18200314-Thermo King Sr-4 Single Temp Trailer Diagnoses Manual

Diagnostic Manual
SR-4 Trailer Single Temp
SR-4 Controller Trailer Single

Temp Units with ECU
Mircoprocessor Control System
TK 55533-EN-2-OD (Rev. 0, 12-12)
DIAGNOSTIC MANUAL
SR - 4 Trailer Single Temperature Units

with Electronic Engine Control Unit (ECU)
Microprocessor Control System
TK 55533-2-OD Rev 0 (12/12)
SR-4 Base Controller

SR-4 HMI Control Panel
and
SR-4 Base Controller Software Revision 8035
SR-4 HMI Control Panel Software Revision 7A00
Used on: Precedent S-600 SR-4 Trailer Single Temp Units with Electronic
Engine Controls
Copyright © 2012 Thermo King Corp. - Minneapolis, MN, USA

Printed in USA
Revision History SR-4 Single Temp Trailer Diagnostic Manual
TK 55533-2-OD Rev 0 (12/12) SR-4 Precedent Single Temp Trailer with Electronic Engine Controls,
SR-4 Base Controller with USB, SR-4 HMI Control Panel, Base
Controller Software Rev 8035, HMI Control Panel Software 7A00
This manual is published for informational purposes only and the information so provided should not be
considered as all-inclusive or covering all contingencies. If further information is required Thermo King
Corporation should be consulted.
Sale of product shown in this manual is subject to Thermo King's terms and conditions including, but not
limited to, the THERMO KING LIMITED EXPRESS WARRANTY. Such terms and conditions are available
upon request. Thermo King's warranty will not apply to any equipment which has been "so repaired or altered
outside the manufacturer’s plants as, in the manufacturer’s judgment, to affect its stability".
No warranties express or implied, including warranties of fitness for a particular purpose or merchantability, or
warranties arising from course of dealing or usage of trade, are made regarding the information,
recommendations and descriptions contained herein. Manufacturer is not responsible and will not be held
liable in contract or in tort (including negligence) for any special, indirect or consequential damages, including
injury or damage caused to vehicles, contents or persons, by reason of the installation of any Thermo King
product or its mechanical failure.
SR-4 Hardware and Software Features
This manual covers the following SR-4 hardware versions:

and
and
TK488CR Electronically Controlled Engine
This manual covers the following SR-4 software revisions:
Base Controller Software Revision through 8035

and
HMI Control Panel Software Revision 7A00
See Section 7 of this manual for additional details.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Because not everyone is familiar with microprocessor based control systems, please take a few minutes to
read this page. It explains the content and structure of this manual. This will make it easier for you to find the
information you need.
Section 1 - Safety information

This section contains the safety information for the SR-4 control system. Read this material carefully before
working on the unit.
Section 2 - Hardware Description

This section describes the SR-4 control system hardware. It identifies and locates controllers, relays, LED’s,
fuses and other components and provides connector maps for all connectors.
Section 3 - Software Description

This section discusses the operation of the SR-4 control system software and programmable features. Each
menu and feature is discussed individually to illustrate how they are used.
Section 4 - Operation
This section explains how to operate the SR-4 control system. This information is referenced by material in
Section 5 Diagnostics.
Section 5 - Diagnostics
This section explains how to diagnose units equipped with the SR-4 control system. It includes both Alarm
Code Diagnostics and Other Symptom Diagnostics. This section will reference material in Section 4
Operation and Section 6 Service Procedures.
Section 6 - Service Procedures

This section includes Service Procedures to assist the technician when servicing units equipped with the SR-4
control system. These procedures are referenced by the diagnostic routines in Section 5 Diagnostics.
Section 7 - Service Information

This section offers Service Information on the basic component parts of the SR-4 control system. It includes
hardware and software history as well as interchangeability information.
Section 8 – Schematics and Wiring Diagrams

This section includes the SR-4 control system electrical schematics and unit wiring diagrams.
Control System Notes
The following procedures must be followed when working on units equipped with microprocessor based
control systems.
• Never use testers consisting of a battery and a light bulb to test circuits on any microprocessor based
equipment.
• The unit must be turned off before connecting or disconnecting the battery.
• Any time a graded sensor is replaced it must be calibrated as shown in Service Procedure A15A
Temperature Sensor Grade Calibration.
• Any time the Base Controller is replaced, these Service Procedures must be used:
A02A Recording Existing Programmable Feature Settings Using HMI Keypad
A03A Replacement of the Base Controller
A04A Programmable Feature Setup Using HMI Keypad
• Any time welding is to be done on the unit or vehicle Service Procedure A26A Welding on Units
Equipped with Microprocessors must be followed.
CHANGES AND COMMENTS
You are invited to comment on this manual so it can be updated and improved to better meet your
needs. Any corrections or comments are welcome. Please complete the following information:
Manual Form Number ____________________________________________________
Section and Page # ______________________________________________________
Your Name _____________________________________________________________
Company Name _________________________________________________________
Phone Number __________________________________________________________
Corrections and Comments _______________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________
Return to:
NORTH AMERICA EUROPE
THERMO KING CORPORATION

th
314 West 90 Street
Mail Stop 38
Minneapolis, MN 55420
Attn: Service Department
Section 1 – SR-4 Control System Safety Information
Table of Contents - Section 1

General Practices .............................................................................................................................................. 3
Auto Start/Stop .................................................................................................................................................. 4
Refrigerant ......................................................................................................................................................... 5
Refrigerant First Aid ..................................................................................................................................... 5
Refrigeration Oil ................................................................................................................................................ 6
Refrigeration Oil First Aid ............................................................................................................................ 6
Electrical Hazards .............................................................................................................................................. 7
High Voltage ................................................................................................................................................. 7
High Voltage First Aid .................................................................................................................................. 7
Low Voltage .................................................................................................................................................. 8
Other Electrical Considerations ....................................................................................................................... 8
Base Controller Service ............................................................................................................................... 8
Welding ......................................................................................................................................................... 8
Units Equipped with Telematics ....................................................................................................................... 9
Remote Control Warning Nameplate ........................................................................................................... 9
1-1
01 December 2012
1-2
01 December 2012
GENERAL PRACTICES
1. Always wear goggles or safety glasses. Refrigerant and battery acid can permanently damage the eyes.
2. Never close the compressor discharge service valve when the unit is running. Never operate the unit with
the discharge service valve closed.
3. Keep hands, clothing and tools clear of fans and belts when the unit is running.
4. Be sure gauge manifold hoses are in good condition. Never let them come in contact with belts, fans,
pulleys or hot surfaces.
5. Never apply heat to a sealed refrigeration system or container.
6. Refrigerants in the presence of an open flame produce toxic gases. These gases are severe respiratory
irritants capable of causing death.
7. Be sure all mounting bolts are the correct length for the application and are securely tightened.
8. Use extreme caution when drilling holes in the unit. Holes may weaken structural components. Holes drilled
into wiring can cause fire or explosion. Holes drilled into the refrigeration system will release refrigerant.
9. Use caution when working around exposed coil fins. These fins can cause painful lacerations.
10. Use caution when working with refrigerant in a closed or confined area with a limited air supply such as a
trailer, truck, container or hold of a ship. Refrigerant tends to displace air and can cause oxygen depletion.
This may result in unconsciousness or death due to suffocation.
1-3
01 December 2012
AUTO START/STOP
CAUTION:
The unit can start and run automatically any time the unit is turned on. Units start
automatically in both Cycle Sentry mode and Continuous mode. Be sure to turn the unit
Microprocessor On/Off switch Off before opening doors, doing inspections or working on any
part of the unit.
SR-4 Precedent units may have options that allow for remote starting from a fully off state. Be
sure to turn the unit Microprocessor On/Off Switch Off before opening doors, doing inspections
or working on any part of the unit.
CAUTION:
Thermo King units equipped with optional 2 way communications can be turned on and off
from remote locations at any time via satellite or cellular phone. Once turned on, the units can
start and run automatically at any time.
Warning Nameplate on Units Equipped with 2 way Communications
CAUTION:
Dangerous three phase AC electric power is present whenever the unit is operating in either
Diesel Mode or Electric Mode and whenever the unit is connected to a source of external
standby power. Voltages of this magnitude can be lethal. Exercise extreme caution when
working on the unit.
1-4
01 December 2012
REFRIGERANT
At Thermo King we recognize the need to preserve the environment and limit the potential harm to the ozone
layer that can result from allowing refrigerant to escape into the atmosphere. We strictly adhere to a policy that
promotes the recovery and limits the loss of refrigerant into the atmosphere.
When working on transport refrigeration systems, a recovery process that prevents or minimizes refrigerant loss
to the atmosphere is required by law. In addition, service personnel must be aware of the appropriate European
Union, national, federal, state and/or local regulations governing the use of refrigerants and certification of
technicians.
When refrigerants are exposed to the atmosphere in liquid form, they evaporate rapidly, freezing anything they
contact. If they contact the skin severe frostbite can result. In the event of frostbite, the objectives of first aid
are to protect the frozen area from additional injury and to warm it rapidly.
Refrigerant First Aid

1. Warm the frozen area by immersing it in luke-warm (not hot) water or by covering the area with warm
blankets.
2. Obtain medical assistance as soon as possible.
3. If refrigerant contacts the eyes, flush them with water immediately and obtain medical assist-ance as soon as
possible.
1-5
01 December 2012
REFRIGERATION OIL
Avoid contact with the eyes. Avoid prolonged contact with the skin or clothing. To prevent skin irritation wash
hands thoroughly after handling refrigeration oil.
Refrigeration Oil First Aid

In case of eye contact, flush immediately with water for at least 15 minutes. Obtain medical assistance as soon
as possible.
1-6
01 December 2012
ELECTRICAL HAZARDS
High Voltage
All SR-4 Precedent units utilize 230 Vac supplied from the diesel engine driven generator to power the condenser
fans and evaporator blower. SmartPower™ Model 50 units feature optional Electric Standby and utilize 230 -
460 volt 3 phase AC external standby power any time the unit is connected to external standby power or is
operating in Electric Mode. Extreme care must be used when working on the unit, as these voltages are capable
of causing serious injury or death.
CAUTION:
Dangerous three phase AC electric power is present whenever the unit is operating in either Diesel Mode
or Electric Mode and whenever the unit is connected to a source of external standby power. Voltages of
this magnitude can be lethal. Exercise extreme caution when working on the unit.
1. When working on high voltage circuits, do not make any rapid movements. Unplanned movements can
cause contact with high voltage.
2. Use tools with insulated handles that are in good condition. Never hold metal tools in your hand if exposed
high voltage conductors are within reach.
3. Treat all wires as high voltage wires.
4. Never work alone on high voltage circuits. Another person should be nearby in case of accident.
High Voltage First Aid

Immediate action must be taken after a person has received an electrical shock. Medical attention should be
summoned as soon as possible.
The source of electricity must be immediately removed, either by shutting down the power or removing the victim
from the source. If the victim must be removed from a live circuit, pull the victim off with a non-conductive
material. Use the victim's clothing, a rope, wood or your belt. After separating the victim from the power source,
immediately check for pulse and respiration. If a pulse is not present, start CPR (Cardio-Pulmonary
Resuscitation) immediately. If a pulse is present, respiration may be restored by mouth to mouth resuscitation.
Obtain emergency medical assistance as soon as possible.
1-7
01 December 2012
Low Voltage
Control circuits are typically 12 volts DC. This voltage potential is not considered dangerous, but the large
amount of current available can cause severe burns if shorted to ground.
Do not wear jewelry, watches or rings when working on the unit. Severe burns can occur if these items contact
an electrical circuit.
Some SR-4 electronic components are connected directly to un-switched battery power. All connections and
circuits labeled with a “2” prefix are connected directly to battery power. Always disconnect the unit starting
battery before servicing the unit.
OTHER ELECTRICAL CONSIDERATIONS
Base Controller Service

Precautions must be taken to prevent electrostatic discharge when servicing the Base Controller/Interface Board
and related components. A potential difference less than that required to create a small spark between a finger
and a doorknob can cause severe damage to solid state components.
Welding
Precautions must be taken before welding on the unit. Refer to Service Procedure A26A Welding on Units
Equipped with Microprocessors in Section 6 of this manual for additional information.
1-8
01 December 2012
UNITS EQUIPPED WITH TELEMATICS
Some Thermo King units may be equipped with Telematics options. These options may feature 2 way
communications that include the ability to start and stop the unit from a remote location via satellite or cellular
phone.
CAUTION:
Thermo King units equipped with optional 2 way communications can be turned on and off
from remote locations at any time via satellite or cellular phone. Once turned on, the units can
start and run automatically at any time.
Before opening the unit doors or performing any work on the unit always turn the unit off by:
1. Pressing the Off Key on the HMI Control Panel.

and
2. Placing the Microprocessor On/Off Switch in the Off position.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury.
Remote Control Warning Nameplate

Units equipped with 2 way communications will feature a Warning Nameplate located next to the unit’s lower
door release.
Warning Nameplate on Units Equipped with 2 way Communications
1-9
01 December 2012
1-10
01 December 2012
Section 2 – SR-4 Trailer S/T Electronic Eng Hardware Description
Table of Contents - Section 2
Block Diagram - Single Temp Trailer Applications ......................................................................................... 5

SR-4 Electronic Engine General Description ................................................................................................... 9
Engine ........................................................................................................................................................... 9
Unit Wiring Loom Colors ........................................................................................................................... 10
AC Generator .............................................................................................................................................. 10
Fan and Blower Motors .............................................................................................................................. 10
Optional Battery Charger ........................................................................................................................... 11
Optional Smart Power™ Electric Standby ................................................................................................ 11
Optional Accessory DC Alternator ............................................................................................................ 11
SR-4 Control System ....................................................................................................................................... 12
Precedent SR-4 Unit Control Panel ................................................................................................................ 13
Microprocessor On/Off Switch ....................................................................................................................... 14
Over-current Protection .................................................................................................................................. 15
External Unit Fuses and Locations ........................................................................................................... 15
Base Controller Fuses and Smart FETs .................................................................................................... 15
SR-4 HMI Control Panel ................................................................................................................................... 16
SR-4 HMI Control Panel .............................................................................................................................. 16
HMI Control Panel Operation ..................................................................................................................... 17
Real Time Clock .......................................................................................................................................... 18
CargoWatch Data Logger ........................................................................................................................... 18
Programmable Features ............................................................................................................................. 18
Display Heater............................................................................................................................................. 19
SR-4 HMI Control Panel Connector Maps (1E64645 Rev A) ..................................................................... 20
SR-4 Base Controller ....................................................................................................................................... 21
Base Controller Hardware Versions .......................................................................................................... 23
Base Controller Software Revisions.......................................................................................................... 23
Real Time Clock .......................................................................................................................................... 23
ServiceWatch Data Logger......................................................................................................................... 23
Programmable Features ............................................................................................................................. 23
Base Controller Operation ......................................................................................................................... 24
Relay Functions .......................................................................................................................................... 24
Base Controller Fuse Size & Function ...................................................................................................... 25
2-1
01 December 2012
Fuse F10...................................................................................................................................................... 26
Smart FET Outputs ..................................................................................................................................... 27
Board Jumpers ........................................................................................................................................... 29
Connector Locations .................................................................................................................................. 30
Connector Usage ........................................................................................................................................ 31
SR-4 Base Controller Connector Maps (1E64645 Rev A).......................................................................... 32
Complete SR-4 Control System with Radio Expansion Board (REB) Installed....................................... 39
Electronic Engine Control Relay/Fuse Board ................................................................................................ 40
Relay Functions .......................................................................................................................................... 41
Fuse Size & Function ................................................................................................................................. 41
Generator ......................................................................................................................................................... 42
Generator Output........................................................................................................................................ 42
Ground Fault Detector................................................................................................................................ 42
Current Sensor ........................................................................................................................................... 43
Diagnostics and Alarm Codes ................................................................................................................... 43
SmartPower™ Electric Standby Units ....................................................................................................... 43
High Voltage Fan and Blower Control Box .................................................................................................... 44
Fan and Blower Motors ................................................................................................................................... 45
Condenser Fan Motors............................................................................................................................... 45
Evaporator Blower Motor ........................................................................................................................... 48
Unit Sensors .................................................................................................................................................... 50
Air Temperature Sensors ................................................................................................................................ 50
Graded and Un-graded Air Temperature Sensors .................................................................................... 50
Dual Sensors .............................................................................................................................................. 50
Control and Display Return Air Sensors ................................................................................................... 51
Control and Display Discharge Air Sensors ............................................................................................. 51
Coil Temperature Sensor ........................................................................................................................... 52
Ambient Temperature Sensor .................................................................................................................... 52
Spare 1 Temperature Sensors ................................................................................................................... 52
CargoWatch Sensors....................................................................................................................................... 53
Refrigeration Control Components ................................................................................................................ 55
Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT) ...................................................................................................... 55
Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT) .......................................................................................................... 55
High Pressure Cutout Switch (HPCO) ....................................................................................................... 55
Pilot Solenoid (PS) ..................................................................................................................................... 55
2-2
01 December 2012
Electronic Throttling Valve (ETV) .............................................................................................................. 55

Hot Gas Solenoid (HG) ............................................................................................................................... 56
Fresh Air Exchange Solenoid Option ........................................................................................................ 56
Engine Control Components .......................................................................................................................... 57
Coolant Temperature Sensor ..................................................................................................................... 57
Coolant Level Sensor (CLS) ....................................................................................................................... 57
Oil Pressure Switch (LOPS) ....................................................................................................................... 57
Oil Level Switch (OLS) ............................................................................................................................... 57
Flywheel Sensor (FW) ................................................................................................................................ 57
Glow Plugs.................................................................................................................................................. 58
Intake Air Heater ......................................................................................................................................... 58
Starter Motor (SM) ...................................................................................................................................... 58
Fuel Solenoid (FSH, FSP) .......................................................................................................................... 58
High Speed Solenoid (HS) ......................................................................................................................... 59
Alternator Frequency.................................................................................................................................. 59
Communication Ports ..................................................................................................................................... 60
USB Ports.................................................................................................................................................... 60
Printer Port.................................................................................................................................................. 60
Optional SmartPower™ Electric Standby ...................................................................................................... 61
Model 50 Features ...................................................................................................................................... 61
High Voltage Components ......................................................................................................................... 62
Standby Power Disconnect Switch ........................................................................................................... 62
Diesel/Electric Relay K5 ............................................................................................................................. 63
Heater Contactor HC................................................................................................................................... 63
Phase Detect Module.................................................................................................................................. 63
SmartPower™ Electric Standby Components .......................................................................................... 64
Optional Battery Charger ................................................................................................................................ 65
Optional Fuel Heater ....................................................................................................................................... 65
2-3
01 December 2012
2-4
01 December 2012
SR-4 PRECEDENT ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROL UNIT (ECU)

SINGLE TEMPERATURE – ELECTRONIC ENGINE
Page 2 of 4
Unit Power
Fuel Injector #1
and Signals
Fuel Injector #1
12 VCD Power (15 A Fuse)
Fuel Injector #1
Fuel Injector #1
Chassis Ground
Ambient Air
Temp Sensor Engine
Components
Keyswitch Signal from SR-4
High Pressure
Fuel Pump
Run Signal from SR-4 Fuel Pressure
Sensor
Fuel Temp
Sensor
To Starter Relay ENGINE Camshaft

CONTROL Sensor
UNIT
To Glow Plug Relay (ECU)
Crankshaft Rotation
Sensor
To EGR Relay
To Engine Control Unit Relay Low Oil

Level Switch
Low Oil
Pressure Switch
Coolant Temp
Sensor
CAN Bus
From Page 1
Exhaust Temp
Diagnostic Sensor
EGR Temp
Tool CAN Bus Sensor
Yanmar SmartAssist EGR Pressure
Direct (YSAD) Sensor
Diagnostic Tool CAN EGR
Bus Valve
20 November 2012
2-6
01 December 2012
SR-4 PRECEDENT FAN AND BLOWER CONTROL

SINGLE TEMPERATURE – ALL UNITS
3 of 4
Ground Fault 3Φ AC
Detector Generator
Current
Sensor
All PRECEDENT Units (Note 1)
Components located in High

Voltage Fan and Blower
Control Box
Optional
High Speed Low Speed Curb Side Road Side
Battery
Evaporator Evaporator Condenser Condenser
Charger
Blower Motor Blower Motor Fan Motor Fan Motor
3Φ AC > 12
Contactor Contactor Contactor Contactor
Vdc
Note 1
Current Sensor 3Φ 3Φ 3Φ
used only on units Evaporator Curb Side Road Side
without optional Blower Condenser Condenser
Battery Charger Motor Fan Motor Fan Motor
26 November 2012
2-7
01 December 2012
SR-4 PRECEDENT FAN AND BLOWER CONTROL

SINGLE TEMPERATURE – SmartPower™ MODEL 50 230 VAC
Page 4 of 4
230 VAC All PRECEDENT Units
PRECEDENT
Standby Phase Detect Smart Power™
Power In Module
Model 50 230 VAC Components located in High
Units Only Voltage Fan and Blower
Control Box
Components located in
SmartPower Control Box
Phase Phase
Contactor Contactor
1 2 460 VAC applications use
a fuse protected step-
down transformer to
provide 230 VAC
Ground Fault 3Φ AC
Detector Generator
Compressor Evaporator
Drive Motor Heater Current
Contactor Contactor Sensor
(Note 1)
Overload Overload
Relay Relay
Generator
Contactor
Compressor Evaporator
Drive Motor Heaters
10 A
Fuse
Optional
High Speed Low Speed Curb Side Road Side
Battery
Evaporator Evaporator Condenser Condenser
Charger
Blower Motor Blower Motor Fan Motor Fan Motor
3Φ AC > 12
Contactor Contactor Contactor Contactor
Vdc
Note 1
Current Sensor
3Φ 3Φ 3Φ
Evaporator Curb Side Road Side
used only on units
Blower Condenser Condenser
without optional
Motor Fan Motor Fan Motor
Battery Charger
26 November 2012
2-8
01 December 2012
SR-4 ELECTRONIC ENGINE GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The Precedent SR-4 control system is a self-contained temperature control unit designed for single temperature
and multi-temperature trailer applications. Model 30 units are powered by an electronically controlled common
rail fuel injected diesel engine and SmartPower™ Model 50 units are powered by either the diesel engine or an
electric motor powered from an external electric standby power source. The unit fans and blowers are driven by
AC motors powered by an engine driven AC generator. Defrost is by means of hot gas and optional electric
heaters.
Engine
There are two engine types used in Precedent Single Temperature Trailer Units. This manual covers the > 25
HP Electronic Engine.
Mechanical Engines < 25 HP

Mechanical Engines use the traditional Base Controller Engine Controls. For applications using the Thermo King
Mechanical Engine see the SR-4 Trailer Single Temperature Units with Mechanical Engine Control Diagnostic
nd
Manual (TK55599-2-OD) to be released 2 quarter 2013.
Electronic Engines > 25 HP

Electronic Engines are controlled by an electronic Engine Control Unit (ECU) rather than by the SR-4 Base
Controller. The SR-4 Base Controller supplies a Keyswitch Signal to enable the ECU and a Run Signal when the
diesel engine is required to run. All other engine control functions are handled by the ECU and an Engine
Control Relay/Fuse Board located below the SR-4 Base Controller. The SR-4 Base Controller engine control
features such as Preheat and Start Relays, RPM Sensor, Coolant Temperature Sensor and Coolant and Oil
Level Sensors are not used. This Diagnostic Manual covers the Electronic Engine only.
The Electronic Engine is a Thermo King TK488CR. This engine features Common Rail Fuel Injection and an
Engine Control Unit (ECU) to control and monitor engine functions. The engine also features an Exhaust Gas
Recirculation System (EGR) and a Diesel Oxidation Catalyst (DOC) exhaust treatment system. The engine is
EPA Tier 4 Compliant and CARB Evergreen. The compressor is directly coupled to the engine on Model 30 units
and clutch driven on Model 50 units. Belts drive the AC Generator, water pump and alternator (if present).
2-9
01 December 2012
IMPORTANT: The Electronic Engine does not use the engine control features such as Preheat and Start
Relays, RPM and Coolant Temperature and Coolant and Oil Level Sensors on the SR-4 Base Controller.
Engine functions are controlled directly by the Engine Control Unit (ECU) and a separate Engine
Relay/Fuse Board.
Unit Wiring Loom Colors

Precedent applications use both 12 VDC and 230 VAC power.
 12 VDC circuits are routed in wiring harnesses with black wiring looms.
 230 VAC circuits are routed in wiring harnesses with orange wiring looms.
AC Generator
An AC Generator is used to supply AC power to the Condenser Fan Motors and Evaporator Blower Motors. The
engine speed (high speed or low speed) determines the voltage and frequency of the AC power. The AC
Generator is belt driven by the diesel engine.
CAUTION:
Fan and Blower Motors

The Evaporator Blowers and Condenser Fans are powered by 230 Vac 3 phase AC electric motors. Fan and
blower motor speed is dependent upon the AC voltage and frequency supplied by the AC Generator when the
diesel engine is running in high speed or low speed. Motor speed of the Evaporator Blower Motor is also
controlled by high speed and low speed windings on the motor.
2-10
01 December 2012
Optional Battery Charger

An alternator is used to provide DC power for system DC loads and to charge the unit battery. The AC
Generator can also supply AC power to an optional Battery Charger that provides DC power when the engine is
running to charge the unit battery and operate the 12 volt DC control system.
Optional Smart Power™ Electric Standby

Smart Power™ Model 50 Electric Standby is available as an option. This option allows unit operation on external
3 phase standby electric power as well as the diesel engine. 460-480 volt AC units utilize a step-down
transformer to reduce the voltage to 230 volts AC.
CAUTION:
Dangerous three phase AC electric power is present whenever the unit is operating in Diesel Mode or
Electric mode and whenever the unit is connected to an external standby power. Voltages of this
magnitude can be lethal. Exercise extreme caution when working on the unit.
Optional Accessory DC Alternator

On units equipped with the Optional Battery Charger an optional engine driven DC alternator is also available to
supply additional DC power for external loads.
2-11
01 December 2012
SR-4 CONTROL SYSTEM

The SR-4 Base Controller Control System consists of the following main components:
 Unit Control Panel
 Microprocessor On/Off Switch
 SR-4 HMI (Human Machine Interface) Control Panel
 SR-4 Base Controller
 Unit Sensors and Transducers
 Refrigeration Control Components
 Engine Control Unit (ECU)
 AC Generator
 AC Fan and Blower Motors
 USB Communication Ports
 Optional Electric Standby
 Optional Battery Charger
 Optional Alternator
2-12
01 December 2012
PRECEDENT SR-4 UNIT CONTROL PANEL
The Precedent SR-4 Control Panel is shown below.
MICRO
PROCESSOR
ON
OFF
THERMO KING
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
USB PORT
FLASH DRIVE ONLY
SR4
Smart Reefer 4 USB PORT
PC COMPUTER ONLY
Precedent Control Panel

Shown with the side panel opened
The Microprocessor On/Off Switch is covered by the side panel when it is closed
2-13
01 December 2012
MICROPROCESSOR ON/OFF SWITCH
The Microprocessor On/Off Switch applies 12 volts DC control power to the Base Controller at the 2 pin
connector located immediately below J6. Main power to the controls is supplied by 15 amp fuse F2.
WARNING:
The Microprocessor On/Off switch disconnects power to the controller and most controller outputs. It
does not disconnect the HMI Control Panel supply power. The HMI Control Panel is directly connected
to the unit starting battery.
IMPORTANT: Always turn the Microprocessor On/Off switch off before inspecting or working on any
part of the unit.
The Microprocessor On/Off switch is located on the control box door above the HMI Control Panel. It is
concealed when the unit side panel is closed.
MICRO-
PROCESSOR
ON
OFF
Microprocessor On/Off Switch
2-14
01 December 2012
OVER-CURRENT PROTECTION
External Unit Fuses and Locations

Over-current protection is provided by fuses. The following external fuses may be used:
Fuse Size Function Location

FS5 30 A Starter Power (Electronic Engine) In Control Box
FS6 40 A Glow Plug Power (Electronic Engine) In Control Box
FS7 35 A Battery Charger Output At Battery Charger
FS8 80 A Battery Power Fuse At Battery
FS9 20 A EGR Circuit (Electronic Engine) In Control Box
FS10 35 A 2 Power to Base Controller In Control Box
15 A ECU Input Power (Electronic Engine) Engine Control Unit (ECU)
F 20 A Optional Fuel Heater
F 5A Optional LED Side Lights
FB1-1 10 A Model 50 AC Power SmartPower™ Electric Standby Control Box
FB2-1 10 A Transformer AC Power (Model 50 – 460 VAC) SmartPower™ Electric Standby Control Box
Base Controller Fuses and Smart FETs

Outputs are either fuse protected or Smart FET (Field Effect Transistor) protected. Smart FETs halt current flow
if an over-current condition exists. See Page 25 for Base Controller fuse list
2-15
01 December 2012
SR-4 HMI CONTROL PANEL

System conditions are displayed and operator instructions are sent using the SR-4 HMI Control Panel. The HMI
Control Panel communicates with the Base Controller via CAN bus.
WARNING:
The Microprocessor On/Off switch disconnects power to the controller and most controller outputs. It
does not disconnect the HMI Control Panel supply power. The HMI Control Panel is directly connected
to the unit starting battery.
IMPORTANT: The SR-4 HMI Control Panel is not compatible with SR-2 and SR-3 Control Systems.
It is critical that the correct software be used.

 Precedent units with SR-4 HMI Control Panels must use HMI Control Panel Software Revision 7A00 or
later.
See Section 7 of this manual for additional hardware and software details and requirements.
THERMO KING
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35 GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
SR4
Smart Reefer 4
Precedent SR-4 HMI Control Panel
2-16
01 December 2012
The HMI (Human Machine Interface) Control Panel consists of an LCD graphics display screen and eight touch
sensitive keys.
 The four keys on the sides of the display screen are used to turn the unit on and off, initiate a manual
defrost cycle, and select the desired operating mode. These keys are designated “Hard” keys as their
function is always the same.
 The function of the four keys located below the display screen change as required by the current menu.
The current function of the key is controlled by software and is displayed directly above the key. These
keys are known as software controlled keys or ‘soft keys’.
 The same HMI Control Panel is used for single temperature and multi-temperature applications.
HMI Control Panel Operation

The HMI contains a microprocessor and dedicated software. The HMI is a message center and does not directly
control the unit operation. It communicates with the Base Controller via a controller area network (CAN)
connection. The HMI displays system operating data and sends operating requests to the controller.
The display screen is used by the Base Controller to provide visual prompts and information to the operator, such
as operating mode, setpoint temperatures, gauges, hourmeter readings and operating conditions of the diesel
engine or electric motor. The HMI also contains the Cargo Watch Data Logger.
Information can be displayed in 11 possible languages as shown below.

 English  German  Portuguese  Hebrew
 Spanish  Italian  Greek  Arabic
 French  Dutch  Turkish 
All Precedent SR-4 applications require HMI Control Panel Software Revision 7A00 or later.
If the HMI Control Panel is disconnected from the unit while the unit is running, the unit will shut down. When the
HMI Control Panel is reconnected the unit will not restart until the On key is pressed.
NOTE: If necessary, the HMI Control Panel can be bypassed using fuse F10 as shown on page 2-23.
2-17
01 December 2012
Real Time Clock

The real time clock is located in the HMI Control Panel. The time is supplied to the Base Controller each time
the unit is turned on.
Clock Power
The HMI Control Panel features a capacitor to provide backup power to the real time clock. This capacitor is
capable of maintaining the clock for approximately two weeks with no power connected to the unit. The capacitor
is recharged any time the HMI Control Panel is installed in the unit and a properly functioning starting battery is
connected.
If the unit starting battery is disconnected for an extended period the clock setting should be checked when the
unit is returned to service. If the HMI Control Panel is changed the clock setting should also be verified.
CargoWatch Data Logger

The HMI Control Panel contains the CargoWatch Data Logger. The CargoWatch Data Logger is a fully
independent temperature logger. Up to six temperature sensors and 3 digital inputs can be connected to the
CargoWatch Data Logger. The optional CargoWatch temperature sensors are separate sensors installed as
desired by each user. The CargoWatch Data Logger records CargoWatch temperature sensors, unit setpoint,
unit operating condition, and alarm codes.
The Countdown and Conservative features allow the CargoWatch Data Logger to continue to log after the unit is
turned off. See CargoWatch Sensor Configuration in Section 3 for details of operation.
Programmable Features
The settings of all programmable features are held in non-volatile memory in the Base Controller. The settings
are supplied to the HMI Control Panel each time the unit is turned on. If the HMI Control Panel is changed, the
current programmable feature settings will be supplied to the HMI Control Panel when the unit is turned on.
2-18
01 December 2012
BLOCK DIAGRAM - SINGLE TEMP TRAILER APPLICATIONS

SR-4 PRECEDENT CONTROL SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SINGLE TEMPERATURE - ELECTRONIC ENGINE
Page 1 of 4
CargoWatch™ Not all devices shown

PRINTER CONNECTOR HMI Software
here are used on all
Supervisor Software applications
Keypad
CargoWatch™ Display Devices in grey are not
Cargo Watch Logger used on Electronic
SENSOR OPTION
Setpoint Buzzer
Engine Controls
MICROPROCESSOR SR-4 ELECTRONIC ENGINE

CAN
ON/OFF SWITCH BASE CONTROLLER CONTROL UNIT (ECU)
Base Controller Software Bus Go to Page 2 of 4
Inputs
Outputs
EXTERNAL FUSES
Service Watch Data Logger MECHANICAL ENGINE
FS5 30A Starter (ECU)
FS6 40A Preheat (ECU) CONTROL
FS7 35A Opt Battery Charger Fuses Intake Heater/Glow Plugs
FS8 80A Main Battery Power F1 (5A) REB Starter Solenoid
FS9 20A EGR (ECU) F2 (15A) On/Off Switch Starter
FS10 (35A) 2 Base Controller F3 (40A) Fuel/Starter Coolant Level Switch
15A ECU Input Power F4 (2A) Alt Bypass Resistor Coolant Temp Sensor
F 20A Fuel Heater F5 (40A) Preheat Oil Level Switch
F 5A LED Side Lights F6 (15A) High Speed Circuit Low Oil Pressure Switch
F7 (2A) 8X to CAN Bus Fuel Pressure Switch (Rail)
F8 (5A) 2A HMI Power to J12 Fuel Level Sensor (Option)
F10 (5A) HMI Bypass On/Off
REFRIGERATION F12 (5A) 2A Power to J13
CONTROL F13 (2A) Remote Lights
F15 (2A) Controller Power SR-4 FAN CONTROL
Control Return AIr Sensor
F20 (2A) Alternator Sense Go to Pages 3-4 of 4
Display Return Air Sensor
Control Discharge Air Sensor F22 (10A) Fresh Air Solenoid
Display Discharge Air Sensor F25 (7.5A) HPCO Circuit
Evaporator Coil Temp Sensor USB USB FLASH DRIVE
Ambient Air Sensor Cold Start Jumper ONLY CONNECTOR
Bus
Spare Sensor 1
Suction Press Transducer Board Mount Relays
Discharge Press Transducer USB USB PC
Compressor Temp Sensor LED Indicators
High Pressure Cutout Switch Bus ONLY CONNECTOR
HPCI Switch Preheat/Start Buzzer
Electronic Throttling Valve
Pilot Solenoid Smart FETs REMOTE LIGHT
Hot Gas Solenoid OPTION
Door Switch (Option)
REMOTE CONTROL
BATTERY CHARGER CAN 20 November 2012 OPTION
OPTION Bus
2-5
01 December 2012
Display Heater
The HMI Control Panel is equipped with a display heater. This heater is necessary to make the display quickly
visible in cold ambient temperatures.
The HMI has its own internal temperature sensor for the display heater. The display heater is energized when
the unit is turned on and the temperature sensed by the internal sensor is below 29°F (-2°C). The display heater
turns off when the temperature sensed by the internal sensor rises above 37°F (+3°C). The display heater draws
from 1.4 to 1.7 amps when energized.
The colder the ambient temperature the longer it will take for the heater to make the display visible on a cold
startup. It may take 10-15 seconds for the display to appear with very cold ambient temperatures.
2-19
01 December 2012
SR-4 HMI Control Panel Connector Maps (1E64645 Rev A)

HMI Control Panel Connector – arranged by use
Pin # Wire # Description
22 CANH-BLK4 HMI Control Panel CAN bus
10 CANL-RED4 HMI Control Panel CAN bus
23 SHLD HMI Control Panel shield
34 ON-BLK3 HMI Control Panel On Line
33 OFF-RED1 HMI Control Panel Off Line
12 2AA-RED2 2AA Power
06 8XP-BLK2 8XP power
35 CH-BLK1 HMI Control Panel chassis ground
20 RXD2 Printer port receive
31 TXD2 Printer port transmit
19 COM Printer Port Chassis Ground
29 D14 Printer port print
04 S1P-01 CargoWatch sensor 1 positive
16 S1N-01 CargoWatch sensor 1 negative
12 1
23 13
35 24
HMI Control Panel J1 Connector – shown from pin side
2-20
01 December 2012
SR-4 BASE CONTROLLER

The heart of the integrated SR-4 control system is the Base Controller. The SR-4 Base Controller consists of a
integrated microprocessor and interface board. The SR-4 Base Controller is mounted on a molded plastic
mounting base that is secured to the back of the control box. The SR-4 Base Controller is not compatible with
SR-2 and SR-3 Control Systems.
WARNING:
The Microprocessor On/Off switch disconnects power to the Base Controller and most controller
outputs. It does not disconnect the HMI Control Panel supply power. The HMI Control Panel is directly
connected to the unit starting battery.
IMPORTANT: The SR-4 Base Controller is not compatible with SR-2 and SR-3 Control Systems.
It is critical that the correct software be used.

 Precedent Single temperature units with SR-4 Base Controllers must use Base Controller Software
Revision 8035 or later.
See Section 7 of this manual for additional hardware and software details and requirements.
2-21
01 December 2012
J32
1
J34
1
J33
1
J12
1
J13
1
J9
1
J10
1 2AH
Watlow RoHS
J21 J27
12
35
23
F12 - 5A
F1 - 5A
F8 - 5A
F7 - 2A
2935 Rev H
J98
F5 – 60A
1
J11
J29
K11
13
24
1
J101 LED09
J1 STATUS
LED48
J102
H
12
35
23
F13 - 2A
CH
J8
2
A
J6
F15 - 2A
S/N: P000344512320T4
1
13
24
Here
1
F2 - 15A
J3 J15
Code
J5 F6 - 15A 2
Bar
LED47
LED50
F25 – 7.5A F22 - 10A

F3 - 40A
BASE P/N: 1H64689001G02
LED04
LED35
LED01
LED36
LED37
F20 - 2A
LED38
LED06
F10 - 15A
K6
LED07
LED49
LED46
LED27
LED29
LED30
LED32
S.P. P/N: 45-2448
ICON-A000-BA00
LED05
REV. PRTO
LED43 K8 K1
LED16
LED17
LED14
LED44
LED11
LED12
LED13
LED10
LED39
LED40
LED41
LED42
F4
LED24
LED25
LED26
K9
LED23 K7 K10
K2
1 12
LED
J4 13 23 02 8D 8D FA DMP 8S
K3 7D 8DP LED08
24 35
2-22
01 December 2012
Base Controller Hardware Versions

For complete details of SR-4 Base Controller hardware versions and software requirements see Section 7 of this
manual.
Base Controller Software Revisions

SR-4 Single Temperature Base Controllers require Base Controller Software Revision 8035 or later. For
complete details of Base Controller software revisions and hardware requirements see Section 7 of this manual.
Real Time Clock

The real time clock is located in the HMI Control Panel. The system time is supplied to the Base Controller each
time the unit is turned on. If the Base Controller is changed the clock setting will be automatically supplied to the
Base Controller when the unit is turned on. If the HMI Control Panel is changed the clock setting must be
verified.
ServiceWatch Data Logger

The Base Controller contains the ServiceWatch Data Logger. The ServiceWatch Data Logger is a diagnostic
data logger. This data logger records unit temperature sensors, unit setpoint, unit operating conditions, alarms
and conditions that exist when an alarm is set.
When diagnosing alarm codes always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the ThermoServ Service
Tool. Review the data to determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the
alarm are recorded when the alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the
cause of the alarm.
The settings of all programmable features are held in non-volatile memory in the Base Controller. The settings
are supplied to the HMI Control Panel each time the unit is turned on. If the Base Controller is changed, all
programmable features must be reprogrammed. See Section 3 of this manual for programmable feature details.
2-23
01 December 2012
Base Controller Operation

The Base Controller is the heart of the SR-4 Control System. It consists of the Base Controller, Base Controller
software, memory, inputs and outputs. The Base Controller also provides the interface between the controller
inputs and outputs and the unit control components. The inputs are used to supply power and system
information to the Base Controller. The Base Controller and software examine the status of the inputs and turn
the outputs to the solenoids, valves and motor contactors on and off as required to control the operation of the
unit. The Base Controller also provides over-current and short circuit protection for the control circuits.
The only user serviceable components on the Base Controller are the fuses and the Cold Start jumper.
The Base Controller controls the operation of the unit using control relays or Smart FETs. The relays control
power to the high amperage loads such as the preheat relay, fuel solenoid pull-up coil and starter. The Smart
FETs control power to the lower amperage loads such as solenoids and valves. Each relay is individually fuse
protected. The Smart FETs are self-protecting. An LED next to each relay or Smart FET is illuminated when the
relay or FET is energized by the Base Controller. With relays the LED lights only when the relay coil is energized
and the relay contacts have transferred to the energized position.
Relay Functions
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to remove the relays from the Base Controller. They are soldered in place.
Relay Function
K1 Starter Solenoid Relay (NOTE 1)
K2 Fuel Solenoid Pull-In Relay (NOTE 1)
K3 High Speed Relay (NOTE 1)
K6 On/Off Relay
K7 Diesel/Electric Relay (Optional)
K8 Run Relay
K9 Electric Standby Motor Relay (Optional)
K10 Fresh Air Exchange Relay (Optional)
K11 Preheat Relay (NOTE 1)
NOTE 1: Not used on Electronic Engines with Electronic Control Units (ECU). Used only on applications with
mechanical engines.
2-24
01 December 2012
Base Controller Fuse Size & Function
Fuse Size Function

F1 5A 2A Power for REB
F2 15A On/Off Switch Circuit
F3 40A Fuel Solenoid/Starter Circuit (NOTE 3)
None No fuse - all Bosch and TK alternators

or 2A fuse - all Prestolite alternators
F4 2A (NOTE 1)
F5 60A Preheat Circuit (NOTE 2), (NOTE 3)

F6 15A High Speed Solenoid Circuit (NOTE 3)
F7 2A 8X Power for CAN bus

F8 5A 2A HMI Power for CAN bus J12
F10 15A HMI Bypass - On/Off Relay Circuit
F12 5A 2A Power for CAN bus J13
F13 2A Status Light Circuit
F15 2A SR-4 Controller Power Circuit
F20 2A Alternator Sense Circuit
F22 10A Fresh Air Door Circuit
F25 7.5A High Pressure Cutout Circuit
NOTE 1: Fuse F4 fuse must be in place for Prestolite alternators to charge. Fuse F4 must be removed for
Bosch and Thermo King alternators. Service Parts Base Controllers are shipped without the F4 fuse.
NOTE 2: The F5 preheat fuse is a “slow blow” type fuse. It is designed for use with the Yanmar trailer engine
air pre-heater. Always replace the fuse with the TK specified fuse. Service Parts Base Controllers are shipped
without the F5 fuse.
NOTE 3: Not used on Electronic Engines with Electronic Control Units (ECU). Used only on applications with
mechanical engines.
2-25
01 December 2012
Fuse F10
There are three in-line fuse clips that allow for two configurations of the F10 fuse. The downward position is the
normal position. This position has a white bar below it on the circuit board. When fuse F10 is installed in the
downward position, control power is routed to the K9 On/Off Relay contacts. The On/Off keys on the HMI
Control Panel energize and de-energize the K9 On/Off Relay. When the K9 On/Off Relay is energized power is
supplied through the normally open K9 contacts to turn the unit on.
When fuse F10 is installed in the upward position power bypasses the K9 On/Off relay contacts and the unit will
start and run without the HMI Control Panel connected. This fuse position is for emergency bypass
operation only. Do not operate the unit with the F10 fuse installed in the upward position unless absolutely
necessary.
IMPORTANT: If fuse F10 is installed in the upward position the unit may start and run. If the HMI Control
Panel is connected and functional, the On and Off keys will still work. The Off key will turn the unit off if Fuse
F10 is in the upward position, but the Base Controller will remain powered up.
IMPORTANT: If fuse F10 is installed in the upward position and the unit is turned off using the Off key the unit
will shut down but the Base Controller will remain powered up. Leaving the unit turned off in this manner for an
extended period may result in a dead battery.
2-26
01 December 2012
Smart FET Outputs

A Smart FET is a self protecting output device used for the functions shown in the table below. If an over-current
condition occurs, the Smart FET will turn off until the over-current condition no longer exists. It will then resume
normal operation. A fuse is not required.
Output Function
KI32 (ECUR-01) Run Signal to ECU
8DF Fuel Pump
HGB Hot Gas Bypass Solenoid
26 Pilot Solenoid
ECUKS ECR Relay
CFC Curbside Condenser Fan
CFR Roadside Condenser Fan
EFH Evaporator Blower High Speed
EFL Evaporator Blower Low Speed
BCE Battery Charger Enable
EVA, EVB, EVC, EVD ETV Outputs
2-27
01 December 2012
LED Functions
The LED is illuminated when the associated circuit output is energized. Not all output LEDs shown below are
used on single temperature trailer applications.
LED # Function LED # Function

LED 1 7K/ECUR Output LED 26 Alternator Excite Output
LED 2 K3 High Speed Output LED 27 Evaporator Fan Low Speed Output
LED 4 K8 Run Relay Output LED 29 Evaporator Fan High Speed Output
LED 5 K7 Diesel/Electric Relay Output LED 30 Condenser Fan Roadside Output
LED 6 K6 On/Off Relay Output LED 32 Condenser Fan Curbside Output
LED 7 K1 Starter Relay Output LED 37 ECU Key Switch Output
LED 8 K2 Fuel Solenoid Output LED 38 Battery Charger Enable Output
LED 9 K11 Preheat Relay Output LED 43 K9 On/Off Circuit
LED 10 Pilot Solenoid Output LED 44 K10 Auto Fresh Air Door Output
LED 11 Purge Valve/Liquid Injection Valve Output LED 46 ETV – D Output (NOTE 2)
LED 12 Hot Gas Bypass Output LED 47 ETV – B Output (NOTE 2)
LED 13 Receiver Tank Pressure Solenoid Output LED 48 Status LED (NOTE 1)
LED 14 Spare 1 LED 49 ETV – A Output (NOTE 2)
LED 15 Spare 4 LED 50 ETV – C Output (NOTE 2)
LED 16 Spare 3
LED 17 Spare 2
LED 23 Liquid Line Solenoid Output
LED 24 CIS/LV/Digital Scroll Output
LED 25 Suction Line Solenoid Output
NOTE 1 The Status LED flashes once per second when the Base Controller is powered and operating normally.
The Status LED flashes several times per second during a flash load. The Status LED is on without flashing
during reboot and when the Base Controller is under test. The Status LED flashes twice within 1 second followed
by 1 second off if a CAN communication error is present.
NOTE 2 ETV LED’s are illuminated when the respective ETV output is energized. Note that on applications
without ETV that the ETV LED’s may be illuminated even though there is no ETV present.
2-28
01 December 2012
Board Jumpers
Three sets of jumper pins are located on the Base Controller. Each set consists of a jumper and three pins. A
white bar next to each set of pins on the circuit board shows the usual jumper placement. For normal operation,
the jumpers must be installed as shown below.
J32
1
J34
1
J33
1
J12
1
J13
1
J9
1
J10
1 2AH
Watlow RoHS
J21 J27
12
35
23
F12 - 5A
F1 - 5A
F8 - 5A
F7 - 2A
2935 Rev H
J27 CAN BUS

J98 Terminator
DO NOT MOVE F5 – 60A
1
J11
J101 Cold Start
Jumper
J29
K11
13
24
1
J101 LED09
J1 STATUS
LED48
J102
H
J102
LED45 DO NOT MOVE
F13 - 2A
CH
The J101 jumper is used to perform a Base Controller Cold Start. For details see Service Procedure A07A
Performing a Base Controller Cold Start. The J27 and J102 jumpers should not be moved.
Jumper Functions
Jumper Function
J27 CAN Bus Terminator – Do Not Move
J101 Cold Start Jumper
J102 Not Used – Do Not Move
2-29
01 December 2012
Connector Locations
17 18 19 20 21 22 23
J32
1
J34
1
J33
1
J12
1
J13
1
J9
1
J10
1 2AH 1
Watlow RoHS
J21 J27
12
35
23
F12 - 5A
F1 - 5A
F8 - 5A
F7 - 2A
2935 Rev H
J98
16 F5 – 60A
1
J11
7
15 J29
K11
13
24
1
J1 STATUS
LED48
J101 LED09
2
J102
14 H
3
LED45
12
35
23
F13 - 2A
8 CH
4
1
J8
2
J6
9 A
F15 - 2A
5
1
13
24
1
F2 - 15A
J3 J15
10 J5 F6 - 15A 2
LED47
LED50
F25 – 7.5A F22 - 10A

13 LED04
F3 - 40A
LED35
LED01
LED36
LED37
F20 - 2A
LED38
LED06
F10 - 15A
K6
LED07
LED49
LED46
LED27
LED29
LED30
LED32
LED05
LED43 K8 K1
LED16
LED17
LED14
LED44
LED11
LED12
LED13
LED10
LED39
LED40
LED41
LED42
F4
LED24
LED25
LED26
K9
LED23 K7 K10
K2
1 12
LED
J4 13 23 02 8D 8D FA DMP 8S
K3 7D 8DP LED08
24 35
12 11
2-30
01 December 2012
Connector Usage
See the following pages for individual connector maps.
Number Connector Circuit

1 2AH 2AH Power
2 H H Power to Glow Plugs
3 CH Chassis Ground
4 2A 2A Power
5 2 2 Power
6 J11 USB Port PC Computer Only
7 J29 USB Port Flash Drive Only
8 J8 Remote Lights
9 J5, J15 Microprocessor Power Switch
10 J6 SmartPower™ Electric Standby
11 J16 / J17 8D > 8FH-01 Fuel Heater Relay
J16 / J22 8D > 8D-02 Compressor Contactor
J16 / J20 FA DMP > AFADE-01 Auto Fresh Air Damper
J16 / J18 Not Used
J16 / J19 Not Used
J16 / J16 Not Used
12 J4 Fan and Blower Control, HPCO, Refrigeration, Other
13 J3 Generator Current Sensor, Ground Fault, Pressure Transducers, Other
14 J1 Sensor Connector
15 J98 Radio Expansion Board
16 J21
17 J32 CAN Bus to Engine Control Unit (ECU)
18 J34
19 J33 CAN Bus to Optional Battery Charger
20 J12 CAN Bus to HMI Control Panel, other HMI functions
21 J13 Rear Flushmount Control Panel
22 J9
23 J10 Rear Flushmount Control Panel
2-31
01 December 2012
SR-4 Base Controller Connector Maps (1E64645 Rev A)

J1 - Base Controller Sensor Connector – arranged by pin number – Single Temperature Applications
1 8F-01 Optional Fuel Level Sensor positive
2 FUEL-01 Optional Fuel Level Sensor
3 FUELN-01 Optional Fuel Level Sensor negative
5 RTP-01 Display Return Air Temperature Sensor Positive (blue sensor wire)
7 DTP-01 Control Discharge Air Temperature Sensor Positive (blue sensor wire)
8 CTP-01 Evaporator Coil Temperature Sensor Positive (blue sensor wire)
9 ST1P-01 Spare 1 Temperature Sensor Positive (blue sensor wire)
10 DTRP-01 Display Discharge Air Temperature Sensor Positive (blue sensor wire)
13 SPN-01 Suction Pressure Transducer Negative
14 DPN-01 Discharge Pressure Transducer
16 HSP-01 Optional Humidity Sensor Positive
17 RTN-01 Control Return Air Temperature Sensor Negative (brown sensor wire)
19 DTN-01 Control Discharge Air Temperature Sensor Negative (brown sensor wire)
20 CTN-01 Coil Temperature Sensor Negative (brown sensor wire)
21 ST1N-01 Spare 1 Temperature Sensor Negative (brown sensor wire)
22 DTRN-01 Display Discharge Air Temperature Sensor Negative (brown sensor wire)
24 SPI-01 Suction Pressure Transducer Signal (white wire) (DPT)
25 DPI-01 Discharge Pressure Transducer Signal (white wire) (DPT)
26 HSI-01 Optional Humidity Sensor Signal
27 HSN-01 Optional Humidity Sensor Negative
28 RTRP-01 Display Return Air Temperature Sensor Negative (brown sensor wire)
29 RTRN-01 Display Return Air Temperature Sensor Negative (brown sensor wire)
30 ATP-01 Ambient Temperature Sensor Positive (blue sensor wire)
31 ATN-01 Ambient Temperature Sensor Negative (brown sensor wire)
J1 Sensor Harness Connector – shown from pin side
12 1
23 13
35 24
2-32
01 December 2012
Section 2 – SR-4 Trailer Single Temp Hardware Description
J3 – 35 Pin Connector – arranged by pin number – Single Temperature Applications

2 CHER-01 Compressor Drive Motor RPM Ground
3 WRPM-01 Compressor Drive Motor RPM
4 GSP-01 Generator Current Sensor Positive
5 GSN-01 Generator Current Sensor Negative
6 GSI-01 Generator Current Sensor Signal
11 CLS-01 Coolant Level Switch
12 SPP-01 Suction Pressure Transducer Positive
18 DPP-01 Discharge Pressure Transducer Positive
29 DSP-01 Door Switch Positive
30 DS-01 Door Switch
31 AFADSP-01 Auto Fresh Air Switch Positive
32 AFADS-01 Auto Fresh Air Switch
33 GFF-01 Ground Fault Failure Signal
34 GFN-01 Ground Fault Sensor Negative
35 GFP-01 Ground Fault Sensor Positive
12 1
23 13
35 24
2-33
27 October 2012
J4 – 35 Pin Connector – arranged by pin number – Single Temperature Applications

2 EXC-01 Alternator Excite
5 HGB-01 Hot Gas Bypass Solenoid
7 26-01 Pilot Solenoid
8 8DF-01 Fuel Pump
12 CC-01 Generator Contactor Auxiliary Contact
14 EFL-01 Evaporator Blower Low Speed Contactor
15 EFH-01 Evaporator Blower High Speed Contactor
16 CFR-01 Condenser Fan Roadside Contactor
17 CFC-01 Condenser Fan Curbside Contactor
20 ECUKS-01 Engine Control Unit (ECU) Relay Control Signal
21 BCE-01 Battery Charger Enable
23 PHPCO-01 High Pressure Cutout Switch Positive
25 EVA-01 Electronic Throttling Valve
26 EVD-01 Electronic Throttling Valve
27 EVC-01 Electronic Throttling Valve
28 EVB-01 Electronic Throttling Valve
30 ECUR-01 Engine Control Unit (ECU) Run Signal
33 2Y-01 Alternator Sense
35 HPCO-01 High Pressure Cutout Switch
12 1
23 13
35 24
2-34
27 October 2012
J6 - Electric Connector – arranged by pin number

1 7E-01 To 7EA terminal on phase select module (PSM)
2 EOL-01 To normally closed contact pin 95 on overload relay (OLR)
3 8-01 To 8 terminal on phase select module (PSM)
4 CH-05 To chassis ground
5 ER-01 To ER terminal on phase select module (PSM)
6 26E-01 Power to heater contactor (HC)
J8 - Remote Light Connector – arranged by pin number

1 ALM-01 To white wire on remote light option
2 8FC-01 To red wire on remote light option
3 ALPC-01 To black wire on remote light option
4 8FC-02 Option Power
J9 – SERVICE WATCH Download Connector – arranged by pin number

1 RXD-RED1-08 To J52 controller download connector pin A
2 TXD-BLK2-06 To J52 controller download connector pin B
3 COM-BLK1-09 To J52 controller download connector pin C
4 DPD-RED2-05 To J52 controller download connector pin E
Mini Mate-N-Lok Harness Connectors – shown from pin side of harness connector
1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
3 4 4 5 6 5 6 7 8
4 Pin Connectors 6 Pin Connectors 8 Pin Connectors
2-35
01 December 2012
J10 – Remote Controller Connector – arranged by pin number

1 RXD-BLK To Remote Controller Panel Pin 7
2 TXD-RED To Remote Controller Panel Pin 8
3
4 REM-ON-BRN To Remote Controller Panel Pin 6
J12 – CAN 1 – HMI Connector – arranged by pin number

Pin Wire Description
Number Number
1 RED4 (CANL) To HMI
2 BLACK4 (CANH) To HMI
3 Shield To HMI
4 BLACK3 (ON) To HMI
5 RED2 (2AA) To HMI
6 BLACK2 (8XP) To HMI
7 RED1 (OFF) To HMI
8 BLACK1 (CH) To HMI
1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
3 4 4 5 6 5 6 7 8
2-36
01 December 2012
J13 – CAN 2 – Remote Controller Connector – arranged by pin number

Number Number
1 CANL Not Used
2 CANH Not Used
3 SHLD Not Used
4 ON-ORN To Remote Controller Panel Pin 4
5 2-BLU To Remote Controller Panel Pin 1
6 8XP Not Used
7 None Not Used
8 DRAIN/CH/GRN To Remote Controller Panel Chassis Ground Pin 2
1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
3 4 4 5 6 5 6 7 8
2-37
01 December 2012
J5, J15 - Power Switch Connector – arranged by pin number

J5 2AB-01 2AB Power
J15 8-02 8 Power
J16 - arranged by pin number

J# Wire # Description
J17 8D > 8FH-01 Fuel Heater Relay
J20 FA DMP Auto Fresh Air Damper
J22 8D > 8D-02 Compressor Contactor
J16 Not Used
J18 Not Used
J19 Not Used
Screw Terminal Power Connections

Terminal Wire Description
Number Number
2 2 Battery Power
2A 2A Alternator Power
CH CH Chassis Ground
H H Glow Plugs
2AH 2AH
J31 - USB Connector – arranged by pin number

1 RED To Front Panel USB Connector
2 WHITE To Front Panel USB Connector
3 GREEN To Front Panel USB Connector
4
5
6 BLACK To Front Panel USB Connector
2-38
01 December 2012
Watlow RoHS
J32
1
J34
1
J33
1
J12
1
J13
1
J9
1
J10
1 2AH
J21 J27
12
35
23 3A
F12 - 5A
F1 - 5A
F8 - 5A
F7 - 2A
2935 Rev H
RJ2
J98
F5 – 60A
1
RJ6 RJ5 J11
SIM J29
Card
GPRS K11
13
24
Holder
1
LED iBox J101 LED09

J1 LED
STATUS
LED48
USB J102
Port
H
WiFi
LED45 LED
12
35
23
F13 - 2A
CH
J8
2
A
A1 A2 A3 A4 J6
F15 - 2A
S/N: P000344512320T4
1
13
24
Here
1
F2 - 15A
J3 J15
Code
J5 F6 - 15A 2
Bar
LED47
LED50
F25 – 7.5A F22 - 10A

F3 - 40A
BASE P/N: 1H64689001G02
LED04
LED35
LED01
LED36
LED37
F20 - 2A
LED38
LED06
F10 - 15A
K6
LED07
LED49
LED46
LED27
LED29
LED30
LED32
S.P. P/N: 45-2448
ICON-A000-BA00
LED05
REV. PRTO
LED43 K8 K1
LED16
LED17
LED14
LED44
LED11
LED12
LED13
LED10
LED39
LED40
LED41
LED42
F4
LED24
LED25
LED26
K9
LED23 K7 K10
K2
1 12
LED
J4 13 23 02 8D 8D FA DMP 8S
K3 7D 8DP LED08
24 35
Complete SR-4 Control System with Radio Expansion Board (REB) Installed
2-39
01 December 2012
ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROL RELAY/FUSE BOARD

The Electronic Engine does not use the engine control features such as Preheat and Start Relays, RPM Sensor,
Coolant Temperature Sensor and Coolant and Oil Level Sensors on the SR-4 Base Controller. Engine functions
are controlled directly by the Engine Control Unit (ECU) and a separate Engine Relay/Fuse Board shown below.
The Engine Relay/Fuse Board is located below the SR-4 Base Controller in the Unit Control Box.
xxA
STR
Relay
40 A 30 A
GP
Relay
EGR
Relay
ECU
Relay
The Engine Control Relay/Fuse Board contains four relays and three fuse blocks. An in-line fuse holder is also
located in the wiring harness near the board.
2-40
01 December 2012
Relay Functions
IMPORTANT: The relays are socket mount relays. They can be replaced if necessary.
Relay Function
STR Starter Relay
GP Glow Plug Relay
EGR Exhaust Gas Relay
ECU Engine Control Unit Relay
Fuse Size & Function

Fuse Size Function
30 A Starter Solenoid Fuse
40 A Glow Plug Fuse
20 A Exhaust Gas Fuse
FS10 35 A Battery to Battery Charger
2-41
01 December 2012
GENERATOR
A 3 Phase 230 VAC Generator is used to supply power to the Condenser Fans and Evaporator Blower on all
Precedent units. The Generator is located below the diesel engine and is belt driven directly from a crankshaft
pulley on the front of the engine. Generator bearings are field replaceable. If a generator winding is failed the
Generator must be replaced.
CAUTION
Generator Output
The voltage and frequency of the AC output varies with the speed of the diesel engine. The voltage and
frequency at high speed and low speed diesel are used to control Fan and Blower speed.
 Diesel engine Low Speed operation results in 230 Vac Generator Output.
 Diesel engine High Speed operation results in 345 Vac Generator Output. The Fan and Blower Motors
can run at 345 Vac without damage.
Ground Fault Detector

A Ground Fault Detector is used to monitor for a short circuit on any leg of the three phase AC output power. If a
ground fault is detected then Alarm Code 518 will be set.
 If a ground fault condition is detected while the unit is running Alarm Code 518 will be set and the unit
will continue to run.
 If Alarm Code 518 is set and the unit is turned off and back on then the unit fans will not start. Note that
if the Condenser Fans cannot run then Alarm Code 10 High Discharge Pressure may be set as a result.
2-42
01 December 2012
Current Sensor
A Current Transformer is used to monitor to monitor current on each leg of the three phase AC output power. If
current flow is excessive then Alarm Code 526 will be set as a Check Alarm.
NOTE: If the unit is equipped with the optional Battery Charger the current sensor is not used. This function is
served by the Battery Charger.
Diagnostics and Alarm Codes

For Generator Diagnostics see Section 5 of this manual. Typical Generator Alarm Codes are the following:
 Alarm Code 518 Generator Ground Fault
 Alarm Code 524 Generator Operational Limit, Voltage to Frequency Ratio
 Alarm Code 525 Generator Frequency Range Fault
 Alarm Code 526 Generator Operational Limit, Output Current
 Alarm Code 527 System Monitor, Unknown Restarts
SmartPower™ Electric Standby Units

If the unit is equipped with the optional SmartPower, the fans and blower are also operated from Standby Power
when connected. When the unit is operating in Electric Mode the Generator Contactor is open to block Standby
Power from reaching the Generator.
2-43
01 December 2012
HIGH VOLTAGE FAN AND BLOWER CONTROL BOX

The high voltage controls for the Condenser Fans and Evaporator Blower are located in the High Voltage Fan
and Blower Control Box mounted just above the Unit Control Box.
High Voltage Fan and Blower Control Box
Ground
Fault
Relay
Evaporator Evaporator Curbside Roadside
Blower Blower Condenser Condenser
High Speed Low Speed Fan Fan
CAUTION
2-44
01 December 2012
FAN AND BLOWER MOTORS
Condenser Fan Motors

There are two 230 Vac 3 Phase Condenser Fan Motors located at the top of the unit. These are identified as the
Curbside and Roadside motors. The motors are single speed motors but change speed when engine speed
changes from Low Speed to High Speed as a result of the increased voltage and frequency generator output in
high speed. Fan Run Timers are used on both Condenser Fans to prevent short cycling.
The Roadside Condenser Fan also moves air over the engine radiator coils. For this reason the Roadside Fan
accumulates more run time than the Curbside Fan.
Motor bearings are field replaceable. If a Condenser Fan Motor winding is failed the Condenser Fan Motor must
be replaced.
CAUTION

As a rule, the same Alarm Codes will be set if a Condenser Fan Motor fails as if a belt failed on a traditional unit.
For complete Condenser Fan Motor Diagnostics see Section 5 of this manual. Typical Alarm Codes caused by a
failed Condenser Fan Motor are the following:
 Alarm Code 10 High Discharge Pressure

 Alarm Code 18 High Coolant Temperature
There are no Alarm Codes specific to the Condenser Fans.
Condenser Fan Motor Control

The table on the next page shows conditions required to turn Condenser Fan Motors on and off.
2-45
01 December 2012
Condenser Fan Operation in Cool Mode
Unit is in Cool Mode Operation

Curbside Condenser Fan Roadside Condenser Fan
Fan Fan
State Condition State Condition
ON Saturated Discharge Temperature > 135°F ON Saturated Discharge Temperature > 135°F
or or
Saturated Discharge Temperature > (Ambient Saturated Discharge Temperature > (Ambient
Temperature + 35°F) Temperature + 30°F)
or or
Suction Pressure Transducer, Discharge Suction Pressure Transducer, Discharge
Pressure Transducer or Ambient Temperature Pressure Transducer or Ambient Temperature
Sensor fails Sensor fails
or
Engine Coolant Temperature > 200°F
or
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor fails
OFF Saturated Discharge Temperature < Minimum OFF Engine Coolant Temperature < 165°F and
Saturated Discharge Temperature setting and Saturated Discharge Temperature < Minimum
Fan Run Timer is expired Saturated Discharge Temperature setting and
or Fan Run Timer is expired
Saturated Discharge Temperature < (Ambient or
Temperature + 10°F) and Fan Run Timer is Engine Coolant Temperature < 165°F and
expired Saturated Discharge Temperature < (Ambient
Temperature + 5°F) and Fan Run Timer is
expired
2-46
01 December 2012
Condenser Fan Operation in Heat Mode or Defrost Mode
Unit is in Heat Mode or Defrost Mode Operation

Curbside Condenser Fan Roadside Condenser Fan
Fan Fan
State Condition State Condition
OFF ON Engine Coolant Temperature > 200°F
or
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor fails
OFF OFF Engine Coolant Temperature < 165°F and Fan
Run Timer is expired
2-47
01 December 2012
Evaporator Blower Motor

There is one 230 Vac 3 Phase 2 Speed Evaporator Blower Motor located in the front accessible Evaporator
Compartment. The motor is a 2 speed motor that also changes speed when engine speed changes from Low
Speed to High Speed as a result of the increased voltage and frequency generator output in high speed. The two
speed motor allows constant airflow to be provided regardless of engine speed.
Motor bearings are field replaceable. If an Evaporator Blower Motor winding is failed the Evaporator Blower
Motor must be replaced.
CAUTION

As a rule, the same Alarm Codes will be set if a Condenser Fan Motor fails as if a belt failed on a traditional unit.
For complete Condenser Fan Motor Diagnostics see Section 5 of this manual. Typical Alarm Codes caused by a
failed Condenser Fan Motor are the following:

 Alarm Code 18 High Coolant Temperature
There are no Alarm Codes specific to the Evaporator Fans.
Evaporator Fan Motor Control

The table on the next page shows conditions required to turn Evaporator Fan Motors on and off.
2-48
01 December 2012
Evaporator Blower Speed

The table below shows available Evaporator Blower Speeds
ENGINE BLOWER SPEED EVAPORATOR AIRFLOW

SPEED SELECTED Compared to SB Unit
HIGH LOW SAME AS HIGH

1
LOW HIGH SAME AS HIGH
2
LOW LOW SAME AS LOW
3
HIGH HIGH NOT ALLOWED
NOTES:
1. Fan motors are 2-speed induction motors (High and Low speed)
2. Motors change speed with generator output voltage and frequency (Engine in High Speed or Low Speed
operation)
3. HIGH/HIGH not allowed due to motor HP limit
2-49
01 December 2012
UNIT SENSORS
The sensors monitor air temperatures at various points in the system, as well as alternator frequency and fuel
level. Refrigerant pressures are also monitored on ETV units. Sensors are connected to the Base Controller via
the J1 and J2 35 Pin Connectors.
Engine sensors such as the engine oil pressure, engine oil level, engine coolant level, engine coolant
temperature and engine speed are monitored by the Engine Control Unit (ECU).
AIR TEMPERATURE SENSORS
Graded and Un-graded Air Temperature Sensors

The dual Return Air and Discharge Air sensors are graded sensors. Sensor grading allows maximum accuracy
without the need for ice water calibration. The sensor grade (from 1L through 9H) is stamped on the sensor and
must be entered into the Base Controller when a sensor is changed, in order to properly calibrate the sensor for
accurate temperature readings. If the grade is not changed from the factory setting of 5H, then Alarm Code 92
Sensor Grades Not Set will occur. Always update the sensor grade nameplate when graded sensors are
changed. The nameplate is mounted on the side of the control box.
Un-graded sensors are used to measure the evaporator coil temperature and ambient temperature, since these
temperatures are not as critical as the return and discharge air temperatures.
Do not replace a graded sensor with an un-graded sensor.
Dual Sensors
Dual temperature sensors are provided for both return air temperature and discharge air temperature. The
sensors are located next to each other to insure common readings. One sensor is the control sensor and the
other sensor is the display sensor. The return and discharge control sensors are used for unit control. The return
and discharge display sensors are used by the HMI Control Panel to display the temperature.
2-50
01 December 2012
Control and Display Return Air Sensors

These sensors monitor the temperature of the air returning to the evaporator coil. The sensors are located in the
return air flow and are connected directly to the Base Controller connector J1. These sensors are graded sensors
and must be replaced with graded sensors. The Base Controller must be calibrated to the respective grade of
the installed sensor in order to operate properly. The Control Return Air Sensor is marked with one yellow cable
tie and is connected to the Base Controller via the RTP and RTN wires. The Display Return Air Sensor is
marked with two yellow cable ties and is connected to the Base Controller via the RTRP and RTRN wires.
Return Air Sensor Clamp
A brass clamp should be installed between the two return air sensors. This clamp increases the thermal coupling
between the sensors to provide more accurate temperature readings when the temperature is changing rapidly.
Rapid temperature changes may occur during pulldown or when the door has been opened. This clamp is not
required on the discharge air sensors.
Control and Display Discharge Air Sensors

These sensors monitor the temperature of the air leaving the evaporator coil. The sensors are located in the
evaporator discharge air path and are connected directly to the Base Controller via connector J1. These sensors
are graded sensors and must be replaced with graded sensors. The Base Controller must be calibrated to the
respective grade of the installed sensor, in order to operate properly. The Control Discharge Air Sensor is
marked with one red cable tie and is connected to the Base Controller via the DTP and DTN wires. The Display
Discharge Air Sensor is marked with two red cable ties and is connected to the Base Controller via the DTRP and
DTRN wires.
2-51
01 December 2012
Coil Temperature Sensor

This sensor monitors the temperature of the evaporator coil. The sensor is located on the evaporator coil header
plate and is connected directly to the Base Controller via connector J1. This is an un-graded sensor. It is
connected to the Base Controller via the CTP and CTN wires.
Ambient Temperature Sensor

This sensor monitors the ambient air temperature. The sensor is located in the main unit adjacent to the
condenser coil and is connected directly to the Base Controller via connector J1. This is an un-graded sensor. It
is connected to the Base Controller via the ATP and ATN wires.
Spare 1 Temperature Sensors

This optional sensor monitors a temperature as selected by the customer. This optional sensor must be installed
as required by the customer. This is a graded sensor. It is connected to the Base Controller via the STIP and
STIN wires.
Alarm Code 92 Sensor Grades Not Set is not used with spare sensors. However, when used spare sensors
should be calibrated to achieve maximum accuracy.
2-52
01 December 2012
CARGOWATCH SENSORS
The CargoWatch Data Logger is part of the HMI Control Panel. The CargoWatch Data Logger conforms to
European standard EN12830. The Data Logger supports up to 6 temperature sensors and 4 digital inputs.
The sensors used for the CargoWatch Data Logger are RTD thermistor-type sensors that differ from the sensors
used for unit control. The CargoWatch sensors are connected directly to the HMI Control Panel.
CargoWatch sensors can be identified by:

 No shrink tubing over sensor barrel
 Shorter sensor barrel than unit sensors
 No sensor grades
 The sensor is not polarity sensitive
 Both wires are black
CargoWatch Sensor
No Shrink Tubing
IMPORTANT: The CargoWatch sensors ARE NOT interchangeable with the unit temperature sensors.
2-53
01 December 2012
These thermistor sensors change resistance as the temperature changes. Resistance values can be measured
using a high quality ohmmeter and compared to a table to directly determine the temperature. Note that these
resistance values only apply to CargoWatch sensors.
CargoWatch Sensor Resistance vs Temperature

°F °C Ohms
-20°F -29°C 166,356
-10°F -23°C 115,757
0°F -18°C 86,501
10°F -12°C 61,737
20°F -7°C 47,070
30°F -1°C 34,374
32°F 0°C 32,650
40°F 4°C 26,688
50°F 10°C 19,904
60°F 16°C 15,002
70°F 21°C 11,944
80°F 27°C 9,166
90°F 32°C 7,402
100°F 38°C 5,775
For testing and replacement of the CargoWatch Sensors see Service Procedure D04A Checking CargoWatch
Sensors.
2-54
01 December 2012
REFRIGERATION CONTROL COMPONENTS

These components are used by the Base Controller to sense conditions or control operation of the refrigeration
system. The Base Controller determines the necessary requirements by considering the setpoint, the software,
®
the programmable feature and OptiSet settings, and the information supplied by the sensors.
Discharge Pressure Transducer (DPT)

This transducer supplies the compressor discharge pressure to the Base Controller. The sense wire is connected
to the Base Controller at J3 via the DPI wire. The DPP and DPN wires supply power to the sensor. This sensor
is installed on ETV-equipped units only.
Suction Pressure Transducer (SPT)

This transducer supplies the compressor suction pressure to the Base Controller. The sense wire is connected to
the Base Controller at J3 via the SPI wire. The SPP and SPN wires supply power to the sensor. This sensor is
installed on ETV equipped units only.
High Pressure Cutout Switch (HPCO)

The high pressure cutout switch is located on the discharge manifold of four cylinder compressors. The switch is
closed with normal pressures and opens with excessive pressures to shut the unit down and prevent damage.
Pilot Solenoid (PS)

The Base Controller energizes (opens) the Pilot Solenoid to shift the 3 way valve to the heat position during heat
or defrost mode operation. The normally closed Pilot Solenoid is located near the 3 way valve. The pilot
solenoid is energized and LED 8 is lit when the Base Controller energizes the Pilot Solenoid Smart FET. This
supplies power via the 26 wire to the pilot solenoid. The circuit is protected by the Smart FET.
Electronic Throttling Valve (ETV)

The Electronic Throttling Valve is capable of opening and closing incrementally and is installed between the
evaporator and the compressor.
The ETV is controlled directly by the Base Controller Smart FET outputs. As the temperature approaches
setpoint, the ETV begins to close, throttling the suction gas returning to the compressor and thus reducing
cooling capacity. As the box temperature approaches setpoint, the ETV becomes more nearly closed. This
feature provides very smooth and steady temperature control. The circuit is protected by the ETV Smart FETs.
2-55
01 December 2012
Hot Gas Solenoid (HG)

The normally closed hot gas bypass solenoid is opened during modulated cool when the temperature is very
close to setpoint. This diverts hot gas from the compressor discharge line, through the open hot gas solenoid to
the evaporator distributor, to further reduce cooling capacity. The valve also opens if the suction pressure is too
low. This valve is supplied on ETV equipped units only. The hot gas solenoid is energized and LED 10 is lit
when the Base Controller energizes the Hot Gas Solenoid Smart FET. This supplies power via the HG wire to
the hot gas solenoid. The circuit is protected by the Smart FET.
Fresh Air Exchange Solenoid Option

An optional Fresh Air Exchange Feature is available. This allows fresh outside air to be drawn into the trailer and
the interior air to be exhausted. This feature is beneficial when hauling loads that release gas as they ripen, such
as potatoes.
The Fresh Air Exchange feature should be used exactly as specified by the customer and with fresh loads only.
Using the Fresh Air Exchange feature with frozen loads will result in poor refrigeration performance, excessive
defrost cycles and may set refrigeration capacity Alarm Codes.
A solenoid is used to open and close the Fresh Air Exchange Door. Note that the Fresh Air Exchange door will
only be open when the unit engine is running, as it is held in the open position by the Fresh Air Exchange
Solenoid. The door will close when the engine shuts down to preserve unit battery life. The setting of the Fresh
Air Exchange door will survive power off / power on cycles – if the door is set “Open” by the operator it will
continue to open any time the engine is running until it is set “Close” by the operator.
As of this date, Revision D006 Base Controller Software and Revision 6561 HMI Control Panel are required for
the Fresh Air Exchange feature and will be installed only in SR-4 SB units equipped with the Fresh Air Exchange
option. Revision D006 Base Controller Software is a direct descendent of Revision D007 Base Controller
Software and has all the same features as Revision D007 Software.
If installed and enabled, the Fresh Air Exchange is opened and closed from the Mode Menu. See Fresh Air
Exchange in Section 4 for details.
2-56
01 December 2012
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS

These components are used by the Base Controller to sense conditions and control operation of the diesel
engine (or electric motor, if present).
Coolant Temperature Sensor

This sensor monitors the temperature of the coolant in the diesel engine. It is located on the diesel engine
thermostat housing and is connected to the Base Controller via the J3 connector WTP and WTN wires. It is used
on Mechanical Engines only.
Coolant Level Sensor (CLS)

This sensor monitors the engine coolant level. It consists of a magnetic reed switch located on the radiator
expansion tank. The magnetic reed switch is a press-in miniature reed switch and a captive magnetic float inside
the radiator expansion tank. If the coolant level is low for a specified period of time a low coolant condition is
assumed to exist. The switch is connected to the Base Controller connector J7 via the CLS and CLP wire. The
switch is closed with adequate coolant level and open with low coolant level. It is used on Mechanical Engines
only.
Oil Pressure Switch (LOPS)

The normally closed low oil pressure switch monitors the oil pressure of the diesel engine. It is located on the
engine side of the unit frame. It is connected to the Base Controller via J7 connector 20B and CH wires. The
switch is open when the oil pressure is adequate. It is used on Mechanical Engines only.
Oil Level Switch (OLS)

The normally open oil level switch monitors the oil level in the diesel engine. It is located above the oil pan on
the door side of the engine. It supplies information on the oil level to the Base Controller via the J7 connector
OLS wire. The switch is closed when the oil level is low. It is used on Mechanical Engines only.
Flywheel Sensor (FW)

This sensor monitors the RPM of the diesel engine. The flywheel sensor is located on the door side of the engine
just under the starter. It supplies engine speed information to the Base Controller connector J7 via the FS1 and
FS2 wires. It is used on Mechanical Engines only.
2-57
01 December 2012
Glow Plugs
The glow plugs are located in the head of the diesel engine. The glow plugs are energized by the Engine Control
Unit (ECU). The circuit is protected by the 40 amp fuse located on the Electronic Engine Relay/Fuse Board.
Glow plugs are used on Electronic Engines only.
Intake Air Heater

The intake air heater is located at the inlet to the intake manifold of the diesel engine. The intake air heater is
energized and LED 3 is lit when the Base Controller energizes the K2 Preheat Relay. The K2 Preheat Relay
normally open contacts supply power via the H wire to the intake air heater to preheat the engine before starting.
The circuit is protected by the 60 amp fuse F5. It is used on Mechanical Engines only.
Starter Motor (SM)

The starter motor is located on the door side of the engine. The starter motor is energized and LED 25 is lit when
the Base Controller energizes the K7 Starter Relay. The K7 Starter Relay normally open contacts supply power
via the 8S wire to the starter solenoid to crank the engine. The circuit is protected by the 40 amp fuse F3.
Fuel Solenoid (FSH, FSP)

The fuel solenoid is located at the rear of the injector pump and is used to start and stop the flow of fuel to the
diesel engine during diesel mode operation. The fuel solenoid features two coils, a pull-in coil and a hold coil.
The pull-in coil transfers the fuel solenoid to the open position. The hold coil maintains the fuel solenoid in the
open position.
The hold coil is energized in Diesel Mode when the Base Controller energizes the K1 Run Relay. LED 6 is lit
when the Run Relay is energized and the contacts have transferred. The K1 Run Relay normally open contacts
supply power from the 8 wire thru the normally closed Diesel/Electric relay to the 8D wire to energize the fuel
solenoid hold coil. The circuit is protected by the 7.5 amp fuse F25.
The pull-in coil is momentarily energized and LED 24 is momentarily lit in Diesel Mode when the Base Controller
energizes the K6 Fuel Solenoid Pull-in Relay for 2 seconds. The K6 Fuel Solenoid Pull-in Relay normally open
contacts supply power via the 8DP wire to the fuel solenoid pull-in coil to positively open the fuel solenoid. The
circuit is protected by the 40 amp fuse F3. It is used on Mechanical Engines only.
2-58
01 December 2012
High Speed Solenoid (HS)

The high speed (throttle) solenoid is located behind the fuel injection pump. The high speed solenoid is
energized and LED 5 is lit when the Base Controller energizes the K3 High Speed Relay. The K3 High Speed
Relay contacts supply power to the 7D wire to the high speed solenoid to enable high speed operation. The
circuit is protected by the 15 amp fuse F6. It is used on Mechanical Engines only.
Alternator Frequency
Alternator frequency is monitored by the microprocessor via the “W” wire. When a unit equipped with optional
Electric Standby is running in Diesel Mode, the ratio between the engine RPM and alternator frequency is
monitored. If these values are not in the proper ratio it is an indication that drive belt slippage is occurring. If this
occurs then Alarm Code 48 is set as a shutdown alarm. It is used on Mechanical Engines only.
2-59
01 December 2012
COMMUNICATION PORTS
The SR-4 features three communication ports. On SB units the CargoWatch and ServiceWatch ports are
located on the control panel and the Printer port is inside the control box. On SL and SLX units the CargoWatch
port and Printer ports are located on the control panel and the ServiceWatch port is located inside the control
box. The port inside the control box may be swapped with one of the ports on the control panel if required by the
end user.
USB Ports
Thermo King SR-4 Trailer Units provide two USB (Universal Serial Bus) Ports located on the unit control panel.
The upper port is reserved for USB Flash Drive only. The lower port is reserved for connection to a PC
Computer.
IMPORTANT: The Flash Drive must be properly configured and the desired features must be enabled using the
ThermoServ™ Service Tool.
Using a properly configured and enabled flash drive, the following functions may be available:
 Download the ServiceWatch Data Logger
 Download the CargoWatch Data Logger
 Flash load Base Controller Software
 Flash load HMI Control Panel Software
 Send OptiSet Plus Files
 Retrieve OptiSet Plus Files
Printer Port
This port is used to print trip records from the CargoWatch Data Logger. The Printer port is located inside the
control box.
2-60
01 December 2012
OPTIONAL SMARTPOWER™ ELECTRIC STANDBY

(Model 50 units only)
The SmartPower™ Electric Standby option allows the unit to be operated on either the diesel engine or external
standby electric power. The units are supplied to operate on 230-460 Vac three phase power. Units to be
operated on 460 Vac are equipped with a step-down transformer to reduce the voltage from 460 Vac to 230 Vac.
CAUTION
Model 50 Features
The following features are standard equipment on units equipped with Electric Standby.
 Automatic Diesel/Electric Selection – The unit can be programmed to automatically switch to electric
operation when a power cord is connected and the standby power is switched “on”. The unit can also be
programmed to automatically switch back to diesel power if the standby power is switched off or fails. The
HMI Control Panel will prompt for electric or diesel switchover if the respective autoswitch feature is not
enabled.
Note: Auto-switch from electric to diesel is not recommended when the unit is running in electric mode
indoors or when below deck on a ferry.
Note: The unit will automatically switch to Cycle Sentry when the unit is manually switched or autoswitched
to electric mode.
 Automatic Overload Reset - The overload relay resets automatically after the motor cools. When the
overload trips, it interrupts power to the motor contactor coil.
 Electric Heat – Both hot gas and electric heat is utilized on model 50 units. The electric heaters are also
used during defrost.
2-61
01 December 2012
 Automatic Phase Correction - The control system features two motor contactors. One of the connectors is
energized by the phase detection module to insure correct motor rotation, regardless of phase rotation on the
incoming power. The motor contactors are also mechanically interlocked.
 Low Voltage Detection – The phase detection modulation will not allow the unit to run if the supply voltage
is too low.
 Single Phase Protection – The phase detection modulation will not allow the unit to run if it detects a single
phase condition.
High Voltage Components

The high voltage enclosure or tray contains the motor contactors, overload relay, heater contactor and phase
select module used to operate the drive motor on units equipped with Electric Standby. The contactors are
controlled by +12 volt dc control signals from the Base Controller. SB units have a separate control box located
on the compressor side of the unit for these high voltage components. SL units utilize a high voltage tray located
inside the unit control box.
Standby Power Disconnect Switch

A Standby Power Disconnect Switch is installed on all Electric Standby equipped units featuring the Remote
Mount Power Receptacle. The Standby Power Disconnect Switch is located in the high voltage enclosure.
2-62
01 December 2012
Diesel/Electric Relay K5
The Diesel/Electric Relay K5 is present on all units. If the Electric Standby option is not present or if the unit is
running in Diesel Mode then control power is routed through the Diesel/Electric Relay normally closed contacts.
The Diesel/Electric Relay is energized and LED 7 is lit when the Base Controller requests Electric Mode
operation. The K5 Diesel/Electric Relay normally open contacts supply power to the 7E circuit to enable Electric
Mode operation.
Heater Contactor HC
The heater contactor is used to supply standby power to the electric heaters during heat and defrost mode
electric operation. The heater contactor is energized and LED 5 is lit when the Base Controller energizes the K3
High Speed Relay during electric mode operation. The K3 High Speed Relay Smart FET supplies chassis
ground via the 26E wire to the heater contactor. The circuit is protected by the Smart FET.
Phase Detect Module

The phase detect module is designed to monitor 3 phase voltages from 160 volts AC through 510 volts AC. The
phase detect module detects missing phases, automatically corrects phase rotation, and provides low voltage
protection. See Section 6 for operation and diagnostics.
Brown
THERMO KING
9131C98G06
Blue L1
L2 0202
L3
Black
Phase Detect Module
2-63
01 December 2012
SmartPower™ Electric Standby Components
The SmartPower™ components are located in a separate SmartPower Control Box located behind the Unit
control box. The unit control box swings out to provide access to the SmartPower Control Box.
10
5
11
12
7
1 13
9
2
1 Compressor Motor Contactor (CC) 8 Heater Contactor (HC)

2 Phase Contactor 2 (PC2) 9 Compressor Motor Overload Relay (OL)
3 Phase Contactor 1 (PC1) 10 Battery Charger Contactor 1 (BC1) 460 VAC only
4 Phase Select Module (PSM) 11 Battery Charger Contactor 2 (BC2) 460 VAC only
5 Fuse Block 1 (FB1) 12 Transformer Contactor (TRC) 460 VAC only
6 Generator Contactor (GC) 13 Transformer Secondary Fuse Blcok (FB2) 460 VAC only
7 Heater Overload Relay (OLH)
2-64
01 December 2012
OPTIONAL BATTERY CHARGER

An optional Battery Charger is available. The battery charger converts AC power from the generator to DC
power to charge the unit battery and power the unit controil system.
If present, it is located in the air duct to the left of the control box. Both the input and output are fuse protected.
OPTIONAL FUEL HEATER

An optional Fuel Heater is available. If present, it is located just to the right of the fuel filter. It is protected by a
fuse located near the Electronic Engine Relay/Fuse Board.
2-65
01 December 2012
2-66
01 December 2012
Section 3 – SR-4 Trailer S/T Electronic Eng Software Description
Table of Contents Section 3

Software Operation ........................................................................................................................................... 7
Hardware and Software Compatibility .............................................................................................................. 8
SR-4 Base Controller .................................................................................................................................... 8
SR-4 HMI Control Panel ................................................................................................................................ 8
Menu Structure .................................................................................................................................................. 9
Standard Display .......................................................................................................................................... 9
TemperatureWatch™ Display ...................................................................................................................... 9
Main Menu ..................................................................................................................................................... 9
Maintenance Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 10
Guarded Access Menu ............................................................................................................................... 10
Menu Overview Flowchart............................................................................................................................... 11
Operator Features............................................................................................................................................ 12
Standard Display ........................................................................................................................................ 12
Setpoint Change .................................................................................................................................... 12
Gauges ................................................................................................................................................... 12
Sensors .................................................................................................................................................. 12
Main Menu .............................................................................................................................................. 12
TemperatureWatch™ ................................................................................................................................... 13
Main Menu Flowchart ...................................................................................................................................... 14
Main Menu Features ........................................................................................................................................ 15
Pretrip.......................................................................................................................................................... 15
Flash Drive .................................................................................................................................................. 15
Language .................................................................................................................................................... 15
Alarms ......................................................................................................................................................... 16
Gauges ........................................................................................................................................................ 16
Sensors ....................................................................................................................................................... 16
Data Logger ................................................................................................................................................ 17
Hourmeters ................................................................................................................................................. 17
Mode............................................................................................................................................................ 17
Electric Standby (Model 50 units only) ..................................................................................................... 18
Diesel Mode (Model 50 units only) ............................................................................................................ 18
Adjust Brightness ....................................................................................................................................... 18
View Time.................................................................................................................................................... 18
3-1
01 December 2012
Clear All ECU Fault Codes ......................................................................................................................... 18

Maintenance Menu Flowchart ......................................................................................................................... 19
Maintenance Menu Features ........................................................................................................................... 21
Accessing the Maintenance Menu ............................................................................................................. 21
Hourmeters ................................................................................................................................................. 21
Gauges ........................................................................................................................................................ 21
Sensors ....................................................................................................................................................... 22
Alarms ......................................................................................................................................................... 22
Service Test Mode ...................................................................................................................................... 22
Output Test Mode ....................................................................................................................................... 23
Display Self Test ......................................................................................................................................... 23
Evacuation Test .......................................................................................................................................... 23
Software Revision ...................................................................................................................................... 23
Set Time and Date ...................................................................................................................................... 23
Time Zone ................................................................................................................................................... 23
Connect Engine Service Tool .................................................................................................................... 24
Guarded Access Menu Flowchart ................................................................................................................... 25
Guarded Access Menu Features ..................................................................................................................... 27
Security Code Protection ........................................................................................................................... 27
Bypassing the Security Code ............................................................................................................... 27
Entering the Guarded Access Menu .......................................................................................................... 27
Bypassing the Security Code ............................................................................................................... 28
Leaving the Guarded Access Menu ........................................................................................................... 28
Programmable Features Menu ........................................................................................................................ 29
Temperature Units ...................................................................................................................................... 29
Pressure Units ............................................................................................................................................ 29
Restart Unit After Shutdown ...................................................................................................................... 30
Setpoint High Limit .................................................................................................................................... 31
Setpoint Low Limit ..................................................................................................................................... 31
Fuel Saver II ................................................................................................................................................ 32
High Speed Pulldown ................................................................................................................................. 33
Fresh Frozen Range ................................................................................................................................... 34
Door Open Forces ...................................................................................................................................... 35
Door Open Timeout .................................................................................................................................... 36
Sleep Mode After Pretrip ............................................................................................................................ 36
3-2
01 December 2012
Rail Option .................................................................................................................................................. 37

Rail Alternate .............................................................................................................................................. 37
Blocked Air Chute Detect ........................................................................................................................... 38
Temperature Differential ............................................................................................................................ 38
Time to Alarm ............................................................................................................................................. 39
Door Open Override ................................................................................................................................... 39
Discharge Pressure Setpoint ..................................................................................................................... 40
Coolant Temperature Setpoint .................................................................................................................. 40
Limited Alarm Resets ................................................................................................................................. 41
Remote Device ............................................................................................................................................ 42
HMI Control Panel COM 1 Default Baud Rate ........................................................................................... 42
Extended ServiceWatch™ Logging ........................................................................................................... 44
High Temperature Defrost .......................................................................................................................... 44
Local Authorization of OptiSet Plus Flash Load ...................................................................................... 44
Local Authorization of Flash Load ............................................................................................................ 45
ServiceWatch™ Logging Intervals ............................................................................................................ 45
Main Menu Configuration Menu ..................................................................................................................... 46
Add Keypad Lockout to Mode Menu ......................................................................................................... 46
Add Sleep to Mode Menu ........................................................................................................................... 47
Configure Soft Key 2 on Standard Display ............................................................................................... 47
Configure Soft Key 3 on Standard Display ............................................................................................... 48
Auto Keypad Lock Time ............................................................................................................................. 48
Auto Keypad Lock Pin Num ....................................................................................................................... 49
Alarm Display Menu ........................................................................................................................................ 50
Hourmeter Setup Menu ................................................................................................................................... 51
Program Hourmeter Sub-menu ....................................................................................................................... 51
Total Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours ......................................................................................................... 52
Controller Power On Hours........................................................................................................................ 53
Pretrip Reminder Hours ............................................................................................................................. 53
Engine Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours ...................................................................................................... 54
Electric Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours ..................................................................................................... 55
3-3
01 December 2012

Viewable Hourmeter Setup Sub-menu ........................................................................................................... 56
Total Hours ................................................................................................................................................. 56
Total Run Time Hours (If Model 50) ........................................................................................................... 57
Engine Hours .............................................................................................................................................. 57
Electric Run Hours (If Model 50) ................................................................................................................ 58
Controller Power On Hours........................................................................................................................ 59
Pretrip Reminder Hours ............................................................................................................................. 59
Programmable Service Due Date .................................................................................................................... 61
Service Due Date ........................................................................................................................................ 61
Sensor Calibration Menu ................................................................................................................................ 62
Sensor Cable Tie Identification ................................................................................................................. 62
Control Return Air Sensor Grade .............................................................................................................. 63
Control Discharge Air Sensor Grade ......................................................................................................... 64
Display Return Air Sensor Grade .............................................................................................................. 65
Display Discharge Air Sensor Grade ......................................................................................................... 66
Spare 1 Sensor Grade ................................................................................................................................ 67
Cycle Sentry Setup Menu ................................................................................................................................ 68
Cycle Sentry Amps Level ........................................................................................................................... 68
Battery Sentry Voltage Level ..................................................................................................................... 68
Check Battery Condition Alarm ................................................................................................................. 69
Defrost Setup Menu ......................................................................................................................................... 70
Defrost Interval In Range with Fresh Setpoint .......................................................................................... 70
Defrost Interval Not In Range with Fresh Setpoint ................................................................................... 70
Defrost Interval In Range with Frozen Setpoint ........................................................................................ 71
Defrost Interval Not In Range with Frozen Setpoint ................................................................................. 71
Maximum Defrost Duration ........................................................................................................................ 71
Language Setup Menu .................................................................................................................................... 72
Enable Language ........................................................................................................................................ 72
3-4
01 December 2012
Access Code Setup Menu ............................................................................................................................... 73

Enter Access Code ..................................................................................................................................... 73
OptiSet Plus Menu ........................................................................................................................................... 74
OptiSet Plus Reset ..................................................................................................................................... 75
Temperature Profile Selection ................................................................................................................... 75
Sensor Configuration Menu – CargoWatch™ Data logger............................................................................ 76
CargoWatch Sensor Programming ............................................................................................................ 78
Logging Interval ......................................................................................................................................... 78
Log Sensor for CargoWatch sensor 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 ................................................................................ 78
Independent Sensor Name for CargoWatch sensor 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 ....................................................... 79
Out of Range Checking (for current sensor)............................................................................................. 81
Low .............................................................................................................................................................. 81
High ............................................................................................................................................................. 82
Italian Option .............................................................................................................................................. 82
Sensor Averaging ....................................................................................................................................... 83
Digital Input Programming ......................................................................................................................... 84
Digital In for CargoWatch digital input 1, 2 or 3 ....................................................................................... 84
Door Open Logging .................................................................................................................................... 84
Digital Input Name for CargoWatch digital input 1, 2, 3 or 4.................................................................... 85
Countdown Timer ....................................................................................................................................... 86
Conservative Log Count ............................................................................................................................ 87
SOT on Setpoint ......................................................................................................................................... 87
SOT at Midnight .......................................................................................................................................... 88
Unit Configuration Setup Menu ...................................................................................................................... 89
Alarm Code 111 Unit Not Configured Correctly ........................................................................................ 89
Unit Model ................................................................................................................................................... 89
High Capacity Unit? ................................................................................................................................... 89
Engine Type ................................................................................................................................................ 90
Compressor Type ....................................................................................................................................... 90
ETV Configured .......................................................................................................................................... 90
Battery Charger........................................................................................................................................... 91
Electric Standby Equipped? ...................................................................................................................... 91
Electric Motor Type .................................................................................................................................... 92
Electric Heat Option ................................................................................................................................... 92
Diesel to Electric Auto Switch Enabled?................................................................................................... 93
3-5
01 December 2012
Electric to Diesel Auto Switch Enabled?................................................................................................... 93

Humidity Sensor ......................................................................................................................................... 94
Fuel Level Sensor Type.............................................................................................................................. 94
Rear Remote Control Panel........................................................................................................................ 95
Rear Remote Control Panel Action ............................................................................................................ 95
rd
3 Party Device Control ............................................................................................................................. 96
REB Type Configured ................................................................................................................................ 96
Fresh Air Exchange .................................................................................................................................... 97
3-6
01 December 2012
SOFTWARE OPERATION
The software is a very complex set of instructions used by the Base Controller, HMI Control Panel and Engine
Control Unit (ECU) to control the refrigeration system, engine and interface with the operator. The Base
Controller, HMI Control Panel and Engine Control Unit microprocessors examine the conditions of all the inputs
and compare them to the instructions contained in the software. The outputs are then energized as specified by
the software instructions.
There is no way to determine from the schematic or wiring diagrams what conditions will cause the unit to
operate in a particular mode. This decision is made by the software after examining all the input conditions and
setpoint. However, operating mode can generally be deduced from the existing conditions. As an example, if a
35°F (2°C) setpoint is selected and the box temperature, as indicated by the return air sensor is 60°F (16°C), the
unit should operate in Cool mode when turned on.
The SR-4 system utilizes several different software sets.
 Base Controller software family BAxx is used for SR-4 single temperature applications.
 HMI Control Panel software 7Axx is used for all SR-4 single temperature applications.
 Engine Control Unit (ECU) software V22xRyy is used for TK486V25 engines.
Base Controller and HMI Control Panel software updates are flash loaded using the ThermoServ™ Service Tool.
To check the Base Controller or HMI Control Panel software revisions see Section 4 of this manual.
Engine Control Unit (ECU) software updates are flash loaded and Engine Control Module (ECM) software
revisions are checked using the Yanmar Smart Assist Direct Tool.
For software revision details see Section 7 of this manual.
3-7
01 December 2012
HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE COMPATIBILITY

The SR-4 Base Controller is totally new and was designed for the Precedent S-600 trailer unit. Single
temperature applications with SR-4 Base Controllers must use Base Controller Software Revisions BAxx.
 See Section 2 for hardware details.
 See Section 7 of this manual for additional hardware and software details and requirements.

The SR-4 HMI Control Panel is totally new and was designed for the Precedent S-600 trailer unit. Single
temperature applications with SR-4 HMI Control Panels must use HMI Control Panel Software Revisions 7Axx.
 See Section 2 for hardware details.
 See Section 7 of this manual for additional hardware and software details and requirements.
3-8
01 December 2012
MENU STRUCTURE
The basic HMI Control Panel menu structure consists of the Standard Display, the TemperatureWatch® Display
and three menus. See the following material for a general description of each menu and feature. See Section 4
for complete operating instructions.
Standard Display
The Standard Display shows the box temperature and setpoint. The Standard Display or the TemperatureWatch
Display is shown when the unit is operating normally. All other menus are accessed from the Standard Display.
 The box temperature is usually return air temperature, but can be discharge air temperature if some
features are enabled.
 The setpoint can be changed from the Standard Display using the SETPOINT soft key.
 The readings of the unit gauges and temperature sensors can be shown from the Standard Display using
the GAUGES and SENSORS soft keys unless these keys have been assigned different functions from
the Guarded Access > Main Menu.
 The Main Menu is accessed from the Standard Display using the MENU soft key.
 If a USB Flash Drive or a PC computer is connected to the unit via a USB Port a USB Icon will appear in
the display.
TemperatureWatch™ Display
The TemperatureWatch Display shows the return air temperature and setpoint using large numbers that allow
unit conditions to be checked from a distance. If there are no alarms other than Log Alarms present then the
TemperatureWatch Display will appear 2½ minutes after the last key is pressed. Press any soft key to return to
the Standard Display.
Main Menu
The Main Menu consists of informational and operational functions intended for the driver or unit operator. The
Main Menu is directly accessible from the Standard Display using the MENU Soft Key. The Menu Soft Key is at
the bottom right of the Standard Display.
3-9
01 December 2012
Maintenance Menu
The Maintenance Menu consists of informational, operational, control, and diagnostic functions used to help the
service technician maintain and diagnose the unit. The Maintenance Menu is indirectly accessible from the Main
Menu.
Guarded Access Menu

The Guarded Access Menu consists of programmable features that configure the unit, set sensor grades, enable
options, and allow the customer to tailor unit operation to his particular requirements. The CargoWatch data
logger is configured from this menu. The Guarded Access Menu is indirectly accessible from the Maintenance
Menu.
3-10
01 December 2012
MENU OVERVIEW FLOWCHART

SR-4 Precedent Trailer S/T Menu Overview - (8035 b206 & 7A00 b642)
Features shown are for units configured as Single Temperature Trailer
Temp Watch
Display
Press Any
2.5 Minute Soft Key
Time-out
Setpoint Setpoint Soft Key
Change
Gauges Menu Gauges Soft Key

(See Note 1)
Standard
Display
Sensors Menu Sensor Soft Key
(See Note 1)
Main Menu Soft Key

Menu
Pretrip
Flash Drive (If connected)
Language (If enabled)
Alarms
Gauges Guarded Access Menu
Sensors (Not Available if Running)
Data Logger
Hourmeters Security Code (If required)
Mode Programmable Features
Electric Standby (If Model 50) Main Menu Configuration
Adjust Brightness Alarms
Time Hourmeter Setup
Clear All ECU Faults Sensor Calibration
Cycle Sentry Setup
Defrost Setup
Controlled Access
Language Setup
Maintenance Access Code Setup
Menu OptiSet Plus
Sensor Configuration
Hourmeters Hardware Configuration
Gauges
Sensors
Alarms
Service Test
Output Test
Note 1 This key can be user
Display Self Test
assigned from the Guarded Access >
Evacuation Test
Main Menu Configuration Menu.
Software Revision
Choices available are Sensors,
Set Time and Date
Gauges, Pretrip, Data Logger, Start of
Time Zone
Trip (SOT) and Hourmeters. Default
setting shown.
Controlled Access
Not all menu features

may appear
Rev 8035 and 7A00 Precedent S/T 30 October 2012
3-11
01 December 2012
OPERATOR FEATURES
The Thermo King SR-4 control system features many special operator functions. These functions are available
from the Standard Display. A brief explanation of each menu is included here. For complete operating details
see Section 4 of this manual.
Standard Display
The Standard Display is the default display that appears if no other display function is selected. The Standard
Display shows the box temperature and setpoint. The box temperature is usually return air temperature, but can
be discharge air temperature if some features are enabled. The Standard Display soft keys provide direct
operator access to change the setpoint and to select the Gauges Menu, Sensors Menu or Main Menu. Note that
the Gauges and Sensors Soft Keys may be assigned different functions at the user’s discretion. If a USB Flash
Drive or a PC computer is connected to the unit via a USB Port a USB Icon will appear in the display.
Setpoint Change
The setpoint menu can be directly accessed from the Standard Display using the Setpoint soft key.
Gauges
The unit Gauges Menu can be directly accessed using the Gauges Soft Key from the Standard Display. If
desired this key can be assigned a different function from the Guarded Access > Main Menu. If the Gauges Key
is reassigned, the Gauges Menu is available from the Main Menu. For a list of gauges available see the
Operator Menus Flowchart on the next page.
Sensors
The unit Sensors Menu can be directly accessed using the Sensors Soft Key from the Standard Display. If
desired this key can be assigned a different function from the Guarded Access > Main Menu. If the Sensors Key
is reassigned, the Sensors Menu is available from the Main Menu. For a list of sensors available see the
Operator Menus Flowchart on the next page.
Main Menu
The unit Main Menu can be directly accessed using a soft key from the Standard Display. For a list of Main
Menu functions see the Operator Menu Flowchart and the material on the following pages.
3-12
01 December 2012
TemperatureWatch™
The TemperatureWatch Display shows the return air temperature and setpoint using large numbers that allow
unit conditions to be checked from a distance. If there are no alarms other than Log Alarms present then the
TemperatureWatch display appears 2½ minutes after the last key is pressed and will remain until any soft key is
pressed. Press any soft key to return to the Standard Display.
The TemperatureWatch display will not appear if any Check, Prevent or Shutdown alarms are present or if the
CargoWatch -15°C Alarm is active. If the TemperatureWatch display is active and any of these alarm conditions
occur the display will return to the Standard Display. If a shutdown alarm is present the display will flash. This
provides a quick method to check for units that may have an alarm set.
If a USB Flash Drive or a PC computer is connected to the unit via a USB Port a USB Icon will appear in the
display.
3-13
01 December 2012
MAIN MENU FLOWCHART

SR-4 Precedent Trailer S/T Operator & Main Menu - 8035 b206 & 7A00 b642
Setpoint Setpoint 2.5 Min TempWatch

Change Soft Key Time- Display
Standard out
Press Any Soft Key
Gauges
Display Menu Main
Gauges Menu
(See Note 1) Soft Key Soft Key Menu
Pretrip
Coolant Temperature Sensors Soft Key Flash Drive (If connected)
Coolant Level Language (If enabled)
Engine Oil Pressure
Sensors Menu Alarms
Engine Oil Level
(See Note 1) Display all alarms
Amps
Clear most alarms
Battery Voltage Control Return Air Temp
Accessory Battery Voltage Display Return Air Temp Gauges
Engine RPM Control Discharge Air Temp Sensors
Fuel Level Sensor Display Discharge Air Temp Datalogger (CargoWatch)
Discharge Pressure Temperature Differential Start Trip
Suction Pressure Evaporator Coil Temp Print / View
ETV Position Ambient Air Temp Hourmeters
Fresh Air Exchange Spare 1 Temp Total Unit Run Hours
I/O (Inputs/Outputs) Log Sensor 1 Total Run Time Hours
High Speed Relay Log Sensor 2 Total Engine Run Hours
Run Relay Log Sensor 3 Total Electric Run Hours
Run Relay Feedback Log Sensor 4 Total Run Reminder 1
Alternator Excite Output Log Sensor 5 Total Run Reminder 2
Defrost Damper Log Sensor 6 Controller Power On
Heat Output Board Temperature Sensor Pretrip Reminder
Motor RPM Engine Reminder 1
Spare Digital Input 1 Engine Reminder 2
Spare Digital Input 2 Electric Reminder 1
Spare Digital Input 4 Mode
Spare Analog Input 1 Turn Cycle Sentry On or Off
Spare Analog Input 2 (Off = Continuous)
Spare Output 1 Degrees - Fahrenheit | Celsius
Spare Output 2 Keypad Lockout
Spare Output 3 Start Sleep Mode
Spare Output 4 Note 1 This key can be user Program Wakeup Time
Spare Output 5 assigned from the Guarded If YES
Fresh Air Exchange Output Access > Main Menu Day to Wake Up
Fresh Air Exchange Feedback Configuration Menu. Choices Hour to Wake Up
Diesel/Electric Relay (50 only) available are Sensors, Gauges, Minutes to Wake Up
Electric Ready Input (50 Only) Pretrip, Datalogger, SOT and Open/Close Fresh Air Vent
Electric Overload (50 only) Hourmeters. Default setting Electric Standby or Diesel Mode
Hot Gas Bypass (ETV only) shown. Adjust Brightness
High – Medium – Low – Off
Time
Time/Date (Display Only)
Clear All ECU Faults
may appear
3-14
01 December 2012
MAIN MENU FEATURES

The Main menu allows the operator to check other unit conditions, change operating modes and perform other
operator functions. The Main menu is accessed from the Standard Display by means of the Menu soft key. The
sub-menus show below may be available. For additional details see Section 4 of this manual.
Pretrip
A Pretrip Test is used to confirm unit operation. This menu allows a Pretrip Test to be initiated by the operator.
If the test is started with the engine or motor off a full test including the non-running amp checks and the running
performance tests are performed. If the test is started with the engine or motor running only the running tests are
performed. Test results are reported as PASS, CHECK or FAIL. See Section 4 for details.
Flash Drive
If a USB Flash Drive is connected to the Control Panel USB Flash Drive Port, this menu item allows the operator
to select the desired Flash Drive function.
IMPORTANT: The Flash Drive must be properly configured and the desired features must be enabled using the
ThermoServ Service Tool.
Using a properly configured and enabled flash drive, the following functions may be available:
 Send OptiSet Plus Files
 Retrieve OptiSet Plus Files
For Flash Drive details see the ThermoServ Service Tool documentation.
Language
If more than one language is enabled, this menu item allows the operator to select a language from a list of 11
languages at one time. All subsequent displays are shown in the selected language. Any or all languages may
be enabled. English is the default language. See Section 4 for details.
3-15
01 December 2012
Alarms
The Alarms display allows the operator to display any existing alarms. The operator can also clear most alarms
from this menu
A simplified list of Alarm Codes is presented in Section 4 of this manual. A list of Alarm Codes including
diagnostic procedures for each code is presented in Section 5 of this manual.
NOTE: Some alarms are clearable in Guarded Access only. Alarms with this feature will not
provide a soft key “Clear” function. See Section 4 for additional details.
NOTE: Engine Control Unit faults can be cleared from the Main Menu > Clear All ECU Faults
Menu. The actual ECU Fault Codes can be viewed cleared using the Yanmar Smart Assist Direct
Tool.
Gauges
The Gauges menu allows the operator to display operating information such as coolant level and temperature,
engine RPM, battery amps, battery volts, and suction and discharge pressure. The I/O selection under Gauges
indicates the named outputs as either On or Off. Gauges can also be viewed from other menus such as the
Service Test Mode and Interface Board Test Mode displays. See Section 4 for details.
NOTE: This menu contains the same information as the Standard Display Gauge Soft Key Menu.
Sensors
The Sensors menu allows the operator to display the reading of all unit temperature sensors as well as the
calculated temperature differential. CargoWatch Data Logger sensors can also be displayed. See Section 4 for
details.
NOTE: This menu contains the same information as the Standard Display Sensors Soft Key
Menu.
3-16
01 December 2012
Data Logger
This menu allows the operator to send a Start of Trip marker to the ServiceWatch and CargoWatch Data
Loggers. It can also be used to print the contents of the CargoWatch Data Logger.
The unit can also be programmed such that every time the setpoint is changed a Start of Trip Marker is sent to
the ServiceWatch and CargoWatch Data Loggers.
ServiceWatch and CargoWatch information can be downloaded and viewed by connecting a PC computer
loaded with the ThermoServ Service Tool software.
ServiceWatch and CargoWatch information can also be downloaded by connecting a properly configured and
enabled Universal Flash Drive to the USB Flash Drive Connector on the unit Control Panel. The Flash Drive is
then connected to a PC computer loaded with the ThermoServ Service Tool software to save and view the
information. For Flash Drive details see the ThermoServ Service Tool documentation.
Hourmeters
The Hourmeters menu allows the operator to view the unit hourmeters that have the view feature enabled in the
Guarded Access menu. If the view feature for a particular hourmeter is not enabled then that hourmeter cannot
be viewed from the Main Menu. See Section 4 for details.
NOTE: All active hourmeters are available for viewing in the Maintenance Menu.
Mode
The Mode menu allows the operator to change the unit operating modes if allowed. Not all modes may appear
depending on the settings selected from the Guarded Access menu. See Section 4 for details.
 Turn Off Cycle Sentry Mode/Turn On Cycle Sentry Mode (If Cycle Sentry Mode is turned Off then the
unit runs in Continuous Mode).
 Select temperature displays in either degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius (if enabled).
 Allow Keypad Lockout to be selected (if enabled).
 Start Sleep Mode (if enabled).
 Open or close the optional Fresh Air Exchange vent (if feature is installed and enabled).
 Auto Keypad Lock Time and PIN Number.
3-17
01 December 2012
Electric Standby (Model 50 units only)

If the Electric Standby option is present and the Diesel to Electric Auto-switch feature is set NO, this feature
allows the operator to manually select electric mode operation. This feature does not appear if the unit does not
have the optional Electric Standby or if the Diesel to Electric Auto-switch feature is set YES. See Section 4 for
details.
Diesel Mode (Model 50 units only)

If a unit equipped with electric standby is running in electric mode and the Electric to Diesel Auto-switch feature
is set NO, this feature allows the operator to manually select diesel mode operation. This feature does not
appear if the unit does not have optional Electric Standby or if the Electric to Diesel Auto-switch feature is set
YES. See Section 4 for details.
Note: Auto-switch from electric to diesel is not recommended when the unit is running in electric mode
indoors or when on board a ferry.
Adjust Brightness
This menu allows the operator to adjust the HMI Control Panel display backlight intensity as required by local
conditions. If desired, the backlight can also be turned off. See Section 4 for details.
View Time
This menu allows the operator to view the unit time and date. The time and date cannot be changed from this
menu. The time and date is loaded from the HMI Control Panel to the Base Controller each time the unit is
turned on. See Section 4 for details.
Clear All ECU Fault Codes

Pressing this key will clear all existing ECU Faults. This may allow continued unit operation should an ECU fault
code result in engine shutdown. See Section 4 for details.
 Any Thermo King Alarm Codes associated with the Engine Control Unit (ECU) Fault Codes will also be
cleared.
 The Thermo King Alarm Codes and Engine Control Unit (ECU) Fault Codes that were cleared can be
viewed in the ServiceWatch and ECU Data Loggers.
3-18
01 December 2012
MAINTENANCE MENU FLOWCHART

SR-4 Precedent Trailer S/T Maintenance Menu - 8035 b206 & 7A00 b642 1 of 2
Maintenance Menu Maintenance Menu

1 of 3 2 of 3
Hourmeters - View and Reset Time Sensors

Total Hours Control Return Air Temperature
Total Run Time Hours Display Return Air Temperature
Engine Hours Control Discharge Air Temperature
Electric Run Hours Display Discharge Air Temperature
Total Run Time Reminder #1 Hours Temperature Differential
Total Run Time Reminder #2 Hours Evaporator Coil Temperature
Controller Power On Hours Ambient Air Temperature
Pretrip Reminder Hours Spare 1 Temperature
Engine Run Time Reminder #1 Hours Log Sensor 1
Electric Run Time Reminder #1 Hours Datalogger Sensor 3 Temperature
Datalogger Sensor 5 Temperature
Gauges Datalogger Sensor 6 Temperature
Coolant Temperature Board Temperature Sensor
Coolant Level
Engine Oil Pressure Alarms
Engine Oil Level Display all alarms
Amps Clear most alarms
Battery Voltage
Accessory Battery Voltage Service Test
Engine RPM Test with Unit Running? (Yes – No)
Fuel Level Sensor Off
Discharge Pressure Null
Suction Pressure High Speed Cool
ETV Position Low Speed Cool
Fresh Air Exchange Low Speed Heat
I/O (Input/Output State) High Speed Heat
High Speed Relay Defrost
Run Relay Cool Bypass
Run Relay Feedback Mod Cool /HGB
Alternator Excite Output Modulation Cool
Defrost Damper Modulation Heat
Heat Output Condenser Road Fan
Motor RPM Condenser Curb Fan
Spare Digital Input 1 Evaporator Fan Low Spd
Spare Digital Input 2 Evaporator Fan High Spd
Spare Digital Input 3
Spare Digital Input 4 Output Test
Spare Analog Input 1 Preheat Relay
Spare Analog Input 2 Evap Fan Low Speed
Spare Output 1 Evap Fan High Speed
Spare Output 2 Condenser Roadside
Spare Output 3 Condenser Curbside
Spare Output 4 Buzzer
Spare Output 5 Run Relay
Fresh Air Exchange Output Pilot Solenoid Valve
Fresh Air Exchange Feedback Indicator Light
Diesel/Electric Relay (50 only) Diesel/Electric Relay
Electric Ready Input (50 Only) High Speed Relay
Electric Overload (50 only) Hot Gas Bypass Valve
Hot Gas Bypass (ETV only) Alternator Excite Output

may appear Rev 8035 and 7A00 Precedent S/T 30 October 2012
3-19
01 December 2012
Maintenance Menu
3 of 3
Display Self Test

LCD Test
Keypad Test
Backlight Test
Brightness Test
Buzzer Test
Heater Output
Serial E2
Datalog Flash
RTC Update
Evacuation Test
Connect Battery Charger
Software Revision
Display Software Rev
Controller Software Rev
Supervisor Software Revision
Set Time and Date

Hour
Minutes
Date
Month
Year
Time Zone
Eastern, Central, Mountain, Pacific
Connect Engine Service Tool

may appear
3-20
01 December 2012
MAINTENANCE MENU FEATURES

The Thermo King SR-4 control system features many special technician functions. These functions are available
from the Maintenance Menu. A brief explanation of each menu is included here.
For complete details see Section 4 of this manual.
Accessing the Maintenance Menu

The Maintenance Menu is accessible from the Main Menu. From the Standard Display press the MENU Soft
Key. The controller will display the Main Menu. From the first Main Menu display press and hold both the EXIT
Soft Key and the Soft Key with no label above it (the first and third Soft Keys) for 5 seconds. After 5 seconds the
Maintenance Menu will appear.
Hourmeters
The Hourmeters Menu allows the technician to view all the active unit hourmeters, even if the Main Menu view
has been disabled. The Maintenance Menu Hourmeter Display also allows the technician to reset the time on
hourmeters with a programmed time limit.
Gauges
The Gauges Menu allows the technician to display operating information such as coolant level and temperature,
engine RPM, battery amps, battery volts, and suction and discharge pressure. The I/O selection under Gauges
indicates the named outputs as either On or Off. Some Gauges can also be viewed from the Service Test Mode
and Interface Board Test Mode displays.
NOTE: This menu contains the same information as the Standard Display Soft Key Menu and Main
Menu > Gauge Menu.
3-21
01 December 2012
Sensors
The Sensors Menu allows the technician to display the reading of all unit temperature sensors as well as the
calculated temperature differential. CargoWatch Data Logger sensors can also be displayed.
NOTE: This menu contains the same information as the Standard Display Soft Key Menu and Main
Menu > Gauge Menu.
Alarms
The Alarms Menu allows the technician to display any existing alarms. The technician can also clear most
alarms from this menu.
A simplified list of Alarm Codes with driver information is presented in Section 4 of this manual. A complete list
of Alarm Codes including diagnostic procedures for each code is presented in Section 5 of this manual.
NOTE: Some alarms are clearable in Guarded Access only. These alarms will not provide a Clear Soft Key if
displayed from the Main Menu or Maintenance Menu. See Section 4 for additional details
Service Test Mode

Since the complexity of the control software makes it impossible to predict exact operating conditions, a
troubleshooting feature called Service Test Mode has been incorporated. The Service Test Menu allows the unit
to be forced to a known set of operating conditions in diesel or electric mode, regardless of setpoint or
temperature sensor inputs. Service personnel can use this mode to troubleshoot the system under defined
operating conditions. Service Test Mode can be used with the unit running or non-running. Any Shutdown
Alarms that are present must be cleared before Service Test Mode is available. See Section 4 for complete
details.
3-22
01 December 2012
Output Test Mode

The Output Test Mode Menu allows individual relays or outputs to be energized. This permits service personnel
to troubleshoot individual circuits under known conditions. Output Test Mode can only be used with the unit in a
non-running condition. If Output Test Mode is entered with the diesel engine or electric motor running the engine
or motor will be turned off. Any shutdown alarms that are present must be cleared before Output Test Mode is
available. See Section 4 for complete details.
Display Self Test

The Display Self Test Menu allows the technician to perform a series of built in tests on the HMI Control Panel.
Evacuation Test
The Evacuation Test Menu allows a full system evacuation to be performed. All normally closed valves are
opened to allow the entire system to be completely evacuated before charging with refrigerant. If present, the
ETV will be fully opened. If the battery voltage falls below acceptable limits, the operator is prompted to connect
a battery charger to maintain sufficient battery voltage to hold all necessary valves open during the procedure. If
the voltage from the battery charger rises above acceptable limits, the controller will be turned off to prevent
damage to the electronics and/or system components.
Software Revision
The Software Revision Menu displays the software revision of the HMI Control Panel software, Base Controller
software and the Supervisor software.
Set Time and Date

The Set Time and Date Menu allows the system time and date to be checked and set as required. The time and
date is loaded from the HMI Control Panel to the Base Controller each time the unit is turned on.
Time Zone
The Time Zone Menu allows the time zone to be checked and set as required for the Eastern, Central, Mountain
or Pacific Time Zone as specified by the user.
3-23
01 December 2012

The Connect Engine Service Tool feature allows the unit to be powered down but maintains power to the Engine
Control Unit (ECU) for diagnostic purposes. This allows the Yanmar Smart Assist Direct (YSAD) Diagnostic Tool
to be connected to the Yanmar Engine Control Unit without having the rest of the unit powered up.
3-24
01 December 2012
GUARDED ACCESS MENU FLOWCHART

SR-4 Precedent Trailer S/T G/A Menu 8035 b206 & 7A00 b642 1 of 2
Guarded Access Menu Guarded Access Menu

1 of 4 2 of 4
Security Code (if enabled) Hourmeter Setup

Enter Access Code Program Hourmeter
Total Run Time Reminder #1 Hours (Off)
Programmable Features Total Run Time Reminder #2 Hours (Off)
Temperature Units (F, C) Controller Power On Hours (Off)
Pressure Units (PSIG, kPA, BARS) Pretrip Reminder Hours (Off)
Restart Unit After Shutdown (Enabled) Engine Run Time Reminder #1 Hours (Off)
Setpoint High Limit (80°F, Max 90°F) Engine Run Time Reminder #2 Hours (Off)
Setpoint Low Limit (-20°F, Max -30°F) Electric Run Time Reminder #1 Hours (Off)
Fuel Saver II (Enabled) Electric Run Time Reminder #2 Hours (Off)
High Speed Pulldown (Enabled) Viewable Hourmeter Setup
Fresh Frozen Range (15°F, 24°F) Total Hours (Disabled)
Door Open Forces (Log Only, Null, Null No Alarm) Total Run Time Hours (Enabled)
Door Open Timeout (HRS:MIN) Engine Hours (Enabled)
Sleep Mode After Pretrip (Disabled) Electric Run Hours (Enabled)
Rail Option (Disabled) Total Run Time Reminder #1 Hours (Disabled)
Rail Alternate (Disabled) Total Run Time Reminder #2 Hours (Disabled)
Blocked Air Chute Detect (Disabled) Controller Power On Hours (Disabled)
Temperature Differential (9.9°, 1-20° x 0.1°) Pretrip Reminder Hours (Disabled)
Time to Alarm (30M, 5-120M x 1M) Engine Run Time Rem #1 Hours (Disabled)
Door Open Override (Enabled) Engine Run Time Rem #2 Hours (Disabled)
Discharge Pressure Setpoint (415 PSI, 380-440 x 1) Electric Run Time Rem #1 Hours (Disabled)
Coolant Temperature Setpoint (210°F, 180-210° x 1) Electric Run Time Rem #2 Hours (Disabled)
Limited Alarm Restarts (Disabled) Program Service Due Date
Remote Device (Disabled) Engine Run Time Service Due Date (Disabled)
COM 1 Default Baud Rate (1200, 1200-115,200)
COM 2 Default Baud Rate (9600, 1200-115,200) Sensor Calibration
COM 3 Default Baud Rate (9600, 1200-115,200) Control Return Air Sensor Grade (5H, 1L - 9H)
Extended ServiceWatch Logging (Disabled) Control Discharge Air Sensor Grade (5H, 1L - 9H)
High Temperature Defrost (Disabled) Display Return Air Sensor Grade (5H, 1L - 9H)
Local Auth of OS+ Upload (Disabled) Display Discharge AIr Sensor Grade (5H, 1L - 9H)
Local Auth of Flash Load (Disabled) Spare 1 Sensor Grade (5H, 1L - 9H)
Service Watch Logging Intervals (15 minutes)
Cycle Sentry Setup
Main Menu Configuration Cycle Sentry Amps Level (5 A, 2-8 A)
Add Keypad Lockout to Mode Menu (Disabled) Battery Sentry Voltage Level (12.2 V, 11.8-12.6 V)
Add Sleep to Mode Menu (Disabled) Check Battery Condition Alarm (Disabled)
Config Soft Key 2 on Standard Display (Gauges)
Config Soft Key 3 on Standard Display (Sensors) Defrost Setup
Add Temperature Units to Mode Menu (Disabled) Def Interval In Range w Fresh S/P (6 Hr, 2-12)
Auto Keypad Lck Time Def Interval Not In Range w Fresh S/P (4 Hr, 2-12)
Auto Keypad Lck Pin Num Def Interval In Range w Frozen S/P (6 Hr, 2-12)
Def Interval Not In Range w Frozen S/P (4 Hr, 2-12)
Alarms Maximum Defrost Duration (30 Min, 45 Min)
Display all alarms
Clear most alarms

may appear
3-25
01 December 2012

3 of 4 4 of 4
Language Setup Unit Configuration
English (Enabled) Unit Model (C-600)
Spanish (Disabled) High Capacity Unit (No)
French (Disabled) Engine Type (TK486V25)
German (Disabled) Compressor Type (Recip)
Italian (Disabled) ETV Configured (Yes)
Dutch (Disabled) Battery Charger (None, 30 Amp, 120 Amp)
Portuguese (Disabled) Electric Standby Equipped? (Yes)
Greek (Disabled) Electric Motor Type (12 HP Type, 19 HP Type)
Turkish (Disabled) Electric Heat Option (Yes)
Hebrew (Disabled) Diesel to Electric Autoswitch Enabled? (No)
Arabic (Disabled) Electric to Diesel Autoswitch Enabled? (No)
Humidity Sensor (Disabled)
Access Code Setup Fuel Level Sensor Type (None, SS, Float, Sw)
Enter Access Code Rear Remote Control (None, COM 2)
3rd Party Device Control (None, COM 1, COM 2)
OptiSet Plus REB Type Configured (None, See Section 3)
OptiSet Plus Reset Fresh Air Exchange (Disabled)
Temperature Profile Selection ( Numeric Setpoint)
Sensor Configuration (CargoWatch)

SOT on Setpoint (Disabled)
Automatic SOT at Midnight (Disabled)
Logging Interval (15 Min, 1, 2, 5-60Min)
Log Sensor 1(On)
Independant Sensor #1 Name (Log Sensor 1)
Out of Range Checking (Off)
Low (-10.8°F, -1°F -20°F)
High (10.8°F, 1°F – 20°F)
Italian Option - Available with Sensor 1 only (Off)
Sensor Averaging (Off)
Log Sensor 2 (On)
Independent Sensor #1 Name (Log Sensor 2)
Low (-10.8°F, -1°F -20°F)
High (10.8°F, 1°F – 20°F)
Log Sensor 3 (Off) Same features as Sensor 2 if On
Digital In 1 (On)
Door Open Logging (On)
Digital Input #1 Name (Digital Input #1) Not all menu features
Digital In 2 (Off) Same as Digital Input 1 if On
may appear
Countdown Timer (Off)
Conservative Log Count (Off)
SOT at Midnight (Disabled)
3-26
01 December 2012
GUARDED ACCESS MENU FEATURES
The Guarded Access Menu allows the programmable unit features to be configured to user requirements.
Security Code Protection

A security code can be set to restrict access to the Guarded Access Menu. If a security code is set the
technician will be prompted to enter the correct code when accessing the Guarded Access Menu. The security
code is defaulted to No Code.
Bypassing the Security Code

If a Security Code is set and the Guarded Access Menu must be accessed, the Security Code can be bypassed
by entering “4444”.
Entering the Guarded Access Menu

The unit must be turned on but not running. If the unit is running do one of the following:
 If the unit is running turn the unit Off and back On. Before the unit starts enter the Guarded Access
Menu starting at Step 1 below.
 If the unit is running, enter the Maintenance Menu. Scroll to and enter the Output Menu. When the
Output Menu is entered the unit will shut down. Exit the Output Menu and scroll to the Maintenance
Menu > Time Zone Menu. Before the unit starts enter the Guarded Access Menu starting at Step 4
below.
1. From the Standard Display press the MENU Soft Key. The controller will display the Main Menu.
2. From the first Main Menu display press and hold both the EXIT Soft Key and the Soft Key with no label
above it (the first and third Soft Keys) for 5 seconds. After 5 seconds the controller will display the
Maintenance Menu.
3. From the Maintenance Menu press the DOWN Soft Key until the Time Zone Menu appears.
4. From the Time Zone Menu press and hold both the EXIT Soft Key and the Soft Key with no label above
it (the first and last Soft Keys) for 5 seconds.
3-27
01 December 2012
5. After 5 seconds the controller will display either a Security Code challenge or the Guarded Access Menu.
If a Security Code has been set the operator is prompted to enter the correct code using the “+” and “-“
keys. When the correct code is set press the YES key to enter the Guarded Access Menu. If the correct
Security Code is not entered access to the Guarded Access Menu will be denied.
If no Security Code has been set the controller will enter the Guarded Access Menu directly.
Bypassing the Security Code

If a Security Code is set and the Guarded Access Menu must be accessed, the Security Code can be bypassed
by entering “4444”.
Leaving the Guarded Access Menu

When leaving the Guarded Access Menu the base controller will automatically turn the controller off and then
restart the controller in order to configure the changes that may have been made. This power cycle is termed a
controller “warm restart”.
3-28
01 December 2012
PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES MENU

The Programmable Features Menu allows overall unit operation to be configured to specific end user
requirements. These features are set to factory defaults when shipped, but can easily be changed to suit the end
user’s needs. Programmable features are designed to allow the user to customize some unit operating
parameters without using OptiSet Plus
IMPORTANT
If a feature has been programmed in OptiSet Plus, the HMI will display “programmed in OptiSet Plus”,
and the feature cannot be updated from this menu.
Temperature Units
Control Rev 8035 and later
HMI Rev 7A00 and later
Choices FAHRENHEIT or CELSIUS
Factory Set FAHRENHEIT
Exceptions The setting selected is used for all ranges.
Description The controller can be set to display temperatures in either degrees FAHRENHEIT or degrees
CELSIUS.
Pressure Units
Choices PSIG, KPa or BARS
Factory Set PSI
Exceptions
Description The controller can be set to display system refrigerant pressures in PSIG, kPa or BARS.
3-29
01 December 2012
Restart Unit After Shutdown

Choices ENABLED, DISABLED, or CONTINUOUS
Factory Set ENABLED
Exceptions Use the CONTINUOUS option for rail applications only.
Description Standard restart alarms become permanent shutdown alarms after several attempts to start and
run. The CONTINUOUS feature is designed for rail applications where the unit runs unattended or is
inaccessible for service. It allows unlimited restart attempts to be made if the following restart alarms occur.
 Alarm Code 10 High Discharge Pressure
 Alarm Code 18 High Engine Coolant Temp
 Alarm Code 63 Engine Stopped
 Alarm Code 82 High Compressor Temp
If restarts are disabled, the unit will shut down on the first alarm event. The following differences exist between
a Standard Restart and a Continuous Restart alarm:
 Standard Restart alarms force a permanent shutdown if the alarm occurs a pre-determined number of
times (usually 3). Continuous Restart alarms allow an unlimited number of restarts for the four alarm
codes listed above.
 Standard Restart alarms typically use a 15 minute timer before a restart is allowed. Continuous Restart
alarms use a 1-hour timer before a restart is allowed.
 With Continuous Restart alarms ETV Head Pressure Setpoint is lowered based on the alarm type and
number of occurrences.
3-30
01 December 2012
Setpoint High Limit

Choices Maximum is 90°F (32°C)
Minimum is Setpoint Low Limit
Factory Set 80°F (27°C)
Exceptions If OptiSet Plus is active the HMI Control Panel will display [Programmed in OptiSet Plus] and
this feature cannot be changed from the Guarded Access Menu. The Setpoint High Limit setting selected is
used for all ranges.
Description Setpoint High Limit allows the upper setpoint limit to be set to a maximum of 90°F (32°C) in
one degree increments. The minimum setting is determined by the setting of Setpoint Low Limit. If the driver
attempts to select a setpoint higher than the Setpoint High Limit, the display will show Setpoint Limit, indicating
that the selected Setpoint High Limit has been reached. Setting Setpoint High Limit and Setpoint Low Limit to
the same temperature results in a single setpoint temperature available.
Setpoint Low Limit

Choices Minimum is -30°F (-34°C)
Maximum is Setpoint High Limit
Factory Set -20°F (-29°C)
this feature cannot be changed from the Guarded Access Menu. The Setpoint Low Limit setting selected is
used for all ranges.
Description Setpoint Low Limit allows the lower setpoint limit to be set to a minimum of -30°F
(-34°C) in one degree increments. The maximum setting is determined by the setting of Setpoint High Limit. If
the driver attempts to select a setpoint lower than the Setpoint Low Limit, the display will show Setpoint Limit,
indicating that the selected Setpoint Low Limit has been reached. Setting Setpoint High Limit and Setpoint Low
Limit to the same temperature results in a single setpoint temperature available.
Setpoint temperatures lower than -25°F (-32°C) should only be used when absolutely required by the load.
3-31
01 December 2012
Fuel Saver II
Choices ENABLED or DISABLED
Factory Set ENABLED
this feature cannot be changed from the Guarded Access Menu.
Description If Fuel Saver II is ENABLED, and the box temperature changes a predetermined amount from
setpoint in Cycle Sentry mode operation, or if the box temperature indicates a need for high speed in
Continuous mode operation, the unit will first run in low speed. An 8-minute timer is started and the control
sensor air temperature is monitored. As long as the temperature falls (in cool mode operation) or rises (in heat
mode operation) a specified amount before the timer expires, the 8-minute timer is reset and low speed
operation continues. If the temperature has not changed the pre-determined amount when the timer times out,
high speed operation is resumed if allowed. This provides fuel savings by delaying high speed operation, yet
assures that the temperature continues to fall or rise as required to reach setpoint.
If the unit switches to high speed from FS-II, the unit will run in high speed until setpoint is reached. If FS-II is
DISABLED, high speed cool and high speed heat are allowed with no delay.
The FS-II feature does not apply to modulation operation.
3-32
01 December 2012
High Speed Pulldown

Factory Set ENABLED
this feature cannot be changed from the Guarded Access Menu.
Description This feature allows High Speed Pull Down for the selected range to be ENABLED or
DISABLED. If High Speed Pull Down is ENABLED, the unit will run in high speed on initial start until setpoint is
reached in both cool and heat mode. If High Speed Pull Down is DISABLED, the unit will switch to low speed
cool when the return air temperature is below low speed switch point value plus setpoint.
NOTE: There is a two minute delay on initial startup before high speed operation is allowed.
If Fuel Saver II is ENABLED, there may be a delay before high speed operation is allowed.
This feature does not apply to modulation operation.
3-33
01 December 2012
Fresh Frozen Range

Choices 24°F (-4°C) or 15°F (-9°C)
Factory Set 15°F (-9°C)
this feature cannot be changed from the Guarded Access Menu. The setting selected is used for all ranges.
Description One set of general control specifications is used when operating in the Fresh range, and
another set of general operating specifications is used when operating in the Frozen range. This feature allows
the line between Fresh and Frozen ranges to be selected as either 15°F (-9°C) or 24°F (-4°C). All setpoints less
than or equal to this value will be treated as frozen ranges. All setpoints greater than this value will be treated
as Fresh ranges.
The Frozen setpoint range is from the limit of the Setpoint Limit Low setting to the Fresh Frozen range setting.
The Fresh setpoint range is from the limit of the Fresh Frozen range + 1 degree to the setpoint high limit setting.
When programming OptiSet Plus, no range may include both Frozen and Fresh range setpoints. This value is
the high value of the last frozen range programmed. The next range programmed will start at this value + 1-
degree depending on the selection made above. Changing this feature will reset all OptiSet Plus range values
to default.
3-34
01 December 2012
Door Open Forces

Choices LOG ONLY, UNIT NULL or UNIT NULL – NO ALARM
Factory Set LOG ONLY
this feature cannot be changed from the Guarded Access Menu. The optional door switch must be installed.
Description This feature allows the Door Open action to be set. If this feature is set LOG ONLY the door
opening will be logged after 4 seconds but the unit will continue to run. Door openings are logged in both the
CargoWatch and ServiceWatch data loggers. The door switch must be open or closed for 4 seconds before the
event is logged to prevent false readings.
If this feature is set UNIT NULL the base controller shuts the unit down and logs the door opening 4 seconds
after the door is opened. If the unit is in defrost when the door is opened, the defrost cycle will be completed
before the unit shuts down. If the Door Open Timeout feature has been set for a door open time, the unit will
restart and run if the time specified by Door Open Timeout is exceeded. The unit will continue to run even if the
door is still open. The event is logged in both the CargoWatch and ServiceWatch data loggers.
If this feature is set UNIT NULL – NO ALARM unit operation is the same as UNIT NULL above, but Alarm Code
108 Door Open Timeout is not set.
3-35
01 December 2012
Door Open Timeout

Choices 1:00 to 4:00 (Hours) in 10 Min Increments or OFF
Factory Set OFF
this feature cannot be changed from the Guarded Access Menu. The optional door switch must be installed.
Only appears if the DOOR OPEN FORCES feature is set to UNIT NULL or UNIT NULL – NO ALARM.
Description This feature allows the unit to restart if the door open time exceeds the set limit.
Door Open Timeout can be set to OFF or for a time limit from 1 to 4 hours, in 10-minute increments. If set to
OFF the unit will remain off until the door is closed. If the Door Open Timeout feature has been set for a door
open time, the unit will restart and run and Alarm Code 108 Door Open Timeout will be set as a Check Alarm if
the time specified by Door Open Timeout is exceeded. The unit will continue to run even if the door is still
open. The event is logged in both the CargoWatch and ServiceWatch data loggers.
Sleep Mode After Pretrip

Factory Set DISABLED
Exceptions
Description If the feature is set ENABLED, the unit will enter Sleep Mode after a Pretrip Test. If the feature
is set DISABLED, the unit will not enter Sleep Mode after a Pretrip Test.
3-36
01 December 2012
Rail Option
Exceptions The optional fuel level switch must be installed in order to use the Fuel Conserve Mode feature.
Description If the unit is a rail application, this feature is ENABLED. When the optional customer fuel level
switch closes (supplies chassis ground to the base controller fuel level input), the unit will enter a Fuel Conserve
Mode where the unit is forced to low speed operation only.
If the unit is not a rail application this feature should be DISABLED.
IMPORTANT: If RAIL OPTION is ENABLED, the fuel level switch will cause the unit to enter a full conserve
mode only. The Low Fuel Shutdown Feature is not available if RAIL OPTION is ENABLED.
Rail Alternate
Exceptions Only available if RAIL OPTION is ENABLED.
Description This feature changes the alerts criteria, defrost allowed temperature and defrost termination
temperature. It should only be used when specified by the customer. If rail alternate is enabled a defrost cycle
is allowed with an evaporator coil temperature less than or equal to 55 °F (13°C) and terminates at 70°F (21°C).
3-37
01 December 2012
Blocked Air Chute Detect

Exceptions The optional Spare Sensor 1 must be installed.
Description The Air Chute Detect feature is designed to detect a blocked or improperly installed trailer air
chute. Spare sensor 1 is located at the rear of the trailer and directly in the air flow at the end of the chute. The
temperature detected by this sensor is compared to the temperature detected by the control discharge air
temperature sensor. This feature functions only during cool mode operation.
If this temperature differential exceeds a user defined number of degrees for a user defined period of time,
Alarm Code 46 CHECK AIR FLOW is generated as a check alarm. If the trailer is equipped with a door switch
and the feature is enabled, monitoring ceases when the door is opened and is resumed 45 minutes after the
door is closed. When the unit enters a defrost cycle, monitoring ceases and is resumed 45 minutes after the
defrost cycle terminates. Should the control discharge temperature sensor or Spare sensor 1 fail the Air Chute
Detect feature is disabled.
Temperature Differential
Choices 1°F to 20°F in 0.1°F increments
1°C to 10°C in 0.1°C increments
Factory Set 9.9°F (5.5°C)
Exceptions Only available if BLOCKED AIR CHUTE DETECT is ENABLED.
Description This feature selects the temperature differential, from the front to the back of the trailer that
must be exceeded to cause an alarm to occur. The temperature differential is calculated using the control
discharge air sensor and spare sensor 1. This temperature differential must exist for the time specified by
TIME TO ALARM below in order to set Alarm Code 46 Check Air Flow.
3-38
01 December 2012
Time to Alarm
Choices 5 to 120 minutes in 1-minute
increments
Factory Set 30 minutes
Description This feature selects the time interval that must be exceeded to cause Alarm Code 46 CHECK
AIR FLOW to occur. This condition must exist with a temperature differential, in excess of that specified by
TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL above, in order to set Alarm Code 46 Check Air Flow.
Door Open Override

Factory Set ENABLED
Description This feature determines if a door switch should interrupt the operation of the BLOCKED AIR
CHUTE DETECT feature. If set ENABLED, then monitoring ceases when the door is opened and is resumed
45 minutes after the door is closed. If set DISABLED, monitoring is not interrupted when a door opens.
3-39
01 December 2012
Discharge Pressure Setpoint

Choices 380 to 440 PSIG
Factory Set 415 PSIG
Exceptions Only on ETV equipped units.
Description This feature allows the head pressure setpoint to be adjusted. This pressure determines when
the base controller will enter a temporary operating mode to prevent unit shutdown. Do not change this setting
unless instructed to do so.
Coolant Temperature Setpoint

Choices 180°F to 210°F (82°C to 99°C)
Factory Set 210°F (99°C)
Exceptions Only on ETV equipped units.
Description This feature allows the water temperature setpoint to be adjusted. This temperature
determines when the base controller will enter a temporary operating mode to prevent unit shutdown. Do not
change this setting unless instructed to do so.
3-40
01 December 2012
Limited Alarm Resets

Exceptions Does not appear unless rail is disabled and restarts are enabled.
Description This feature modifies the ability to repeatedly clear certain alarms from the Main menu or
Operators menu. If these alarms occur repeatedly, they may indicate a need for service to prevent unit or
product damage. These alarms are as follows:
 Alarm Code 23 Cooling Cycle Fault
 Alarm Code 24 Heating Cycle Fault
 Alarm Code 32 Refrigeration Capacity Low
 Alarm Code 82 High Comp Discharge Temp
Setting this feature to ENABLED will allow the above alarms to be cleared conventionally 2 times in a
continuous 12 hour period. If any of these alarms are cleared more than 2 times in 12 hours, all subsequent
occurrences can only be cleared from the Guarded Access Menu. This helps ensure that the alarms receive the
attention of service personnel. The 12 hour timer is reset when any of the above alarms is cleared from the
Guarded Access Menu. The 12 hour timer is not reset with a unit or controller power-down.
Setting this feature DISABLED will allow the above alarms to be cleared conventionally an unlimited number of
times.
3-41
01 December 2012
Remote Device
Exceptions Requires optional device – see below.
Description
Setting this feature to ENABLED allows an external device, such as TracKing, to start and stop a properly
equipped unit. Setting this feature to DISABLED prevents this control.
IMPORTANT: The Remote Device feature should be set DISABLED before working on the unit if the unit is
equipped with a device that allows it to be started and stopped from a remote location.
HMI Control Panel COM 1 Default Baud Rate

Choices 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 BPS
Factory Set 1200
Exceptions
Description This feature allows the default baud rate to be selected for the HMI Control Panel COM Port 1.
COM Port 1 is used by Wintrac. The setting of this feature should not be changed.
3-42
01 December 2012

Choices 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 BPS
Factory Set 9600
Exceptions
Description This feature allows the default baud rate to be selected for the HMI Control Panel COM Port 2.
COM Port 2 is used by the CargoWatch printer. If a customer has a mixed fleet with both SR-2/SR-4 and P-IV
M/T controllers with DAS, the baud rate for COM 2 should be set to 2400. This will allow printing from both the
SR-2/SR-4 and P-IV controllers without changing the printer baud rate. Note that the printer baud rate must be
set to match the baud rate setting of the Com 2 Port.

Choices 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 BPS
Factory Set 9600
Exceptions
Description This feature allows the default baud rate to be selected for the HMI Control Panel COM port 3.
COM port 3 is currently used by R:COM or other telematics devices. The setting of this feature should not be
changed.
3-43
01 December 2012
Extended ServiceWatch™ Logging

Exceptions Multi-Temperature applications only
Description If set ENABLED, this feature will cause all Multi-temperature zone mode changes to be logged
by the ServiceWatch Data Logger. If set DISABLED, zone mode changes will not be logged.
High Temperature Defrost

Exceptions
Description This feature changes the defrost allowed temperature and defrost termination temperature. It
should only be used when specified by the customer. If High Temperature Defrost is enabled a defrost cycle is
allowed with an evaporator coil temperature less than or equal to 55 °F (13°C) and terminates at 70°F (21°C).
IMPORTANT: Unlike the Rail Alternate feature, the Low Fuel Shutdown feature is available when High
Temperature Defrost is set ENABLED and a float or solid state fuel level sensor is installed.
Local Authorization of OptiSet Plus Flash Load

Exceptions Radio Expansion Board (REB) must be enabled.
Description This feature determines if an over the air OptiSet Plus upload requires authorization from the
HMI Control Panel. If this feature is set ENABLED, an authorization request will be shown on the HMI and must
be approved before the OptiSet Plus upload can proceed. If this feature is set DISABLED no local authorization
is required to perform an OptiSet Plus upload.
3-44
01 December 2012
Local Authorization of Flash Load

Exceptions Radio Expansion Board (REB) must be enabled.
Description This feature determines if an over the air flash load requires authorization from the HMI Control
Panel. If this feature is set ENABLED, an authorization request will be shown on the HMI and must be
approved before the flash load can proceed. If this feature is set DISABLED no local authorization is required
to perform a flash load.
ServiceWatch™ Logging Intervals

Choices 1-60 Minutes, 2 Hours, 4 Hours
Factory Set 15 Minutes
Exceptions
Description This feature allows the logging interval of the ServiceWatch Data Logger to be set from 1
minute to 4 hours.
3-45
01 December 2012
MAIN MENU CONFIGURATION MENU

The Main Menu Configuration Menu determines features will appear in the Main Menu > Mode Menu. These
features are set to factory defaults when shipped, but can easily be changed to suit the end user’s needs. The
default settings for all features except Cycle Sentry/Continuous are set DISABLED.
The Main Menu Configuration Menu also allows the function of the 2nd and 3rd Standard Display Soft Keys to be
reassigned as desired by the customer.
Add Keypad Lockout to Mode Menu

Exceptions
Description When enabled, Keypad Lockout allows the operator to lock the keypad to prevent tampering.
Pressing any soft key for 5 seconds will unlock the keypad.
Setting this feature Enabled adds the Keypad Lockout feature to the Mode Menu.
Setting this feature Disabled turns the Keypad Lockout feature off and removes the feature from the Mode
Menu.
3-46
01 December 2012
Add Sleep to Mode Menu

Exceptions
Description When enabled, Sleep Mode allows the operator to place the unit in Sleep Mode from the Mode
Menu.
Setting this feature Enabled adds the Sleep Mode feature to the Mode Menu.
Setting this feature Disabled removes the Sleep Mode feature from the Mode Menu.
Configure Soft Key 2 on Standard Display

Choices Sensors, Gauges, Pretrip, Datalogger, SOT, Hourmeters
Factory Set Gauges
Exceptions For Single Temp Applications Only.
Description This feature allows the function of the 2nd HMI Control Panel Soft Key to be assigned as desired
by the end user. The Gauge function remains available in the Main Menu and Maintenance Menu in the same
manner as before. The optional selections work in the same manner as if they had been selected from the Main
Menu.
3-47
01 December 2012
Configure Soft Key 3 on Standard Display

Choices Sensors, Gauges, Pretrip, Datalogger, SOT, Hourmeters
Factory Set Sensors
Exceptions For Single Temp Applications Only.
rd
Description This feature allows the function of the 3 HMI Control Panel Soft Key to be assigned as desired
by the end user. The Sensors function remains available in the Main Menu and Maintenance Menu in the same
manner as before. The optional selections work in the same manner as if they had been selected from the Main
Menu.
Auto Keypad Lock Time

Choices DISABLED, 3 Minutes, 5 Minutes, 10 Minutes
Exceptions
Description If ENABLED, this feature will automatically lock the HMI Keypad after a user selectable 3, 5 or
10 minute interval during which no HMI Key has been pressed. If this feature is DISABLED, the HMI Keypad
will not be locked.
3-48
01 December 2012
Auto Keypad Lock Pin Num

Choices NO CODE, 1 - 99999
Factory Set NO CODE
Exceptions
Description If this feature is set NO CODE, a code is not required to unlock the keypad if it has been
locked. If a code from 1-99999 has been selected, this code must be entered in order to unlock the HMI
keypad. The code should be recorded for future use.
3-49
01 December 2012
ALARM DISPLAY MENU

The Alarm Menu allows the technician to display and clear any existing alarms except alarms that auto-clear
only. See Section 4 for operating details. If an alarm condition still exists when the alarm is cleared, the alarm
will be set again as soon as the alarm condition is detected.
A simplified list of Alarm Codes is presented in Section 4 of this manual.
A list of alarm codes including diagnostic procedures for each alarm code is presented in Section 5 of this
manual.
3-50
01 December 2012
HOURMETER SETUP MENU

The Hourmeter Setup Menu allows the unit hourmeters to be configured to customer requirements. There are
three sub-menus under the Hourmeter Setup Menu as follows:
 Program Hourmeter
 Viewable Hourmeter Setup
 Program Service Due Date
PROGRAM HOURMETER SUB-MENU

The hourmeters listed below allow a time limit to be established for each programmable Hourmeter. These time
limits are defined by the customer and are typically used as maintenance reminders. When a hourmeter time is
exceeded, a stored alarm is set as a maintenance reminder. The hourmeter is cleared by means of a CLEAR
soft key when viewing the hourmeters from the Guarded Access Menu. The hour meter elapsed time should be
reset to 0. Hourmeters cannot be cleared from the Main Menu
With the exception of Controller Power On Hours and Pretrip Reminder Hours there are two hourmeters for each
feature to allow two different maintenance intervals to be set.
The Program Hourmeter Sub-menu is used to set and clear the adjustable time limits for each Hourmeter, as
required by a customer’s maintenance program. The default time limit for all hourmeters is 100 hours. The
hourmeters appear in the order shown here.
3-51
01 December 2012
Total Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours

Choices OFF, 1 to 99,999
Factory Set OFF
Exceptions If a time limit is set and exceeded then Alarm Code 132 will be set as a stored alarm.
Description Total Run Time Reminder #1 Hours is one of two hourmeters that track the total amount of time
the unit has run in both diesel and electric mode. If a time limit is set and exceeded then Alarm Code 132 will
be set as a stored alarm.
This feature sets the meter limits for this programmable hourmeter. The default setting is OFF. Time limits start
at 100 hours and can be decreased to 1 and then OFF or increased to a maximum of 99,999 hours.

Factory Set OFF
Description Total Run Time Reminder #2 Hours is one of two hourmeters that track the total amount of time
the unit has run in both diesel and electric mode. If a time limit is set and exceeded then Alarm Code 133 will
be set as a stored alarm.
3-52
01 December 2012
Controller Power On Hours

Factory Set OFF
Description Controller Power On Hours is the total amount of time the controller has been turned on. If a
time limit is set and exceeded then Alarm Code 134 will be set as a stored alarm.
Pretrip Reminder Hours

Factory Set OFF
Description Controller Power On Hours is the total amount of time since the last Pretrip Test was
performed. If a time limit is set and exceeded then Alarm Code 64 will be set as a stored alarm.
3-53
01 December 2012
Engine Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours

Factory Set OFF
Description Engine Run Time Reminder #1 Hours is one of two hourmeters that track the total amount of
time the unit has run in diesel mode. If a time limit is set and exceeded then Alarm Code 128 will be set as a
stored alarm.

Factory Set OFF
Description Engine Run Time Reminder #2 Hours is one of two hourmeters that track the total amount of
time the unit has run in diesel mode. If a time limit is set and exceeded then Alarm Code 129 will be set as a
stored alarm.
3-54
01 December 2012
Electric Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours

Factory Set OFF
Exceptions If a time limit is set and exceeded then Alarm Code 130 will be set as a stored alarm. Only
appears if the unit is configured as being equipped with optional electric standby.
Description Electric Run Time Reminder #1 Hours is one of two hourmeters that track the total amount of
time the unit has run in electric mode. If a time limit is set and exceeded then Alarm Code 130 will be set as a
stored alarm.

Factory Set OFF
Exceptions If a time limit is set and exceeded then Alarm Code 131 will be set as a stored alarm. Only
appears if the unit is configured as being equipped with optional electric standby.
Description Electric Run Time Reminder #2 Hours is one of two hourmeters that track the total amount of
time the unit has run in electric mode. If a time limit is set and exceeded then Alarm Code 131 will be set as a
stored alarm.
3-55
01 December 2012
VIEWABLE HOURMETER SETUP SUB-MENU

The hourmeters can be programmed to be visible or hidden from the Main Menu. The hourmeters continue to
accumulate time even if the hourmeter view is hidden.
If an hourmeter view is set Enabled, then that hourmeter will appear in the Hourmeter menu in both the Main
Menu and Maintenance Menu. If the hourmeter view is set disabled, the hourmeter is only viewable from the
Maintenance Menu.
With Model 30 units the default setting for the Engine Hours hourmeter is Enabled. The default setting of all
other hourmeters is Disabled.
With Model 50 units the default setting for the Total Run Time Hours, Engine Hours and Electric Run Hours
hourmeters is Enabled. The default setting of all other hourmeters is Disabled.
The hourmeters appear in the order shown here.
Total Hours
Exceptions
Description The setting of this feature determines if the Total Hours hourmeter can be viewed from the
Main Menu. If the hourmeter is Enabled it can be viewed from the Main Menu. If it is Disabled it cannot be
viewed from the Main Menu but is visible from the Maintenance Menu.
3-56
01 December 2012
Total Run Time Hours (If Model 50)

Factory Set ENABLED if Electric Standby Option is installed
Exceptions Only appears if the unit is configured as being equipped with optional electric standby.
Description The setting of this feature determines if the Total Run Time Hours hourmeter can be viewed
from the Main Menu. If the hourmeter is Enabled it can be viewed from the Main Menu. If it is Disabled it
cannot be viewed from the Main Menu but is visible from the Maintenance Menu.
Engine Hours
Factory Set ENABLED
Exceptions
Description The setting of this feature determines if the Engine Hours hourmeter can be viewed from the
Main Menu. If the hourmeter is Enabled it can be viewed from the Main Menu. If it is Disabled it cannot be
3-57
01 December 2012
Electric Run Hours (If Model 50)

Factory Set ENABLED if Electric Standby Option is installed
Description The setting of this feature determines if the Electric Run Hours hourmeter can be viewed from
the Main Menu. If the hourmeter is Enabled it can be viewed from the Main Menu. If it is Disabled it cannot be

Exceptions
Description The setting of this feature determines if the Total Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours hourmeter can
be viewed from the Main Menu. If the hourmeter is Enabled it can be viewed from the Main Menu. If it is
Disabled it cannot be viewed from the Main Menu but is visible from the Maintenance Menu.

Exceptions
Description The setting of this feature determines if the Total Run Time Reminder # 2 Hours hourmeter can
be viewed from the Main Menu. If the hourmeter is Enabled it can be viewed from the Main Menu. If it is
3-58
01 December 2012
Controller Power On Hours

Exceptions
Description The setting of this feature determines if the Controller Power On Hours hourmeter can be
viewed from the Main Menu. If the hourmeter is Enabled it can be viewed from the Main Menu. If it is Disabled
it cannot be viewed from the Main Menu but is visible from the Maintenance Menu.
Pretrip Reminder Hours

Exceptions
Description The setting of this feature determines if the Pretrip Reminder Hours hourmeter can be viewed
from the Main Menu. If the hourmeter is Enabled it can be viewed from the Main Menu. If it is Disabled it
cannot be viewed from the Main Menu but is visible from the Maintenance Menu.

Exceptions
Description The setting of this feature determines if the Engine Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours hourmeter
can be viewed from the Main Menu. If the hourmeter is Enabled it can be viewed from the Main Menu. If it is
3-59
01 December 2012

Exceptions
Description The setting of this feature determines if the Engine Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours hourmeter

Description The setting of this feature determines if the Electric Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours hourmeter

Description The setting of this feature determines if the Electric Run Time Reminder # 2 Hours hourmeter
3-60
01 December 2012
PROGRAMMABLE SERVICE DUE DATE

This feature allows a Service Due Date to be programmed. When the selected Service Due Date is reached,
Alarm Code 128 Service Due is set.
Service Due Date

Exceptions
Description If this feature is set Enabled, prompts appear to set a Service Due Date (Date / Month / Year).
When this date is reached, Alarm Code 128 Service Due is set as a stored alarm.
Alarm Code 128 Service Due can only be cleared from the Guarded Access Menu. When Alarm Code 128
Service Due is cleared, the Service Due Date feature is reset to Disabled. The feature can again be set
Enabled and a new Service Due Date selected.
3-61
01 December 2012
SENSOR CALIBRATION MENU

The grade number for graded sensors must be set correctly for the unit to operate properly. Sensor grades are
defined such that a sensor grade 5H does not exist. The default setting for a new controller or after a cold start is
5H. This serves as a notice that the sensor grade is not set. The default grade of 5H is not a valid grade and will
not be printed on any sensor.
If a sensor grade for a return air or discharge air sensor is set to grade 5H, the Alarm Code for that sensor and
Alarm Code 92 Sensor Grade Not Set will be set.
Spare Sensor 1 is also a graded sensor but an alarm code is not set if this sensor grade is set to 5H.
NOTE: To insure proper operation the grades must be properly set to match the actual sensor grades. Failure to
do so may result in false alarm codes. Exercise care to properly identify the sensor grades. The best way to
positively identify the sensor grade is to physically check the sensor grade printed on each graded sensor. In
addition, colored cable ties are installed on the sensor harness near the sensor as shown in the Sensor Cable Tie
Identification Table below.
Sensor Cable Tie Identification

Sensor and Alarm Code Wire # Cable Tie Color
Control Return Air Sensor RTP 1 Yellow
Alarm Code 03 RTN
Control Discharge Air Sensor DTP 1 Red
Alarm Code 04 DTN
Display Return Air Sensor RTRP 2 Yellow
Alarm Code 203 RTRN
Display Discharge Air Sensor DTRP 2 Red
Alarm Code 204 DTRN
IMPORTANT: Sensor grades cannot be set using OptiSet Plus.
The Sensor Calibration Menu allows the operator to select the correct grade for all graded sensors. Sensor
grades range from 1L through 9H. The sensors appear in the order shown here.
3-62
01 December 2012
Control Return Air Sensor Grade

Choices 1L thru 9H
Factory Set 5H
Exceptions Unit Type = Trailer Single Temperature.
Description This feature is used to set the sensor grade for the Control Return Air Sensor.
The default setting for a new base controller or after a ServiceWatch base controller cold start is 5H. This
serves as a warning that the sensor grade is not set. The default grade of 5H is not a valid grade and will not be
printed on any sensor. If a sensor grade for a return air or discharge air sensor is set to grade 5H, the alarm
code for that sensor and Alarm Code 92 Sensor Grade Not Set will be set. Alarm Code 92 is not set if a Spare
Sensor is set to 5H.
To insure proper operation the grades must be properly set to match the actual sensor grades to prevent
nuisance alarm codes. Exercise care to properly identify the sensor grades. The best way to positively identify
the sensor grade is by physically checking the sensor grade printed on each graded sensor.
The harness for the Control Return Air Sensor is further identified by one yellow cable tie.
3-63
01 December 2012
Control Discharge Air Sensor Grade

Choices 1L thru 9H
Factory Set 5H
Description This feature is used to set the sensor grade for the Control Discharge Air Sensor.
code for that sensor and Alarm Code 92 Sensor Grade Not Set will occur. Alarm Code 92 is not set if a Spare
The harness for the Control Discharge Air Sensor is further identified by one red cable tie.
3-64
01 December 2012
Display Return Air Sensor Grade

Choices 1L thru 9H
Factory Set 5H
Description This feature is used to set the sensor grade for the Display Return Air Sensor.
The harness for the Display Return Air Sensor is further identified by two yellow cable ties.
3-65
01 December 2012
Display Discharge Air Sensor Grade

Choices 1L thru 9H
Factory Set 5H
Description This feature is used to set the sensor grade for the Display Discharge Air Sensor.
The harness for the Display Discharge Air Sensor is further identified by two red cable ties.
3-66
01 December 2012
Spare 1 Sensor Grade

Choices 1L thru 9H
Factory Set 5H
Exceptions Unit Type = Trailer Single Temperature. If the optional Spare 1 Sensor is not present this
feature need not be set.
Description This feature is used to set the sensor grade for the Spare 1 Sensor.
NOTE: Alarm Code 92 Sensor Grades Not Set is not active with spare sensors. However, if the sensor is in
used the sensor grade should be set to provide maximum sensor accuracy.
3-67
01 December 2012
CYCLE SENTRY SETUP MENU

The Cycle Sentry Menu allows the unit defaults for Cycle Sentry Null and Sleep Null unit shut down on battery
charge current and unit restart on battery voltage to be modified as desired by the customer.
Cycle Sentry Amps Level

Choices 2A to 8A in 1A increments
Factory Set 5A
Exceptions
Description When operating in Cycle Sentry or Sleep mode the unit will automatically run to charge the
battery, until the charging current falls below this set limit. This occurs even if cooling, heating or defrosting is
not required.
Battery Sentry Voltage Level

Choices 11.8V to 12.6V in 0.1V increments
Factory Set 12.2V
Exceptions
Description When operating in Cycle Sentry or Sleep mode the controller will monitor battery voltage and
restart the unit to charge the battery, if the battery voltage falls below this set limit. This occurs even if cooling,
heating or defrosting is not required.
3-68
01 December 2012
Check Battery Condition Alarm

Exceptions
Description If Check Battery Condition Alarm is ENABLED, Alarm Code 159 Check Battery Condition will
be set if indications exist that the battery may be about to fail. If this feature is set DISABLED, the battery
condition check will be disabled and Alarm Code 159 Check Battery Condition will not be set.
3-69
01 December 2012
DEFROST SETUP MENU

The Defrost Setup Menu allows the defrost operation to be configured for maximum performance.
 The evaporator coil temperature must be 45°F (7°C) or less to allow defrost. Defrost cycles will
terminate at 58°F (14°C).
 If rail alternate or High Temperature Defrost is enabled a defrost cycle is allowed with an evaporator coil
temperature less than or equal to 55 °F (13°C) and terminates at 70°F (21°C).
Defrost Interval In Range with Fresh Setpoint

Choices 2, 4, 6, 8 or 12 Hours
Factory Set 6 Hours
Exceptions
Description This feature selects the timed interval between defrost cycles with Fresh range setpoints when
the temperature is in range.
Defrost Interval Not In Range with Fresh Setpoint

Factory Set 4 Hours
Exceptions
Description This feature selects the timed interval between defrost cycles with Fresh range setpoints when
the temperature is not in range.
3-70
01 December 2012
Defrost Interval In Range with Frozen Setpoint

Factory Set 6 Hours
Exceptions
Description This feature selects the timed interval between defrost cycles with Frozen range setpoints when
the temperature is in range.
Defrost Interval Not In Range with Frozen Setpoint

Factory Set 6 Hours
Exceptions
Description This feature selects the timed interval between defrost cycles with Frozen range setpoints
when the temperature is not in range.
Maximum Defrost Duration

Choices 30 or 45 Minutes
Exceptions
Description This feature selects the maximum time the unit can remain in a defrost cycle. A defrost cycle
normally terminates when the evaporator coil temperature reaches 58°F (14°C). If Rail Alternate is enabled a
defrost cycle terminates at 70°F (21°C). If the evaporator temperature does not reach this temperature, the
defrost cycle will terminate after the elapsed time selected here.
3-71
01 December 2012
LANGUAGE SETUP MENU

This menu allows the display language or languages to be enabled as required. When a language is selected all
subsequent displays are in that language. Any or all languages shown below can be enabled. The default
language is English and is always enabled.

English is included in all language sets and is factory set as Enabled. Only enabled languages will appear in the
Main Menu Language selections. All languages other than English are factory set as Disabled. If only one
language is enabled the Language selection screen does not appear in the Main Menu.
Enable Language
Choices See Language Support Table
Factory Set English only
Exceptions
Description This feature allows any or all of the included languages to be enabled. Only enabled
languages will appear in the Operators Language Menu. All languages other than English are factory set as
Disabled. If only one language is enabled then the Language Selection Menu will not appear on startup or in
the Main Menu.
3-72
01 December 2012
ACCESS CODE SETUP MENU

This menu allows an Access code to be required for entry to the Guarded Access Menu. If a code is selected, an
access code challenge will appear when entering the Guarded Access menu. If the correct code is not entered
access is denied.
A technician can bypass an unknown Access Code by entering “4444” and pressing the Enter key.
Enter Access Code

The + and – keys are used to enter the desired Access Code. When the desired Access Code is displayed, the
Enter Key is pressed to load the code. The code should be recorded for future use.
If OptiSet Plus is active this feature is set using OptiSet Plus.
3-73
01 December 2012
OPTISET PLUS MENU

The OptiSet Plus™ Temperature Management System allows up to 64 different Named and/or Numeric
temperature profiles to be defined and tailored for maximum operating efficiency as determined by customer
load requirements. The term “OptiSet Plus” refers to both the programmable temperature profiles and the unit
operating features that can be tailored using OptiSet Plus.
Due to the large number of features available in OptiSet Plus, the OptiSet Plus features can no longer be viewed
or changed from the Guarded Access Menu. The only OptiSet Plus features available from the Guarded Access
Menu are OptiSet Plus Reset and Temperature Profile Selection.
 OptiSet Plus Reset is used to reset all OptiSet Plus features to the factory default settings.
 Temperature Profile Selection is used to determine what temperature profiles are available for use by the
driver.
For details of OptiSet Plus Reset and Temperature Profile Selection see the next page.
IMPORTANT: All other OptiSet Plus Features are set using OptiSet Plus. They cannot be viewed or changed
from the Guarded Access Menu. OptiSet Plus and the ThermoServ Service Tool are required for use with the
SR-4 Control System to tailor unit performance to customer requirements.
For additional details see the ThermoServ Service Tool Manual. Additional information can also be found in the
extensive Help Menu in OptiSet Plus.
3-74
01 December 2012
These two features are available from the Guarded Access OptiSet Plus Menu.
OptiSet Plus Reset

Exceptions Only available if OptiSet Plus features have been previously set using OptiSet Plus.
Description If any OptiSet Plus features have been previously set using OptiSet Plus, an OptiSet Reset is
provided at the beginning of the OptiSet Plus menu to return all settings to the default values. If this OptiSet
Reset feature is used, all OptiSet Plus settings are returned to factory defaults.
Temperature Profile Selection

Choices NUMERIC SETPOINT ONLY
NAMED PRODUCT ONLY
NAMED PROD & NUMERIC SP
Factory Set Numeric Setpoint Only
Exceptions
Description This feature determines what profiles are available to the driver.
If NUMERIC SETPOINT ONLY is selected, only numeric setpoints such as 35°F or -10°F are available to the
driver.
If NAMED PRODUCT ONLY is selected, only the named products such as Potatoes or Squash enabled during
OptiSet Plus setup are available to the driver.
If NAMED PROD & NUMERIC SP is selected, both named products and numeric setpoints are available to the
driver.
3-75
01 December 2012
SENSOR CONFIGURATION MENU – CARGOWATCH™ DATA

LOGGER
The CargoWatch Data Logger is internal to the HMI Control Panel. This Data Logger conforms to European
standard EN12830. The data logger supports up to 6 temperature sensors and 3 digital inputs. These sensors
are optional sensors and are not the same as the temperature sensors used to control the unit. The CargoWatch
Data Logger features the ability to customize logging parameters and enable product temperature checking.
Note that the CargoWatch Data Logger does not record unit sensors. Unit sensors and other unit operating data
are recorded by the ServiceWatch Data Logger. The CargoWatch logger records the unit setpoint, operating
mode, and shutdown alarms.
When shipped from the factory, CargoWatch sensors 1 and 2 are turned on to be logged and CargoWatch
sensors 3 through 6 are turned off. Also, digital input 1 is turned on to be logged and digital inputs 2 and 3 are
turned off. Sensors and digital inputs can be turned on, off and configured using the CargoWatch menu in
Guarded Access or by using the ThermoServ Service Tool.
3-76
01 December 2012
Sensor Configuration Menu

(CargoWatch)
Logging Interval (15 Minutes)

Log Sensor 1(On)
Low (-10.8°F)
High (10.8°F)
Italian Option (Sensor 1 only) (Off)
Log Sensor 2 (On)
Low (-10.8°F)
High (10.8°F)
Log Sensor 3 (Off)
Same features as Sensor 2 if On
Log Sensor 4 (Off)
Log Sensor 5 (Off)
Log Sensor 6 (Off)
Digital In 1 (On)
Digital Input #1 Name (Digital Input #1)
Digital In 2 (Off)
Same features as Digital Input 1 if On
Digital In 3 (Off)
Countdown (Off)
Conservative (Off)
3-77
01 December 2012
CargoWatch Sensor Programming
Logging Interval
Micro Rev 8035 and later
Choices 1 minute, 2 minutes and 5 to 60 minutes in 5-minute intervals
Exceptions Wintrac is capable of setting additional intervals as short as 1 minute.
Description This feature allows the desired logging interval to be set for all enabled sensors and digital
inputs.
Log Sensor for CargoWatch sensor 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6

Choices ON or OFF
Factory Set Sensors 1-2 ON, sensors 3-6 OFF
Exceptions
Description This feature allows the desired sensors to be turned On to be logged. If the sensor is turned on
then additional features may be selected for that sensor.
3-78
01 December 2012
Independent Sensor Name for CargoWatch sensor 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6

Choices See table below
Factory Set Log Sensor 1 through 6
Exceptions
Description This feature allows the desired sensor name to be specified. These names appear only on
handheld printer reports. This aids in reading and understanding data logger printer reports.
~ choices shown on next page ~
3-79
01 December 2012
Choices
 Log Sensor 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
 Spare Ambient
 Ambient
 Spare Dry
 Spare Chilled
 Spare Frozen
 Spare Fresh
 Dry
 Chilled
 Fresh
 Spare Left Side
 Spare Right Side
 Spare Side
 Spare Rear
 Spare Front
 Left Side
 Right Side
 Side
 Rear
 Front
 Other Spare
 Other
 Spare
 Spare USDA 1, 2 or 3
 USDA 1, 2 or 3
 Other Spare Discharge Air
 Spare Discharge Air Zone 1, 2 or 3
 Spare Discharge Air
 Other Spare Return Air
 Spare Return Air Zone 1, 2 or 3
 Spare Return Air
 Other Discharge Air
 Discharge Air Zone 1, 2 or 3
 Discharge Air
 Other Return Air
 Return Air Zone 1, 2 or 3
 Return Air
 Frozen
 Independent Sensor 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
3-80
01 December 2012
Out of Range Checking (for current sensor)

Choices ON or OFF
Factory Set ON
Exceptions
Description This feature allows the Out of Range Checking feature to be turned on or off. If Out of Range
Checking is turned on, an alarm will be set if the temperature, as sensed by the specified sensor, is above or
below setpoint by more than the number of degrees determined by the setting of LOW and HIGH programmable
features. The out of range condition must exist for 1 hour before the alarm is set. A visual notification will be
provided to the driver on the standard display, as shown below.
OUT OF RANGE LIMIT
°F
SET
POINT
35GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
Low
Choices From -1.0° to –20.0° in 0.1-degree increments, in either Fahrenheit or Celsius.
Factory Set –10.8°F (-6.0°C)
Exceptions
Description This feature allows the low limit for Out of Range Checking to be set.
3-81
01 December 2012
High
Choices From 1.0° to 20.0° in 0.1-degree increments, in either Fahrenheit or Celsius.
Factory Set 10.8°F (6.0°C)
Exceptions
Description This feature allows the high limit for Out of Range Checking to be set.
Italian Option
Choices ON or OFF
Factory Set OFF
Exceptions This feature is available with Sensor 1 only.
Description If this feature is turned ON, the driver is presented a visual “Out of Range Limit” notification and
flashes the backlight if the box temperature rises above -15°C. The visual notification appears on the Standard
Display as shown below.
OUT OF RANGE LIMIT
°F
SET
POINT
35 GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
3-82
01 December 2012
Sensor Averaging
Choices ON or OFF
Factory Set OFF
Exceptions
Description If this feature is turned OFF, the temperature logged will be the actual instantaneous sensor
reading at the time of log. If this feature is turned ON, the sensor is read once each minute. The sensor
readings are averaged dependant on the setting of the Logging Interval feature selected above.
For example, if the Logging Interval is 15 minutes the previous 15 sensor readings are averaged and logged
instead of the actual instantaneous value. If the Logging Interval is set for 10 minutes, the previous 10 sensor
readings are averaged and logged.
3-83
01 December 2012
Digital Input Programming

The digital inputs are used to log the door switch status.
Digital In for CargoWatch digital input 1, 2 or 3

Choices Digital Input 1, 2, 3 or 4
Factory Set
Exceptions
Description This feature allows the digital input to be programmed to be selected.
Door Open Logging

Choices ON or OFF
Factory Set Input 1 ON, inputs 2-4 OFF
Exceptions
Description This feature allows the desired digital inputs to be logged or ignored.
3-84
01 December 2012
Digital Input Name for CargoWatch digital input 1, 2, 3 or 4

Choices See table below
Factory Set Digital Input 1 through 4
Exceptions
Description This feature allows the desired input name to be specified. This aids in reading and
understanding data logger downloads.
Choices
 Digital Input 1, 2, 3 or 4
 Door
 Other Door
 Main Door
 Back Door
 Front Door
 Side Door
 Left Door
 Right Door
 Other Back Door
 Other Front Door
 Other Side Door
 Other Left Door
 Other Right Door
 Fresh Door
 Other Fresh Door
 Frozen Door
 Other Frozen Door
 Chilled Door
 Other Chilled Door
 Dry Door
 Other Dry Door
3-85
01 December 2012
Countdown Timer
Choices OFF, 1 – 96 Hours
Factory Set OFF
Exceptions The Countdown Timer only affects the CargoWatch Data Logger.
Description The Countdown Mode feature will keep the HMI Control Panel powered up for a user specified
time period after the unit is turned off. Under these conditions the display and backlight are turned off to
conserve unit battery power.
IMPORTANT: The four Hard Keys will remain illuminated when the unit is in Countdown Mode. This is normal
operation.
ON
OFF
The CargoWatch data logger will continue to record data according to the current CargoWatch interval settings
until the user specified time period expires. This allows data to be recorded during an interval where the unit is
turned off.
The programmable time intervals are OFF or from 1 Hour to 96 Hours. The default setting for Countdown
Mode is OFF.
3-86
01 December 2012
Conservative Log Count

Choices OFF, 1 – 400 Logs
Factory Set OFF
Exceptions The Countdown Timer only affects the CargoWatch Data Logger.
Description The Conservative Mode can be utilized by the user after the Countdown Mode interval above
has expired. When the Countdown Mode has expired, Conservative Mode (if programmed) allows the HMI
Control Panel to be temporarily powered up according to the current CargoWatch interval settings to log an
additional number of CargoWatch data logs. The HMI Control Panel will be powered up for approximately 30
seconds to perform each data log, and will then turn back off.
The possible number of additional Conservative Mode CargoWatch data logs is from 1 Log to 400 Logs. The
default setting for Conservative Mode is OFF.
SOT on Setpoint
Exceptions
Description If this feature is set ENABLED, a Start of Trip is sent to the ServiceWatch and CargoWatch
Data Loggers after any setpoint change. If this feature is set DISABLED, a Start of Trip is not sent.
3-87
01 December 2012
SOT at Midnight
Exceptions
Description If this feature is set ENABLED, a Start of Trip is sent to the ServiceWatch and CargoWatch
Data Loggers after any setpoint change. If this feature is set DISABLED, a Start of Trip is not sent.
3-88
01 December 2012
UNIT CONFIGURATION SETUP MENU

The Unit Setup Menu is used to specify the actual unit configuration. These features are set at the factory as
required for each unit. The factory settings shown below are for a replacement SR-4 Base Controller.
Alarm Code 111 Unit Not Configured Correctly

If the base controller detects a mismatch between unit connections and configuration selections, Alarm Code 111
Unit Not Configured Correctly will be set.
Unit Model
Choices C-600, S-600, S-700
Factory Set To match unit as built. A Base Controller cold start will default this feature to S-600.
Exceptions
Description This feature allows the Unit Model to be selected. Set as appropriate for the unit.
High Capacity Unit?

Choices YES or NO
Factory Set To match unit as built. A Base Controller cold start will default this feature to NO.
Exceptions
Description If the unit was built as a High Capacity unit this setting must be set to YES. If the unit was not
built as a High Capacity unit this setting must be set to NO.
IMPORTANT: Improper setting of this feature may cause Alarm Code 33 Check Engine RPM to be set
during a Pretrip Test.
3-89
01 December 2012
Engine Type
Choices TK488CR, TK486V25, TK-DV6-NR
Factory Set TK488CR
Exceptions
Description This feature allows the engine type to be selected. Set as appropriate for the unit.
Compressor Type
Choices Recip
Factory Set Recip
Exceptions
Description This feature allows the compressor type to be selected. Set as appropriate for the unit.
ETV Configured
Choices YES or NO
Factory Set To match unit as built. A base controller cold start will default this feature to YES.
Exceptions
Description If the unit was built with an Electronic Throttling Valve (ETV) this feature must be set YES.
Units without an Electronic Throttling Valve (ETV) must be set NO.
3-90
01 December 2012
Battery Charger
Choices NONE, 30 Amp, 120 Amp
Factory Set To match unit as built. A base controller cold start will default this feature to NONE.
Exceptions
Description If the unit is equipped with an alternator, this feature should be set to NONE. Single
Temperature applications use a 30 Amp Battery Charger. Multi-Temperature applications use a 120 Amp
Battery Charger.
Electric Standby Equipped?

Choices YES or NO
Factory Set To match unit as built. A base controller cold start will default this feature to YES.
Exceptions This setting will automatically be forced from “NO” to “YES” if the unit detects that electric
supply power is connected to the unit.
Description This feature specifies if the unit is equipped with optional Smart Power™ Electric Standby. If
the unit is equipped with Electric Standby, this feature should be set YES. If the unit is not equipped with
Electric Standby, this feature should be set NO.
3-91
01 December 2012
Electric Motor Type

Choices 14 HP or optional 24 HP
Factory Set As built. A Base Controller cold start will default this feature to 14 HP.
Exceptions
Description This feature specifies which motor is used on units equipped with the optional Smart Power
Electric Standby. A 14 HP motor is standard on units equipped with the Electric Standby option. The 24 HP
motor is an available option.
Electric Heat Option

Choices YES or NO
Factory Set To match unit as built. A Base Controller cold start will default this feature to YES.
Exceptions
Description This feature specifies if the unit is equipped with the Electric Heat option. If the unit is equipped
with Electric Heat, this feature should be set YES. If the unit is not equipped with Electric Heat, this feature
should be set NO.
On multi-temp applications electric heat is applicable to Zone 1 host evaporators only.
3-92
01 December 2012
Diesel to Electric Auto Switch Enabled?

Choices YES or NO
Factory Set NO
Exceptions
Description This feature allows the Auto Switch from Diesel to Electric feature to be enabled or disabled. If
this feature is set YES, the unit will switch automatically to electric mode when standby power is connected. If
the feature is set NO, the operator must manually switch the unit to electric mode using the HMI Control Panel
Mode Menu or by following the HMI Control Panel prompts when standby power is connected.
Electric to Diesel Auto Switch Enabled?

Choices YES or NO
Factory Set NO
Exceptions
Description This feature allows the Auto Switch from Electric to Diesel feature to be enabled or disabled. If
this feature is set YES, the unit will switch automatically to diesel mode when standby power is disconnected or
fails. If the feature is set NO, the operator must manually switch the unit to diesel mode using the HMI Control
Panel Mode Menu or by following the HMI Control Panel prompts when standby power is disconnected or fails.
NOTE: Auto-switch from electric to diesel is not recommended when the unit is running in electric mode
indoors or when below deck on a ferry where engine operation is strictly prohibited.
3-93
01 December 2012
Humidity Sensor
Exceptions
Description If the optional humidity sensor is installed, this feature must be set ENABLED. If the humidity
sensor is not installed this feature must be set DISABLED.
Fuel Level Sensor Type

Choices NONE, SOLID STATE, FLOAT or SWITCH
Factory Set NONE
Exceptions
Description This feature is used to select the type of fuel level sensor installed. If no fuel level sensor is
installed, this feature should be set to NONE.
3-94
01 December 2012
Rear Remote Control Panel

Choices NONE, COM 2
Factory Set NONE
Exceptions
Description This feature specifies if the unit is equipped with the optional flush mount Rear Remote Control
Panel. If the unit is equipped with the flush mount Rear Remote Control Panel this feature should be set to
COM 2 and the flush mount Rear Remote Control Panel should be connected to the COM2 port on the interface
board. If the unit is not equipped with a flush mount Rear Remote Control Panel, this feature should be set
NONE.
See Section 4 of this manual for more information on using the Rear Remote Control Panel.
Rear Remote Control Panel Action

Choices STAND BY, RUN
Factory Set STAND BY
Exceptions Only appears if Rear Remote Control Panel is set for COM 2
Description If the Action is set to STAND BY, the unit will power up when the Rear Remote Control Panel
ON key is pressed. The setpoints can be changed from the Rear Remote Control Panel but the unit will not
start and run. The unit must be started from the HMI Control Panel on the unit. Pressing the Rear Remote
Control Panel OFF key will power down the control system. All Rear Remote Control Panel functions are
present except the engine will not start and a Manual Defrost Cycle or Pretrip Test cannot be initiated.
If the Action is set to RUN the unit will automatically start and run when the Rear Remote Control Panel ON key
is pressed. Pressing the Rear Remote Control Panel OFF key will power down the control system. All Rear
Remote Control Panel functions are present.
See Section 4 of this manual for more information on using the Rear Remote Control Panel.
3-95
01 December 2012
3rd Party Device Control

Choices NONE, COM 1, COM 2
Factory Set NONE
Exceptions
Description This feature selects the communications port on the SR-4 Base Controller/Interface Board that
will be used by a third party control device such as satellite communications. If the unit is not equipped with a
third party device, this feature should be set NONE.
REB Type Configured

Choices NONE,
IBOX
IBOX+CELL+GPS
IBOX+WPAN
IBOX+CELL+GPS+WPAN
WIFI+GPS+WPAN
IBOX+WIFI+GPS+WPAN
IBOX+CELL+GPS+WIFI+WPAN
Factory Set NONE
Exceptions
Description The REB Type Configured feature should be set to match the options installed on the unit
3-96
01 December 2012
Fresh Air Exchange

Choices YES or NO
Factory Set NO
Exceptions The Fresh Air Exchange Feature must be installed on the unit.
Description The Fresh Air Exchange option allows fresh outside air to be drawn into the trailer and the
interior air to be exhausted by opening the Fresh Air Exchange doors. This feature is beneficial when hauling
loads that release gas as they ripen, such as potatoes. The Fresh Air Exchange feature should be used exactly
as specified by the customer.
The Fresh Air Exchange feature is only available with setpoints above 32°F (0°C). The feature is disabled with
setpoints of 32°F (0°C) and below.
A solenoid is used to open and close the Fresh Air Exchange Door. Note that the Fresh Air Exchange door will
only be open when the unit engine is running, as it is held in the open position by the Fresh Air Exchange
Solenoid. The door will close when the engine shuts down to preserve unit battery life. The setting of the Fresh
Air Exchange door will survive power off / power on cycles – if the door is set to “Open” by the operator it will
continue to open any time the engine is running until it is set to “Close” by the operator.
If Fresh Air Exchange is set YES then the Fresh Air Exchange Open | Close feature will be shown in the Mode
Menu. If Fresh Air Exchange is set NO then the Fresh Air Exchange Open | Close feature will not appear in the
Mode Menu.
3-97
01 December 2012
3-98
01 December 2012
Section 4 – Table of Contents
Section 4 Operation – Table of Contents
Part 1 – Trailer S/T Electronic Engine Operation
Part 2 – SR-4 Trailer S/T Rear Remote Operation
Part 3 – SR-4 Precedent Trailer S/T Electronic Engine Alarm Codes
01 December 2012
Section 4 – Table of Contents
01 December 2012
Section 4 – SR-4 Trailer S/T Electronic Engine Operation
Table of Contents Section 4 – Part 1 Operation

HMI = 7A00, Base Controller = 8035
SR-4 Precedent™ Unit Control Panel ............................................................................................................... 7

USB Connectors......................................................................................................................................... 8
Flash Drive Only USB Port Connector ................................................................................................. 8
PC Computer Only USB Port Connector ............................................................................................. 8
SR-4 HMI Control Panel ..................................................................................................................................... 9
Display ...................................................................................................................................................... 10
Display Icons ....................................................................................................................................... 10
Keys .......................................................................................................................................................... 11
Hard Keys ............................................................................................................................................ 11
Soft Keys ............................................................................................................................................. 12
Configurable Soft Keys....................................................................................................................... 13
Display Heater .......................................................................................................................................... 14
Turning the Unit On......................................................................................................................................... 15
If a Flash Drive is Connected .................................................................................................................. 16
If a Language is Enabled ......................................................................................................................... 18
If Log Alarms are Present ........................................................................................................................ 20
Turning the Unit Off ........................................................................................................................................ 21
The Standard Display ...................................................................................................................................... 22
The Temperature Watch Display .................................................................................................................... 23
Changing the Setpoint .................................................................................................................................... 24
Numerical Setpoints ................................................................................................................................ 24
Named Products – OptiSet Plus .............................................................................................................. 24
Both Numerical Setpoints and Named Products ................................................................................... 25
Changing the Setpoint – Numerical Setpoint ......................................................................................... 26
Changing the Setpoint – Named Product ............................................................................................... 29
Changing the Setpoint – Both Numerical Setpoint and Named Product Available.............................. 32
Starting the Diesel Engine .............................................................................................................................. 33
Starting the Electric Motor .............................................................................................................................. 34
Switching from Diesel to Electric ................................................................................................................... 35
4-1
01 December 2012
Switching from Electric to Diesel ................................................................................................................... 36

Initiating a Manual Defrost Cycle .................................................................................................................... 37
Selecting Cycle Sentry or Continuous Mode ................................................................................................. 39
Using the Gauges Key..................................................................................................................................... 42
Gauges Available ..................................................................................................................................... 43
Using the Sensors Key .................................................................................................................................... 44
Sensors Available .................................................................................................................................... 45
Main Menu Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 46
Using the Main Menu ....................................................................................................................................... 47
Main Menu Features ........................................................................................................................................ 48
Pretrip ....................................................................................................................................................... 48
Pretrip Test Conditions ...................................................................................................................... 48
Conditions where Pretrip Tests are not allowed ............................................................................... 48
Pretrip Test Sequence ........................................................................................................................ 48
Pretrip Test Considerations ............................................................................................................... 49
Performing a Pretrip Test ................................................................................................................... 49
Flash Drive ............................................................................................................................................... 53
Flash Drive Icon .................................................................................................................................. 53
Selecting the Flash Drive Menu from the Main Menu (If Already Connected) ................................. 54
Flash Drive (If Connected While the Unit is Turned On) ................................................................... 55
Removing the Flash Drive .................................................................................................................. 55
Languages (If Enabled) ............................................................................................................................ 56
Available Languages........................................................................................................................... 56
Selecting an Alternate Language ....................................................................................................... 57
Language Menu Quick Access ........................................................................................................... 59
Alarms....................................................................................................................................................... 60
Log Alarms .......................................................................................................................................... 60
Check Alarms ...................................................................................................................................... 60
Shutdown Alarms................................................................................................................................ 61
Pretrip Alarms ..................................................................................................................................... 61
Alarm Codes When Switching Between Diesel and Electric ............................................................ 61
Clearing Alarm Codes ......................................................................................................................... 62
Displaying and Clearing Alarm Codes ............................................................................................... 63
Important Alarm Notes ........................................................................................................................ 66
4-2
01 December 2012
Gauges ..................................................................................................................................................... 67
Displaying Gauges .............................................................................................................................. 67
Sensors..................................................................................................................................................... 69
Displaying Sensors ............................................................................................................................. 69
Data Logger (CargoWatch) ...................................................................................................................... 71
Sending Start of Trip Marker to CargoWatch and ServiceWatch Data Loggers .............................. 72
Printing CargoWatch Data Logger Reports ....................................................................................... 72
Hourmeters ............................................................................................................................................... 75
Viewing Hourmeters ........................................................................................................................... 75
Hourmeter Names and Definitions ..................................................................................................... 77
Mode ......................................................................................................................................................... 78
Using the Change Mode Menu ........................................................................................................... 78
Turn Cycle Sentry On or Off ............................................................................................................... 80
Select Temperature Units ................................................................................................................... 81
Fresh Air Exchange Open or Closed ................................................................................................. 82
Keypad Lockout .................................................................................................................................. 84
Start Sleep Mode ................................................................................................................................. 85
Smart Power™ Electric Standby Option ................................................................................................. 86
Electric Mode Operation ..................................................................................................................... 86
Diesel Mode Operation ....................................................................................................................... 86
Switching from Diesel to Electric ....................................................................................................... 87
Electric Standby Power Fails or is Disconnected ............................................................................. 88
Switching from Electric to Diesel ....................................................................................................... 89
Adjust Brightness .................................................................................................................................... 90
Time .......................................................................................................................................................... 92
Clear All ECU Faults................................................................................................................................. 93
Maintenance Menu Overview .......................................................................................................................... 95
Using the Maintenance Menu ......................................................................................................................... 97
Entering the Maintenance Menu ............................................................................................................. 97
Maintenance Menu Choices ............................................................................................................................ 99
Hourmeters ............................................................................................................................................... 99
Hourmeter Definitions....................................................................................................................... 100
Gauges ................................................................................................................................................... 101
Gauge List ......................................................................................................................................... 102
4-3
01 December 2012
Sensors................................................................................................................................................... 103
Sensor List ........................................................................................................................................ 104
Alarms..................................................................................................................................................... 105
Log Alarms ........................................................................................................................................ 105
Check Alarms .................................................................................................................................... 106
Prevent Alarms .................................................................................................................................. 106
Shutdown Alarms.............................................................................................................................. 107
Displaying Alarms ............................................................................................................................. 108
Clearing Alarms................................................................................................................................. 109
Alarm Notes ....................................................................................................................................... 110
Service Test Mode.................................................................................................................................. 111
Service Test Modes........................................................................................................................... 113
Devices Energized – Reciprocating Compressor – Diesel Mode ................................................... 113
Devices Energized – Reciprocating Compressor – Electric Mode ................................................. 114
Output Test Mode .................................................................................................................................. 115
Interface Board Test Modes and Current Draw ............................................................................... 116
Display Self Test .................................................................................................................................... 117
Display Self Tests ............................................................................................................................. 118
Evacuation Test ..................................................................................................................................... 119
Software Revision .................................................................................................................................. 121
Set Time and Date .................................................................................................................................. 122
Time Zone............................................................................................................................................... 123
Connect Engine Service Tool ................................................................................................................ 124
4-4
01 December 2012
Guarded Access Menu Overview .................................................................................................................. 125

Using the Guarded Access Menu ................................................................................................................. 127
Entering the Guarded Access Menu ..................................................................................................... 127
Guarded Access Menu Choices.................................................................................................................... 130
Programmable Features (some features are not available if OptiSet Plus is in use) ......................... 130
Main Menu Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 131
Alarms..................................................................................................................................................... 131
Hourmeter Setup .................................................................................................................................... 132
Program Hourmeter .......................................................................................................................... 132
Viewable Hourmeter Setup ............................................................................................................... 132
Program Service Due Date................................................................................................................ 132
Sensor Calibration ................................................................................................................................. 133
Cycle Sentry Setup ................................................................................................................................ 133
Defrost Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 133
Language Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 134
Access Code Setup ................................................................................................................................ 134
OptiSet Plus ........................................................................................................................................... 134
Sensor Configuration (Cargo Watch).................................................................................................... 135
Unit Configuration ................................................................................................................................. 137
4-5
01 December 2012
4-6
01 December 2012
SR-4 PRECEDENT™ UNIT CONTROL PANEL

The SR-4 Precedent Unit Control Panel consists of the SR-4 HMI Control Panel and two data connectors.
The SR-4 HMI (Human/Machine Interface) Control Panel is connected to the Base Controller and is used to
operate the unit and display unit information. The HMI Control Panel communicates with the Base Controller via
a controller area network (CAN) bus.
The Microprocessor Power Switch is located above HMI Control Panel. It is hidden when the lower roadside
body panel surrounding the Control Box is closed.
The two connectors to the right of the SR-4 HMI Control Panel are USB Ports. These connectors remain
accessible when the lower roadside body panel surrounding the Control Box is closed. The upper connector
allows a properly configured flash drive to be connected. The lower connector allows the unit to be connected to
a PC computer using a convention USB cable.
MICRO
PROCESSOR
ON
OFF
THERMO KING
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
USB PORT
FLASH DRIVE ONLY
SR4
Smart Reefer 4 USB PORT
PC COMPUTER ONLY
SR-4 Unit Control Panel

Lower Roadside Body Panel removed to show Control Box
4-7
01 December 2012
USB Connectors
The two unit USB connectors are located to the right side of the SR-4 HMI Control Panel.
Flash Drive Only USB Port Connector

The Flash Drive Only USB Port allows a USB Flash Drive that has been properly configured using the
ThermoServ™ Service Tool to be connected to the unit. The use of the USB Flash Drive eliminates the need for
a PC Computer and cables. The following functions are available using a ThermoServ™ Service Tool
configured USB Flash Drive:
 Upload and download OptiSet Plus™ files. See ThermoServ™ Service Tool for details.
 Download the CargoWatch Data Logger. See ThermoServ™ Service Tool for details.
 Download the ServiceWatch Data Logger. See ThermoServ™ Service Tool for details.
 Flash load software updates to the SR-4 Base Controller and HMI Control Panel. See ThermoServ™
Service Tool for details.
PC Computer Only USB Port Connector

The lower PC Computer Only USB Port allows a PC Computer to be connected to the unit via a standard USB
Cable. The following functions are available using a PC Computer and the ThermoServ™ Service Tool:
 Upload and download OptiSet Plus™ files. See ThermoServ™ Service Tool for details.
 Download the CargoWatch Data Logger. See ThermoServ™ Service Tool for details.
 Download the ServiceWatch Data Logger. See ThermoServ™ Service Tool for details.
 Access the Engine Control Unit (ECU). See ThermoServ™ Service Tool for details.
4-8
01 December 2012
SR-4 HMI CONTROL PANEL

The SR-4 HMI (Human/Machine Interface) Control Panel is connected to the Base Controller and is used to
operate the unit and display unit information. The HMI Control Panel communicates with the Base Controller via
a controller area network (CAN) bus. The HMI Control Panel also contains the ‘Cargo Watch™ Data Logger.
The HMI Control Panel and communication connectors are located on the control box door.
 The HMI Control Panel consists of a display and 8 touch-sensitive keys.
 The display is capable of showing both text and graphics.
 The keys on the left and right sides of the display are dedicated or single function keys.
 The four keys under the display are termed “soft” keys. The functions of these keys change depending
on the operation being performed. If a soft key is active the current key function is shown in the display
directly above the key.
THERMO KING
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35 GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
SR4
Smart Reefer 4
4-9
01 December 2012
Display
THERMO KING
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
SR4
Smart Reefer 4
The display is used to present information to the operator. This information includes setpoint and temperature,
unit operating information, gauge readings, temperatures, alarm codes and other information as selected by the
operator or technician. The Standard Display of box temperature and setpoint is shown above. The unit has a
setpoint of 35°F, and an actual box temperature of 35.8°F.
Display Icons
Display symbols or Icons are used to present additional unit information as shown below.
The down-pointing arrow at the left side of the display shows the unit is cooling. If the arrow
were pointing upward the unit would be heating.
The unit is running in Cycle Sentry Mode as shown by the Cycle Sentry Icon in the upper right
corner of the display. If the Cycle Sentry icon is not present, the unit is running in Continuous
Mode.
The USB Icon in the upper left corner of the display will appear when a USB device is
connected to either of the USB Ports on the Unit Control Panel.
4-10
01 December 2012
Keys
THERMO KING
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
SR4
Smart Reefer 4
Hard Keys
The keys on either side of the display are dedicated or “hard” keys. Their function always remains the same.
The ON Hard Key is used to turn the unit on. First the display will briefly show the Thermo King
ON Logo and then the statement “Configuring System – Please Wait”. When the power-up
sequence is complete the display shows the Standard Display of box temperature and setpoint.
For more information see “Turning the Unit On and Off” later in this section.
The OFF Hard Key is used to turn the unit off. First the display will briefly show “System is
OFF Powering Down – Please Wait. Press On to Resume” and then “Off” will appear momentarily.
When the power-down sequence is complete the display will be blank. For more information
see “Turning the Unit On and Off” later in this section.
The DEFROST Hard Key is used to initiate a manual defrost cycle. For more information see
“Initiating a Manual Defrost Cycle” later in this section.
The CYCLE SENTRY Hard Key is used to select Cycle Sentry Mode or Continuous Mode
operation if allowed by OptiSet Plus. For more information see “Selecting Cycle Sentry or
Continuous Mode” later in this section.
4-11
01 December 2012
Soft Keys
THERMO KING
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
SR4
Smart Reefer 4
The four “soft” keys under the display are multi-purpose keys. Their function changes
depending on the operation being performed. If a soft key is active the key function is shown in
the display directly above the key. The keys are numbered from left to right, with Key 1 on the
far left and Key 4 on the far right.
NOTE: The key function shown in the display will be shown in the language selected. For
example, if German is selected as the display language, then all soft key functions in the
display will be shown in German.
Typical soft key functions:

MENU
NEXT BACK
YES NO
+ -
SELECT EXIT
CLEAR HELP
HOUR METERS SENSORS
GAUGES
4-12
01 December 2012
Configurable Soft Keys

When the Standard Display is shown, the default functions of the two center soft keys are GAUGES and
SENSORS as shown below.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
The functions of these two keys can be changed as required for customer convenience. The functions of these
two soft keys on the Standard Display can be re-assigned to any of the following functions using the Guarded
Access > Main Menu Configuration menu:
 GAUGES  PRETRIP  SOT (Start of Trip)

 SENSORS  DATA LOGGER  HOURMETERS
The GAUGES and SENSORS functions are always available from the Maintenance Menu.
In the example shown below, the soft key functions from the Standard Display have been changed to PRETRIP
and SOT (Start of Trip marker). The GAUGES and SENSORS functions are always available from the
Maintenance Menu.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
PRETRIP
.8
SOT
35
MENU
4-13
01 December 2012
Display Heater
The HMI Control Panel is equipped with a display heater. This heater is needed to make the display visible in
very cold ambient temperatures.
The HMI has its own internal temperature sensor for the display heater. The heater is energized when the unit is
turned on and the ambient temperature is below 29.4°F (-2°C). The heater turns off when the temperature
sensed by the internal sensor rises above 37.4°F (+3°C). The heater draws from 1.4 to 1.7 amps when
energized.
The colder the ambient temperature the longer it will take for the heater to make the display visible on a cold
startup. It may take 10-15 seconds for the display to appear with extremely cold temperatures.
4-14
01 December 2012
TURNING THE UNIT ON
The unit is turned on by pressing the ON Key and off by pressing the OFF Key. When the On Key is pressed the
display briefly shows the THERMO KING Logo as the display initializes.
IMPORTANT: The ON Key must be held down until the Thermo King Logo appears. If the ON Key is not held
down long enough (approximately ½ second), the display may flicker but the unit will not start up. If this occurs,
hold the ON Key down until the Thermo King logo appears.
NOTE: With extremely cold ambient temperatures it may take up to 15 seconds for the display to appear on
initial startup.
ON
OFF
Then the startup screen shown below appears while communications are established and the unit prepares for
operation.
ON CONFIGURING SYSTEM
PLEASE WAIT
OFF
4-15
01 December 2012
Turning the Unit On - (continued)

THIS PAGE ONLY APPLIES IF A USB FLASH DRIVE IS INSERTED IN THE USB FLASH DRIVE PORT
WHEN THE UNIT IS TURNED ON
If a Flash Drive is Connected

If a properly configured USB Flash Drive is inserted in the Flash Drive Only USB Port on the Control Panel when
the unit is turned on, the display will briefly show FLASH DRIVE.
ON
FLASH DRIVE
OFF
Then FLASH DRIVE DETECTED and the Flash Drive Menu will appear on the display as shown below. The
display will be shown for about 30 seconds and then the Standard Display will appear. To go to the Standard
Display immediately press the EXIT Soft Key.
ON
FLASH DRIVE DETECTED
OFF EXIT DOWN FLASH OPTISET

LOAD LOAD PLUS
IMPORTANT: The engine start is not delayed by the Flash Drive Menu shown above. The engine start prompt
will appear and the engine will start. After the engine is started the display will return to the Flash Drive Menu or
the Standard Display.
4-16
01 December 2012
THIS PAGE ONLY APPLIES IF A USB FLASH DRIVE IS INSERTED IN THE USB FLASH DRIVE PORT
WHEN THE UNIT IS TURNED ON
If a properly configured USB Flash Drive is connected to the USB Flash Drive connector, this feature allows the
operator to select the desired Flash Drive function. If enabled when the Flash Drive was configured, the
following functions may be available:
DOWNLOAD
FLASHLOAD
OPTISET PLUS
SEND
 Send OptiSet Plus files
RETRIEVE
 Retrieve OptiSet Plus files
For complete details regarding configuration and use of the USB Flash Drive see the ThermoServ™ Service
Tool documentation.
The Flash Drive is also available from the Main Menu.
The Flash Drive Menu will time out about 30 seconds after the engine starts. When the Flash Drive Menu times
out, the Standard Display will appear as shown on page 4-20. To go to the Standard Display immediately press
the EXIT Key.
4-17
01 December 2012

THIS PAGE ONLY APPLIES IF MORE THAN ONE LANGUAGE IS ENABLED
If a Language is Enabled
If more than one language has been enabled from the Guarded Access Language Menu, a prompt will appear to
allow the desired language to be chosen as shown below. Only languages specifically enabled from the Guarded
Access Menu are available. If a different language is desired, press the NO Key as shown below.
IMPORTANT: The engine start is not delayed by the language prompt shown below. The prompt will appear for
10 seconds and then the engine will start. After the engine is started the display will return to the prompt shown
below.
CURRENT LANGUAGE IS
ON
ENGLISH
OFF OK?
YES NO
The Language menu will appear as shown below. Press the + or – Keys to select the desired language. When
the desired language is shown press the YES Key to confirm the choice.
NEW LANGUAGE WILL BE

ON
DEUTSCH
OFF USE +/- TO CHANGE OK?

- + YES NO
4-18
01 December 2012

THIS PAGE ONLY APPLIES IF MORE THAN ONE LANGUAGE IS ENABLED
The display will briefly show PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE – PLEASE WAIT in the new language as shown
below.
ON
SPRACHE WIRD
PROGRAMMIERT
BITTE WARTEN
OFF
The new language is confirmed, and then the Standard Display will appear in the new language as shown below.
The unit is ready to run.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
MESSGE
RAT
.8
SENSORE
N
35
MENU
4-19
01 December 2012
If Log Alarms are Present

Log Alarms are indicated for 60 seconds each time the unit is turned on. This level of alarm serves as a notice
to take corrective action before a problem becomes severe. Maintenance items such as maintenance hourmeter
time-outs are log alarms. The Temperature Watch screen is not disabled if only log alarm(s) are active.
If log alarm(s) are present the Log Alarm notice shown below will appear on the display for 60 seconds. The
remote indicator alarm light (if installed) will also be on during this period. After 60 seconds the Standard Display
will appear and the remote indicator alarm light will go off. Pressing the EXIT soft key will return to the Standard
Display immediately.
ON LOG ALARMS ACTIVE

GO TO MENU TO VIEW
OFF
EXIT
NOTE: The Alarm Icon does not appear on startup with log alarms present.
When the unit is ready to run the Standard Display appears.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
4-20
01 December 2012
TURNING THE UNIT OFF

Pressing the OFF Key stops unit operation. The unit shuts down immediately and the display briefly shows the
power down message.
SYSTEM IS POWERING DOWN

ON
OFF
The display briefly shows OFF and then goes blank. To start the unit again, press the ON Key.
ON
OFF
OFF
4-21
01 December 2012
THE STANDARD DISPLAY

The Standard Display is the default display that appears if no other display function is selected. The Standard
Display shows the box temperature and setpoint. The box temperature is that measured by the controlling
sensor, usually the return air sensor. The box temperature here is 35.8°F with a 35°F setpoint.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35 GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
The down-pointing arrow at the left side of the display shows the unit is cooling. If the arrow
were pointing upward the unit would be heating.
The unit is running in Cycle Sentry Mode as shown by the Cycle Sentry Icon in the upper right
corner of the display. If the Cycle Sentry icon is not present, the unit would be running in
Continuous Mode.
The USB Icon in the upper left corner of the display will appear when a USB Flash Drive is
connected to the Flash Drive Only USB Port or a PC computer is connected to the PC Only
USB Port on the Unit Control Panel.
Pressing the left soft key allows the user to change the SETPOINT, and pressing the right soft key accesses the
MAIN MENU. The other two soft keys access the GAUGES menu and the SENSORS menu.
NOTE: The functions of the GAUGES and SENSORS soft keys may be re-assigned to better suit customer
requirements. The GAUGES and SENSORS functions are always available from the Maintenance Menu.
4-22
01 December 2012
THE TEMPERATURE WATCH DISPLAY

The TemperatureWatch Display appears 2 ½ minutes after the Standard Display appears so long as there is no
key activity and no check, prevent or shutdown alarms are present. The TemperatureWatch Display will remain
on until any key is pressed or a check, prevent or shutdown alarm occurs.
The TemperatureWatch Display shows the box temperature and setpoint. The large numbers allow unit
conditions to be checked from a distance. The box temperature is that measured by the controlling sensor,
usually the return air sensor. The box temperature here is 35.8°F with a 35°F setpoint. The Cycle Sentry icon in
the upper right corner of the display shows that the unit is operating in Cycle Sentry mode. If the Cycle Sentry
icon is not present, the unit is running in Continuous Mode. The down-pointing arrow indicates that the unit is
cooling. Pressing any soft key returns the display to the Standard Display. The USB Icon next to the Cycle
Sentry Icon in the upper right corner of the display indicates that a USB Flash Drive is inserted in the USB Port
on the Unit Control Panel.
TEMPERATURE SETPOINT
°F
35
ON
OFF .8
35
MENU
If an alarm condition (other than a log alarm) is present, the TemperatureWatch Display will not appear. If an
alarm condition occurs while the TemperatureWatch Display is present the display will return to the Standard
Display to indicate that an alarm condition has occurred.
If the Defrost Key or Cycle Sentry Key is pressed, the display will return to the TemperatureWatch Display
immediately after the defrost cycle is initiated or the operating mode is changed.
4-23
01 December 2012
CHANGING THE SETPOINT

The Setpoint is changed from the Standard Display. If the TemperatureWatch display is present, press any key
to return to the Standard Display.
IMPORTANT: If OptiSet Plus is in use there are several possible options when changing the setpoint.
Numerical Setpoints
If OptiSet Plus is not in use or if only Numerical Setpoints are enabled the left soft key will be labeled SETPOINT
as shown below.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
Named Products – OptiSet Plus

OptiSet Plus allows the use of Named Products such as APPLES or BANANAS in place of a numerical setpoint.
If only named products are enabled the left soft key will be labeled PRODUCT as shown below.
 A single setpoint temperature may be allowed for the specific named product.
 A numerical setpoint range may be allowed for the specific named product.
ON
°F
OFF
PRODUCT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
4-24
01 December 2012
Changing the Setpoint – (continued)
Both Numerical Setpoints and Named Products

OptiSet Plus can allow the use of both Numerical Setpoints and Named Products. If both numerical setpoints
and named products are enabled the left soft key will be labeled PRODUCT/SETPOINT as shown below.
ON
°F
OFF
35
PRODUCT/
SETPOINT
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
4-25
01 December 2012
Changing the Setpoint – Numerical Setpoint

If the Temperature Watch display is shown, press any soft key to return to the Standard Display. From the
Standard Display, press the SETPOINT Key.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
The setpoint display appears as shown below.
CURRENT SETPOINT
ON
35 F
+/- TO CHANGE
OFF
- + EXIT
The “-“ and “+” Keys are used to increase or decrease the setpoint until the desired setpoint is shown. Here the
setpoint has been changed to 40°F using the “+” Key.
NEW SETPOINT WILL BE
ON
40 F
+/- TO CHANGE OK?
OFF
- + YES NO
4-26
01 December 2012
The YES and NO Keys confirm the setpoint change. When the desired setpoint has been selected using the “+”
and/or “-“ Keys, press the YES Key to confirm and load the new setpoint. If the setpoint is changed using the “+”
or “-“ Keys, the change must be confirmed or rejected by pressing the YES or NO Key within 10 seconds of
changing the setpoint. A warning beep will sound for 5 seconds as a reminder.
Failure to confirm the new setpoint by pressing Yes or No within 10 seconds of changing the setpoint will result in
no setpoint change. In addition, Alarm Code 127 Setpoint Not Entered is set, to indicate that a setpoint change
was initiated but not completed.
NEW SETPOINT WILL BE
ON
40 F
+/- TO CHANGE OK?
OFF
- + YES NO
After the YES Key has been pressed, the display briefly shows PROGRAMMING NEW SETPOINT – PLEASE
WAIT. The display then confirms the new setpoint for several seconds.
NEW SETPOINT IS
ON
40 F
OFF
If the NO Key is pressed the display will briefly show SETPOINT NOT CHANGED and return to the Standard
Display. The Standard Display will show the old setpoint.
4-27
01 December 2012
The display then returns to the Standard Display showing the new setpoint. Notice that the arrow now points up,
to indicate that the unit is heating.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
40
MENU
IMPORTANT: If the setpoint is changed using the “+” or “-“ Keys, the change must be confirmed or
rejected by pressing the YES or NO Key within 10 seconds of changing the setpoint.
 If the YES Key is pressed, the setpoint change made with the “+” or “-“ Key is accepted, the setpoint
changes, and the display returns to the Standard Display.
 If the NO Key is pressed the setpoint change made with the “+” or “-“ Key is not accepted, the setpoint is
not changed, and the display returns to the Standard Display.
 If the YES or NO Key is not pressed within 10 seconds of making a change with the “+” or “-“ Key, the
setpoint is not changed and the display returns to the Standard Display. The display briefly shows
[SETPOINT NOT CHANGED] and Alarm Code 127 Setpoint Not Entered is set, to indicate that a
setpoint change was initiated but not completed.
4-28
01 December 2012
Changing the Setpoint – Named Product

Standard Display, press the PRODUCT Key. Note that PRODUCT is displayed in place of SETPOINT as shown
below.
GRAPEFRUIT, ARIZONA
ON
°F
OFF
PRODUCT
59 GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
59
MENU
The display briefly shows PRODUCT and then the setpoint display appears as shown below.
CURRENT PRODUCT IS
ON
GRAPEFRUIT, ARIZONA
+/- TO CHANGE
OFF
- + EXIT
The “-“ and “+” Keys are used to change the Named Product until the desired product is shown. Here the product
has been changed to Potato, Late Crop.
NEW PRODUCT WILL BE
ON
POTATO, LATE CROP
+/- TO CHANGE OK?

OFF
- + YES NO
4-29
01 December 2012

The YES and NO Keys confirm the product change. When the desired product has been selected using the “+”
and/or “-“ Keys, press the YES Key to confirm and load the new product. If the product is changed using the “+”
or “-“ Keys, the change must be confirmed or rejected by pressing the YES or NO Key within 10 seconds of
changing the product. A warning beep will sound for 5 seconds as a reminder.
Failure to confirm the new product by pressing Yes or No within 10 seconds of changing the product will result in
no product change. In addition, Alarm Code 127 Setpoint Not Entered is set, to indicate that the product change
was initiated but not completed.
NEW PRODUCT WILL BE
ON
POTATO, LATE CROP
+/- TO CHANGE OK?

OFF
- + YES NO
After the YES Key has been pressed, the display briefly shows PROGRAMMING NAMED PRODUCT – PLEASE
WAIT. The display then confirms the new setpoint for several seconds.
NEW NAMED PRODUCT IS

ON
POTATO, LATE CROP
OFF
If the NO Key is pressed the display will briefly show SETPOINT NOT CHANGED and return to the Standard
Display. The Standard Display will show the old setpoint.
4-30
01 December 2012

The display then returns to the Standard Display showing the new named product. Notice that the arrow points
down, to indicate that the unit is cooling.
POTATO, LATE CROP
ON
°F
OFF
45
PRODUCT GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
45
MENU
IMPORTANT: If the named product is changed using the “+” or “-“ Keys, the change must be confirmed
or rejected by pressing the YES or NO Key within 10 seconds of changing the named product.
* If the YES Key is pressed, the product change made with the “+” or “-“ Key is accepted, the product
changes, and the display returns to the Standard Display.
* If the NO Key is pressed the product change made with the “+” or “-“ Key is not accepted, the product is
not changed, and the display returns to the Standard Display.
* If the YES or NO Key is not pressed within 10 seconds of making a change with the “+” or “-“ Key, the
product is not changed and the display returns to the Standard Display. The display briefly shows
[SETPOINT NOT CHANGED] and Alarm Code 127 Setpoint Not Entered is set, to indicate that the
product change was initiated but not completed.
4-31
01 December 2012
Changing the Setpoint – Both Numerical Setpoint and Named Product Available
Standard Display, press the SETPOINT Key. Note that both PRODUCT and SETPOINT are displayed as shown
below.
ON
°F
OFF
PRODUCT/
SETPOINT
35GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
The NAMED PRODUCT / NUMERIC SETPOINT prompt will appear as shown below.
ON NAMED PRODUCT / NUMERIC

SETPOINT?
OFF
EXIT NAMED NUMERIC
 Press the NUMERIC Soft Key to proceed with Changing the Setpoint – Numeric Setpoint change as
previously shown on page 24.
 Press the NAMED Soft Key to proceed with Changing the Setpoint – Named Product change as shown
previously on page 27.
 Press the EXIT Soft Key to return to the Standard Display.
4-32
01 December 2012
STARTING THE DIESEL ENGINE
Diesel engine preheats and starts are automatic in both Continuous Mode and Cycle Sentry Mode. The engine
will preheat and start as required when the unit is turned on. The engine preheat and start will be delayed in
Cycle Sentry mode if there is no current need for the engine to run. If any keys are being pressed on the HMI
Control Panel the engine will not preheat and start until 10 seconds after the last key is pressed.
NOTE: If the unit is equipped with optional Electric Standby there may be some additional prompts before the
engine will start. See STARTING THE ELECTRIC MOTOR on the following pages for details.
CAUTION: The engine may start automatically any time the unit is turned on.
WARNING: Never use starting fluid.
When the engine is preparing to start the HMI Control Panel will display the engine start screen, as shown below.
The preheat buzzer sounds during the engine preheat and crank sequence.
ON
DIESEL ENGINE STARTING
OFF
After the engine is started the display returns to the Standard Display of temperature and setpoint.
4-33
01 December 2012
STARTING THE ELECTRIC MOTOR
Units equipped with the Electric Standby option only
Electric motor starting is automatic in both Continuous Mode and Cycle Sentry Mode. The motor will start as
required when the unit is turned on. If any keys are being pressed on the HMI Control Panel prior to the motor
start, the motor start will be delayed until 10 seconds after the last key is pressed.
CAUTION: The motor may start automatically any time the unit is turned on.
When the motor is preparing to start the HMI Control Panel will display the motor start screen, as shown below.
The preheat buzzer sounds for 20 seconds before the electric motor starts.
ON
ELECTRIC MOTOR STARTING
OFF
4-34
01 December 2012
SWITCHING FROM DIESEL TO ELECTRIC

If the Diesel to Electric Autoswitch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is set YES then the unit will automatically
switch to Electric Mode operation when standby power is connected and available.
If the Diesel to Electric Autoswitch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is set NO then the prompt screen shown
below will appear when standby power is connected and available.
ELECTRIC STANDBY DETECTED

ON
DO YOU WISH TO SWITCH TO
ELECTRIC?
OFF
YES NO
If NO is selected, then the unit will continue to operate in Diesel Mode. If YES is selected then the display will
briefly show the screen below.
PROGRAMMING ELECTRIC
ON STANDBY
OFF PLEASE WAIT
Electric Mode operation will briefly be confirmed. If unit operation is required the electric motor will start as
shown previously under STARTING THE ELECTRIC MOTOR.
If the Diesel to Electric Autoswitch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is set NO then the unit can also be
switched from Diesel mode to Electric mode operation using the Electric Standby Selection from the Main Menu
as shown later in this section.
4-35
01 December 2012
SWITCHING FROM ELECTRIC TO DIESEL

If the Electric to Diesel Autoswitch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is set YES then the unit will automatically
switch to Diesel Mode operation when standby power is turned off or is no longer available.
If the Electric to Diesel Autoswitch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is set NO and standby power is
disconnected or fails, the unit will not automatically switch to Diesel mode. This is primarily designed to prevent
unauthorized diesel engine starts when the truck is indoors or on a ferry where engine operation is strictly
prohibited. If the Electric to Diesel Autoswitch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is set NO then the prompt
screen shown below will appear when standby power is turned off or is no longer available.
ELECTRIC STANDBY NOT DETECTED

ON
DO YOU WISH TO SWITCH TO
DIESEL?
OFF
YES NO
If YES is selected then the display will briefly show the screen below.
ON
PROGRAMMING DIESEL MODE
OFF PLEASE WAIT
Diesel Mode operation will briefly be confirmed. If unit operation is required the diesel engine will start as shown
previously under STARTING THE DIESEL ENGINE.
If the Electric to Diesel Autoswitch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is set NO then the unit can also be
switched from Diesel mode to Electric mode operation using the Diesel Selection from the Main Menu as shown
later in this section.
4-36
01 December 2012
INITIATING A MANUAL DEFROST CYCLE
Defrost cycles are usually initiated automatically based on time or demand. Manual defrost is also available
Manual defrost is available if the unit is running and the evaporator coil temperature is less than or equal to 45°F
(7°C).
NOTE: If the Rail Alternate feature is set YES defrost is allowed with an evaporator coil temperature less
than or equal to 55°F (13°C).
Other features such as door switch settings may not allow manual defrost under some conditions. To initiate a
manual defrost cycle, press the Defrost Key as shown below.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
The display briefly shows [DEFROST], [PROGRAMMING DEFROST - PLEASE WAIT] and then [DEFROST
STARTED].
ON
DEFROST STARTED
OFF
4-37
01 December 2012
Initiating a Manual Defrost Cycle - continued
The display then shows the Defrost display. The bar indicator shows approximately how much time remains to
complete the defrost cycle. The bar indicator below shows that the defrost cycle is about 25% complete.
ON
35
OFF
SET GAUGES SENSORS MENU
POINT
If conditions do not allow a defrost cycle, the display shown below will briefly appear. The display will then return
to the Standard Display.
ON
DEFROST NOT AVAILABLE
OFF
Terminating a Defrost Cycle

The defrost cycle terminates automatically when the coil temperature is greater than or equal to 58°F (14°C) or
the defrost timer expires. Defrost can also be terminated by turning the unit off and back on.
NOTE: If Rail Alternate is set YES the defrost cycle terminates at 70°F (21°C) or if the defrost timer
expires.
4-38
01 December 2012
SELECTING CYCLE SENTRY OR CONTINUOUS MODE
When Cycle Sentry Mode is selected the unit will start and stop automatically to maintain setpoint, keep the
engine warm and the battery charged. When Continuous Mode is selected, the unit starts automatically and runs
continuously to maintain setpoint and provide constant airflow.
IMPORTANT: Cycle Sentry or Continuous Mode may not be selectable if OptiSet Plus is in use.
If the unit is operating in Cycle Sentry Mode, the Cycle Sentry Icon will be present in the upper right corner of the
display as shown below. If the Cycle Sentry Icon is not present the unit is operating in Continuous Mode.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
If allowed by OptiSet Plus, Cycle Sentry Mode or Continuous Mode is selected by pressing the Cycle
Sentry/Continuous Key as shown below.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
NOTE: Cycle Sentry Mode or Continuous Mode can also be selected using the Main Menu > Mode Submenu.
4-39
01 December 2012
Selecting Cycle Sentry or Continuous Mode - (continued)
If the unit is in Cycle Sentry Mode, pressing the Cycle Sentry/Continuous Key changes the mode from Cycle
Sentry Mode to Continuous Mode. The display confirms the change, as shown below.
ON PROGRAMMING CONT MODE
PLEASE WAIT
OFF
The new mode is confirmed for 3 seconds.
ON NEW SYSTEM MODE IS
CONTINUOUS
OFF
The display then returns to the Standard Display. In the example shown below the absence of the Cycle Sentry
Icon indicates that the unit is running in Continuous Mode.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
4-40
01 December 2012
Selecting Cycle Sentry or Continuous Mode - (continued)
Pressing the Cycle Sentry/Continuous Key again allows the operator to change back to Cycle Sentry Mode
operation.
IMPORTANT: If the unit is in Cycle Sentry Null and the mode is switched to Continuous Mode, the unit will start
automatically.
IMPORTANT: Cycle Sentry or Continuous Mode may not be selectable if OptiSet Plus is in use.
4-41
01 December 2012
USING THE GAUGES KEY
The GAUGES Key allows the operator to view the unit gauges. If the function of this key has been reassigned,
the GAUGES Menu is also available in the Maintenance Menu.
To access the GAUGES Menu, press the GAUGES Key.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
The first gauge display will appear. Press the NEXT and BACK Keys to scroll thru the gauges. Pressing the
LOCK Key will lock the current gauge on the display.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
ON
13.8 v
OFF
EXIT LOCK BACK NEXT
The gauges and I/O conditions available are shown on the next page. Not all gauges or I/O conditions may
appear depending on unit configuration and software revision.
To return to the Standard Display press the EXIT Key.
4-42
01 December 2012
Gauges Available
Coolant Temperature – Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.

Coolant Level – Displays the coolant level in the overflow tank.
Engine Oil Pressure – Displays the engine oil pressure as OK or LOW.
Engine Oil Level Switch – Displays the engine oil level as OK or LOW.
Amps – Displays the current flow in amps flowing to or from the unit battery
Battery Voltage – Displays the voltage of the unit battery.
Accessory Battery Voltage – Displays the voltage at the alternator.
Engine RPM – Displays the engine speed in RPMs.
Fuel Level Sensor – Displays the fuel level if a fuel level sensor is installed.
Discharge Pressure – Displays the unit discharge pressure. (ETV units only)
Suction Pressure – Displays the unit suction pressure. (ETV units only)
ETV Position – Displays the current position of the ETV valve. (ETV units only)
Fresh Air Exchange – Displays the current position of the optional Fresh Air Exchange Door
I/O (Input/Output State) – Displays the current state of the input/output devices listed below.
 High Speed Relay/Electric Heat  Spare Output 1
 Run Relay  Spare Output 2
 Run Relay Feedback  Spare Output 3
 Alternator Excite Output  Spare Output 4
 Defrost Damper  Spare Output 5
 Heat Output  Fresh Air Exchange Output
 Motor RPM  Fresh Air Exchange Feedback
 Spare Digital Input 1  Diesel/Electric Relay (Model 50 units only)
 Spare Digital Input 2  Electric Ready Input (Model 50 units only)
 Spare Digital Input 3  Electric overload (Model 50 units only)
 Spare Digital Input 4  Hot Gas Bypass (ETV units only)
 Spare Analog Input 1
 Spare Analog Input 2
4-43
01 December 2012
USING THE SENSORS KEY
The SENSORS Key allows the operator to view the unit gauges. If the function of this key has been reassigned,
the SENSORS Menu is also available in the Maintenance Menu.
To access the SENSORS Menu, press the SENSORS Key.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
The first sensor display will appear. Press the NEXT and BACK Keys to scroll thru the sensors. Pressing the
LOCK Key will lock the current sensor on the display.
CONTROL DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE
ON
48. 3 °F
OFF
EXIT LOCK BACK NEXT
The sensors available are shown on the next page.
4-44
01 December 2012
Sensors Available
Control Return Air Temperature – Displays the temperature of the control return air sensor.
Display Return Air Temperature – Displays the temperature of the display return air sensor.
Control Discharge Air Temperature – Displays the temperature of the control discharge air sensor.
Display Discharge Air Temperature – Displays the temperature of the display discharge air sensor.
Temperature Differential – Displays the calculated difference between the control return air sensor and the
control discharge air sensor.
Evaporator Coil Temperature – Displays the temperature of the evaporator coil sensor.
Ambient Air Temperature – Displays the temperature of the ambient air sensor.
Spare 1 Temperature – Displays the temperature of the spare 1 temperature sensor.
Log Sensor 1 – Displays the temperature of the CargoWatch Data Logger temperature sensor 1.
Board Temperature Sensor – Displays the internal temperature of the HMI Control Panel pc board.
4-45
01 December 2012
MAIN MENU OVERVIEW

SR-4 Precedent Trailer S/T Operator & Main Menu - 8035 b206 & 7A00 b642
Setpoint Setpoint 2.5 Min TempWatch

Change Soft Key Time- Display
Standard out
Press Any Soft Key
Gauges
Display Menu Main
Gauges Menu
(See Note 1) Soft Key Soft Key Menu
Pretrip
Coolant Temperature Sensors Soft Key Flash Drive (If connected)
Coolant Level Language (If enabled)
Engine Oil Pressure
Sensors Menu Alarms
Engine Oil Level
(See Note 1) Display all alarms
Amps
Clear most alarms
Battery Voltage Control Return Air Temp
Accessory Battery Voltage Display Return Air Temp Gauges
Engine RPM Control Discharge Air Temp Sensors
Fuel Level Sensor Display Discharge Air Temp Datalogger (CargoWatch)
Discharge Pressure Temperature Differential Start Trip
Suction Pressure Evaporator Coil Temp Print / View
ETV Position Ambient Air Temp Hourmeters
Fresh Air Exchange Spare 1 Temp Total Unit Run Hours
I/O (Inputs/Outputs) Log Sensor 1 Total Run Time Hours
High Speed Relay Log Sensor 2 Total Engine Run Hours
Run Relay Log Sensor 3 Total Electric Run Hours
Run Relay Feedback Log Sensor 4 Total Run Reminder 1
Alternator Excite Output Log Sensor 5 Total Run Reminder 2
Defrost Damper Log Sensor 6 Controller Power On
Heat Output Board Temperature Sensor Pretrip Reminder
Motor RPM Engine Reminder 1
Spare Digital Input 1 Engine Reminder 2
Spare Digital Input 4 Mode
Spare Analog Input 1 Turn Cycle Sentry On or Off
Spare Analog Input 2 (Off = Continuous)
Spare Output 1 Degrees - Fahrenheit | Celsius
Spare Output 2 Keypad Lockout
Spare Output 3 Start Sleep Mode
Spare Output 4 Note 1 This key can be user Program Wakeup Time
Spare Output 5 assigned from the Guarded If YES
Fresh Air Exchange Output Access > Main Menu Day to Wake Up
Fresh Air Exchange Feedback Configuration Menu. Choices Hour to Wake Up
Diesel/Electric Relay (50 only) available are Sensors, Gauges, Minutes to Wake Up
Electric Ready Input (50 Only) Pretrip, Datalogger, SOT and Open/Close Fresh Air Vent
Electric Overload (50 only) Hourmeters. Default setting Electric Standby or Diesel Mode
Hot Gas Bypass (ETV only) shown. Adjust Brightness
High – Medium – Low – Off
Time
Time/Date (Display Only)
may appear
4-46
01 December 2012
USING THE MAIN MENU
The Main Menu contains several additional submenus that allow the operator to view information and modify unit
operation. To access the Main Menu press the MENU Key.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
The first Main Menu choice will appear. Press and hold the UP and DOWN Keys to scroll thru the menu choices.
When the desired selection is shown on the display, press the SELECT Key to access it. The Pretrip submenu is
shown here.
MAIN MENU
PRETRIP
ON
LANGUAGE
ALARMS
GAUGES
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
The Main Menu choices are shown below. For detailed information see the individual explanations of each
submenu item on the following pages.
 Pretrip  Gauges  Mode  Clear ECU Faults

 Flash Drive  Sensors  Electric Standby
 Language  Data Logger  Adjust Brightness
 Alarms  Hourmeters  Time
4-47
01 December 2012
MAIN MENU FEATURES
Pretrip
A Pretrip Test verifies unit operation. This display allows a Pretrip Test to be selected and initiated by the
operator. If the Pretrip Test is entered with the unit shut down a Full Pretrip Test with device amp checks will be
performed. If the Pretrip Test is entered with the unit running in either diesel or electric mode a Running Pretrip
Test is performed. Test results are reported as PASS, CHECK or FAIL when the Pretrip Test is completed.
Pretrip Test Conditions

 Current unit settings are saved and restored at the end of the Pretrip Test or if the unit is turned off and
back on.
 Pretrip Test can be run in either Diesel or Electric Mode.
 The unit will auto switch from Diesel Mode to Electric Mode or from Electric Mode to Diesel Mode during
a Pretrip Test if these features are enabled and the auto switch conditions occur.
Conditions where Pretrip Tests are not allowed

 If any shutdown alarms are present. Pretrip tests are allowed with some Check and Log alarms.
 If the unit is in Sleep Mode.
 If the unit is in Service Test Mode, Interface Board Test Mode or Evacuation Mode.
Pretrip Test Sequence

Pretrip tests proceed in the order shown below. A Full Pretrip Test includes all tests. A Running Pretrip Test is
started with the engine or motor running and does not include the Amp Checks or Engine Start Check.
 Amp Checks – Each electrical control component is energized and the current drawn is confirmed as
within specification.
 Engine Start – The Engine will start automatically.
 Defrost – If the coil temperature is below 45°F (7°C), a defrost cycle is initiated.
 RPM Check – The engine RPM in high and low speed is checked during the Cool Check.
 Cool Check – The ability of the unit to cool in low speed is checked.
 Heat Check - The ability of the unit to heat in low speed is checked.
 Report Test Results – The test results are reported as PASS, CHECK or FAIL when the Pretrip Test is
completed. If test results are CHECK or FAIL alarm codes will exist to direct the technician to the source
of the problem.
4-48
01 December 2012
Pretrip Test Considerations

When performing a Pretrip Test, the following issues should be considered.
 If running a Pretrip Test on a trailer loaded with dry cargo, insure that proper airflow can occur around the
load. If the load restricts airflow, false test results may occur. Also, SR-2 units have high refrigeration
capacity which results in rapid temperature changes. Sensitive dry cargo may be damaged as a result.
 If running a Pretrip Test on a trailer that has just been washed down, the extremely high humidity inside
the trailer may result in false test results.
 If running a Pretrip Test on a trailer loaded with sensitive cargo, monitor the load temperature during the
test as normal temperature control is suspended during pre-trip operation.
 Always perform Pretrip Tests with the trailer cargo doors closed to prevent false test failures.
Performing a Pretrip Test

If a Pretrip Test is initiated with the engine shut down a Full Pretrip Test will be performed. If a Pretrip Test is
initiated with the engine or motor running a Running Pretrip Test is performed.
 Before initiating a Pretrip Test, clear all alarm codes.

 To stop a Pretrip Test at any time turn the unit off.
Pretrip Tests are initiated using the Pretrip Menu. From the Standard Display, press the MENU Key.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35 GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
4-49
01 December 2012
The Main Menu will appear. Press the UP or DOWN Key as required to choose the Pretrip Menu. When the
Pretrip Menu is shown press the SELECT Key to start a Pretrip Test.
MAIN MENU
PRETRIP
ON
LANGUAGE
ALARMS
GAUGES
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
The display will briefly show PROGRAMMING PRETRIP MODE. If the unit is not running a Full Pretrip Test will
be initiated. If the unit is running in either diesel or electric mode a Running Pretrip Test will be performed.
PROGRAMMING PRETRIP MODE

ON
OFF
If all alarms were not cleared a prompt appears as shown below. Exit the Pretrip Test, clear all alarms and
repeat the Pretrip Test.
ON NO PRETRIP -- ALARM ACTIVE
OFF
EXIT
4-50
01 December 2012
If all alarms were cleared, the Pretrip Test display appears.
NON-RUNNING PRETRIP
TEST 1 OF 26
ON
SENSOR CHECK
OFF
HOUR SENSORS GAUGES
METERS
 The top line of the display indicates the unit is performing the non-running portion of the Pretrip Test.
 The second line measures test progress. The number of tests completed of the total number of tests to
be performed is shown. In the example above the unit is performing Test 1 of 26, Sensor Check.
 The soft keys may be used during the Pretrip Test to select the Hourmeter, Gauge or Sensor menus.
 To stop a Pretrip Test at any time turn the unit off. This will generate Alarm Code 28 Pretrip Abort.
Other alarm codes may also be generated. This is normal when the Pretrip Test is halted before
completion.
When the non-running tests are complete the unit will start automatically and continue with the Running Pretrip
Test. In the example shown below the unit is in the Running Pretrip and is performing Test 21 of 26, Cool Test.
RUNNING PRETRIP
TEST 21 OF 26
ON
COOL TEST
OFF
HOUR SENSORS GAUGES
METERS
4-51
01 December 2012
When all tests are complete, the results are reported as PASS, CHECK or FAIL. If the results are CHECK or
FAIL, the accompanying alarm codes will direct the technician to the cause of the problem.
PRETRIP
ON
PASS
OFF EXIT
If the Pretrip Test results are CHECK or FAIL the problem should be diagnosed and corrected before the unit is
released for service.
To return to the Main Menu press the EXIT Key. To return to the Standard display press the EXIT Key again.
4-52
01 December 2012
Flash Drive
If a properly configured USB Flash Drive is currently connected to the USB Port on the unit Control Panel, the
Flash Drive Menu will appear as a Main Menu selection. If a properly configured USB Flash Drive is connected
to the USB Flash Drive connector, this feature allows the operator to select the desired Flash Drive function. If
enabled when the Flash Drive was configured, the following functions may be available:
DOWNLOAD
FLASHLOAD
OPTISET PLUS
SEND
 Send OptiSet Plus files
RETRIEVE
 Retrieve OptiSet Plus files
If a USB Flash Drive is not connected to the unit, this feature will not appear in the Main Menu.
Flash Drive Icon

 The USB Icon will appear in the upper left corner of the display as shown below when a
USB Flash Drive is inserted in the USB Flash Drive USB Port on the Unit Control Panel.
 The USB Icon will also appear if a computer is connected to the USB PC Computer USB
Port on the Unit Control Panel.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
4-53
01 December 2012
Selecting the Flash Drive Menu from the Main Menu (If Already Connected)
To select the Flash Drive Menu, press the MENU Key.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
The Main Menu will appear. If a properly configured USB Flash Drive is connected to the Flash Drive Only USB
Port on the Control Panel, the Flash Drive Menu will appear as a main Menu selection.
MAIN MENU
FLASH DRIVE
ON
PRETRIP
LANGUAGES
ALARMS
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
Press the UP or DOWN Key as required to choose the Flash Drive Menu. When the Flash Drive Menu is shown
press the SELECT Key to select the Flash Drive menu.
ON

LOAD LOAD PLUS
Tool documentation.
4-54
01 December 2012
Flash Drive (If Connected While the Unit is Turned On)

If a properly configured USB Flash Drive is connected to the USB Port on the unit Control Panel while the unit is
turned on, a Flash Drive indication will appear for several seconds. Then the Flash Drive Menu will be shown.
ON

LOAD LOAD PLUS
Tool documentation.
Removing the Flash Drive

If the Flash Drive is disconnected, the display shown below will appear for 30 seconds and the display will return
to the Standard Display. To return to the Standard Display immediately press the EXIT Soft Key.
ON FLASH DRIVE REMOVED
OFF EXIT HELP
If the HELP Soft Key is pressed the display shown below will appear.
FLASH DRIVE REMOVED
ON PLEASE CHECK THE FLASH DRIVE FOR

PROPER INSERTION – REMOVE AND
REINSERT
OFF EXIT
4-55
01 December 2012
Languages (If Enabled)

If more than one language is enabled from the Guarded Access > Language Menu, this menu item will appear. If
only one language is enabled, this menu will not appear. The Language Menu allows the operator to select a
language from a list of up to 11 enabled languages. All subsequent displays are shown in the selected language.
Four different language packages with a total of 24 languages are available. English is the default language and
is provided in each of the packages. See the Guarded Access Language Setup Menu in Section 3 of this manual
for details.
If Languages are not enabled from the Guarded Access Menu, this feature will not appear in the Main Menu.
IMPORTANT: Exercise care when changing languages, as once changed all HMI Control Panel displays will be
in the new language.
Available Languages
The following languages are available:
 English
 Spanish
 French
 German
 Italian
 Dutch
 Portuguese
 Greek
 Turkish
 Hebrew
 Arabic
4-56
01 December 2012
Selecting an Alternate Language

To select an alternate language, press the MENU Key.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
The Main Menu will appear. If more than one language is enabled, the Language Menu will appear as a main
Menu selection. Press the UP or DOWN Key as required to choose the Language Menu. When the Language
Menu is shown press the SELECT Key to select the Language menu.
MAIN MENU
PRETRIP
ON
LANGUAGE
ALARMS
GAUGES
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
The Language menu will appear as shown below. Press the + or – Keys to select the desired language. Only
languages enabled from the Guarded Access Menu are available. When the desired language is shown press
the YES Key to confirm the choice.
NEW LANGUAGE WILL BE

ON
DEUTSCH
USE +/- TO CHANGE OK?

OFF
- + YES NO
4-57
01 December 2012
The display will briefly show PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE – PLEASE WAIT in the new language. The display
will then return to the Language Menu, but will show the new language. German is shown below.
HAUPTMENU
ON
SPRACHE
OFF
BEENDEN AUSWHAL WEITER
Repeat the process to select a different language. To select a different Main Menu item press the NEXT
(WEITER) Key. To return to the Standard Display press the EXIT (BEENDEN) Key.
All displays will now be in the new language. Deutsch (German) is shown here.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
MESSGE
RAT
.8
SENSORE
N
35
MENU
4-58
01 December 2012
Language Menu Quick Access

Should it be necessary at any time to change to English or any other installed language, return to the Standard
Display and then press and hold the first and last soft keys for 5 seconds as shown below. The Standard Display
here is shown in Deutsch (German).
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35 MESSGE
RAT
.8
SENSORE
N
35
MENU
After 5 seconds the Language Menu will appear in the current language as shown below. Press the + or – Keys
to select the desired language. When the desired language is shown press the YA (YES) Key to confirm the
choice.
NEUE SPRACHE
ON
DEUTSCH
OFF MIT +/- ANDERN OK?

- + YA NEIN
Note that all languages in the installed software can be selected using this method.
4-59
01 December 2012
Alarms
The Alarm Menu allows the operator to view any active alarms, and allows most alarms to be cleared.
Log Alarms
If only Log Alarms exist the display shown below will appear and the optional remote alarm light will light for 30
seconds when the unit is turned on.

GO TO MENU TO VIEW
OFF
EXIT
Check Alarms
If a Check Alarm condition occurs while the unit is running the alarm icon will appear in the display as shown
below.
ON
OFF
SET
35
POINT
GAUGES SENSORS
35
MENU
4-60
01 December 2012
Shutdown Alarms
If a Shutdown Alarm occurs while the unit is running it will be indicated by all of the following:
 The Alarm Icon will appear.
 The display, backlight and optional remote alarm light will flash on and off.
 The display will switch from normal video to reverse video and back to normal video. (Light areas
become dark and dark areas become light.)
ON
OFF SET
35
POINT
GAUGES SENSORS
35
MENU
Pretrip Alarms
If an alarm occurs during a Pretrip Test the alarm code will be displayed as Pretrip Alarm XX, where XX is the
alarm code.
Alarm Codes When Switching Between Diesel and Electric

If a shutdown alarm occurs that affects only diesel mode operation and the unit is switched to electric, the diesel
mode shutdown alarm becomes an electric mode log alarm. This allows the unit to run in electric mode without
clearing the shutdown alarm that is preventing diesel mode operation. If the unit is switched back to diesel
mode, the alarm again become a diesel mode shutdown alarm and prevents unit operation.
In the same manner, if a shutdown alarm occurs that affects only electric mode operation and the unit is switched
to diesel, the electric mode shutdown alarm becomes a diesel mode log alarm to allow diesel mode operation. If
the unit is switched back to electric mode, the alarm reverts to an electric mode shutdown alarm and prevents
unit operation. If the unit is configured for electric to diesel autoswitch, it automatically starts and runs in diesel
mode if an electric shutdown occurs.
4-61
01 December 2012
Clearing Alarm Codes

Most alarm codes can be cleared conventionally from the Alarm Menu using the CLEAR Key.
The following control and display sensor alarm codes can only be cleared from the Maintenance Menu or
Guarded Access Menu:
 Alarm Code 03 Check Control Return Air Sensor
 Alarm Code 04 Check Control Discharge Air Sensor
 Alarm Code 203 Check Display Return Air Sensor
 Alarm Code 204 Check Display Discharge Air Sensor
The following alarm codes clear automatically:

 Alarm Code 64 Pretrip Reminder – Clears when a Pretrip Test is performed.
 Alarm Code 84 Restart Null – Clears when the unit is no longer in a restart null due to a Prevent Alarm.
 Alarm Code 85 Forced Unit Operation – Clears when the unit is no longer running in a forced mode due
to a Prevent Alarm.
 Alarm Code 91 Check Electric Ready Input – Clears automatically when the unit starts running.
 Alarm Code 92 Sensor Grades Not Set – Clears when the sensor grade is changed from 5H.
If the Limited Alarm Restarts feature is enabled the following additional alarm codes may only be cleared from
the Guarded Access Menu. If this is the case, the CLEAR soft key will not appear if the alarms are displayed
from the Main Menu or the Maintenance Menu. See the Limited Alarm Restarts feature in Section 3 for details.
 Alarm Code 23 Cooling Cycle Fault
 Alarm Code 24 Heating Cycle Fault
 Alarm Code 32 Refrigeration Capacity Low
4-62
01 December 2012
Displaying and Clearing Alarm Codes

Alarms are displayed and cleared using the Alarm Menu. From the Standard Display, press the MENU Key.
ON
OFF
SET
POINT
35 GAUGES SENSORS
35
MENU
The Main Menu will appear. Press the UP or DOWN Key as required to choose the Alarms Menu. When the
Alarms Menu is shown press the SELECT Key to select the Alarms menu.
MAIN MENU
PRETRIP
ON
LANGUAGE
ALARMS
GAUGES
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
The number of alarms (if more than one) and a list of the alarms with the most recent alarm first will be shown.
In the example below, there are two alarms. The most recent is Alarm Code 5 Check Ambient Temp Sensor.
1 OF 2 ALARMS
5 CHECK AMBIENT TEMP SENSOR
ON
64 PRETRIP REMINDER
x 64
OFF
EXIT CLEAR HELP DOWN
4-63
01 December 2012
If necessary to view all alarms, scroll down using the DOWN Key.
1 OF 2 ALARMS
ON
64 PRETRIP REMINDER
x 64
OFF
If the alarm situation has been resolved press the CLEAR Key to clear the alarm.
1 OF 2 ALARMS
ON
64 PRETRIP REMINDER
x 64
OFF
The display will briefly show CLEARING ALARM 5 – PLEASE WAIT. Then the Alarm Menu will reappear.
Note that Alarm Code 64 Pretrip Reminder cannot be cleared using the CLEAR Key. This alarm will clear
automatically when a Pretrip Test is run.
1 OF 1 ALARMS
64 PRETRIP REMINDER
ON
x 64
OFF
4-64
01 December 2012
If a serious condition occurs, the unit will be shut down to prevent damage to the unit or the load. If this occurs,
the Alarm Icon will appear, the display and backlight will flash on and off.
ON
OFF SET
POINT
35 GAUGES SENSORS
35
MENU
The Alarm Menu display will display the Shutdown Alarm Code. For additional information regarding the alarm
shown on the display, press the HELP Key.
1 OF 1 ALARMS
66 LOW ENGINE OIL LEVEL
ON
x 64
OFF
A help message will appear. Press the EXIT Key to return to the Alarms Menu. Check the oil level and add oil
as required, clear the alarm and restart the engine.
LOW ENGINE OIL LEVEL
ON
CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL. IF UNIT IS SHUT
DOWN REPAIR IMMEDIATELY. OTHERWISE
REPORT ALARM AT END OF DAY.
OFF
EXIT
4-65
01 December 2012
Important Alarm Notes

 If an alarm will not clear, it may still exist. If the alarm is not corrected, it will not clear or may be
immediately set again.
 If an alarm cannot be cleared from the Main menu, the Clear Key will not appear. These alarms must be
cleared from the Maintenance or Guarded Access Menus.
4-66
01 December 2012
Gauges
The Gauges Menu allows the operator to view the unit gauges and I/O conditions. The unit gauges can always
be viewed from the Main Menu. This is necessary if the GAUGES Soft Key on the Standard Display has been
reassigned to a different function.
Displaying Gauges
Gauges are displayed using the Gauges Menu. From the Standard Display, press the MENU Key.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
The Main Menu will appear. Press the UP or DOWN Key as required to choose the Gauges Menu. When the
Gauges Menu is selected, press the SELECT Key to choose the Gauges menu.
MAIN MENU
LANGUAGE
ON
ALARMS
GAUGES
SENSORS
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
4-67
01 December 2012
The first gauge display will appear. Press the NEXT and BACK Keys to scroll thru the gauges and I/O conditions.
Pressing the LOCK Key will lock the current gauge on the display.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
ON
13.8 v
OFF
EXIT LOCK BACK NEXT
The gauges and I/O conditions available are shown on page XX of this Section of the manual. Not all gauges or
I/O conditions may appear depending on unit configuration and software revision.
4-68
01 December 2012
Sensors
The Sensors Menu allows the operator to view the unit and CargoWatch Data Logger temperature sensors. The
sensors can always be viewed from the Main Menu. This is necessary if the SENSORS Soft Key on the
Standard Display has been reassigned to a different function.
Displaying Sensors
Sensors are displayed using the Sensors Menu. From the Standard Display, press the MENU Key.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
The Main Menu will appear. Press the UP or DOWN Key as required to choose the Sensors Menu. When the
Sensors Menu is selected, press the SELECT Key to choose the Sensors menu.
MAIN MENU
ALARMS
ON
GAUGES
SENSORS
DATA LOGGER
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
4-69
01 December 2012
The first sensors display will appear. Press the NEXT and BACK Keys to scroll thru the gauges and I/O
conditions. Pressing the LOCK Key will lock the current gauge on the display.
ON
48. 3 °F
OFF
EXIT LOCK BACK NEXT
The sensors available are shown on page XX of this Section of the manual.
4-70
01 December 2012
Data Logger (CargoWatch)

The CargoWatch Data Logger is physically located in the HMI Control Panel. It can support up to 6 optional
temperature sensors.
When shipped from the factory, CargoWatch sensors 1 and 2 are turned on to be logged and CargoWatch
sensors 3 through 6 are turned off. Also, digital input 1 is turned on to be logged and digital inputs 2 through 4
are turned off. Sensors and digital inputs can be turned on, off and configured using the CargoWatch menu in
Guarded Access or with Wintrac. The CargoWatch Data Logger can also be configured using the USB Flash
Drive OptiSet Plus Feature.
A Start of Trip can be sent to the unit ServiceWatch and CargoWatch Data Loggers. In addition, the CargoWatch
Data Logger contents can be printed with a hand-held printer.
The ServiceWatch and CargoWatch Data Logger are accessed using the Data Logger Menu. From the Standard
Display, press the MENU Key.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
The Main Menu will appear. Press the UP or DOWN Key as required to choose the Data Logger Menu. When
the Data Logger Menu is selected, press the SELECT Key to choose the Data Logger menu.
MAIN MENU
GAUGES
ON
SENSORS
DATA LOGGER
HOURMETERS
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
4-71
01 December 2012
The Data Logger Menu will appear.
Sending Start of Trip Marker to CargoWatch and ServiceWatch Data Loggers

To send a Start of Trip marker to the CargoWatch and ServiceWatch Data Loggers press the SELECT Key. The
display will briefly show START OF TRIP COMPLETE to confirm that a Start of Trip marker was set in the
CargoWatch Data Logger.
DATA LOGGER
START TRIP
ON
PRINT/VIEW
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
NOTE: The start of trip marker is sent to both the CargoWatch and ServiceWatch data loggers.
Printing CargoWatch Data Logger Reports

Press the DOWN Key to select the PRINT / VIEW feature and press the SELECT Key to choose Print/View.
DATA LOGGER
START TRIP
ON
PRINT/VIEW
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
4-72
01 December 2012
The Print Data Menu will appear. The first Print Data Menu allows the operator to print a Delivery Ticket using a
hand held printer. Pressing the SELECT Key will print the ticket. The Delivery Ticket is a short ticket that shows
delivery specific details including the current temperature.
PRINT DATA
DELIVERY TICKET
ON
TRIP TICKET
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
4-73
01 December 2012
Pressing the DOWN Key allows the operator to print a Trip Ticket using a hand held printer. Press the SELECT
Key to print the ticket. The Trip Ticket is a long ticket that shows details for the current trip including a
temperature history. The Trip Ticket is also called a Journey Ticket.
PRINT DATA
DELIVERY TICKET
ON
TRIP TICKET
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
4-74
01 December 2012
Hourmeters
The Hourmeters Menu allows the operator to view the unit hourmeters that have the view feature enabled in the
Guarded Access menu. If the view feature for a particular hourmeter is not enabled then that hourmeter will
continue to accumulate time but cannot be viewed from the Main Menu. However, all hourmeters can be viewed
from the Maintenance Menu, even if they are not enabled. The hourmeters shown below are implemented.
Viewing Hourmeters
Only Hourmeters that have been enabled in Guarded Access are shown from the Main Menu. The Hourmeters
can be viewed only.
Hourmeters are displayed using the Hourmeter Display. From the Standard Display, press the MENU Key.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
The Main Menu will appear. Press the UP or DOWN Key as required to choose the Hourmeter Menu. When the
Hourmeter Menu is selected, press the SELECT Key to choose the Hourmeter Menu.
MAIN MENU
SENSORS
ON
DATA LOGGER
HOURMETERS
MODE
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
4-75
01 December 2012
Press the NEXT or PREVIOUS Key to scroll through the hourmeters.
HOURMETERS
TOTAL UNIT RUN HOURS
ON
TOTAL ENGINE RUN HOURS
833
TOTAL ELECTRIC RUN HOURS
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
Hourmeter names and definitions are shown in the table on the next page in the order they appear. Only
hourmeters enabled in the Guarded Access Menu will be shown. To return to the Standard Display, press the
EXIT Key.
When shipped from the factory, only these hourmeters are enabled for viewing from the Main Menu.
 Total Unit Run Hours
 Total Engine Run Hours
 Total Electric Run Hours
4-76
01 December 2012
Hourmeter Names and Definitions

Only configured hourmeters that have been enabled in the Viewable Hourmeter Setup Menu will be shown
Hourmeter Name Definition
Total Hours Total number of hours the unit has been turned on (protection hours).
Total Run Time Hours Total number of hours the unit has run in both diesel and electric mode.
Engine Hours Total number of hours the unit has run in diesel mode.
Electric Run Hours Total number of hours the unit has run in electric mode.
Total Run Reminder 1 User Programmable – The number of hours before a Total Unit Run Time
Maintenance Reminder 1 occurs.
Total Run Reminder 2 User Programmable – The number of hours before a Total Unit Run Time
Controller Power On Total hours the controller and HMI Control Panel have been turned on.
Pretrip Reminder User Programmable – number of hours before a Pretrip Reminder occurs.
Engine Reminder 1 User Programmable – The number of hours before an Engine Run Time
Engine Reminder 2 User Programmable – The number of hours before an Engine Run Time
Electric Reminder 1 User Programmable – The number of hours before an Electric Run Time
Electric Reminder 2 User Programmable – The number of hours before an Electric Run Time
Important: If a programmable hourmeter is not enabled or the view for that hourmeter is not turned on it will not
appear in the display sequence.
4-77
01 December 2012
Mode
The Mode Menu allows the operator to change the unit operating modes that have been enabled in Guarded
Access. Only Operating Modes that have been enabled from the Guarded Access > Main Menu Configuration
Menu will be shown.
 Turns Off Cycle Sentry Mode/Turns On Cycle Sentry Mode (If Cycle Sentry is turned Off unit runs in
Continuous). Note that selecting Cycle Sentry Mode or Continuous Mode can also be accomplished
using the Cycle Sentry Key to the right of the display.
 Allows temperature to be displayed in either Fahrenheit or Celsius degrees (if enabled from the Guarded
Access > Main Menu Configuration Menu).
 Allows the optional Fresh Air Exchange door to be opened or closed (if enabled from the Guarded
Access > Hardware Configuration Menu).
 Allows Keypad Lockout to be selected (if enabled from the Guarded Access > Main Menu Configuration
Menu).
 Start Sleep Mode (if enabled from the Guarded Access > Main Menu Configuration Menu).
When shipped from the factory, only the Cycle Sentry/Continuous Mode is enabled.
If OptiSet Plus is in use some modes may not be available.
Using the Change Mode Menu

Mode changes are made using the Mode Menu. From the Standard Display, press the MENU Key.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
4-78
01 December 2012
The Main Menu will appear. Press the UP or DOWN Key as required to choose the Mode Menu. When the
Mode Menu is selected, press the SELECT Key to choose the Mode Menu.
MAIN MENU
DATA LOGGER
ON
HOURMETERS
MODE
ELECTRIC STANDBY
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
The first enabled Change Mode Menu selection will appear. To choose that function, press the SELECT Soft
Key. To Scroll through the enabled features in the Change Mode Menu, press the UP and DOWN Soft Keys.
CHANGE MODE
TURN ON CYCLE SENTRY MODE
ON
FAHRENHEIT
KEYPAD LOCKOUT
START SLEEP MODE
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
 Possible mode selections are shown on the following pages.
 Only those modes that have been enabled will appear. Only the Cycle Sentry Menu is enabled on
factory units.
 Not all modes may be available, depending on OptiSet Plus usage and the settings of other
programmable features.
 To return to the Standard Display press the EXIT Key.
 The modes shown on the following pages may be available.
4-79
01 December 2012
Turn Cycle Sentry On or Off

Cycle Sentry Mode can be turned On or Off if Cycle Sentry Mode is allowed by OptiSet Plus. If Cycle Sentry is
turned off the unit runs in Continuous mode, unless Continuous Mode is not allowed by OptiSet Plus. Either
Cycle Sentry or Continuous operation can be disabled via OptiSet Plus. From the Main Menu > Change Mode
menu choose Turn On/Off Cycle Sentry Mode and press the SELECT Soft Key.
CHANGE MODE
ON
FAHRENHEIT
KEYPAD LOCKOUT
START SLEEP MODE
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
If the unit is running in Cycle Sentry Mode, press the SELECT Soft Key to turn off Cycle Sentry Mode as shown
below.
CHANGE MODE
TURN OFF CYCLE SENTRY
ON
OFF
EXIT SELECT
Confirmation screens will appear briefly, the unit will switch to Continuous Mode operation and the Cycle Sentry
Icon will disappear.
 To turn Cycle Sentry back on press the SELECT Key again.
 To leave this menu with changing the setting, press the EXIT Soft Key. To return to the Standard Display
press the EXIT Soft Key again.
NOTE: Cycle Sentry Mode can also be turned on and off using the Cycle Sentry Key on the HMI Control Panel
unless the Soft Key function has been reassigned.
4-80
01 December 2012
Select Temperature Units

If this feature enabled in Guarded Access > Main Menu Configuration, the operator can select temperature units
to be displayed as either degrees Fahrenheit or degrees Celsius. From the Main Menu > Change Mode menu
choose Fahrenheit or Celsius and press the SELECT Soft Key.
CHANGE MODE
ON
FAHRENHEIT
KEYPAD LOCKOUT
START SLEEP MODE
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
Choose the desired Temperature Units using the UP and DOWN Soft Keys and press the SELECT Soft Key to
select the choice.
TEMPERATURE UNITS
FAHRENHEIT
ON
CELSIUS
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
Temperatures will be displayed in the selected units.
 To leave this menu without changing the setting, press the EXIT Soft Key. To return to the Standard
Display press the EXIT Soft Key again.
4-81
01 December 2012
Fresh Air Exchange Open or Closed

If this option is installed and enabled in Guarded Access > Main Menu Configuration, the Fresh Air Exchange
option allows fresh outside air to be drawn into the trailer and the interior air to be exhausted by opening the
Fresh Air Exchange door. This feature is beneficial when hauling loads that release gas as they ripen, such as
potatoes. The Fresh Air Exchange feature is only available with setpoints above 32°F (0°C). The feature is
disabled with setpoints of 32°F (0°C) and below. This feature may not be available if OptiSet Plus is in use.
The Fresh Air Exchange feature should be used exactly as specified by the customer.
From the Change Mode menu choose Open Fresh Air Exchange and press the SELECT Soft Key.
CHANGE MODE
ON
FAHRENHEIT
OPEN FRESH AIR EXCHANGE
KEYPAD LOCKOUT
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
To open the Fresh Air Exchange door press the SELECT Key as shown below.
FRESH AIR EXCHANGE

OPEN FRESH AIR EXCHANGE
ON
OFF
EXIT SELECT
The Fresh Air Exchange door will open. To close the Fresh Air Exchange door press the SELECT Key again.
4-82
01 December 2012
IMPORTANT: The Fresh Air Exchange feature should be used exactly as specified by the customer.
 The Fresh Air Exchange door will only be open when the unit engine is running. The door will close
when the engine shuts down to preserve unit battery life.
 The setting of the Fresh Air Exchange door will survive power off/power on cycles – if the door is set to
“Open” by the operator it will continue to open any time the engine is running until it is set to “Close” by
the operator.
 To leave this menu without changing the setting, press the EXIT Soft Key. To return to the Standard
Display press the EXIT Soft Key again.
4-83
01 December 2012
Keypad Lockout
If enabled in Guarded Access > Main Menu Configuration, the keypad can be locked to prevent unauthorized
use. If the keypad is locked, only the On Key and Off Key function. The keypad will remain locked ev en if the
unit is turned off and back on. If Keypad Lockout is active, press and hold any soft key for 5 seconds to
deactivate the feature. To turn the feature on, from the Change Mode menu choose Keypad Lockout and press
the SELECT Soft Key.
CHANGE MODE
ON
FAHRENHEIT
KEYPAD LOCKOUT
START SLEEP MODE
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
A Confirmation Request will appear. To activate Keypad Lockout press the YES Soft Key. To leave this menu
without turning the Keypad Lockout feature on, press the NO Soft Key.
KEYPAD LOCKOUT
ON
ARE YOU SURE?
OFF
YES NO
If the YES Soft Key was pressed Keypad Lockout is active. Repeat the process to turn the Keypad Lockout
feature off.
 If the keypad is locked, only the On Key and Off Key function. The keypad will remain locked even if the
unit is turned off and back on.
 If Keypad Lockout is active, press and hold any soft key for 5 seconds to deactivate the feature.
 To return to the Standard Display press the EXIT Soft Key again.
4-84
01 December 2012
Start Sleep Mode

If this feature enabled in Guarded Access > Main Menu Configuration, the operator can select and set Sleep
Mode from the Mode Menu. Sleep Mode is used to keep the engine warm and the battery charged when the unit
is not in use. When the unit is Sleep Mode the display will show “SLEEP” and the current time. To turn the
feature on, from the Change Mode menu choose Start Sleep Mode and press the SELECT Soft Key.
CHANGE MODE
ON
FAHRENHEIT
KEYPAD LOCKOUT
START SLEEP MODE
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
The following features are available in Sleep Mode. Follow the display prompts to select and set the features.
 Program Wakeup Time This feature allows a wakeup time to be specified. When the selected time is
reached the unit will start and resume normal operation.
 If a Wakeup Time is selected the following features are available:
 Day to Wake Up This feature allows the day the unit is to wake up to be specified.
 Hour to Wake Up This feature allows the hour the unit is to wake up to be specified.
 Minute to Wake Up This feature allows the minute the unit is to wake up to be specified.
 Run Pretrip on Wakeup This feature allows a Pretrip Test to be automatically run when the unit wakes
up.
4-85
01 December 2012
Smart Power™ Electric Standby Option

The Diesel/Electric Standby selection from the Main Menu allows the operator to manually select diesel or
electric mode operation on units equipped with the electric standby Smart Power option. The unit can also be
programmed to automatically switch to Electric Mode operation when standby power is available and to
automatically switch to Diesel Mode operation if standby power fails or is removed. If the unit is programmed to
automatically switch from diesel to electric and/or electric to diesel the associated screens do not appear.
 If the unit is currently operating in Diesel Mode the ELECTRIC STANDBY selection will appear in the
Main Menu.
 If the unit is currently operating in Electric Mode the DIESEL MODE selection will appear in the Main
Menu.
Electric Mode Operation

If a unit equipped with the electric standby Smart Power option is running in Diesel Mode, the Diesel to Electric
Auto-switch feature is set NO and the unit is connected to a source of standby power, this feature allows the
operator to manually select electric mode operation. This feature does not appear if the electric standby Smart
Power option is not installed or if the Diesel to Electric Auto-switch feature is set YES.
Diesel Mode Operation

If a unit equipped with the electric standby Smart Power option is running in Electric Mode, the Electric to Diesel
Auto-switch feature is set NO, this feature allows the operator to manually select diesel mode operation. This
feature does not appear if the electric standby Smart Power option is not installed or if the Electric to Diesel
Auto-switch feature is set YES.
4-86
01 December 2012
Switching from Diesel to Electric

If the unit is running in Diesel Mode and the Diesel to Electric Autoswitch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is
set YES then the unit will automatically switch to Electric Mode operation when standby power is connected and
available. The screens shown below will not appear.
If the unit is running in Diesel Mode and the Diesel to Electric Autoswitch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is
set NO, the unit can be switched to Electric Mode using the Electric Standby selection from the Main Menu.
From the Standard Display, press the MENU Key.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
From the Main Menu choose Electric Standby and press the SELECT Soft Key.
MAIN MENU
HOURMETERS
ON
MODE
ELECTRIC STANDBY
ADJUST BRIGHTNESS
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
If the unit has standby power available and is turned on, the electric standby run screen will appear. The new
mode is confirmed for 10 seconds. The unit will start and run in Electric Mode. If electric standby power is not
available or fails, the display will prompt for a return to Diesel Mode as shown below.
Any engine related Shutdown Alarms become Log Alarms when the unit is switched to Electric Mode operation.
If the unit is switched back to Diesel Mode these alarms again become Shutdown Alarms.
4-87
01 December 2012
Electric Standby Power Fails or is Disconnected

If the electric standby power source fails or is disconnected and manual switching to Diesel Mode is selected, the
unit will prompt for a switch to Diesel Mode.
ELECTRIC STANDBY UNDETECTED
ON DO YOU WISH TO SWITCH TO

DIESEL?
OFF YES NO
 Pressing the YES Soft Key will switch unit operation back to Diesel Mode.
 Pressing the NO Soft Key will allow the unit to remain in Electric Mode even though standby power is not
available.
The unit will not run and Alarm Code 91 Check Electric Ready Input will be set as a prevent alarm.
4-88
01 December 2012
Switching from Electric to Diesel

If the unit is running in Electric Mode and the Electric to Diesel Autoswitch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is
set YES then the unit will automatically switch to Diesel Mode operation when standby power is no longer
available. The screens shown below will not appear.
If the Diesel to Electric Autoswitch Enabled feature in Guarded Access is set NO and standby power is
disconnected or fails, the unit will not automatically switch to Diesel mode. This is primarily designed to prevent
unauthorized diesel engine starts when the truck is indoors or on a ferry where engine operation is strictly
prohibited.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
From the Main Menu choose Diesel Mode and press the SELECT Soft Key.
MAIN MENU
HOURMETERS
ON
MODE
DIESEL MODE
ADJUST BRIGHTNESS
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
The new mode is confirmed for 10 seconds. The unit will start and run in Diesel Mode.
Any electric standby related Shutdown Alarms become Log Alarms when the unit is switched to Diesel Mode
operation. If the unit is switched back to Electric Mode these alarms again become Shutdown Alarms.
4-89
01 December 2012
Adjust Brightness
The brightness of the HMI Control Panel display can be adjusted to allow for changing ambient light conditions.
The choices available to the operator are HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW and OFF. OFF actually results in a very dim
screen suitable for low light conditions.
Display brightness is adjusted using the Adjust Brightness Menu. From the Standard Display, press the MENU
Key.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
The Main Menu will appear. Press the UP or DOWN Key as required to choose the Adjust Brightness Menu.
When the Adjust Brightness is selected, press the SELECT Key to choose the Adjust Brightness.
MAIN MENU
MODE
ON
ELECTRIC STANDBY
ADJUST BRIGHTNESS
TIME
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
4-90
01 December 2012
The Display Brightness menu will appear as shown below. Press the UP or DOWN Soft Keys to select the
desired display brightness. When the desired brightness is shown press the SELECT Soft Key to confirm the
choice.
DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS WILL BE

OFF
ON
LOW
MEDIUM
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
4-91
01 December 2012
Time
The Time and Date held by the HMI Control Panel can be checked. Time and Date cannot be changed from the
Main Menu. The time and date is accessed using the Main Menu. From the Standard Display, press the MENU
Key.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
The Main Menu will appear. Press the UP or DOWN Key as required to choose the Time Menu. When the Time
Menu is selected, press the SELECT Key to choose the Time Menu.
MAIN MENU
ELECTRIC STANDBY
ON
ADJUST BRIGHTNESS
TIME
CLEAR ALL ECU FAULTS
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
The date and time held in the HMI Control Panel will be shown on the display. Time and Date cannot be
changed from the Main Menu.
TIME MENU
ON
01:18 MONDAY 10 DEC 2012
OFF
EXIT
4-92
01 December 2012

Pressing this key will clear all existing Engine Control Unit (ECU) Fault Codes. This may allow continued unit
operation should an ECU fault code result in engine shutdown.
 Any Thermo King Alarm Codes associated with the Engine Control Unit (ECU) Fault Codes will also be
cleared.
 The Thermo King Alarm Codes and Engine Control Unit (ECU) Fault Codes that were cleared can be
viewed in the ServiceWatch and ECU Data Loggers.
Engine Control Unit (ECU) Fault Codes are cleared using the Clear All ECU Faults Menu. From the Standard
Display, press the MENU Key.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
The Main Menu will appear. Press the UP or DOWN Key as required to choose the Clear All ECU Faults Menu.
When the Clear All ECU Faults Menu is selected, press the SELECT Key to choose the Clear All ECU Faults
Menu.
MAIN MENU
ADJUST BRIGHTNESS
ON
TIME
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
4-93
01 December 2012
The Clear All ECU Faults Prompt will appear. To clear all Engine Control Unit (ECU) Faults and associated
Thermo King Faults press the CLEAR Soft Key.
ON
OFF
EXIT CLEAR
All Engine Control Unit (ECU) Faults and associated Thermo King Faults will be cleared.
4-94
01 December 2012
MAINTENANCE MENU OVERVIEW

Maintenance Menu Maintenance Menu

1 of 3 2 of 3
Hourmeters - View and Reset Time Sensors

Total Hours Control Return Air Temperature
Total Run Time Hours Display Return Air Temperature
Engine Hours Control Discharge Air Temperature
Electric Run Hours Display Discharge Air Temperature
Total Run Time Reminder #1 Hours Temperature Differential
Total Run Time Reminder #2 Hours Evaporator Coil Temperature
Controller Power On Hours Ambient Air Temperature
Pretrip Reminder Hours Spare 1 Temperature
Datalogger Sensor 5 Temperature
Gauges Datalogger Sensor 6 Temperature
Coolant Temperature Board Temperature Sensor
Coolant Level
Engine Oil Pressure Alarms
Engine Oil Level Display all alarms
Amps Clear most alarms
Battery Voltage
Accessory Battery Voltage Service Test
Engine RPM Test with Unit Running? (Yes – No)
Fuel Level Sensor Off
Discharge Pressure Null
Suction Pressure High Speed Cool
ETV Position Low Speed Cool
Fresh Air Exchange Low Speed Heat
I/O (Input/Output State) High Speed Heat
High Speed Relay Defrost
Run Relay Cool Bypass
Run Relay Feedback Mod Cool /HGB
Alternator Excite Output Modulation Cool
Defrost Damper Modulation Heat
Heat Output Condenser Road Fan
Motor RPM Condenser Curb Fan
Spare Digital Input 1 Evaporator Fan Low Spd
Spare Digital Input 2 Evaporator Fan High Spd
Spare Digital Input 4 Output Test
Spare Analog Input 1 Preheat Relay
Spare Analog Input 2 Evap Fan Low Speed
Spare Output 1 Evap Fan High Speed
Spare Output 2 Condenser Roadside
Spare Output 3 Condenser Curbside
Spare Output 4 Buzzer
Spare Output 5 Run Relay
Fresh Air Exchange Output Pilot Solenoid Valve
Fresh Air Exchange Feedback Indicator Light
Diesel/Electric Relay (50 only) Diesel/Electric Relay
Electric Ready Input (50 Only) High Speed Relay
Electric Overload (50 only) Hot Gas Bypass Valve
Hot Gas Bypass (ETV only) Alternator Excite Output

may appear Rev 8035 and 7A00 Precedent S/T 30 October 2012
4-95
01 December 2012
Maintenance Menu Overview - Continued

Maintenance Menu
3 of 3
Display Self Test

LCD Test
Keypad Test
Backlight Test
Brightness Test
Buzzer Test
Heater Output
Serial E2
Datalog Flash
RTC Update
Evacuation Test
Connect Battery Charger
Software Revision
Display Software Rev
Controller Software Rev
Supervisor Software Revision
Set Time and Date

Hour
Minutes
Date
Month
Year
Time Zone
Eastern, Central, Mountain, Pacific

may appear
4-96
01 December 2012
USING THE MAINTENANCE MENU

The Maintenance Menu contains features that allow the technician to view additional information, perform unit
diagnostics using Service Test Mode and Output Test Mode and evacuate using Evacuation Mode. Software
revisions can be checked and the time, date and time zone can be set.
Entering the Maintenance Menu

From the Standard Display, press the MENU Soft Key.
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
The Maintenance Menu is accessed from the first Main Menu screen that appears, usually the Pretrip Menu. The
third Soft Key from the left will be unlabelled. Press and hold both the Exit Soft Key and the unlabelled Soft Key
for 5 seconds as shown below.
MAIN MENU
PRETRIP
ON
LANGUAGE
ALARMS
GAUGES
OFF
EXIT SELECT DOWN
4-97
01 December 2012
The Maintenance Menu will appear. Press the UP and DOWN Soft Keys to scroll thru the Maintenance Menu
selections. When the desired choice is shown on the display, press the SELECT Soft Key to access it.
MAINTENANCE MENU
HOURMETERS
ON
GAUGES
SENSORS
ALARMS
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
The Maintenance Menu choices are shown on the following pages. For detailed information see the individual
explanations of each Maintenance Menu item in this section.
To return to the Standard Display press the EXIT Soft Key.
The HMI Control Panel will automatically return to the Standard Display 30 seconds after the last key is pressed.
4-98
01 December 2012
MAINTENANCE MENU CHOICES
Hourmeters
The Hourmeters Menu allows the technician to view all the active unit hourmeters, even if the Main Menu view
has been turned off. The Maintenance Menu Hourmeter Display also allows the technician to reset the time on
hourmeters with a programmed time limit. Hourmeters can also be viewed from the Main Menu if enabled in
Guarded Access.
Choose Hourmeters by pressing the SELECT Soft Key when HOURMETERS is shown in the Maintenance Menu.
The hourmeter screen appears as shown below.
HOURMETERS
TOTAL CONTROLLER ON HOURS
ON
TOTAL UNIT RUN HOURS
1948
TOTAL ENGINE RUN HOURS
OFF
EXIT UP DOWN
 The UP and DOWN Soft Keys are used to scroll through the hourmeters.
 The EXIT Soft Key returns to the Maintenance Menu
See the definition of hourmeters on the next page.
4-99
01 December 2012
Hourmeter Definitions
Hourmeter Name Definition
Total Hours Total number of hours the unit has been turned on (protection hours).
Total Run Time Hours Total number of hours the unit has run in both diesel and electric mode.
Engine Hours Total number of hours the unit has run in diesel mode.
Electric Run Hours Total number of hours the unit has run in electric mode.
Total Run Reminder 1 Hours User Programmable – The number of hours before a Total Unit Run Time
Total Run Reminder 2 Hours User Programmable – The number of hours before a Total Unit Run Time
Controller Power On Hours Total hours the controller and HMI Control Panel have been turned on.
Pretrip Reminder Hours User Programmable – number of hours before a Pretrip Reminder occurs.
Engine Reminder 1 Hours User Programmable – The number of hours before an Engine Run Time
Engine Reminder 2 Hours User Programmable – The number of hours before an Engine Run Time
Electric Reminder 1 Hours User Programmable – The number of hours before an Electric Run Time
Electric Reminder 2 Hours User Programmable – The number of hours before an Electric Run Time
4-100
01 December 2012
Gauges
The Gauge Menu allows the technician to view the unit gauges. The Gauge Menu can also be accessed from
the Standard Display and the Main Menu.
Choose Gauges by pressing the SELECT Soft Key when GAUGES is chosen in the Maintenance Menu. The
Gauges Menu appears as shown below.
BATTERY VOLTAGE
ON
13.8 v
OFF
EXIT LOCK BACK NEXT
 The NEXT and BACK Soft Keys are used to scroll through the gauges.
 The LOCK Soft Key allows a gauge display to be “locked” on the display for 15 minutes at the operator’s
discretion.
Not all gauges are available on all units. Only gauges used by the specific unit configuration will appear.
See the list of gauges on the next page.
The I/O submenu shows the state of each named device – either On or Off, or Low or OK.
4-101
01 December 2012
Gauge List
NOTE: Not all gauges may appear
 Coolant Temperature  I/O (Input/Output State)
 Coolant Level High Speed Relay
 Engine Oil Pressure Run Relay
 Engine Oil Level Run Relay Feedback
 Amps Alternator Excite Output
 Battery Voltage Defrost Damper
 Accessory Battery Voltage Heat Output

Motor RPM
 Engine RPM
 Fuel Level Sensor
 Discharge Pressure
 Suction Pressure
 ETV Position
Spare Analog Input 1
 Fresh Air Exchange Door Position
Spare Analog Input 2
Spare Output 1
Spare Output 2
Spare Output 3
Spare Output 4
Spare Output 5
Fresh Air Exchange Output
Fresh Air Exchange Feedback
Diesel/Electric Relay (50 only)
Electric Ready Input (50 only)
Electric Overload (50 only)
Hot Gas Bypass (ETV only)
4-102
01 December 2012
Sensors
The Sensors Menu allows the technician to view the unit temperature sensors. The Sensors Menu can also be
accessed from the Standard Display.
Choose sensors by pressing the SELECT Soft Key when SENSORS is chosen in the Maintenance Menu. The
SENSORS screen appears as shown below.
ON
48. 3 °F
OFF
EXIT LOCK BACK NEXT
 The NEXT and BACK Soft Keys are used to scroll through the sensors.
 The LOCK Soft Key allows a sensor display to be “locked” on the display to prevent the display from
timing out.
See the list of sensors on the next page.
4-103
01 December 2012
Sensor List
 Control Return Air Temperature

 Display Return Air Temperature
 Control Discharge Air Temperature
 Display Discharge Air Temperature
 Temperature Differential (T)
 Evaporator Coil Temperature
 Ambient Air Temperature
 Spare 1 Temperature
 Log Sensor 1
 Log Sensor 2
 Datalogger Sensor 3 Temperature
 Board Temperature Sensor (HMI Control Panel internal circuit board)
4-104
01 December 2012
Alarms
The Alarms Menu allows the technician to view all alarms and clear most alarms. The Alarms Menu is also
available from the Main Menu.
Alarms may be one of four types as shown below.
Log Alarms
Log Alarms are indicated for 60 seconds each time the unit is turned on. This level of alarm serves as a notice
to take corrective action before a problem becomes severe. Maintenance items such as maintenance hourmeter
time-outs are log alarms. The TemperatureWatch screen is not disabled if only log alarm(s) are active.
When the unit is turned on the display will show the Thermo King Logo and then the “Configuring System”
message. If log alarm(s) are present the Log Alarm notice will appear on the display for 60 seconds as shown
below. The remote indicator alarm light (if installed) will also be on during this period. The Standard Display will
appear and the remote indicator alarm light will go off after 60 seconds.
NOTE: The Alarm Icon does not appear on startup with log alarms present.

GO TO MENU TO VIEW
OFF
EXIT
NOTE: If required, an engine start may occur while the display above is shown. This is normal
operation.
4-105
01 December 2012
Check Alarms
Prevent Alarms are indicated by a steady Alarm Icon. This level of alarm serves as a notice to take corrective
action before a problem becomes severe. The remote indicator alarm light (if installed) will be on. The unit will
run with check alarms but some features and functions may be inhibited. The TemperatureWatch screen is
disabled if a check alarm is active.
ON
OFF
SET
35
POINT
GAUGES SENSORS
35
MENU
Prevent Alarms
Prevent Alarms are also indicated by a steady Alarm Icon in the display. The remote indicator alarm light (if
installed) will be on. The unit will attempt to resolve the situation as shown below.
 The unit will be temporarily shut down if a Prevent Alarm is active.
 The TemperatureWatch screen is disabled if a prevent alarm is active.
 The unit will remain shut down for a timed restart interval or until the fault conditions are corrected.
 If the unit is in a temporary shutdown, Alarm Code 84 Restart Null will be present along with the
associated Prevent Alarm.
 The unit will restart and run (in most cases with forced reduced performance) to determine if continued
operation is possible. The unit will run in this manner for a timed interval. If the unit is running with
forced reduced performance, Alarm Code 85 Forced Unit Operation will also be present under some
conditions.
4-106
01 December 2012
 If the alarm does not reoccur during the timed running interval with reduced performance, the unit will
return to full performance to determine if continued operation is possible. The unit will run in this manner
for a timed interval. If the unit is successfully able to return to full performance for the timed interval
without the alarm re-occurring, the alarm is auto cleared and the unit will run normally.
 All Prevent Alarm events and conditions are logged by the ServiceWatch Data Logger.
 In general, if the alarm condition re-occurs a defined number of times, the alarm is set as a shutdown
alarm and no further restarts are possible.
NOTE: If the Restart After Shutdown feature in the Guarded Access Menu is set for CONTINUOUS, then
an unlimited number of restart attempts are allowed.
Shutdown Alarms
Shutdown Alarms are indicated by the following:
 The Alarm Icon will appear.
 The display and backlight will flash on and off.
 The display will switch from normal video to reverse video and back to normal video. (Light areas
ON
OFF SET
35
POINT
GAUGES SENSORS
35
MENU
Shutdown alarms will force the unit into shutdown. The unit will remain in shutdown until the shutdown alarm is
manually cleared. Exceptions are some engine and electric shutdown alarms that become log alarms when
switched to the alternate operating mode (diesel to electric or electric to diesel). The TemperatureWatch screen
is disabled if a unit level shutdown alarm is active.
4-107
01 December 2012
Displaying Alarms
Choose Alarms by pressing the SELECT Soft Key when ALARMS is chosen in the Maintenance Menu. The
Alarms screen appears as shown below.
1 OF 2 ALARMS
ON
64 PRETRIP REMINDER
x 64
OFF
 The DOWN Soft Key is used to scroll through the alarms.
 The HELP Soft Key accesses an Operator level help screen.
 The CLEAR Soft Key clears most alarms. Some alarms can only be cleared from the Guarded Access
Menu.
 The EXIT Soft Key returns to the Maintenance Menu.
For a list of Alarm Codes and Alarm Code Diagnostics see Section 5 of this manual.
4-108
01 December 2012
Clearing Alarms
Most alarm codes can be cleared conventionally from the Alarm Menu using the CLEAR Soft Key.
The following control and display sensor alarm codes can only be cleared from the Maintenance Menu or
Guarded Access Menu:
 Alarm Code 03 Check Control Return Air Sensor
 Alarm Code 04 Check Control Discharge Air Sensor
 Alarm Code 74 Controller Reset to Defaults (Guarded Access Only)
 Alarm Code 203 Check Display Return Air Sensor
 Alarm Code 204 Check Display Discharge Air Sensor
The following alarm codes clear automatically.

 Alarm Code 64 Pretrip Reminder – Clears when a Pretrip Test is performed.
 Alarm Code 84 Restart Null – Clears when the unit is no longer in a restart null due to a Prevent Alarm.
 Alarm Code 85 Forced Unit Operation – Clears when the unit is no longer running in a forced mode due
to a Prevent Alarm.
 Alarm Code 91 Check Electric Ready Input – Clears automatically when the unit starts running.
 Alarm Code 92 Sensor Grades Not Set – Clears when all required sensor grades are changed from 5H.
If the Limited Alarm Restarts feature is enabled the following additional alarm codes may only be cleared from
the Guarded Access Menu. If this is the case, the CLEAR Soft Key will not appear if the alarms are displayed
from the Main Menu or the Maintenance Menu. See the Limited Alarm Restarts feature in Section 3 for details.
 Alarm Code 23 Cooling Cycle Fault
 Alarm Code 24 Heating Cycle Fault
 Alarm Code 32 Refrigeration Capacity Low
4-109
01 December 2012
Alarm Notes
 IMPORTANT: If an alarm will not clear, it may still exist. If the alarm is not corrected, it will not clear or
may be immediately set again.
 IMPORTANT: If an alarm cannot be cleared from the Main menu, the Clear Soft Key will not appear.
These alarms must be cleared from the Maintenance or Guarded Access Menus.
 IMPORTANT: All alarms must be viewed before any of the alarms can be cleared.
 IMPORTANT: Shutdown alarms should receive immediate attention if the truck or trailer is loaded.
4-110
01 December 2012
Service Test Mode

Service Test Mode allows the technician to force the unit to a known operating mode for diagnostic purposes.
The unit can be either running or not running.
If the unit is not running and a running test is selected the unit will start and run.
IMPORTANT: Service Test Mode is not allowed if any shutdown alarms exist or if the unit is in a Prevent
Mode Shutdown Null (Alarm Code 84 is set). Clear all alarms before using Service Test Mode.
Choose Service Test Mode by pressing the SELECT Soft Key when SERVICE TEST is shown in the
Maintenance Menu. The TEST WITH UNIT RUNNING prompt will appear. Select YES or NO as desired by
pressing the appropriate Soft Key.
ON
TEST WITH UNIT RUNNING?
OFF EXIT YES NO
The SERVICE TEST Selection Menu appears as shown below. Use the + and – Soft Keys to scroll through the
available tests. When the desired test is shown press the YES Soft Key to select it.
TEST WILL BE
ON
HIGH SPEED COOL
OFF USE +/- TO CHANGE OK?

- + YES NO
4-111
01 December 2012
The test shown is the High Speed Cool test. Return, Discharge and Evaporator Coil temperatures are shown.
The Temperature Differential is also calculated and displayed.
HIGH SPEED COOL TEST

ON RET 45 F ECOIL 30 F
DIS 35 F DIFF -10 F
TIME REMAINING 12:32 MINS
OFF
EXIT TEST GAUGES
 A test will remain active for 15 minutes. A countdown timer shows the time remaining for the test. If the
test times out the test will terminate, the unit will be shut down (if running) and Alarm Code 54 Test Mode
Timeout will be set.
 The GAUGES Soft Key is used to scroll through the gauges.
 The TEST Soft Key allows the various tests to be selected.
Not all tests are available on all units. Only tests used by the specific unit configuration will appear.
See the list of tests on the next page.
4-112
01 December 2012
Service Test Modes

 Off  Modulation Cool 100% with Hot Gas Bypass
 Null (ETV units only)
 High Speed Cool  Modulation Cool 100% (ETV units only)
 Low Speed Cool  Modulation Heat 100% (ETV units only)
 Low Speed Heat  Condenser Roadside Fan
 High Speed Heat  Condenser Curbside Fan
 Defrost  Evaporator Blower Low Speed
 Cool Bypass (ETV units only)  Evaporator Blower High Speed
Devices Energized – Reciprocating Compressor – Diesel Mode

Service Test Mode Run High Heat D/E Hot Gas ETV Damper
Test Relay Speed Relay Bypass
Off/Null
High Speed Cool ON ON Enabled
Low Speed Cool ON Enabled
Low Speed Heat ON ON Enabled
High Speed Heat ON ON ON Enabled
Defrost ON ON Enabled ON
Cool Bypass ON ON Enabled
Mod Cool 100% HGB ON ON 100 Steps
Open
Mod Cool 100% ON 100 Steps
Open
Mod Heat 100% ON ON 100 Steps
Open
If a Condenser Fan or Evaporator Blower Test is selected only that fan or blower will be energized.
4-113
01 December 2012
Devices Energized – Reciprocating Compressor – Electric Mode

Service Test Mode Run High Heat D/E Hot Gas ETV Damper
Test Relay Speed/ Relay Bypass
Electric
Heat
Null
Cool ON ON Enabled
Hot Gas Heat ON ON ON Enabled
Hot Gas & Elec Heat ON ON ON ON Enabled
Defrost ON ON ON ON Enabled ON
Cool Bypass ON ON ON Enabled
Mod Cool 100% HGB ON ON ON 100 Steps
Open
Mod Cool 100% ON ON 100 Steps
Open
Mod Heat 100% ON ON ON 100 Steps
Open
If a Condenser Fan or Evaporator Blower Test is selected only that fan or blower will be energized.
4-114
01 December 2012
Output Test Mode

Output Test Mode allows the technician to energize and de-energize individual control devices for diagnostic
purposes. The unit cannot be running to use this test. If the test is entered with the unit running, the unit will shut
down.
IMPORTANT: Output Test Mode is not allowed if any shutdown alarms exist or if the unit is in a Prevent
Mode Shutdown Null (Alarm Code 84 is set). Clear all alarms before using Output Test Mode.
Choose Output Test Mode by pressing the SELECT Soft Key when OUTPUT TEST is shown in the Maintenance
Menu. The OUTPUT TEST Menu appears as shown below. The test shown is the Heat Output test.
PILOT SOLENOID VALVE

ON HEAD-P -27 ADD AMPS -0.4
SCT-P -7.7 ADD VOLTS 13.8
TIME REMAINING 12:32 MINS
OFF
EXIT TEMP ON LOCK ON NEXT
Discharge Pressure, Suction Pressure, Amps and Volts are shown.
The NEXT Soft Key is used to scroll down through the test menu.
The TEMP ON Soft Key is used to momentarily energize the device shown.
The LOCK ON Soft Key energizes the device shown for 15 minutes. A countdown counter shows the time
remaining for the test. If the test times out Alarm Code 54 Test Mode Timeout is set. Not all devices can be
locked on. The UNLOCK Soft Key de-energizes the device shown and returns to the Output Test.
The EXIT Soft Key returns to the Maintenance Menu.
Not all tests are available on all units. Only tests used by the specific unit will appear.
See the list of tests on the next page.
4-115
01 December 2012
Interface Board Test Modes and Current Draw

NOTE: Device current will vary dependant on battery voltage and battery condition.
Interface Board Test Approximate Device Comments

Current Draw
Evap Fan Low Speed 1.8 Amps Contactor coil current
Evap Fan High Speed 1.8 Amps Contactor coil current
Condenser Fan Roadside 1.8 Amps Contactor coil current
Condenser Fan Curbside 1.8 Amps Contactor coil current
Buzzer Negligible Temporary On only
Run Relay 2.0 Amps
Pilot Solenoid Valve 0.4 Amps
Indicator Light 0.1 Amps
Diesel/Electric Relay 1.1 Amps
Hot Gas Bypass 1.5 Amps ETV units only.
4-116
01 December 2012
Display Self Test

The Display Self Test allows the technician to perform a number of self tests on the unit HMI Control Panel. The
tests available are shown below.
Choose Display Self Test by pressing the SELECT Soft Key when DISPLAY SELF TEST is chosen in the
Maintenance Menu. The Display Self Test screen appears. Select a test from the Display Self Test Menu.
DISPLAY SELF TEST

ON
KEYPAD TEST
OFF
EXIT SELECT BACK NEXT
 The NEXT and BACK Soft Keys are used to scroll through the tests.
 The SELECT Soft Key starts the selected test.
See the list of Display Self Tests on the next page.
4-117
01 December 2012
Display Self Tests

 LCD Test – This test allows the technician to select a normal or inverted display. If inverted is chosen
the display is reversed – segments that were turned on are now turned off and segments that were
turned off are now turned on. The technician visually verifies that all display segments are functioning
properly.
 Keypad Test – This test prompts the technician to press the four soft keys, the Defrost Key and the Cycle
Sentry Key. Each time the requested key is pressed the next prompt is displayed, allowing the
technician to verify proper operation of these keys.
 Backlight Test – This test allows the technician to turn the backlight on and off to confirm operation.
 Brightness Test – This test allows the technician to select Low, Medium or High backlight intensity.
 Buzzer Test – This test allows the technician to turn the HMI buzzer on and off to verify operation.
 Heater Output – This test allows the technician to turn the HMI display heater on and off.
 Serial E2 – This test allows the technician to perform an internal HMI memory test. The test takes less
than 1 second and the results are reported as PASS or FAIL.
 Data Log Flash – This test allows the technician to perform an internal HMI CargoWatch data logger
memory test. The test takes less than 1 second and the results are reported as PASS or FAIL.
 RTC Update – This test allows the technician to perform an internal HMI real time clock test. The test
takes less than 3 seconds and the results are reported as PASS or FAIL.
4-118
01 December 2012
Evacuation Test
This menu allows the technician to open all normally closed refrigeration system valves to evacuate and charge
the unit with refrigerant. If the battery voltage falls below 13.0 VDC the technician is prompted to connect a
battery charger to maintain sufficient voltage to hold all valves open.
IMPORTANT: Evacuation mode has no time-out. The unit will remain in Evacuation Mode indefinitely
unless the battery voltage becomes excessive.
All selectable unit features will be disabled when in evacuation mode. Auto switch from diesel to electric or from
electric to diesel is allowed, but unit will not start.
Evacuation mode is not allowed if:

 Any shutdown alarms are present.
 The unit is in restart null.
 The unit is in a start sequence.
When in evacuation mode:

 If the unit is running it will shut down automatically when entering Evacuation Mode.
 Alarm Code 86 Check Discharge Pressure Sensor is disabled.
 Alarm Code 87 Check Suction Pressure Sensor is disabled.
 Door switch operation is disabled.
Choose Evacuation Test by pressing the SELECT Soft Key when EVACUATION TEST is shown by the
Maintenance Menu. The Evacuation Test display shown below will appear and remain on the display so long as
the battery voltage does not fall below 13.0 VDC. All normally closed refrigerant valves are energized to the
open position to allow system evacuation to effectively remove air and moisture from the refrigeration system.
EVAC MODE BATTERY VOLTS

ON
14.8 v
OFF
EXIT
4-119
01 December 2012
If the battery voltage falls below 13.0 VDC the technician is prompted to install a battery charger to guarantee
sufficient voltage to keep all valves open during the evacuation process.
CONNECT BATTERY CHARGER

ON
12.9 v
OFF
EXIT
If the voltage from the battery charger rises above 16 Vdc, the controller will be turned off to prevent damage to
the electronics and/or system components.
 To exit Evacuation Mode press the EXIT Soft Key or turn the unit off.
4-120
01 December 2012
Software Revision
This menu allows the technician to view the current installed software revision for the HMI Control Panel and the
Base Controller.
Choose Software Revision by pressing the SELECT Soft Key when SOFTWARE REVISION is shown by the
Maintenance Menu. The Software Revision display appears as shown below.
SOFTWARE REVISION
DISPLAY SOFTWARE REV
ON
CONTROLLER SOFTWARE REV
8035
SUPERVISOR SOFTWARE REV
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
The NEXT and BACK Soft Keys allow the technician to scroll through the software revisions. Software revisions
appear in the order shown below:
 Display Software Revision
 Controller Software Revision
 Supervisor Software Revision (Determined by HMI Control Panel software revision)
The ThermoServ Service Tool is used to flash software updates to the HMI Control Panel and Base Controller.
4-121
01 December 2012
Set Time and Date

This menu allows the technician to view and change the HMI Control Panel clock/calendar.
Choose Set Time and Date by pressing the SELECT Soft Key when SET TIME AND DATE is shown by the
Maintenance Menu. The Set Time and Date display appears as shown below.
ENTER HOUR
ON
16:00
OFF
+/- TO CHANGE OK?
- + YES NO
The – and + Soft Keys are used to change the hour as required. Pressing the YES Soft Key changes the hour to
the selected time and then shows the next Time/Date screen. The screens appear in the order shown below.
 Hour
 Minute
 Date (Day)
 Month
 Year
4-122
01 December 2012
Time Zone
This menu allows the technician to view and change the Time Zone.
Choose Time Zone by pressing the SELECT Soft Key when Time Zone is shown by the Maintenance Menu. The
Time Zone Menu appears as shown below.
EASTERN TIME
ON
CENTRAL TIME
MOUNTAIN TIME
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
The UP and Down Soft Keys are used to change the Time Zone as required. Pressing the SELECT Soft Key
changes the Time Zone to the selected zone. The screens appear in the order shown below.
 Eastern Time
 Central Time
 Mountain Time
 Pacific Time
4-123
01 December 2012

The Connect Engine Service Tool feature allows the unit to be powered down but maintains power to the Engine
Control Unit (ECU) for diagnostic purposes. This allows the Yanmar Smart Assist Direct (YSAD) Diagnostic Tool
to be connected to the Yanmar Engine Control Unit without having the rest of the unit powered up.
See Service Procedure AxxA Connecting the Yanmar Smart Assist Direct (YSAD) Diagnostic Tool for details.
4-124
01 December 2012
GUARDED ACCESS MENU OVERVIEW


1 of 4 2 of 4
Security Code (if enabled) Hourmeter Setup

Enter Access Code Program Hourmeter
Total Run Time Reminder #1 Hours (Off)
Programmable Features Total Run Time Reminder #2 Hours (Off)
Temperature Units (F, C) Controller Power On Hours (Off)
Pressure Units (PSIG, kPA, BARS) Pretrip Reminder Hours (Off)
Restart Unit After Shutdown (Enabled) Engine Run Time Reminder #1 Hours (Off)
Setpoint High Limit (80°F, Max 90°F) Engine Run Time Reminder #2 Hours (Off)
Setpoint Low Limit (-20°F, Max -30°F) Electric Run Time Reminder #1 Hours (Off)
Fuel Saver II (Enabled) Electric Run Time Reminder #2 Hours (Off)
High Speed Pulldown (Enabled) Viewable Hourmeter Setup
Fresh Frozen Range (15°F, 24°F) Total Hours (Disabled)
Door Open Forces (Log Only, Null, Null No Alarm) Total Run Time Hours (Enabled)
Door Open Timeout (HRS:MIN) Engine Hours (Enabled)
Sleep Mode After Pretrip (Disabled) Electric Run Hours (Enabled)
Rail Option (Disabled) Total Run Time Reminder #1 Hours (Disabled)
Rail Alternate (Disabled) Total Run Time Reminder #2 Hours (Disabled)
Blocked Air Chute Detect (Disabled) Controller Power On Hours (Disabled)
Temperature Differential (9.9°, 1-20° x 0.1°) Pretrip Reminder Hours (Disabled)
Time to Alarm (30M, 5-120M x 1M) Engine Run Time Rem #1 Hours (Disabled)
Door Open Override (Enabled) Engine Run Time Rem #2 Hours (Disabled)
Discharge Pressure Setpoint (415 PSI, 380-440 x 1) Electric Run Time Rem #1 Hours (Disabled)
Coolant Temperature Setpoint (210°F, 180-210° x 1) Electric Run Time Rem #2 Hours (Disabled)
Limited Alarm Restarts (Disabled) Program Service Due Date
Remote Device (Disabled) Engine Run Time Service Due Date (Disabled)
COM 1 Default Baud Rate (1200, 1200-115,200)
COM 2 Default Baud Rate (9600, 1200-115,200) Sensor Calibration
COM 3 Default Baud Rate (9600, 1200-115,200) Control Return Air Sensor Grade (5H, 1L - 9H)
Extended ServiceWatch Logging (Disabled) Control Discharge Air Sensor Grade (5H, 1L - 9H)
High Temperature Defrost (Disabled) Display Return Air Sensor Grade (5H, 1L - 9H)
Local Auth of OS+ Upload (Disabled) Display Discharge AIr Sensor Grade (5H, 1L - 9H)
Local Auth of Flash Load (Disabled) Spare 1 Sensor Grade (5H, 1L - 9H)
Service Watch Logging Intervals (15 minutes)
Cycle Sentry Setup
Main Menu Configuration Cycle Sentry Amps Level (5 A, 2-8 A)
Add Keypad Lockout to Mode Menu (Disabled) Battery Sentry Voltage Level (12.2 V, 11.8-12.6 V)
Add Sleep to Mode Menu (Disabled) Check Battery Condition Alarm (Disabled)
Config Soft Key 2 on Standard Display (Gauges)
Config Soft Key 3 on Standard Display (Sensors) Defrost Setup
Add Temperature Units to Mode Menu (Disabled) Def Interval In Range w Fresh S/P (6 Hr, 2-12)
Auto Keypad Lck Time Def Interval Not In Range w Fresh S/P (4 Hr, 2-12)
Auto Keypad Lck Pin Num Def Interval In Range w Frozen S/P (6 Hr, 2-12)
Def Interval Not In Range w Frozen S/P (4 Hr, 2-12)
Alarms Maximum Defrost Duration (30 Min, 45 Min)
Display all alarms
Clear most alarms

may appear
4-125
01 December 2012
Guarded Access Menu Overview - Continued


3 of 4 4 of 4
Language Setup Unit Configuration
English (Enabled) Unit Model (C-600)
Spanish (Disabled) High Capacity Unit (No)
French (Disabled) Engine Type (TK486V25)
German (Disabled) Compressor Type (Recip)
Italian (Disabled) ETV Configured (Yes)
Dutch (Disabled) Battery Charger (None, 30 Amp, 120 Amp)
Portuguese (Disabled) Electric Standby Equipped? (Yes)
Greek (Disabled) Electric Motor Type (12 HP Type, 19 HP Type)
Turkish (Disabled) Electric Heat Option (Yes)
Hebrew (Disabled) Diesel to Electric Autoswitch Enabled? (No)
Arabic (Disabled) Electric to Diesel Autoswitch Enabled? (No)
Humidity Sensor (Disabled)
Access Code Setup Fuel Level Sensor Type (None, SS, Float, Sw)
Enter Access Code Rear Remote Control (None, COM 2)
3rd Party Device Control (None, COM 1, COM 2)
OptiSet Plus REB Type Configured (None, See Section 3)
OptiSet Plus Reset Fresh Air Exchange (Disabled)
Temperature Profile Selection ( Numeric Setpoint)
Sensor Configuration (CargoWatch)

Automatic SOT at Midnight (Disabled)
Logging Interval (15 Min, 1, 2, 5-60Min)
Log Sensor 1(On)
Low (-10.8°F, -1°F -20°F)
High (10.8°F, 1°F – 20°F)
Italian Option - Available with Sensor 1 only (Off)
Log Sensor 2 (On)
Low (-10.8°F, -1°F -20°F)
High (10.8°F, 1°F – 20°F)
Digital In 1 (On)
Digital Input #1 Name (Digital Input #1) Not all menu features
may appear
Countdown Timer (Off)
Conservative Log Count (Off)
4-126
01 December 2012
USING THE GUARDED ACCESS MENU

The Guarded Access Menu contains menus that allow the technician to check and change the unit’s
programmable features. These features are detailed in Section 3 of this manual. Service Procedure A02A
explains how to display and record the Guarded Access programmable feature settings using the HMI Control
Panel Keypad. Service Procedure A04A explains how to set the Guarded Access programmable features using
the HMI Control Panel Keypad.
The Guarded Access programmable features can also be changed using the ThermoServ™ Service Tool. Once
created, a Unit Setup file can be transferred to a USB Flash Drive to send the file to the unit. For more
information see the ThermoServ™ Service Tool help information.
NOTE: A warm restart is performed when the Guarded Access menu is exited. The unit is reconfigured so that
any changes that were made from the Guarded Access menu take effect. This will occur even if no changes
were made to any of the Guarded Access Menu features.
HINT: The Guarded Access Menu is entered from the last feature of the Maintenance Menu. The unit must not
be running in order to enter the Guarded Access Menu. If the unit is running, entering Output Test Mode from
the Maintenance menu will shut the unit down. Press the EXIT Key to return to the Maintenance Menu and
continue scrolling to the end of the Maintenance Menu to enter the Guarded Access Menu.
Entering the Guarded Access Menu

ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35
GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
4-127
01 December 2012
The Maintenance Menu is accessed from the first Main Menu screen that appears, usually the Pretrip Menu. The
third Soft Key from the left will be unlabelled. Press and hold both the Exit Soft Key and the unlabelled Soft Key
for 5 seconds as shown below.
MAIN MENU
PRETRIP
ON
LANGUAGE
ALARMS
GAUGES
OFF
EXIT SELECT DOWN
The Maintenance Menu will appear. Press the DOWN Soft Key to scroll to CONNECT ENGINE SERVICE TOOL
at the end of the Maintenance Menu choices. The fourth Soft Key from the left will be unlabelled. Press and
hold both the unlabelled soft key and the Exit Key for 5 seconds.
NOTE: Guarded Access cannot be entered if the unit is running. If the unit is running, when scrolling
thru the Maintenance Menu enter Output Test Mode to shut the unit down. Press the EXIT Key to return
to the Maintenance Menu and continue scrolling to the end of the Maintenance Menu.
MAINTENANCE MENU
SET TIME AND DATE
ON
TIME ZONE
CONNECT ENGINE SERVICE TOOL
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP
IMPORTANT: If a Security Code has been set the correct code must be entered here to gain access to the
Guarded Access Menu. If an Access Code is requested and the code is not known, enter 4444.
4-128
01 December 2012
If an Access Code is not enabled or when the correct security code is entered (4444 always works), the first
Guarded Access Menu feature will appear. Press the UP and DOWN Soft Keys to scroll thru the Guarded
Access Menu choices. When the desired choice is shown on the display, press the SELECT Key to access it.
GUARDED ACCESS
PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
ON
MAIN MENU CONFIGURATION
ALARMS
HOURMETER SETUP
OFF
EXIT SELECT UP DOWN
The Guarded Access Menu choices are shown on the next pages. For detailed information see the individual
explanations of each menu item in Section 3 of this manual.
Service Procedure A02A explains how to manually display and record all Guarded Access programmable feature
settings using the HMI Control Panel Keypad. Service Procedure A04A explains how to manually set all
Guarded Access programmable features using the HMI Control Panel Keypad.
The Guarded Access programmable features can also be changed using the ThermoServ™ Service Tool. A Unit
Setup file is created to the customer’s specific requirements. Once created, the Unit Setup file can be
transferred to a USB Flash Drive to send the file to the unit. For more information see the ThermoServ™
Service Tool help information.
NOTE: A warm restart is performed when the Guarded Access menu is exited. The unit is reconfigured so that
any changes that were made from the Guarded Access menu take effect. This will occur even if no changes
were made to any of the Guarded Access Menu features.
4-129
01 December 2012
GUARDED ACCESS MENU CHOICES

Programmable Features (some features are not available if OptiSet Plus is in use)
See Section 3 of this manual for details.
 Temperature Units (F)
 Pressure Units (PSIG)
 Restart Unit After Shutdown (Enabled)
 Setpoint High Limit (80°F) or (27°C)
 Setpoint Low Limit (-20°F) or (-29°C)
 Fuel Saver II (Enabled)
 High Speed Pulldown (Enabled)
 Fresh Frozen Range (15°F) or (-9°C)
 Door Open Forces (Log Only)
Door Open Timeout (HRS:MIN)
 Sleep Mode After Pretrip (Disabled)
 Rail Option (Disabled)
Rail Alternate (Disabled)
 Blocked Air Chute Detect (Disabled)
Temperature Differential (9.9)
Time to Alarm (0:30)
Door Open Override (Disabled)
 Discharge Pressure Setpoint (415 PSI)
 Coolant Temperature Setpoint (210°F) or (99°C)
 Limited Alarm Restarts (Disabled)
 Remote Device (Disabled)
 COM 1 Default Baud Rate (1200)
 Extended ServiceWatch Logging (Disabled)
 High Temperature Defrost (Disabled)
 Local Authorization of OS+ Upload (Disabled)
 Local Authorization of Flash Load (Disabled)
 Service Watch Logging Intervals (15 minutes)
4-130
01 December 2012
Main Menu Configuration

 Add Keypad Lockout to Mode Menu (Disabled)
 Add Sleep to Mode Menu (Disabled)
 Configure Soft Key 2 on Standard Display (Gauges)
 Configure Soft Key 3 on Standard Display (Sensors)
 Add Temperature Units to Mode Menu (Disabled)
 Auto Keypad Lck Time
 Auot Keypad Lck PIN Number
Alarms
 Display all alarms
 Clear most alarms.
4-131
01 December 2012
Hourmeter Setup
Program Hourmeter
 Total Run Time Reminder #1 Hours (Off)
 Total Run Time Reminder #2 Hours (Off)
 Controller Power On Hours (Off)
 Pretrip Reminder Hours (Off)
 Engine Run Time Reminder #1 Hours (Off)
 Engine Run Time Reminder #2 Hours (Off)
 Electric Run Time Reminder #1 Hours (Off)
 Electric Run Time Reminder #2 Hours (Off)
Viewable Hourmeter Setup

 Total Hours (Disabled)
 Total Run Time Hours (Enabled)
 Engine Hours (Enabled)
 Electric Run Hours (Enabled)
 Total Run Time Reminder #1 (Disabled)
 Total Run Time Reminder #2 (Disabled)
 Controller Power On Hours (Disabled)
 Pretrip Reminder Hours (Disabled)
 Engine Run Time Reminder #1 (Disabled)
 Engine Run Time Reminder #2 (Disabled)
 Electric Run Time Reminder #1 (Disabled)
 Electric Run Time Reminder #2 (Disabled)
Program Service Due Date

 Engine Run Time Service Due Date (Disabled)
4-132
01 December 2012
Sensor Calibration
 Control Return Air Sensor Grade (5H)
 Control Discharge Air Sensor Grade (5H)
 Display Return Air Sensor Grade (5H)
 Display Discharge Air Sensor Grade (5H)
 Spare 1 Sensor Grade (5H)
Cycle Sentry Setup

 Cycle Sentry Amps Level (5)
 Battery Sentry Voltage Level (12.2)
 Check Battery Condition Alarm (Disabled)
Defrost Setup
 Defrost Interval In Range with Fresh Setpoint (6)
 Defrost Interval Not In Range with Fresh Setpoint (4)
 Defrost Interval In Range with Frozen Setpoint (6)
 Defrost Interval Not In Range with Frozen Setpoint (4)
 Maximum Defrost Duration (45)
4-133
01 December 2012
Language Setup
 English (Always Enabled)
 Spanish
 French
 German
 Italian
 Dutch
 Portuguese
 Greek
 Turkish
 Hebrew
 Arabic
Access Code Setup

 If a security code is desired for entry to the Guarded Access menu, it is set up here.
OptiSet Plus
 OptiSet Plus Reset
 Temperature Profile Selection (Numeric Setpoint)
4-134
01 December 2012
Sensor Configuration (Cargo Watch)

See Service Procedure A49A in Section 6 of this manual for details
 Logging Interval (15 Minutes)
 Log Sensor 1 (On)
Low (-10.8°F) or (-24°C)
High (10.8°) or (-12°C)
Italian Option – Available with Sensor 1 Only (Off)
 Log Sensor 2 (On)
Low (-10.8°F) or (-24°C)
High (10.8°) or (-12°C)
 Log Sensor 3 (Off)
~ Continued Next Page ~
4-135
01 December 2012
Sensor Configuration (CargoWatch) - continued

 Digital In 1 (On)
Digital Input # 1 Name (Digital Input #1)
 Digital In 2 (Off)
 Digital In 3 (Off)
 Countdown Timer (Off)
 Conservative Log Count (Off)
 SOT on Setpoint
4-136
01 December 2012
Unit Configuration
 Unit Model (S-600)
 High Capacity Unit (No)
 Engine Type (TK 488CR)
 Compressor Type (Recip)
 ETV Configured (Yes)
 Battery Charger (None, 30 Amp, 120 Amp)
 Electric Standby Equipped (Yes)
 Electric Motor Type (12 HP Type, 19 HP Type)
 Electric Heat Option (Yes)
 Diesel to Electric Autoswitch Enabled (No)
 Electric to Diesel Autoswitch Enabled (No)
 Humidity Sensor (Disabled)
 Fuel Level Sensor Type (None, Solid State, Float, Switch)
 Rear Remote Control (None, COM 2)
 3rd Party Device Control (None, COM 1, COM 2)
 REB Type Configured (None, See Section 3)
 Fresh Air Exchange (Disabled)
4-137
01 December 2012
4-138
01 December 2012
Section 4 – SR-4 Rear Remote
TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 4

Simulator with HMI = 9A27, Base Controller = 8032
Optional Rear Remote Control Panel ............................................................................................................... 3

Rear Remote Control Panel Functionality ................................................................................................ 4
Rear Remote Control Action set to Run .............................................................................................. 4
Rear Remote Control Action set to Stand By ...................................................................................... 5
Keypad ........................................................................................................................................................ 6
Display ........................................................................................................................................................ 7
Reading a Typical Remote Standard Display ........................................................................................... 8
Remote Control Panel Lockout ................................................................................................................. 8
Turning the Unit On or Off (Configured for STAND BY operation) ......................................................... 9
Turning the Unit On and Off (Configured for RUN operation) ................................................................ 9
Changing the Setpoint ............................................................................................................................. 10
Selecting Cycle Sentry or Continuous Mode ......................................................................................... 11
Displaying the Discharge Air Temperature............................................................................................. 12
Viewing and Clearing Alarm Codes ........................................................................................................ 13
Starting a Manual Defrost Cycle .............................................................................................................. 14
Sending a Start of Trip Marker ................................................................................................................ 15
Running a Pretrip Test............................................................................................................................. 16
4-1
01 November 2012
4-2
01 November 2012
OPTIONAL REAR REMOTE CONTROL PANEL
The optional Rear Remote Control Panel is connected to the control system and is used to operate the unit from
a remote location, typically at the rear of the trailer. In the illustration below all display segments are turned on.
THERMO KING
ON OFF
ZONE
P
1234
IMPORTANT: There are several versions of the Rear Remote Control Panel available. They can be identified
by the color of the wide border around the actual control panel. SR-4 Single Temperature Rear Remote Control
Panels have a black border. SR-4 SPECTRUM Multi-Temperature Rear Remote Control Panels have a blue
border. They are two separate control panels and are not interchangeable.
4-3
01 November 2012
Rear Remote Control Panel Functionality

The Rear Remote Control Panel functions that are available to the user are determined by the setting of the Rear
Remote Control and Rear Remote Control Action features in the Guarded Access / Unit Configuration Menu.
See Unit Configuration in Section 3 of this manual for details of these features.
When the unit is turned on at the Rear Remote Control Panel either the Remote Standard Display or [STAnd by]
will appear on the display.
Rear Remote Control Action set to Run

If the Rear Remote Control Action is set to RUN the Remote Standard Display will be present on the Rear
Remote Control Panel and the unit will start and run when the Rear Remote Control Panel ON Key is pressed.
Pressing the Rear Remote Control Panel OFF Key will turn the unit off.
If the control system is powered up from the Rear Remote Control Panel the Remote Standard Display will
appear in both the Rear Remote Control Panel display and the unit HMI Control Panel display. In addition to
turning the unit on and off and starting the unit, when set to RUN the Rear Remote Control Panel allows the
following:
 Turn the unit off and on
 The unit will start and run
 Change the Setpoint
 Select Cycle Sentry or Continuous Mode (unless prevent by OptiSet Plus)
 Display discharge air temperature
 Display and clear alarm codes
 Initiate a manual defrost cycle
 Send a Start of Trip marker to the ServiceWatch and CargoWatch Data Loggers
 Initiate a Pretrip Test
4-4
01 November 2012
Rear Remote Control Action set to Stand By

If the Rear Remote Control Action is set to STAND BY, pressing the Rear Remote Control Panel ON Key will
power up the control system, but the unit will not start and run. Pressing the Rear Remote Control Panel OFF
Key will turn the unit off. The HMI Control Panel on the unit must be used to start and stop unit operation.
In addition to turning the unit on and off, when set to STAND BY the Rear Remote Control Panel allows the
following:
 Turn the unit on and off
 The unit will not start and run
 Change the Setpoint
 Select Cycle Sentry or Continuous Mode (unless prevent by OptiSet Plus)
 Display discharge air temperature
 Display and clear alarm codes
 Send a Start of Trip marker to the ServiceWatch and CargoWatch Data Loggers
However, when in STAND BY, the engine will not start and a Defrost Cycle or Pretrip Test cannot be initiated.
If the control system is powered up from the remote control panel a stand by message will appear in both the
remote control panel display and the unit HMI Control Panel display as shown below.
REAR REMOTE CONTROL
STAND BY
Rear Remote Control Panel Unit HMI Control Panel
When the StAnd bY display is shown, press the Select Key to show the Remote Standard Display. When the
remote standard Display is shown, the setpoint and operating mode can be changed, the discharge air
temperature can be displayed and alarms can be viewed and cleared. In addition, a Start of Trip can be sent to
the data loggers.
After the last key is pressed, the display will return to the StAnd bY display shown above in about 10 seconds.
4-5
01 November 2012
THERMO KING
ON OFF
ZONE
P
1234
Keypad
The nine touch sensitive keys are used to turn the unit on and off. They also allow the setpoint to be changed,
Cycle Sentry or Continuous Mode to be selected, Alarm Codes and other operating data to be displayed and
Pretrip Tests and Defrost Cycles to be performed. A Start of Trip marker can also be sent to the data loggers.
ON KEY Turns the unit on as determined by the setting of Rear Remote Control
ON Action.
OFF KEY Turns the unit off.

OFF
UP ARROW KEY Increases setpoint or changes other setting.
DOWN ARROW KEY Decreases setpoint or changes other setting.
SELECT KEY Allows Cycle Sentry to be turned on and off, displays the discharge air
temperature and alarms.
ENTER KEY Executes a prompt or loads a new setpoint or other setting.
PRETRIP KEY Initiates a Pretrip Test
TK LOGO KEY Sends a Start of Trip marker to the data logger.
DEFROST KEY Initiates a defrost cycle if conditions allow.
4-6
01 November 2012
THERMO KING
ON OFF
ZONE
P
1234
Display
The display normally shows the Standard Display of return air temperature and setpoint. The icons on either side
of the display indicate operating modes and alarms. The display shown here has all possible segments lighted.
The display icons are defined below.
Cool Icon This icon appears when the unit is cooling.
Heat Icon This icon appears when the unit is heating.
Modulation Icon This icon appears when the unit is in modulation.
Defrost Icon This icon appears when the unit is defrosting.
Cycle Sentry Icon This icon appears when the unit is operating in Cycle Sentry mode.
Alarm Icon This icon appears when an alarm condition has been detected.
Electric Standby Icon This icon appears when the unit is operating in the optional electric standby
mode.
Setpoint Icon This icon appears when the setpoint is being shown in the display.
Not Used This icon appears during a remote control panel test but is not currently
used.
4-7
01 November 2012
Reading a Typical Remote Standard Display

The Remote Standard Display shows the temperature and setpoint. The icons at the sides of the display indicate
operating conditions.
The Remote Standard Display above shows the following information:

 The temperature (typically return air temperature) is 35.8°F.
 The setpoint is 35°F.
 The unit is cooling as shown by the icon at the upper left side of the display.
 The unit is operating in Cycle Sentry mode as shown by the icon at the upper right side of the display.
Remote Control Panel Lockout

The remote control panel may be locked out during some control system functions such as Service Test Mode,
Interface Board Test Mode and while setting programmable features. If this is the case the display shown below
will appear. The display will return to the Remote Standard Display when allowed by the control system.
ON OFF
4-8
01 November 2012
Turning the Unit On or Off (Configured for STAND BY operation)

The control system is turned on by pressing the ON Key and off by pressing the OFF Key. When the On Key is
pressed the remote display briefly shows all segments and then STAnd by as shown below. A stand by message
will also appear on the unit HMI Control Panel display. The setpoint can be changed but the unit will not start
and run. Only the Select Key, Enter Key and Up and Down Arrow Keys are functional. The unit can be started
and run by pressing the unit HMI Control Panel ON Key. IMPORTANT: To change the setpoint, press the
Select Key to show the Remote Standard Display. The setpoint can now be changed as shown on the next page.
OF
ON
F
Turning the Unit On and Off (Configured for RUN operation)

The unit is turned on by pressing the ON Key and off by pressing the OFF Key. When the On Key is pressed the
remote display briefly shows all segments and then COn FIg as the control system initializes. Then the Remote
Standard Display will appear as shown below. The unit will start and run if necessary.
OF
ON
F
4-9
01 November 2012
Changing the Setpoint

The setpoint can be changed when the Remote Standard Display is shown.
1. When the Remote Standard Display is shown, press the Up or Down Arrow Keys to select the desired
setpoint.
OF
ON
F
2. When the desired setpoint is shown on the display, immediately press the Enter Key to load the new
setpoint. The display will briefly show [Lod] and then the new setpoint will reappear in the display.
OF
ON
F
IMPORTANT: The Enter Key must be pressed or the setpoint will not be changed. The display will return to the
Standard Display and the setpoint will return to the old setpoint in about 10 seconds if the Enter Key is not
pressed. Alarm Code 127 Setpoint Not Entered is set, to indicate that the setpoint change was started but not
completed.
IMPORTANT: Confirm that the correct setpoint is set.
4-10
01 November 2012
Selecting Cycle Sentry or Continuous Mode

Cycle Sentry or Continuous Mode operation can be changed using the Select Key.
1. When the Remote Standard Display is shown, press the Select Key once to display the Cycle Sentry
prompt.
OF
ON
F
2. Use the Up and Down Arrow Keys to chose either YES or nO. Yes = Cycle Sentry Mode. nO =
Continuous Mode.
OF
ON
F
3. When the desired selection is shown, press the Enter Key to load the setting. The display will briefly
show [Lod] and then the new selection will briefly appear in the display.
OF
ON
F
4. The display will then return to the Remote Standard Display.
4-11
01 November 2012
Displaying the Discharge Air Temperature

The discharge air temperature can be shown using the Select Key.
1. When the Remote Standard Display is shown, press the Select Key twice. The discharge air
temperature will be shown in the display for about 10 seconds.
OF
ON
F
4-12
01 November 2012
Viewing and Clearing Alarm Codes

Alarm Codes can be displayed and cleared using the Select Key.
1. When the Remote Standard Display is shown, press the Select Key three times. Any alarm codes
present will be shown in the display, with the most recent alarm code shown first. If no alarm codes are
present the display will show [00].
OF
ON
F
2. To clear a displayed alarm code, press the Enter Key. The display will briefly show CLEAr ALm.
OF
ON
F
3. If any additional alarms are present, the next alarm will be shown. If no other alarms are present the
display will briefly show [00].
ON OFF
4-13
01 November 2012
Starting a Manual Defrost Cycle

If conditions allow, a manual defrost cycle can be initiated using the Defrost Key.
1. Press the Defrost Key. The defrost prompt [EnTEr dEF] will appear in the display.
OF
ON
F
2. When the defrost prompt is shown, press the Enter Key to start a manual defrost. The display will briefly
show LOAd dEF and then a defrost cycle will begin if conditions allow.
OF
ON
F
3. The display will return to the Remote Standard Display. The Defrost Icon will be shown in the display.
OF
ON
F
4. The defrost cycle will terminate automatically.
4-14
01 November 2012
Sending a Start of Trip Marker

A Start of Trip marker can be sent to the data loggers using the Thermo King Logo Key.
1. Press the Thermo King Logo Key. The Start of Trip [EnTEr SOt] prompt will appear in the display.
OF
ON
F
2. When the Start of Trip prompt is shown, press the Enter Key to send a Start of Trip marker to the
CargoWatch and ServiceWatch data loggers. The display will briefly show LOAd SOt.
OF
ON
F
3. The display will return to the Remote Standard Display.
4-15
01 November 2012
Running a Pretrip Test

A Pretrip Test can be started using the Pretrip Key. If the unit is not running when the Pretrip Test is started a
Full Pretrip Test will be performed. If the unit is running when the Pretrip Test is started a Running Pretrip Test
will be performed.
1. Clear any alarm codes as shown previously.
2. Press the Pretrip Key. The Pretrip [EntEr PrE] prompt will appear in the display.
OF
ON
F
3. When the Pretrip prompt is shown, press the Enter Key to start a Pretrip Test. The display will briefly
show LOAd PrE. If the unit is not running a Full Pretrip Test will be performed. If the unit is running a
Running Pretrip Test will be performed.
OF
ON
F
4-16
01 November 2012
4. When the Pretrip Test is running the display will show PrE trP. The HMI Control Panel will show the
Pretrip Test progress.
ON OFF
5. When the Pretrip Test is complete the display will show PASS, CHEC or FAIL. Pressing the Select Key
will return to the Remote Standard Display.
ON OFF
4-17
01 November 2012
4-18
01 November 2012
Section 4 – SR-4 Trailer S/T Electronic Engine Alarm Codes
SR-4 PRECEDENT ALARM CODES

NOTE: Not all alarm codes are used with all applications
Code Description Operator Help
00 No Alarms Exist
02 Check Evaporator Coil Sensor Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of the
day.
03 Check (Control) Return Air Sensor Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of the
day.
04 Check (Control) Discharge Air Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of the
Sensor day.
05 Check Ambient Air Sensor Report alarm at end of the day.
06 Check Coolant Temp Sensor

(Mechanical Engine Only)
07 Check Engine RPM Sensor
09 High Evaporator Temperature Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of the
day.
10 High Discharge Pressure If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
alarm at end of the day.
11 Unit Controlling on Alternate Sensor Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of the
day.
12 Sensor or Digital Input Shutdown The unit is no longer able to operate and has been shut down.
Repair immediately.
13 Sensor Calibration Check Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of the
day.
17 Engine Failed to Crank
18 High Engine Coolant Temperature If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
4-1
01 November 2012
19 Low Engine Oil Pressure If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
20 Engine Failed to Start If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
21 Cooling Cycle Check Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of the
day.
22 Heating Cycle Check Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of the
day.
23 Cooling Cycle Fault The unit is no longer able to operate and has been shut down.
Repair immediately.
24 Heating Cycle Fault The unit is no longer able to operate and has been shut down.
Repair immediately.
25 Alternator or Battery Charger Check If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
26 Check Refrigeration Capacity Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of the
day.
28 Pretrip Abort Report alarm at end of the day.
31 Check Oil Pressure Switch If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
32 Refrigeration Capacity Low The unit is no longer able to operate and has been shut down.
Repair immediately.
33 Check Engine RPM Report alarm at end of the day.
35 Check Run Relay Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
36 Electric Motor Failed to Run If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
37 Check Engine Coolant Level Check engine coolant level. Do not remove the cap if the
engine is hot. Report alarm at end of the day.
4-2
01 November 2012
38 Electric Phase Reversed If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
39 Check Water Valve Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
40 Check High Speed Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
41 Check Engine Coolant Temperature If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
42 Unit Forced to Low Speed Report alarm at end of the day.
43 Unit Forced to Low Speed Report alarm at end of the day.

Modulation
44 Check Fuel System Report alarm at end of the day.
45 Hot Gas or Hot Gas Bypass Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
46 Check Air Flow If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
48 Check Belts or Clutch If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
50 Reset Clock Report alarm at end of the day.
52 Check Heat Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
54 Test Mode Timeout Service Test or Output Test timed out after 15 minutes. Report
56 Check Host Evap Fan Low Speed If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
57 Check Host Evap Fan High Speed If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
4-3
01 November 2012
61 Low Battery Voltage If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
62 Ammeter Out of Calibration If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
63 Engine Stopped If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
64 Pretrip Reminder Report alarm at end of the day.
65 Abnormal Temperature Differential Report alarm at end of the day.
66 Low Engine Oil Level Check engine oil level. If unit is shut down repair immediately.
Otherwise, report alarm at end of the day.
67 Check Liquid Line Solenoid Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
68 Internal Controller Fault Code Report alarm at end of the day.
70 Hourmeter Failure Report alarm at end of the day.
74 Controller Reset to Defaults Report alarm at end of the day.
79 Internal Data Logger Overflow Report alarm at end of the day.
84 Restart Null Report alarm at end of the day.
85 Forced Unit Operation Report alarm at end of the day.
86 Check Discharge Pressure Sensor Report alarm at end of the day.
87 Check Suction Pressure Sensor Report alarm at end of the day.
4-4
01 November 2012
89 Check Electronic Throttling Valve If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
Circuit alarm at end of the day.
90 Electric Overload If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
91 Check Electric Ready Input If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
92 Sensor Grades Not Set Report alarm at end of the day.
96 Low Fuel Level Check engine fuel level and add fuel as required.
98 Check Fuel Level Sensor Report alarm at end of the day.
108 Door Open Timeout Close Doors. Report alarm at end of the day.
111 Unit Not Configured Correctly Report alarm at end of the day.
113 Check Electric Heat Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
117 Auto Switch from Diesel to Electric Report alarm at end of the day.
118 Auto Switch from Electric to Diesel Report alarm at end of the day.
120 Check Alternator Excite Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
121 Check Liquid Injection Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
122 Check Diesel/Electric Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
127 Setpoint Not Entered Be sure the setpoint is set to the correct temperature.
4-5
01 November 2012
128 Engine Run Time Maintenance Report alarm at end of the day.
Reminder #1
129 Engine Run Time Maintenance Report alarm at end of the day.
Reminder #2
130 Electric Run Time Maintenance Report alarm at end of the day.
Reminder #1
131 Electric Run Time Maintenance Report alarm at end of the day.
Reminder #2
132 Total Unit Run Time Maintenance Report alarm at end of the day.
Reminder #1
133 Total Unit Run Time Maintenance Report alarm at end of the day.
Reminder #2
134 Controller Power On Hours Report alarm at end of the day.
141 Autoswitch Diesel to Electric Report alarm at end of the day.

Disabled
143 Check Remote Zone Drain Hose If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
Heater Output alarm at end of the day.
145 Loss of Controller “On” 8XP If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
Feedback Signal alarm at end of the day.
146 Software Version Mismatch If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
148 Autoswitch Electric to Diesel Report alarm at end of the day.
Disabled
150 CargoWatch Sensor Out of Range Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of the
Low day.
151 CargoWatch Sensor Out of Range Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of the
High day.
152 CargoWatch Sensor Failed If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
4-6
01 November 2012
153 Expansion Module Flash Load If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
Failure alarm at end of the day.
157 OptiSet File Mismatch Report alarm at end of the day.
158 Primary Software Failed to Load Report alarm at end of the day.
159 Check Battery Condition If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
160 Lost Radio Expansion Board (REB) If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
CAN Communication alarm at end of the day.
203 Check Display Return Air Sensor Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of the
day.
204 Check Display Discharge Air Sensor Manually monitor load temperature. Report alarm at end of the
day.
233 REB Transitioning From Report alarm at end of the day.
Conservative to Full Null
234 Check Relative Humidity Sensor Report alarm at end of the day.
251 REB Miss-configured Report alarm at end of the day.
252 Check Auto Fresh Air Exchange Report alarm at end of the day.
Door
4-7
01 November 2012
4-8
01 November 2012
SR-4 PRECEDENT ALARM CODES – 500 SERIES

500 Check Host Evaporator Fan Low If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
Speed alarm at end of the day.
501 Check Host Evaporator Fan High If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
Speed alarm at end of the day.
505 Check Roadside Condenser Fan If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
Motor Speed Circuit alarm at end of the day.
506 Check Curbside Condenser Fan If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
Motor Speed Circuit alarm at end of the day.
508 Speed Request Communication Report alarm at end of the day.
Error
509 Engine Control Unit (ECU) Failed to If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
Enable alarm at end of the day.
510 Engine Control Unit (ECU) Run If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
Signal Failed alarm at end of the day.
511 Engine Wait to Start Time Delay Report alarm at end of the day.
Expired
518 Generator Ground Fault If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
519 Check Battery Charger Input Power If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
520 Check Battery Charger Output If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
Power alarm at end of the day.
521 Battery Charger If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
External/Environmental Fault alarm at end of the day.
522 Battery Temperature Sensor Alarm If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
523 Battery Charger Indicated Conditions If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
4-9
01 November 2012
524 Generator Operational Limit Vout to If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
Frequency Ratio alarm at end of the day.
525 Generator Frequency Range Fault If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
526 Generator Operational Limit Output If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
Current alarm at end of the day.
528 Controller Not Receiving Messages If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
From Battery Charger alarm at end of the day.
529 Check Fuel Pump Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
530 Low Pressure Differential If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
(Scroll Compressor Only) alarm at end of the day.
531 Check Economizer Pressure Sensor If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
(Scroll Compressor Only) alarm at end of the day.
538 Engine J1939 CAN Datalink If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
Degraded (Electronic Engine Only) alarm at end of the day.
539 Engine J1939 CAN Datalink Failed If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
(Electronic Engine Only) alarm at end of the day.
599 Engine Service Tool Connected Maintenance information only. Report alarm at end of the day.
4-10
01 November 2012
SR-4 PRECEDENT ALARM CODES – 600 SERIES (YANMAR)

600 Check Crankshaft Speed Sensor Report alarm at end of the day.
601 Check Camshaft Speed Sensor Report alarm at end of the day.
602 Check Intake Throttle Position If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
Sensor alarm at end of the day.
603 Check Exhaust Pressure Sensor If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
604 Check Coolant Temperature Sensor Report alarm at end of the day.
605 Check Fresh Air Temperature Report alarm at end of the day.
Sensor
607 Check Fuel Temperature Sensor Report alarm at end of the day.
608 Check Rail Pressure Sensor If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
609 Check Intake Pressure Sensor If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
610 Check Atmospheric Pressure Sensor Report alarm at end of the day.
611 Check Glow Plug Circuit Report alarm at end of the day.
612 Check Intake Throttle Circuit If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
613 Check Injector(s) Report alarm at end of the day.
614 Check High Pressure Fuel Pump If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
4-11
01 November 2012
615 Rail Pressure Fault If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
616 Engine Overspeed If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
617 Internal ECU Fault If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
618 Check EGR System Report alarm at end of the day.
619 ECU Main Relay Fault Report alarm at end of the day.
623 TRU CAN Message Timeout Report alarm at end of the day.
624 Check EGR Temperature Sensor Report alarm at end of the day.
625 Check Intake Air Temperature If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
Sensor alarm at end of the day.
626 Check Exhaust Temperature Sensor Report alarm at end of the day.
699 Unknown ECU Fault If unit is shut down repair immediately. Otherwise, report
4-12
01 November 2012
Section 5 – SR-4 Trailer S/T Electronic Engine Diagnostics
Table of Contents – Section 5
SR-4 Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................................... 7

SR-4 Control System Notes............................................................................................................................... 8
Electrostatic Discharge ..................................................................................................................................... 8
Physical protection ............................................................................................................................................ 8
Corrective Actions As A Result Of Alarm Codes ............................................................................................. 9
Alarm Types ....................................................................................................................................................... 9
Log Alarms .................................................................................................................................................... 9
Check Alarms ................................................................................................................................................ 9
Prevent Alarms ........................................................................................................................................... 10
Shutdown Alarms ....................................................................................................................................... 10
Special Alarm Code Considerations ............................................................................................................... 11
Pretrip Alarm Codes ................................................................................................................................... 11
Alarm Codes When Switching Between Diesel and Electric .................................................................... 11
Low Battery Voltage ................................................................................................................................... 11
Clearing Alarm Codes...................................................................................................................................... 12
00 No Alarms Exist .......................................................................................................................................... 13
02 Check Evaporator Coil Sensor ................................................................................................................... 13
03 Check (Control) Return Air Sensor ............................................................................................................ 15
04 Check (Control) Discharge Air Sensor ....................................................................................................... 18
05 Check Ambient Temperature Sensor ......................................................................................................... 21
09 High Evaporator Temperature .................................................................................................................... 23
10 High Discharge Pressure............................................................................................................................ 24
11 Unit Controlling on Alternate Sensor ......................................................................................................... 26
12 Sensor Shutdown ....................................................................................................................................... 27
13 Sensor Check .............................................................................................................................................. 28
17 Engine Failed to Crank ............................................................................................................................... 30
18 High Engine Coolant Temperature ............................................................................................................. 31
19 Low Engine Oil Pressure ............................................................................................................................ 32
20 Engine Failed to Start ................................................................................................................................. 33
21 Cooling Cycle Check .................................................................................................................................. 34
22 Heating Cycle Check................................................................................................................................... 35
23 Cooling Cycle Fault..................................................................................................................................... 36
24 Heating Cycle Fault ..................................................................................................................................... 37
25 Alternator Check ......................................................................................................................................... 39
5-1
01 December 2012
26 Check Refrigeration Capacity..................................................................................................................... 41

28 Pretrip Abort................................................................................................................................................ 42
31 Check Oil Pressure Switch ......................................................................................................................... 43
32 Refrigeration Capacity Low ........................................................................................................................ 44
33 Check Engine RPM ..................................................................................................................................... 45
35 Check Run Relay Circuit............................................................................................................................. 46
36 Electric Motor Failed to Run ....................................................................................................................... 48
37 Check Engine Coolant Level ...................................................................................................................... 49
38 Electric Phase Reversed ............................................................................................................................. 51
39 Check Water Valve Circuit .......................................................................................................................... 52
41 Check Engine Coolant Temperature .......................................................................................................... 53
42 Unit Forced to Low Speed .......................................................................................................................... 54
43 Unit Forced to Low Speed Modulation ....................................................................................................... 55
44 Check Fuel System ..................................................................................................................................... 56
45 Check Hot Gas or Hot Gas Bypass Circuit ................................................................................................ 57
46 Check Air Flow ............................................................................................................................................ 59
48 Check Belts or Clutch ................................................................................................................................. 60
50 Reset Clock ................................................................................................................................................. 61
52 Check Heat Circuit ...................................................................................................................................... 62
54 Test Mode Timeout ..................................................................................................................................... 64
56 Check Host Evaporator Fan Low Speed .................................................................................................... 65
57 Check Host Evaporator Fan High Speed ................................................................................................... 65
61 Low Battery Voltage.................................................................................................................................... 66
62 Ammeter Out of Calibration........................................................................................................................ 68
63 Engine Stopped........................................................................................................................................... 69
64 Pretrip Reminder ......................................................................................................................................... 70
65 Abnormal Temperature Differential ............................................................................................................ 71
66 Low Engine Oil Level .................................................................................................................................. 72
67 Check Liquid Line Solenoid Circuit ........................................................................................................... 73
68 Internal Controller Fault Code .................................................................................................................... 74
70 Hourmeter Failure ....................................................................................................................................... 74
74 Controller Reset to Defaults ....................................................................................................................... 75
79 Internal Data Logger Overflow ................................................................................................................... 76
84 Restart Null ................................................................................................................................................. 77
85 Forced Unit Operation ................................................................................................................................ 79
86 Check Discharge Pressure Sensor ............................................................................................................ 80
5-2
01 December 2012
87 Check Suction Pressure Sensor ................................................................................................................ 82

89 Check Electronic Throttling Valve Circuit.................................................................................................. 84
90 Electric Overload ........................................................................................................................................ 86
91 Check Electric Ready Input ........................................................................................................................ 87
92 Sensor Grades Not Set ............................................................................................................................... 88
96 Low Fuel Level ............................................................................................................................................ 89
98 Check Fuel Level Sensor ............................................................................................................................ 90
108 Door Open Timeout................................................................................................................................... 91
111 Unit Not Configured Correctly .................................................................................................................. 92
113 Check Electric Heat Circuit....................................................................................................................... 93
117 Auto Switch From Diesel to Electric ........................................................................................................ 94
118 Auto Switch From Electric to Diesel ........................................................................................................ 95
120 Check Alternator Excite Circuit ................................................................................................................ 96
121 Check PWM/Liquid Injection Circuit......................................................................................................... 98
122 Check Diesel/Electric Circuit .................................................................................................................... 99
127 Setpoint Not Entered............................................................................................................................... 101
128 Engine Run Time Maintenance Reminder #1 ......................................................................................... 102
129 Engine Run Time Maintenance Reminder #2 ......................................................................................... 102
130 Electric Run Time Maintenance Reminder #1 ........................................................................................ 102
131 Electric Run Time Maintenance Reminder #2 ........................................................................................ 102
132 Total Unit Run Time Maintenance Reminder #1 .................................................................................... 102
133 Total Unit Run time maintenance Reminder #2 ..................................................................................... 102
134 Controller Power On Hours .................................................................................................................... 102
141 Auto-switch Diesel to Electric Disabled ................................................................................................. 103
145 Loss of Controller “ON” Feedback Signal ............................................................................................. 104
146 Software Version Mismatch .................................................................................................................... 105
148 Auto-switch Electric to Diesel Disabled ................................................................................................. 105
150 Out of Range Low ................................................................................................................................... 106
151 Out of Range High................................................................................................................................... 107
157 OptiSet File Mismatch ............................................................................................................................. 108
157a Numbers in Lieu of Named Products ................................................................................................. 110
158 Software Failed to Load .......................................................................................................................... 111
159 Check Battery Condition......................................................................................................................... 112
160 Lost REB CAN Communication .............................................................................................................. 112
203 Check Display Return Air Sensor........................................................................................................... 113
204 Check Display Discharge Air Sensor ..................................................................................................... 116
5-3
01 December 2012
233 REB Transition Conservative to Full Null .............................................................................................. 119

234 Check Relative Humidity Sensor ............................................................................................................ 119
251 REB Mis-Configured ............................................................................................................................... 120
252 Check Fresh Air Exchange Circuit ......................................................................................................... 121
5-4
01 December 2012
SR-4 Precedent 500 Series Alarm Codes...................................................................................................... 123

500 Check Host Evaporator Blower Low Speed ........................................................................................... 123
501 Check Host Evaporator Blower High Speed .......................................................................................... 123
502 Check Host Evaporator RPM Sensor ..................................................................................................... 123
503 Check Host Condenser Fan 1 RPM Sensor ........................................................................................... 123
504 Check Host Condenser Fan 2 RPM Sensor ........................................................................................... 123
505 Check Roadside Cond Fan Motor Speed Ckt......................................................................................... 124
505 Check Roadside Cond Fan Motor Speed Ckt......................................................................................... 125
506 Check Curbside Cond Fan Motor Speed Ckt ......................................................................................... 126
506 Check Curbside Cond Fan Motor Speed Ckt ......................................................................................... 127
508 Speed Request Communication Error ................................................................................................... 128
509 ECU Failed to Enable .............................................................................................................................. 129
510 ECU Run Signal Failed............................................................................................................................ 130
511 Engine Wait to Start Time Delay Expired ............................................................................................... 131
518 Generator Ground Fault .......................................................................................................................... 132
519 Check Battery Charger Input Power....................................................................................................... 133
520 Check Battery Charger Output Power .................................................................................................... 134
521 Battery Charger External/Environ Fault ................................................................................................. 135
522 Battery Temperature Sensor ALarm ...................................................................................................... 136
523 Battery Charger Indicated Conditions.................................................................................................... 137
524 Generator Op Limit Vout to Freq Ratio ................................................................................................... 138
525 Generator Frequency Range Fault ......................................................................................................... 139
526 Generator Operation Limit Output Current ............................................................................................ 140
528 Controller Not Receiving Messages from Battery Charger ................................................................... 141
529 Check Fuel Pump Circuit ........................................................................................................................ 142
538 Engine J1939 CAN Data link Degraded .................................................................................................. 143
539 J1939 CAN Data link Failed .................................................................................................................... 145
539 J1939 CAN Data link Failed .................................................................................................................... 146
599 Engine Service Tool Connected ............................................................................................................. 147
5-5
01 December 2012
SR-4 Precedent 600 Series Yanmar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) ........................................................ 149
Viewing Yanmar DTC Codes (Diagnostic Trouble Codes) ...................................................................... 149
Yanmar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) with Thermo King Alarm Codes ........................................... 149
Clearing Yanmar DTC Codes and Associated Thermo King Alarm Codes ............................................ 149
Connections to Yanmar Engine Control Unit (ECU) ..................................................................................... 150
600 Check Crankshaft Speed Sensor ........................................................................................................... 151
601 Check Camshaft Speed Sensor.............................................................................................................. 152
602 Check Intake Throttle Position Sensor .................................................................................................. 153
603 Check Exhaust Pressure Sensor............................................................................................................ 154
604 Check Coolant Temp Sensor .................................................................................................................. 155
605 Check Fresh Air Temp Sensor ............................................................................................................... 156
607 Check Fuel Temp Sensor........................................................................................................................ 157
608 Check RAIL Pressure Sensor ................................................................................................................. 158
609 Check Intake Pressure Sensor ............................................................................................................... 159
610 Check Atmospheric Pressure Sensor .................................................................................................... 160
611 Check Glow Plug Circuit......................................................................................................................... 161
612 Check Intake Throttle Circuit .................................................................................................................. 162
613 Check Injector(s) ..................................................................................................................................... 163
614 Check High Pressure Fuel Pump ........................................................................................................... 165
615 RAIL Pressure Fault ................................................................................................................................ 166
616 Engine Overspeed................................................................................................................................... 167
617 Internal ECU Fault ................................................................................................................................... 168
618 Check EGR System ................................................................................................................................. 170
619 ECU Main Relay Fault ............................................................................................................................. 172
623 TRUCAN Message Timeout .................................................................................................................... 173
624 Check EGR Temperature Sensor ........................................................................................................... 174
625 Check Intake Air Temp Sensor ............................................................................................................... 175
626 Check Exhaust Temp Sensor ................................................................................................................. 176
699 Unknown ECU Fault ................................................................................................................................ 177
5-6
01 December 2012
SR-4 DIAGNOSTICS
Section 5 is devoted to diagnostic routines designed to help the technician quickly identify the cause of a problem
and repair it using the correct tools, information and procedures. It is important that the required procedures be
followed exactly. Failure to do so may result in an incomplete repair.
The following hints will prove helpful.
 Download the ServiceWatch data logger using the ThermoServ™ Service Tool. Review the data to
determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when
the alarm is set and cleared. This data can be very helpful in determining the cause of the alarm.
 Every effort should be made to perform a Pretrip Test on a suspect unit. In almost all cases, the Pretrip Test
will result in one or more alarm codes that will lead you directly to the problem.
 Operators should record all alarm codes in sequence for reference. Alarm codes are displayed in order of
occurrence, with the most recent alarm code displayed last.
 Clear all alarm codes before starting a Pretrip Test.
 Use Output Test and Service Test Mode as appropriate to verify unit operation
 Be certain all connectors at the Base Controller and HMI Control Panel are properly seated.
 Be certain all outboard harness connectors are properly seated.
 Make sure all programmable features are set to the customer’s specifications before releasing the unit for
service.
5-7
01 December 2012
SR-4 CONTROL SYSTEM NOTES

The following procedures must be followed when working on units equipped with SR-4 Base Controllers.
 Never use testers consisting of a battery and a light bulb to test circuits on any microprocessor-
based device.
 Any time a Return Air or Discharge Air sensor is changed, it must be calibrated using the Sensor
Calibration feature in the Guarded Access Menu.
 Any time the Base Controller is replaced, these Service Procedures must be used:
A02A - Recording Existing Base Controller Setup
A03A - Base Controller Removal and Replacement
A04A - Base Controller Setup
 Any time welding is necessary, Service Procedure A26A must be followed.
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
The following electrostatic precautions must be taken.
 Keep all SR-4 Base Controllers and HMI Control Panels in anti-static bags at all times.
PHYSICAL PROTECTION
 Protect any defective SR-4 Base Controller and HMI control panels from physical damage by placing them in
the shipping carton supplied with the replacement. They will be returned for failure analysis and possible re-
manufacture.
5-8
01 December 2012
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS AS A RESULT OF ALARM CODES

 Every effort should be made to perform a Pretrip Test on a unit suspected of having a defect. In
almost all cases, the Pretrip Test will result in one or more alarm codes that will lead you directly
to the problem.
 Download the ServiceWatch data logger using the Precedent Service Tool. Review the data to
determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are
recorded when the alarm is set and cleared. This data can be very helpful in determining the
cause of the alarm.
ALARM TYPES
Alarms may be one of four types as shown below.
Log Alarms
Log Alarms are indicated for 30 seconds each time the unit is turned on. This level of alarm serves as a notice to
take corrective action before a problem becomes severe. Maintenance items such as maintenance hourmeter
time-outs are Log Alarms. The Temperature Watch screen is not disabled if only Log Alarm(s) are active.
When the unit is turned on the display will show the Thermo King Logo and then the “Configuring System”
message. If Log Alarm(s) are present the Log Alarm notice will appear on the display for 60 seconds. The
remote indicator alarm light (if installed) will also be on during this period. The Standard Display will appear and
the remote indicator alarm light will go off after 30 seconds.
NOTE: The Alarm Icon does not appear on startup with Log Alarms present.
Check Alarms
Check Alarms are indicated by a steady alarm indication at the top of the display and the message “Service
Required within 24 Hours”. The Alarm Icon will appear. This level of alarm serves as a notice to take corrective
action before a problem becomes severe. The unit will run with Check Alarms but some features and functions
may be inhibited. The TemperatureWatch screen is disabled if a Check Alarm is active.
5-9
01 December 2012
Prevent Alarms
Prevent Alarms are indicated by a steady alarm indication at the top of the display and the message “Service
Required within 24 Hours”. The Alarm Icon will appear. The unit will be temporarily shut down if a prevent alarm
is active. The unit will remain shut down for a timed restart interval or until the fault conditions are corrected and
then restart. If the unit is in a temporary shutdown, Alarm Code 84 Restart Null will be present along with the
associated Prevent Alarm. In most cases the unit will restart with reduced performance to determine if continued
operation is possible. If the alarm does not reoccur with reduced performance then the unit will then return to full
performance. If the unit is operating with reduced performance Alarm Code 85 Forced Unit Operation will also be
present under some conditions. In general, if the alarm condition reoccurs a defined number of times then the
alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm and no further restarts are possible. The Temperature Watch screen is
disabled if a prevent alarm is active.
NOTE: If the Restart After Shutdown feature in the Guarded Access Menu is set for CONTINUOUS, then
an unlimited number of restart attempts are allowed.
Shutdown Alarms
Depending on software revisions, Shutdown Alarms may be indicated by the following:
 The Alarm Icon will appear.
 The display and backlight will flash on and off.
 The display will switch from normal video to reverse video and back to normal video. (Light areas
Shutdown Alarms will force the unit into shutdown. The unit will remain in shutdown until the Shutdown Alarm is
manually cleared. Exceptions are some engine and electric Shutdown Alarms that become Log Alarms when
switched to the alternate operating mode (diesel to electric or electric to diesel). The TemperatureWatch screen
is disabled if a unit level Shutdown Alarm is active.
5-10
01 December 2012
SPECIAL ALARM CODE CONSIDERATIONS
Pretrip Alarm Codes

If an alarm occurs during a Pretrip Test the alarm code will be displayed as Pretrip Alarm XX, where XX is the
alarm code.
Alarm Codes When Switching Between Diesel and Electric

If a Shutdown Alarm occurs that affects only Diesel Mode operation and the unit is switched to Electric Mode, the
Diesel Mode Shutdown Alarm becomes an Electric Mode Log Alarm. This allows the unit to run in Electric Mode
without clearing the Shutdown Alarm that is preventing Diesel Mode operation. If the unit is switched back to
Diesel Mode, the alarm again become a Diesel Mode Shutdown Alarm and prevents unit operation.
In the same manner, if a Shutdown Alarm occurs that affects only Electric Mode operation and the unit is switched
to diesel, the Electric Mode Shutdown Alarm becomes a Diesel Mode Log Alarm to allow Diesel Mode operation.
If the unit is switched back to Electric Mode, the alarm reverts to an Electric Mode Shutdown Alarm and prevents
unit operation.
Low Battery Voltage

If Alarm Code 61 Low Battery Voltage is set as a Shutdown Alarm then no subsequent alarm codes will be set
with the exception of Alarm Code 28 Pretrip Abort.
5-11
01 December 2012
CLEARING ALARM CODES

Most alarm codes can be cleared conventionally from the Alarm Menu using the CLEAR soft key.
The following alarm codes can only be cleared from the Guarded Access Menu. The CLEAR soft key will not
appear if the alarms are displayed from the Main Menu or the Maintenance Menu.
 Alarm Code 03 Check (Control) Return Air Sensor for all zones.
 Alarm Code 04 Check (Control) Discharge Air Sensor for all zones.
 Alarm Code 203 Check (Display) Return Air Sensor for all zones.
 Alarm Code 204 Check (Display) Discharge Air Sensor for all zones.
 Alarm Code 74 Controller Reset to Defaults
The following alarm codes clear automatically.

 Alarm Code 64 Pretrip Reminder – Clears when a Pretrip Test is performed.
 Alarm Code 84 Restart Null – Clears when the unit is no longer in a restart null due to a Prevent Alarm.
 Alarm Code 85 Forced Unit Operation – Clears when the unit is no longer running in a forced mode due
to a Prevent Alarm.
 Alarm Code 91 Check Electric Ready Input – Clears automatically when the unit starts running or the unit
is switched to Diesel Mode.
 Alarm Code 92 Sensor Grades Not Set – Clears when all installed graded sensor grades are changed
from 5H.
If the Limited Alarm Restarts feature is enabled the following additional alarm codes may only be cleared from the
Guarded Access Menu. If this is the case, the CLEAR soft key will not appear if the alarms are displayed from the
Main Menu or the Maintenance Menu. See the Limited Alarm Restarts feature in Section 3 for details.
 Alarm Code 10 High Discharge Pressure
 Alarm Code 23 Cooling Cycle Fault
 Alarm Code 24 Heating Cycle Fault
 Alarm Code 32 Refrigeration Capacity Low
5-12
01 December 2012
ALARM CODE DIAGNOSTICS

00 NO ALARMS EXIST Page 1 of 1
02 CHECK EVAPORATOR COIL SENSOR Page 1 of 2

Alarm Type Check Alarm
(Shutdown Alarm during a Pretrip Test).
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 13 Sensor Calibration Check
Codes
Component Description and Location
This sensor is an un-graded sensor and does not require calibration. The sensor is located on the evaporator coil
header plate.
Circuit Description
The evaporator coil temperature sensor circuit is a two wire circuit. The CTP-01 (+) wire connects the Base
Controller 35 pin sensor connector J1 Pin 8 to the blue sensor wire. The CTN-01 (-) wire connects the Base
Controller 35 pin sensor connector J1 Pin 20 to the brown sensor wire. The sensor wires are routed in the Sensor
Harness. The sensor is hard-wired to the sensor harness.
Considerations
1. Sensors should be positioned to minimize the potential for moisture entry where the wires enter the
sensor shell. Mount sensors with the barrel up and the wires down wherever possible.
2. See Alarm Code 13 for an explanation of “Soft Failures” and “Hard Failures”.
How Alarm is Set

1. If the sensor reading is over 200°F (93°C) for 10 seconds then Alarm Code 02 is set as a Check Alarm.
The sensor reading will display dashes [ - - - ] and may return to normal. This condition is termed a
“hard” sensor failure.
2. If the sensor reading is under -50°F (-46°C) for 10 seconds then Alarm Code 02 is set as a Check Alarm.
The sensor reading will display dashes [ - - - ] and may return to normal. The -50°F (-46°C) check is
ignored when the zone is in a Low Evaporator Coil Temperature Demand Defrost. This condition is
termed a “hard” sensor failure.
3. If the differential between the coil and other sensors is too large when Alarm Code 02 is cleared then
Alarm Code 02 and Alarm Code 13 Sensor Calibration Check are set as Check Alarms. This condition is
termed a “soft” sensor failure.
4. If the sensor reading is erratic over time but does not go above 200°F (93°C) or below -50°F (-46°C) then
5-13
01 December 2012
02 CHECK EVAPORATOR COIL SENSOR Page 2 of 2

How Alarm is Cleared
This alarm can be cleared manually. When the alarm is cleared the return air sensors, discharge air sensors and
evaporator coil sensor must all read within 30F (17C) of each other. If they do not, it is assumed that the sensor
reading is not accurate. The alarm code is not cleared and Alarm Code 13 Sensor Calibration Check will also be
set. Also, if the sensor is over or under range when the alarm clear is attempted, the alarm will not be cleared.
Diagnostic Procedure
Always download the ServiceWatch data logger using the ThermoServ Service Tool. Review the data to
determine the conditions at the time the alarm was set. Conditions relevant to the alarm are recorded when the
alarm is both set and cleared. This data can be invaluable when determining the cause of the alarm.
Alarm Code 02 (Sensor was out of range)

1. Display the sensor reading using the Sensor Menu. If the display shows [----], the sensor is defective and
should be replaced. If the condition still exists, check the sensor circuit for an open wire or short to
ground. See Service Procedure D01A. Check the Base Controller using Service Procedure A01A.
2. If the display is normal proceed as shown below.
Alarm Code 02 and Alarm Code 13 (Sensor was reading erratically)

1. Review the ServiceWatch data logger and check the sensor reading at the time the alarm was set. Also
review the history to see if previous alarm codes exist that would indicate an intermittent problem. If the
sensor appears to have read incorrectly, it should be replaced.
2. If the problem reoccurs, check the sensor connector as shown in Service Procedure D01A.
3. Check the sensor circuit as shown by Service Procedure D01A.
If all or many of the Sensor Codes (02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 11, 12 and 13) are set
1. Be sure the 35 pin Base Controller sensor connector J1 is securely attached.
2. Check the Base Controller as shown by Service Procedure A01A.
5-14
01 December 2012
03 CHECK (CONTROL) RETURN AIR SENSOR Page 1 of 3

Associated Alarm Alarm Code 11 Unit Controlling on Alternate Sensor
Codes Alarm Code 13 Sensor Check
Alarm Code 92 Sensor Grades Not Set
Alarm Code 203 Check Display Return Air Sensor
This sensor is one of a pair of return air sensors. Both return air sensors must agree within specified limits. The
sensor associated with Alarm Code 03 Check (Control) Return Air Sensor is used for unit control. The sensor is
located next to the display return air sensor in the return air stream. The harness wires to this sensor are marked
with one yellow cable tie near the sensor connection. It is a graded sensor.
Circuit Description
The control return air temperature sensor circuit is a two wire circuit. The RTP-01 (+) wire connects the Base
Controller 35 pin sensor connector J1 pin 5 to the blue sensor wire. The RTN-01 (-) wire connects the Base
Controller 35 pin sensor connector J1 pin 17 to the brown sensor wire. The sensor wires are routed in the Sensor
Harness. The harness wires to this sensor are marked with one yellow cable tie near the sensor connection. The
sensor is hard wired to the sensor harness.
Considerations
1. If the unit is controlling on return air temperature and a problem occurs with either return air sensor, the
unit will switch to Discharge Air Control and Alarm Code 11 Unit Controlling on Alternate Sensor will be
set. The appropriate sensor alarm codes will also be set.
2. Sensor codes must be cleared from the Guarded Access Menu before Alarm Code 11 Unit Controlling on
Alternate Sensor can be cleared.
3. Sensor grades must be correctly set to the actual grade of the sensor installed. Failure to do so may
result in nuisance sensor alarm codes.
5-15
01 December 2012

How Alarm is Set
The sensor reading will display dashes [ - - - ] and may return to normal. This condition is termed a “hard”
sensor failure.
The sensor reading will display dashes [ - - - ] may return to normal. This condition is termed a “hard”
sensor failure.
3. If the differential between the return air temperature and other temperature sensors is too large when
Alarm Code 03 is cleared then Alarm Code 03 and Alarm Code 13 Sensor Calibration Check are set as
Check Alarms. This condition is termed a “soft” sensor failure.
5. If the sensor grade for this sensor is set to 5H then Alarm Code 03 and Alarm Code 92 Sensor Grades
Not Set are set as Check Alarms.
6. The temperatures of the control return air sensor and display return air sensor twins are not within a
specified range. If the faulty sensor can be determined, only the alarm code for that sensor and Alarm
Code 13 Sensor Check will be set. Alarm Codes 03 Check (Control) Return Air Sensor, 203 Check
Display Return Air Sensor, and 13 Sensor Check are set if the faulty sensor cannot be determined.

This alarm can only be cleared manually from the Guarded Access menu.
When the alarm is cleared the return air sensors, discharge air sensors and evaporator coil sensor must all read
within 30F (17C) of each other. If they do not, it is assumed that the sensor reading is not accurate. The alarm
code is not cleared and Alarm Code 13 Sensor Calibration Check will also be set. Also, if the sensor is over or
under range when the alarm clear is attempted, the alarm will not be cleared.
If the alarm is set by Condition #5 above, Alarm Code 92 will clear automatically if the sensor grade is changed
from 5H. If the sensor grade remains 5H, Alarm Code 92 can not be cleared.
This is a graded sensor. The sensor grade must be correctly set in the Guarded Access Menu.
5-16
01 December 2012


Alarm Code 03 and Alarm Code 13 (Sensor drifted or was reading erratically)
1. Review the ServiceWatch data logger and check the senor reading at the time the alarm was set. Also,
2. Be sure the sensor grades are set to the actual sensor grade.
3. Check for an airflow obstruction and correct sensor mounting.
5. Check the sensor circuit, as shown by Service Procedure D01A.
Alarm Code 03 and Alarm Code 92 (Sensor grade set to 5H)

1. Verify and set the sensor grade.
Alarm Code 03 and/or Alarm Code 203 are set with Alarm Code 13 (Dual sensors don’t agree)
1. Review the ServiceWatch data logger and check the senor readings at the time the alarm was set. Also,
review the history to see if previous alarm codes exist that would indicate the problem sensor. If a sensor
appears to have read incorrectly, it should be replaced.
2. Check for an airflow obstruction and correct sensor mounting. Be sure the brass clamp is installed on the
two return air sensors.
3. Be sure the sensor grades are set to the actual sensor grade, and are not transposed.
4. If the offending sensor cannot be determined, either ice bath both return air sensors simultaneously to
determine which sensor is inaccurate or replace both sensors.
If all or many of the Sensor Codes (02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 11, 12, 203 and 204) are set
1. Be sure the 35 pin Base Controller sensor connector J1 is connected securely.
5-17
01 December 2012
04 CHECK (CONTROL) DISCHARGE AIR SENSOR Page 1 of 3

This sensor is one of a pair of dual discharge air sensors. Both discharge air sensors must agree within specified
limits. The sensor associated with Alarm Code 04 Check (Control) Discharge Air Sensor is used for unit control.
The sensor is located next to the display discharge air sensor in the discharge air stream. The harness wires to
this sensor are marked with one red cable tie near the sensor connection. It is a graded sensor.
Circuit Description
The discharge air temperature sensor circuit is a two wire circuit. The DTP-01 (+) wire connects the Base
Controller 35 pin sensor connector J1 pin 7 to the blue sensor wire. The DTN-01 (-) wire connects the Base
Harness. The harness wires to this sensor are marked with one red cable tie near the sensor connection. The
Considerations
1. If the unit is controlling on discharge air temperature, and a problem occurs with either discharge air
sensor, the unit will switch to Return Air Control and Alarm Code 11 Unit Controlling on Alternate Sensor
will be set. The appropriate sensor alarm codes will also be set.
5-18
01 December 2012

How Alarm is Set
sensor failure.
3. If the differential between the discharge and other sensors is too large when Alarm Code 04 is cleared
then Alarm Code 04 and Alarm Code 13 Sensor Calibration Check are set as Check Alarms. This
condition is termed a “soft” sensor failure.
5. If the sensor grade for this sensor is set to 5H then both Alarm Code 04 and Alarm Code 92 Sensor
Grades Not Set are set as Check Alarms.
6. The temperatures of the control discharge air sensor and display discharge air sensor twins are not within
a specified range. If the faulty sensor can be determined, only the alarm code for that sensor and Alarm
Code 13 Sensor Check will be set. Alarm Codes 04 Check (Control) Discharge Air Sensor, 204 Check
Display Discharge Air Sensor, and 13 Sensor Check are set if the faulty sensor cannot be determined.

Programmable Settings
5-19
01 December 2012


1. Review the ServiceWatch data logger and check the sensor reading at the time the alarm was set. Also,

1. Review the ServiceWatch data logger and check the senor readings at the time the alarm was set. Also,
5-20
01 December 2012
05 CHECK AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Page 1 of 2

Associated Alarm Alarm Code 13 Sensor Check
Codes
This sensor is an un-graded sensor and does not require calibration. The sensor is located in the condenser air
stream behind the condenser grill.
Circuit Description
The ambient temperature sensor circuit is a two wire circuit. The ATP-01 (+) wire connects the Base Controller
35 pin sensor connector J1 pin 30 to the blue sensor wire. The ATN-01 (-) wire connects the Base Controller 35
pin sensor connector J1 pin 31 to the brown sensor wire. The sensor wires are routed in the Sensor Harness.
The sensor is connected to the sensor harness with a Deutsch connector.
Considerations
How Alarm is Set

1. If the sensor reading is over 200°F (93°C) for 10 seconds then set alarm code 05 as a Check Alarm. The
sensor reading will display dashes [ - - - ] and may return to normal. This condition is termed a “hard”
sensor failure.
2. If the sensor reading is under -50°F (-46°C) for 10 seconds then set alarm code 05 as a Check Alarm.
sensor failure.

This alarm is cleared manually. If the sensor is over or under range when the alarm clear is attempted, the alarm
will not be cleared.
5-21
01 December 2012
05 CHECK AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR Page 2 of 2

Alarm Code 05 (Sensor was out of range) Only

1. Display the sensor reading using the Sensor Menu. If the display shows [- - - - ], the sensor is defective
and should be replaced. If the condition still exists, check the sensor circuit for an open wire or short to
5-22
01 December 2012
09 HIGH EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Prevent or Shutdown Alarm
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 84 Restart Null

Codes
See Alarm Code 02 Evaporator Coil Sensor.
How Alarm is Set

If the unit is running and the evaporator coil temperature was greater than or equal to 155°F (68°C) or the
discharge air temperature was greater than or equal to 135°F (57°C).

This alarm is cleared manually.
1. Check refrigeration system operation, especially in heat and defrost.

a. This alarm may be set if the 3 way valve is stuck in the heat position.
b. This alarm may be set if the defrost damper is stuck in the closed position.
2. Check the evaporator fan for proper operation.
3. If both the coil temperature sensor and the discharge temperature sensor are failed, then the defrost
cycle is terminated on time. If this occurs, the unit may remain in defrost long enough to cause excessive
evaporator coil temperature.
4. Check evaporator coil sensor operation, as shown in Alarm Code 02 Check Evaporator Coil Sensor. If
the evaporator coil sensor reads high due to a defective sensor then Alarm Code 09 High Evaporator
Temperature may be set as a result.
5-23
01 December 2012
10 HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE Page 1 of 2

Alarm Type Prevent or Shutdown Alarm

Codes
The high pressure cutout switch (HPCO) is located on the compressor discharge manifold.
Circuit Description
The high pressure cutout circuit is a two wire circuit. The PHPC-01 wire connects the Base Controller 35 pin
connector J4 pin 23 to one side of the high pressure cutout switch. The HPCO-01 wire connects the Base
Controller 35 pin connector J4 pin 35 to the other side of the high pressure cutout switch. The switch is not
polarity sensitive. The switch wires are routed in the Main Harness. The HPCO switch is connected to the Main
Harness with a Deutsch connector.
How Alarm is Set

1. If the HPCO switch opens then alarm code 10 is set as a prevent alarm. Two restart attempts will be
made to allow continued operation at temporarily reduced performance. If, at the end of the two attempts
full performance is not possible, the alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm. The temporary shutdown period
is 15 minutes Code 84 restart null is set along with the code 10 alarm to indicate the unit is in a
temporary shutdown mode.
If continuous restarts are enabled, a Shutdown Alarm is not set after 2 attempts. The temporary
shutdown period is 60 minutes if continuous restarts are enabled. Code 84 restart null is set along with
the code 10 alarm to indicate the unit is in a temporary shutdown mode.
If restarts are disabled, the alarm will be set as a shutdown on the first occurrence.
2. If the discharge pressure transducer exceeds a pre-set value and the discharge pressure transducer is
not failed then alarm code 10 is set as a prevent alarm. Two restart attempts will be made to allow
continued operation at temporarily reduced performance. If, at the end of the two attempts full
performance is not possible, the alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm. The temporary shutdown period is 15
minutes Code 84 restart null is set along with the code 10 alarm to indicate the unit is in a temporary
shutdown mode.
If continuous restarts are enabled, a Shutdown Alarm is not set after 2 attempts. The temporary
shutdown period is 60 minutes if continuous restarts are enabled. Code 84 restart null is set along with
the code 10 alarm to indicate the unit is in a temporary shutdown mode.
If restarts are disabled, the alarm will be set as a shutdown on the first occurrence.
5-24
01 December 2012
10 HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE Page 2 of 2

1. The alarm can be cleared manually if the condition no longer exists.
2. The alarm will clear automatically at the conclusion of a successful prevent routine.
Considerations
If the HPCO switch is open it will always shut the unit down. The switch contacts break power to the Run Relay
and the Fuel Solenoid.
1. Check the refrigeration system for high discharge pressure and correct as required.
2. Check to be sure the Condenser Fans are operating properly using Output Test Mode.
3. Check the High Pressure Cutout Switch for proper operation (closed under normal conditions). Check the
switch for excessive resistance. The nominal switch resistance is less than 1 ohm.
4. Check the High Pressure Cutout Switch circuit, as shown by Service Procedure D01A.
5. Check the Base Controller High Pressure Cutout fuse F25.
6. Check the discharge pressure transducer for correct and accurate readings.
7. Check the refrigeration system valves for correct operation. A fault that prevents refrigerant flow from the
system high side to the system low side may create high discharge pressure.
8. Review the ServiceWatch download in technician level view. The associated alarm data will show the
status of the HPCO switch and the discharge pressure at the time the alarm was set. If this data
indicates that the HPCO switch opened but the discharge pressure remained within acceptable limits, the
actual problem is a defective HPCO switch, not high discharge pressure.
5-25
01 December 2012
11 UNIT CONTROLLING ON ALTERNATE SENSOR Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm Alarm Code 03 Check (Control) Return Air Sensor

Codes Alarm Code 203 Check Display Return Air Sensor
Alarm Code 04 Check (Control) Discharge Air Sensor
Alarm Code 204 Check Display Discharge Air Sensor
See Alarm Codes indicated above.
Circuit Description
How Alarm is Set

The primary control sensor (either return or discharge depending on unit settings) has failed and the unit is
controlling on the alternate sensor. If the unit is operating with return air sensor control, and either of the dual
return air sensors fails, the unit will control using the discharge air sensor. If the unit is operating with discharge
air sensor control, and either of the discharge air sensors fails, the unit will control using the return air sensor.

This alarm is cleared manually. The associated sensor alarm code must be cleared before Alarm Code 11 can be
cleared.
If Alarm Code 12 Sensor Shutdown is set then Alarm Code 11 will be auto cleared.
1. Determine which sensor Alarm Codes (03, 203 04 or 204) is present. Proceed as shown for that Alarm
Code.
5-26
01 December 2012
12 SENSOR SHUTDOWN Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Check or Shutdown Alarm
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 03 Check (Control) Return Air Sensor

Codes Alarm Code 203 Check Display Return Air Sensor
Circuit Description
How Alarm is Set

Fresh Setpoints
Both return and discharge sensors have failed or have been disabled by the dual sensor alarm control. With a
fresh range setpoint the alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
Frozen Setpoints
Both return and discharge sensors have failed or have been disabled by the dual sensor alarm control. With a
frozen range setpoint the alarm is set as a Check Alarm. The unit will be forced into continuous low speed cool.

This alarm is cleared automatically when the associated sensor Alarm Codes 03 and 04 are cleared.
1. Determine which sensor Alarm Codes (03, 203, 04 or 204) are present. Proceed as shown for that alarm
code.
5-27
01 December 2012
13 SENSOR CHECK Page 1 of 2

Associated Alarm Alarm Code 02 Check Evaporator Coil Sensor

Codes Alarm Code 03 Check (Control) Return Air Sensor
Alarm Code 05 Check Ambient Temperature Sensor
Circuit Description
How Alarm is Set

1. Evaporator Coil Sensor Check If the evaporator coil, return and discharge sensors do not read within a
specified number of degrees of each other 20 minutes after a defrost cycle terminates then Alarm Code
13 Sensor Check is set as a Check Alarm. Alarm Code 02 Check Evaporator Coil Sensor will also be set.
2. The alarm is set if, immediately after clearing Alarm Codes 02, 03, 203, 04 or 204, all return, discharge
and coil sensors do not read within a specified number of degrees of each other.
3. Return, Discharge and Evaporator Coil Sensor Check If the return, discharge or evaporator coil sensors
are reading erratically over a specified time then Alarm Code 13 will be set as a Check Alarm along with
the alarm code for the erratic sensor (Alarm Code 03, 203 or Alarm Code 04, 204).

This alarm is cleared manually. The associated sensor code must be cleared from the Guarded Access menu.
5-28
01 December 2012
13 SENSOR CHECK Page 2 of 2

Determine which sensor Alarm Codes (02, 03, 203, 04, 204 or 05) are present along with Alarm Code 13.
Proceed as shown for that Alarm Code.
Sensor alarms are classified as either “Soft Failures” or “Hard Failures”.
A “Soft Failure” is defined as erratic operation or sensor drift that exceeds acceptable tolerances. If this occurs,
the alarm code for the suspect sensor will be set along with Alarm Code 13. This indicates a potential problem
that may not be immediately apparent, and also shows that a hard failure as defined below did not occur. Alarm
Code 13 is always set if a soft failure occurs.
Note: Alarm Code 13 can be cleared by the driver, while sensor Alarm Codes 03, 04, 203 and 204 can
only be cleared from the Guarded Access Menu. If the unit has only Alarm Code 03, 04, 203 or 204 set
when inspected, that alarm code may have been originally set with Alarm Code 13. Checking the
ServiceWatch data logger download will indicate the conditions that existed when the failure occurred.
A “Hard Failure” is defined by an out of range sensor reading, typically caused by an open or shorted sensor,
connector, or harness conductor. The sensor display will show dashes if a hard failure occurs. If this occurs, only
the alarm code for that sensor will be set (such as Alarm Code 03 if the control return air sensor failed). Alarm
Code 13 will not be set if a hard failure occurs.
Note: The controller may not be currently showing dashes for the sensor reading, but the alarm will be
present when the unit is inspected. If a sensor alarm code is set, a failure did occur at some point.
Checking the ServiceWatch data logger download will indicate when the hard failure occurred.
5-29
01 December 2012
17 ENGINE FAILED TO CRANK Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Log Alarm
Associated Alarm
Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. Alarm Code 17 is set as a supporting Log Alarm if the ECU determines the engine failed to crank.

The alarm is cleared manually.
Use the Yanmar SmartAssist Direct (YSAD) Diagnostic Tool to determine what DTC Codes are set. For
corrective actions consult the Yanmar Troubleshooting Guide.
5-30
01 December 2012
18 HIGH ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Prevent or Shutdown Alarm in Diesel Mode
Log Alarm in Electric Mode
Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. Alarm Code 18 is set as a supporting Log Alarm if the ECU determines the engine coolant temperature is
high.

1. The alarm can be cleared manually if the condition no longer exists.
2. The alarm will clear automatically at the conclusion of a successful prevent routine.
Considerations
This alarm becomes a Log Alarm if the unit is switched to Electric Mode. Alarm Code 18 alarm conditions will be
monitored while the unit is operating in Electric Mode, and will auto-clear when the engine coolant temperature is
reduced to a safe value.
5-31
01 December 2012
19 LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Shutdown Alarm in Diesel Mode
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 31 Check Oil Pressure Switch
Codes Alarm Code 66 Low Engine Oil Level

The oil pressure switch is located at the side of the oil filter housing.
Circuit Description
The low oil pressure switch circuit is a single wire circuit. The 20B wire connects the Base Controller 36 pin
connector J7 pin 28 to the low oil pressure switch. The switch is not polarity sensitive and is closed on low oil
pressure. This applies chassis ground to the Base Controller. The switch wire is routed in the Main Harness.
How Alarm is Set

1. Alarm Code 18 is set as a supporting Log Alarm if the ECU determines the engine oil pressure is low.

Considerations
This alarm becomes a Log Alarm if the unit is switched to Electric Mode. It will again become a Shutdown Alarm
if the unit is switched to Diesel Mode.
5-32
01 December 2012
20 ENGINE FAILED TO START Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Log, Check, Prevent or Shutdown Alarm in Diesel Mode
Codes Alarm Code 15 Check Air Intake Heater
How Alarm is Set

1. Alarm Code 20 is set as a supporting Log Alarm if the ECU determines the engine failed to start.

The alarm is cleared manually.
Considerations
This alarm becomes a Log Alarm if the unit is switched to Electric Mode.
5-33
01 December 2012
21 COOLING CYCLE CHECK Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Prevent Alarm
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 23 Cooling Cycle Fault

Codes Alarm Code 84 Restart Null
Alarm Code 85 Forced Unit Operation
How Alarm is Set
1. If the unit or zone is exhibiting a heating temperature differential (T) while operating in cool mode then
Alarm Code 21 is set as a prevent alarm.

This alarm is cleared automatically or manually.
Considerations
1. This is a Prevent alarm. A second occurrence of this alarm will be set as Alarm Code 23 Cooling Cycle
Fault Shutdown Alarm.
2. If restarts are disabled, Alarm Code 23 will be set as a Shutdown Alarm on the first occurrence of the
alarm.
1. Check temperature differential by displaying the temperature differential, or by checking the difference
between the return and discharge air temperature sensors.
2. Check refrigerant level.
3. Attach gauges and evaluate unit refrigeration system performance.
4. Verify that sensor grades are set correctly.
5. Check for proper air flow. Short cycling, caused by a blocked air flow path, may generate this code.
6. Check the three-way valve. A defective valve that does not return to the cooling position may cause this
alarm.
7. Check the pilot solenoid valve. A defective valve that is stuck open will prevent the three-way valve from
shifting to the cooling position.
5-34
01 December 2012
22 HEATING CYCLE CHECK Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm Alarm Code 24 Heating Cycle Fault

Codes Alarm Code 84 Restart Null
Alarm Code 85 Forced Unit Operation
How Alarm is Set
1. If the unit or zone is exhibiting a cooling temperature differential (T) while operating in heat mode then
Alarm Code 22 is set as a prevent alarm.

This alarm is cleared automatically or manually.
Considerations
1. This is a Prevent alarm. A second occurrence of this alarm will be set as Alarm Code 24 Heating Cycle
Fault Shutdown Alarm if the zone is operating in the Fresh setpoint range.
2. The alarm is set as a check level alarm if the unit is operating in the frozen setpoint range. Heat
operation is locked out if an Alarm Code 24 is set in a unit that is operating in the frozen setpoint range.
alarm.
6. Check the three-way valve. A defective valve that does not return to the heating position may cause this
alarm.
7. Check the pilot solenoid valve. A defective valve will prevent the three-way valve from shifting to the
heating position.
5-35
01 December 2012
23 COOLING CYCLE FAULT Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Shutdown Alarm
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 21 Cooling Cycle Check

Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If the unit or zone was operating with a heating temperature differential (T) while operating in cool mode
and Alarm Code 21 Cooling Cycle Check has previously been set then Alarm Code 23 is set as a
Shutdown Alarm. If the unit is in a Pretrip Test or Restarts are set DISABLED then Alarm Code 23 can be
set without Alarm Code 21 Cooling Cycle Check having occurred.

This alarm is cleared manually. If the Limited Alarm Resets feature is active then Alarm Code 23 will be promoted
to Guarded Access clear.
If restarts are disabled Alarm Code 24 will be set as a Shutdown Alarm on the first occurrence of the alarm.
Considerations
1. This is a Shutdown Alarm. It is typically preceded by Alarm Code 21 Cooling Cycle Check Alarm.
alarm.
6. Check the three-way valve. A defective valve that does not return to the cooling position may cause this
alarm.
5-36
01 December 2012
24 HEATING CYCLE FAULT Page 1 of 2

Associated Alarm Alarm Code 22 Heating Cycle Check

Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If the unit or zone was operating with a cooling temperature differential (T) while operating in heat mode
and Alarm Code 22 Heating Cycle Check has previously been set then Alarm Code 24 is set as a
Shutdown Alarm. If the unit is in a Pretrip Test or Restarts are set DISABLED then Alarm Code 24 can be
set without Alarm Code 22 Heating Cycle Check having occurred.

This alarm is cleared manually. If the Limited Alarm Resets feature is active Alarm Code 24 will be promoted to
Guarded Access clear.
If restarts are disabled Alarm Code 24 will be set as a Shutdown Alarm on the first occurrence of the alarm.
Considerations
1. This is a Shutdown Alarm. It is typically preceded by Alarm Code 22 Heating Cycle Check Alarm.
2. If restarts are disabled Alarm Code 24 will be set as a Shutdown Alarm on the first occurrence of the
alarm.
3. This alarm cannot be set in a unit operating in the frozen setpoint range. See the Alarm Code 22
description.
5-37
01 December 2012
24 HEATING CYCLE FAULT Page 2 of 2

between the zone return and discharge air temperature sensors.
6. Check the three-way valve. A defective valve that does not return to the heating position may cause this
alarm.
5-38
01 December 2012
25 ALTERNATOR CHECK Page 1 of 2

Alarm Type Log, Check or Shutdown Alarm
Associated Alarm None

Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If the engine is running, oil pressure is good, charge amps are less than -1.0 amps, and battery volts are
less than 13.2 volts for 3 minutes, the alarm is set as a Check Alarm in normal operation and during a
Pretrip Test and as a Shutdown Alarm in Sleep mode.
2. If the engine is running, oil pressure is good and battery volts are greater than 16.0 volts for 3 minutes,
the alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
3. If the unit is running in electric, the alternator frequency is >100HZ, charge amps are less than -1.0 amps,
and battery volts are less than 13.2 volts for 3 minutes, the alarm is set as a Check Alarm in normal
operation and during a Pretrip Test, and as a Shutdown Alarm in Sleep mode.

Considerations
The alternator excite voltage is controlled by the Alternator Excite Output. The Alternator Excite Output will
supply alternator excite voltage as soon as the engine starts.
5-39
01 December 2012
25 ALTERNATOR CHECK Page 2 of 2

1. Check and adjust the alternator drive belt.
2. Start the engine or electric motor and check the battery voltage and amperage, using the Gauge Display
in the Maintenance Menu. The voltage should be greater than 13.2 volts but less than 16 volts. Current
flow should be greater than –1.0 amps. Test and repair charging system as required.
3. Check the alternator connections.
4. Check the excitation voltage at the alternator. Excitation voltage should be equal to the battery voltage.
5. Check the operation of the Alternator Excite Output using Output Test Mode. Be sure the Alternator
Excite LED 18 lights. The Alternator Excite Output will supply alternator excite voltage as soon as the
engine starts.
6. Check the sense voltage at the alternator. Sense voltage should be equal to the battery voltage
7. Check Fuse F20 on the Base Controller.
8. If the unit is equipped with a Prestolite alternator, verify that fuse F4 is in place on the Base Controller and
is not open. Units equipped with a Bosch or a Thermo King alternator should not have fuse F4 installed
on the Base Controller.
5-40
01 December 2012
26 CHECK REFRIGERATION CAPACITY Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm Alarm Code 85 Forced Unit Operation

Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If the unit or zone heating or cooling capacity is reduced far enough below normal levels to indicate a
refrigeration problem then Alarm Code 26 is set as a Check Alarm. The capacity loss is not significant
enough to force the unit into shutdown mode.

This alarm is cleared manually or automatically.
Considerations
If the unit is running in reduced capacity mode because of a Prevent alarm and Alarm Code 26 is set, Alarm Code
85 Forced Unit Operation alarm is also set. Alarm Code 85 indicates the unit was forced into a reduced capacity
mode.
between the control return and control discharge sensors.
6. Check evaporator superheat.
5-41
01 December 2012
28 PRETRIP ABORT Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm The associated Pretrip alarm

Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If a Shutdown Alarm occurs during a Pretrip test then Alarm Code 28 is set and the unit is shut down.
The alarm condition that caused the shutdown is also set. Alarm Code 28 is also set if the unit is turned
off while a Pretrip Test is in progress, or if the Pretrip Test is terminated by a communications command.

1. This is a normal alarm any time the Pretrip Test is terminated before the completion of all tests.
2. Proceed with the corrective actions for any alarm codes that occurred.
3. After repairs, repeat the Pretrip Test. See Section 4 for details.
4. If only Alarm Code 28 is set, the unit may have been turned off during a Pretrip Test, or the test may have
been interrupted by a communications request. Clear the alarm and repeat the Pretrip Test.
5-42
01 December 2012
31 CHECK OIL PRESSURE SWITCH Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Log or Shutdown Alarm in Diesel Mode
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 19 Low Engine Oil Pressure
Codes Alarm Code 66 Low Engine Oil Level

The oil pressure switch is located at the side of the oil filter housing.
Circuit Description
The low oil pressure switch circuit is a single wire circuit. The 20B wire connects the Base Controller 36 pin
connector J7 pin 28 to the low oil pressure switch. The switch is not polarity sensitive and is closed on low oil
pressure. This applies chassis ground to the Base Controller. The switch wire is routed in the Main Harness.
How Alarm is Set

1. Alarm Code 31 is set as a supporting Log Alarm if the ECU determines the engine oil pressure switch is
malfunctioning.

Considerations
If this alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm in Diesel Mode operation, it becomes a Log Alarm if unit is switched to
Electric Mode operation.
If the alarm exists in Electric Mode and the unit is switched to diesel, either condition #1 or #2 in the “How Alarm
is Set” section above apply.
5-43
01 December 2012
32 REFRIGERATION CAPACITY LOW Page 1 of 2

Associated Alarm Alarm Code 26 Check Refrigeration Capacity

Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If the unit heating or cooling capacity has degraded to the point where it has insufficient capacity to
operate then Alarm Code 32 is set as a Shutdown Alarm. The unit's cooling or heating performance is
considerably impaired. Corrective actions such as defrost have failed to improve performance.

Considerations
Alarm Code 32 Refrigeration Capacity Low requires that Alarm Code 26 Check Refrigeration Capacity has been
set first.
5. Check for proper air flow. Short cycling caused by a blocked air flow path may generate this code.
6. Check the compressor and refrigeration system.
5-44
01 December 2012
33 CHECK ENGINE RPM Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Check Alarm (Pretrip Only)
Associated Alarm Alarm 07 Check Engine RPM Sensor

Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. Alarm Code 33 is set as a supporting Log Alarm if the ECU determines the engine RPM is not in range.

Considerations
Only checked during a Pretrip Test.
5-45
01 December 2012
35 CHECK RUN RELAY CIRCUIT Page 1 of 2

Associated Alarm
Codes
Circuit Description
The K1 Run Relay, LED 6, and associated fuse are located on the Base Controller. The 7K circuit is internal
within the SR-4 Base Controller.
Power to the Run Relay circuit is supplied by fuse F25. Consult the schematic diagram for the unit for complete
circuit details.
When the Run Relay is energized, 8 circuit power is supplied to the 7K circuit. This alarm code indicates that 7K
circuit digital input is not present when the Run Relay output is energized or that 7K power is present when the
Run Relay is de-energized.
How Alarm is Set

1. If the Run Relay is energized and the 7K input is low at the Base Controller then Alarm Code 35 is set as
a Shutdown Alarm.
2. If the Run Relay is not energized and the 7K input is high at the Base Controller for 4 seconds then Alarm
Code 35 is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
3. If current draw is not between 0.4 to 5 amps when the Run Relay is energized during a Pretrip Test Amps
Check then Alarm Code 35 is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
4. If current draw is not less than 0.5 amps when the Run Relay is de-energized during a Pretrip Test Amps
Check then Alarm Code 35 is set as a Shutdown Alarm.

5-46
01 December 2012
35 CHECK RUN RELAY CIRCUIT Page 2 of 2

1. Check the Run Relay circuit fuse on the Base Controller. Power to the Run Relay circuit is supplied by
the 7.5 amp fuse F25. Consult the schematic diagram for the unit for complete circuit details.
2. Check to be sure the K1 Run Relay LED 6 is energized.
3. Check the operation of the K1 Run Relay circuit using Output Test Mode.
4. Check to be sure the High Pressure Cutout Switch is closed (HPCO and PHPCO circuits).
5. Check the voltage of the HPCO wire at the HPCO switch. Battery volts should be present when the unit
is turned on.
6. Review the ServiceWatch download in technician level view. The associated alarm data will show the
status of the 7K circuit when the alarm was set.
5-47
01 December 2012
36 ELECTRIC MOTOR FAILED TO RUN Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Log, Check, Prevent, or Shutdown Alarm in Electric Mode
Log Alarm in Diesel Mode
Codes Alarm Code 122 Check Diesel/Electric Circuit
How Alarm is Set

1. If the alternator frequency is less than 100 Hz for 10 seconds when the electric motor should be running
then Alarm Code 36 is set as a prevent alarm.

Considerations
This alarm becomes a Log Alarm if the unit is switched to diesel.
CAUTION: Electric Standby Units utilize 460, 400 or 230 volt, 3 phase AC power. Extreme care must be
used when working on the unit, as these voltages are capable of causing serious injury or death.
1. Check the motor, motor contactor, overload relay and other associated electric standby motor circuitry.
The internal pull coil/hold coil circuits in the contactor may be defective, requiring replacement of
contactor.
2. Check the voltages at the phase detect module. Battery voltage should be present on the ER wire and
the 8 wire.
3. Check the standby power voltage at the phase detect module. Standby power should be available at L1,
L2 and L3.
4. Check the voltage at the motor contactor coils. Battery voltage should be present on either the 7EC or
7EB wire when the motor should be running.
5. Check for reason that the motor fails to turn the alternator, such as slipping belts, clutch, etc.
6. Check the alternator as shown under Alarm Code 25.
7. Download and inspect the ServiceWatch data logger to determine the operating conditions present when
the alarm code was set. Use the running Service Test Mode Feature to duplicate the operating
conditions. The alternator frequency and engine RPM are logged in ServiceWatch and this information is
viewable in technician mode. This information can be used to confirm the RPM sensor reading and
alternator frequency when the alarm was set.
5-48
01 December 2012
37 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL Page 1 of 2

Alarm Type Log, Check or Shutdown Alarm in Diesel Mode
Log or Check Alarm in Electric Mode
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 06 Check Coolant Temp Sensor
Codes
Circuit Description
Optical Sensor The 3-wire optical sensor is supplied with + 5 VDC and common from the Base Controller. The
sensor is located in the coolant tank. The coolant level must be at or above the sensor location. If the sensor is
not submerged in coolant, this alarm will be generated after the condition exists for 3 minutes. This alarm will
self-clear automatically if the coolant level rises above the sensor location. The wiring is located in the Main
Harness via the CLS-01, CLN-01, CLP-01 circuits.
Magnetic Switch The two wire magnetic switch is actuated by a float inside the coolant expansion tank. The
switch is closed if the coolant level is adequate. The two wire switch supplies + 5 VDC from the CLP wire to the
CLS wire when the coolant level is adequate. The circuit is opened if coolant level falls below an adequate level.
This alarm will self-clear automatically if the coolant level rises above the sensor location. The wiring is located in
the Main Harness via the CLS and CLP circuits.
How Alarm is Set

1. If the engine coolant level input indicates low coolant level for 3 minutes and the unit is in Electric Mode
then Alarm Code 37 will be set as a Log Alarm. If the engine coolant level input indicates low coolant
level for 3 minutes and the unit is in Diesel Mode then Alarm Code 37 will be set as a Check Alarm. If the
unit is switched to Electric Mode this alarm remains a Check Alarm.
2. If Alarm Code 06 Check Coolant Temp Sensor is set and the engine coolant level input indicates low
coolant level for 3 minutes and the unit is in Electric Mode then Alarm Code 37 will be set as a Check
Alarm. If Alarm Code 06 Check Coolant Temp Sensor is set and the engine coolant level input indicates
low coolant level for 3 minutes and the unit is in Diesel Mode then Alarm Code 37 will be set as a
Shutdown Alarm.

The alarm self-clears if coolant level input indicates good coolant level for 30 seconds. It can also be manually
cleared.
Considerations
The Discharge Pressure Transducer, Suction Pressure Transducer and Coolant Level switch each have a
separate 5 Vdc power supply. A short circuit condition in one transducer or switch circuit should not affect the
other circuits.
5-49
01 December 2012
37 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL Page 2 of 2

CAUTION: Exercise extreme care when checking hot coolant.
1. Check the engine coolant level and mixture. Be sure coolant is above sensor when the coolant is cold.
2. Check the sensor connector for a pushed pin or missing orange pin lock, loose pin crimp or broken wire.
3. Check that +5 VDC is present between the (CLP-01) wire from the Base Controller and chassis ground.
4. If an optical sensor, check continuity to ground of the (CLN-01) wire.
5. Check the voltage between the (CLS-01) wire and chassis ground. Voltage should be +5 Vdc when the
sensor or switch is submerged in coolant and less than +0.5 Vdc when the sensor or switch is not
submerged.
See Thermo King Service Bulletin T&T 379 for additional information on testing the coolant level switch.
5-50
01 December 2012
38 ELECTRIC PHASE REVERSED Page 1 of 2

Alarm Type Shutdown Alarm in Electric Mode
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 90 Electric Overload
Codes
How Alarm is Set
Two phases are reversed on 3 phase standby power between the motor contactor and the motor or the motor is
incorrectly wired. This will cause the compressor and condenser fan to rotate in the wrong direction. This is
checked by monitoring the evaporator temperature differential.
1. If the unit is running in Electric Mode and the temperature differential between return air temperature and
discharge air temperature is greater than 50°F (10°C) and is still greater than 45°F (7°C) after 5 minutes
then Alarm Code 38 is set as a Shutdown Alarm. The large temperature differential indicates the motor is
rotating in the wrong direction.

1. Check motor wiring to be sure phase rotation is correct.
2. Confirm that the 7EC-01 wire is connected to the MCB motor contactor and the 7EB-01 wire is connected
to the MCA motor contactor.
3. Check the voltages at the phase detect module. Battery voltage should be present on the 7EA wire and
the 8 wire.
4. Check the standby power voltage at the phase detect module. Standby power should be available at L1,
L2 and L3.
5. Confirm that the phase wiring between contactor MCA and MCB is correct.
5-51
01 December 2012
39 CHECK WATER VALVE CIRCUIT Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Check Alarm (Pre-trip only)
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 28 Pretrip Abort

Codes Alarm Code 111 Unit Not Configured Correctly
How Alarm is Set

The water valve is not currently used. However, the associated output is checked during the Non-running Pretrip
Test to be certain nothing has been mistakenly connected to it. The output is energized and then de-energized to
insure that no device is connected to the circuit and that the Base Controller is operating properly.
1. If current flow is detected during the output energized phase of the Non-running Pretrip Test then Alarm
Code 39 will be set as a Check Alarm and Alarm Code 111 Unit Not Configured Correctly will be set as a
Log Alarm. The Non-running Pretrip Test will be allowed to complete.
2. If current flow is detected during the output de-energized phase of the Non-running Pretrip Test then
Alarm Code 39 will be set as a Check Alarm, Alarm Code 111 Unit Not Configured Correctly will be set as
a Log Alarm and Alarm Code 28 Pretrip Abort will be set as a Shutdown Alarm. The Pretrip Test will be
aborted.

1. Check unit configuration to confirm proper setting.
2. Check the Base Controller wiring to insure that there is no connection to connector J7, pin 9.
5-52
01 December 2012
41 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm Alarm Code 42 Unit Forced to Low Speed

Codes Alarm Code 43 Unit Forced to Low Speed Modulation.
How Alarm is Set

Alarm Code 41 indicates the engine coolant temperature is above expected operating limits, but is not high
enough to force a shutdown condition.
1. If the engine coolant temperature rises above 210F and remains above 205F for 60 seconds then Alarm
Code 41 is set as a Check Alarm.

1. Check the engine coolant temperature by pressing the Gauge key
2. Check the engine coolant level.
3. Check the water pump drive belt.
4. Check the radiator for airflow or coolant flow blockage.
5. Download and inspect the ServiceWatch data logger information to determine the operating conditions
that were present when the alarm code was set. Use running Service Test Mode to duplicate the
5-53
01 December 2012
42 UNIT FORCED TO LOW SPEED Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm Alarm Code 10 High Discharge Pressure or Temperature

Codes Alarm Code 18 High Engine Coolant Temperature
Alarm Code 41 Check Engine Coolant Temperature
Alarm Code 43 Unit Forced to Low Speed Modulation.
How Alarm is Set
1. If the unit has been forced to low speed operation as a result of high engine coolant temperature or high
discharge pressure then Alarm Code 42 will be set as a Log Alarm. Alarm Code 10, Alarm Code 18 or
Alarm Code 41 will also be set.

Alarm will self-clear if unit returns to normal operation.
1. Troubleshoot as shown for the associated alarm code.
5-54
01 December 2012
43 UNIT FORCED TO LOW SPEED MODULATION Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm Alarm Code 10 High Discharge Pressure or Temperature

Codes Alarm Code 18 High Engine Coolant Temperature
Alarm Code 41 Check Engine Coolant Temperature
Alarm Code 42 Unit Forced to Low Speed
How Alarm is Set
1. Unit has been forced to low speed, but the engine coolant temperature is still above acceptable limits.
The ETV will be closed to reduce the engine load.

Alarm will self-clear if unit returns to normal operation.
Considerations
Applies to ETV units only.
3. Troubleshoot as shown for the associated alarm code.
5-55
01 December 2012
44 CHECK FUEL SYSTEM Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm Alarm Code 96 Low Fuel Level

Codes Alarm Code 98 Check Fuel Level Sensor

Either float style or solid state style fuel level sensor must be installed and selected from Guarded Access > Unit
Configuration > Fuel Sensor Type.
Low Fuel Shutdown must be enabled from Guarded Access > Unit Configuration > Low Fuel Shutdown.
How Alarm is Set

1. If a fuel level sensor is enabled and fuel level falls to less than 7% of tank capacity for 5 minutes then
Alarm Code 44 Check Fuel System is set as a Shutdown Alarm.

If this alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm, manually clearing the alarm will demote it to a Check Alarm.
This alarm is cleared automatically when the fuel level is increased to more than 15% of tank capacity.
This alarm is cleared automatically if Alarm Code 98 Check Fuel Level Sensor is set.
This alarm is cleared automatically if the unit is switched to Electric Mode operation.
Considerations
Alarm Code 44 Check Fuel System is not available if Guarded Access > Programmable Features > Rail Option is
set ENABLED.
1. Add fuel as necessary.
5-56
01 December 2012
45 CHECK HOT GAS OR HOT GAS BYPASS CIRCUIT Page 1 of 2


Codes
The hot gas/hot gas bypass solenoid is located in the condenser section next to the receiver tank. It is a normally
closed valve. This valve is only used on ETV units.
Circuit Description
The hot gas/hot gas bypass solenoid circuit is a two wire circuit. The HG-01 wire connects the Base Controller
Connector J4 Pin 5 to one side of the hot gas/hot gas bypass solenoid. The CHHG wire connects the other side
of the solenoid to chassis ground at the ground plate near the unit battery. The solenoid is not polarity sensitive.
The switch wires are routed in the Main Harness. A Smart FET on the Base Controller supplies power to the HG-
01 circuit.
Considerations
1. During a non-running Pretrip the current draw is determined by the Base Controller shunt reading.
2. During normal operation the current draw is determined by the Smart FET feedback to the Base
Controller.
3. If an alarm code is set during normal operation then the ServiceWatch Data Logger will list the Alarm
Code, FLTCT (Fault Current), Battery Volts, and the Shunt Current. The FLTCT will be the high or low
current draw as determined by the Smart FET feedback that caused the Alarm Code to set.
How Alarm is Set

1. If during normal operation the current is greater than 3 amps or less than 0.5 amps at specified intervals
after the solenoid is energized then Alarm Code 45 Check Hot Gas Circuit is set as a Check Alarm and
the output is turned off. If the output circuit is shorted it will be turned off immediately to protect the circuit
and the alarm code will be set. Hot gas valve operation is not allowed until Alarm Code 45 Check Hot
Gas Circuit is cleared. The unit will continue to run but with reduced performance until the condition is
corrected and the alarm is cleared. If this condition occurs when the unit is in Evacuation Mode then
Alarm Code 45 Check Hot Gas Circuit will be set as a Shutdown Alarm.
2. If during normal operation the current does not return to less than 0.5 amps at a specified interval after
the solenoid is de-energized then Alarm Code 45 Check Hot Gas Circuit is set as a Check Alarm. Hot
gas valve operation is not allowed until Alarm Code 45 Check Hot Gas Circuit is cleared. The unit will
continue to run but with reduced performance until the condition is corrected and the alarm is cleared.
3. If during a Pretrip Test the current is not between 0.5 to 3 amps when the solenoid is energized then
Alarm Code 45 Check Hot Gas Circuit is set as a Check Alarm.
4. If during a Pretrip Test the current does not return to less than 0.5 amps when de-energized then Alarm
Code 45 Check Hot Gas Circuit is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
5-57
01 December 2012
45 CHECK HOT GAS OR HOT GAS BYPASS CIRCUIT Page 2 of 2

1. If FLTCT is greater than 3.0 amps the circuit has excessive current flow. Check for a shorted circuit or
solenoid coil.
2. If FLTCT is less than 0.5 amps the circuit has low current flow. Check for high resistance or an open in
the circuit or solenoid coil.
Indicator LED Diagnosis
1. Clear the alarm to reset the Smart FET. Check the operation of the Hot Gas Solenoid circuit using Output
Test Mode. Be sure the Base Controller Hot Gas Solenoid circuit LED lights. For Base Controller LED
identification see the LED decal on the control box door. If the Base Controller Hot Gas Solenoid circuit
LED lights go to Step 2. If the Base Controller Hot Gas Solenoid circuit LED does not light go to Step 3.
2. If the Base Controller Hot Gas Solenoid circuit LED lights and Alarm Code 45 Check Hot Gas Circuit is
set, the circuit has high resistance or is open. Use the HMI Control Panel amps gauge to check the
current drawn by the Hot Gas Solenoid, while operating the solenoid with Output Test Mode. The current
draw should be approximately 1.1 amps. If the current is not within limits then check for high resistance
or open in the circuit or solenoid coil as shown in Step 3. Verify that all circuit connectors are secure.
3. If the Base Controller Hot Gas Solenoid circuit LED does not light and Alarm Code 45 Check Hot Gas
Circuit is set, check for a shorted circuit or solenoid coil. Disconnect the 35 pin Connector J4 and check
the Hot Gas Solenoid circuit at Pin 5 with an accurate ohmmeter for a short circuit, open circuit or loose
connection. The solenoid coil resistance should be approximately 8.3 ohms.
4. If no problems are found in Steps 1-3 and the output LED does not turn on then check the Base
Controller Assembly as shown in Service Procedure A01A.
5-58
01 December 2012
46 CHECK AIR FLOW Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
The Blocked Air Chute Detect uses the Spare 1 sensor mounted in the discharge air chute.
How Alarm is Set

1. Alarm is set if the difference between the control discharge air temperature and a chute mounted sensor
(Spare 1) exceeds the programmed limits. See Blocked Air Chute Detect feature in Section 3 for details.

See Blocked Air Chute Detect in Section 3 for details and setup.
1. Check the discharge air chute for restricted air flow.
2. Check the spare sensor to be sure that it is positioned in the chute air flow at the rear of the trailer and is
not obstructed.
3. Check operation of the spare sensor.
5-59
01 December 2012
48 CHECK BELTS OR CLUTCH Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. The ratio between the engine RPM and electric standby motor RPM is monitored. If these values are not
in the proper ratio it is an indication that drive belt slippage is occurring. If this occurs then Alarm Code
48 is set as a Shutdown Alarm.

Considerations
Applies to units equipped with electric standby only.
1. Check belts for condition, operation and slippage.
2. Check for a stuck compressor.
3. Check unit configuration if this alarm occurs on a Model 30 (diesel only) unit.
the alarm code was set. Use the running Service Test Mode Feature to duplicate the operating
conditions. The motor RPM and engine RPM are logged in ServiceWatch and this information is
viewable in technician mode. This information can be used to confirm the RPM sensor reading and motor
RPM when the alarm was set.
5-60
01 December 2012
50 RESET CLOCK Page 1 of 1

How Alarm is Set

1. This alarm indicates that power to the HMI control panel has been interrupted for an extended period and
the hold capacitor for the clock/calendar has discharged. As a result, the clock/calendar is no longer
accurate. Turning the unit on will recharge the hold capacitor in the HMI control panel.

1. Turn the unit on to recharge the hold capacitor in the HMI control panel.
2. Reset the clock to the customer’s time zone.
5-61
01 December 2012
52 CHECK HEAT CIRCUIT Page 1 of 2


Codes
The pilot solenoid is located in the condenser section adjacent to the receiver tank.
Circuit Description
The pilot solenoid circuit is a two wire circuit. The 26-01 wire connects the Base Controller connector J4 pin 7 to
one side of the pilot solenoid. The CHPS wire connects the other side of the solenoid to chassis ground at the
ground plate near the unit battery. The solenoid is not polarity sensitive. The switch wires are routed in the Main
Harness. A Smart FET on the Base Controller supplies power to the 26-01 circuit.
Considerations
1. During a non-running Pretrip the current draw is determined by the Base Controller shunt reading.
2. During normal operation the current draw is determined by the Smart FET feedback to the Base
Controller.
3. If an alarm code is set during normal operation then the ServiceWatch Data Logger will list the Alarm
Code, FLTCT (Fault Current), Battery Volts, and the Shunt Current. The FLTCT will be the high or low
current draw as determined by the Smart FET feedback that caused the Alarm Code to set.
How Alarm is Set

1. If during normal operation the current is greater than 3 amps or less than 0.5 amps at specified intervals
after the solenoid is energized then Alarm Code 52 Check Heat Circuit is set as a Check Alarm and the
output is turned off. If the output circuit is shorted it will be turned off immediately to protect the circuit
and the alarm code will be set. Hot gas valve operation is not allowed until Alarm Code 52 Check Heat
Circuit is cleared. The unit will continue to run but with reduced performance until the condition is
corrected and the alarm is cleared. If this condition occurs when the unit is in Evacuation Mode then
Alarm Code 52 Check Heat Circuit will be set as a Shutdown Alarm.
2. If during normal operation the current does not return to less than 0.5 amps at a specified interval after
the solenoid is de-energized then Alarm Code 52 Check Heat Circuit is set as a Check Alarm. Hot gas
valve operation is not allowed until Alarm Code 52 Check Heat Circuit is cleared. The unit will continue to
run but with reduced performance until the condition is corrected and the alarm is cleared.
3. If during a Pretrip Test the current is not between 0.5 to 3 amps when the solenoid is energized then
Alarm Code 52 Check Heat Circuit is set as a Check Alarm.
Code 52 Check Heat Circuit is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
5-62
01 December 2012
52 CHECK HEAT CIRCUIT Page 2 of 2

solenoid coil.
1. Clear the alarm to reset the Smart FET. Check the operation of the Pilot Solenoid circuit using Output
Test Mode. Be sure the Base Controller Pilot Solenoid circuit LED lights. For Base Controller LED
identification see the LED decal on the control box door. If the Base Controller Pilot Solenoid circuit LED
lights go to Step 2. If the Base Controller Pilot Solenoid circuit LED does not light go to Step 3.
2. If the Base Controller Pilot Solenoid circuit LED lights and Alarm Code 52 Check Heat Circuit is set, the
circuit has high resistance or is open. Use the HMI Control Panel amps gauge to check the current drawn
by the Pilot Solenoid, while operating the solenoid with Output Test Mode. The current draw should be
approximately 1.1 amps. If the current is not within limits then check for high resistance or open in the
circuit or solenoid coil as shown in Step 3. Verify that all circuit connectors are secure.
3. If the Base Controller Pilot Solenoid circuit LED does not light and Alarm Code 52 Check Heat Circuit is
set, check for a shorted circuit or solenoid coil. Disconnect the 35 pin Connector J4 and check the Pilot
Solenoid circuit at Pin 7 with an accurate ohmmeter for a short circuit, open circuit or loose connection.
The solenoid coil resistance should be approximately 9.6 ohms.
Controller Assembly as shown in Service Procedure A01A.
5-63
01 December 2012
54 TEST MODE TIMEOUT Page 1 of 1


Codes
Considerations
The HMI will display the remaining test time. The timer can be reset by pressing the HMI test “Select” key while
the respective Service Test Mode or Output Test Mode test is active.
How Alarm is Set

1. If the unit has been in the same Service Test Mode function for 15 minutes then Alarm Code 54 is set as
a Shutdown Alarm.
2. If the unit has been in the same Output Test Mode function for 15 minutes then Alarm Code 54 is set as a
Shutdown Alarm.

This alarm is manually cleared.
1. If the unit is in Service Test Mode or Output Test Mode and the function is not changed for 15 minutes
then Alarm Code 54 is set as a Shutdown Alarm. Clear the alarm and re-enter the test mode as
necessary to complete the diagnosis or repair.
5-64
01 December 2012
Conflicting information on if these are enabled?

56 CHECK HOST EVAPORATOR FAN LOW SPEED Page 1 of 1
Alarm Type
Codes
Considerations
How Alarm is Set

Conflicting information on if these are enabled?

57 CHECK HOST EVAPORATOR FAN HIGH SPEED Page 1 of 1
Alarm Type
Codes
Considerations
How Alarm is Set

5-65
01 December 2012
61 LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE Page 1 of 2

Alarm Type Log Alarm or Shutdown Alarm
Associated Alarm
Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If the unit is not preheating or starting, and battery voltage is less than 11.2 volts for 3 minutes, Alarm
2. If during the preheat cycle prior to an engine start the battery voltage is below 10 volts during an engine
start, Alarm Code 61 is set as a Log Alarm. NOTE: The preheat output will have been de-energized prior
to the alarm being set.
3. If during a Pretrip Test the preheat amps check is not within limits, and battery voltage is less than 11.3
volts, Alarm Code 61 is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
4. If during a Pretrip Test all outputs are de-energized, and battery voltage is not within limits, Alarm Code
61 is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
5. If the unit is in Evacuation mode, and battery voltage is greater than 16.0 volts for 3 minutes, Alarm Code
61 is set as a Shutdown Alarm
6. If three power-up and start attempts are made without a successful start, Alarm Code 61 is set as a
Shutdown Alarm. This indicates that the battery voltage dropped low enough during the start sequence
that the Base Controller powered down. This can also occur if the unit is turned on and off 3 times
without allowing the unit to start.

Considerations
If Alarm Code 61 Low Battery Voltage is set as a Shutdown Alarm then no subsequent alarm codes will be set
with the exception of Alarm Code 28 Pretrip Abort.
This alarm code can be set by either low voltage or excessive voltage conditions.
5-66
01 December 2012
61 LOW BATTERY VOLTAGE Page 2 of 2

1. Check for discharged battery and charge as required.
2. Check the battery terminals for tightness and corrosion.
3. Check the unit ground plate connections for tightness and corrosion.
4. With the engine running, check the battery voltage and charge rate using the Gauge Menu.
5. Check the operation of the alternator. Be sure the belt is properly adjusted.
6. Load test the battery, replace if necessary.
7. Inspect the ServiceWatch downloads to check for 3 start attempts and the reason for the start attempts.
the alarm code was set. The battery voltage, charge current, and alternator frequency are logged in
ServiceWatch and this information is viewable in technician mode. This information can be used to
determine which condition caused the alarm to be set.
5-67
01 December 2012
62 AMMETER OUT OF CALIBRATION Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Shutdown Alarm (Pretrip Only)
Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
The current shunt on SR-4 Base Controllers is a surface mount device and is conformal coated for protection.
Field resistance measurement of this circuit cannot be made.
How Alarm is Set

1. Shunt calibration check in Pretrip Test shows shunt circuit is out of calibration with all outputs de-
energized.

1. Check the ServiceWatch download for abnormal ammeter readings or all dashes [ - - - - ].
2. Check the Base Controller assembly, using Service Procedure A01A.
3. Check the current draw with the unit off and compare it to the reading of a clamp-on ammeter.
5-68
01 December 2012
63 ENGINE STOPPED Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Prevent or Shutdown Alarm in Diesel Mode
Codes
Considerations
Becomes a Log Alarm if unit is switched to Electric Mode.
If the Restart Unit After Shutdown feature is set for Continuous, then the Shutdown Alarm condition is disabled
and the interval between restart attempts is increased from 15 minutes to 1 hour. Note: This feature is
recommended only for rail application where the equipment is operated unattended for long periods of time. See
the Restart Unit After Shutdown feature in Section 3 for additional information.
How Alarm is Set

1. Alarm Code 63 is set as a supporting Log Alarm if the ECU determines the engine should be running
and is not.

This alarm is cleared manually or automatically.
5-69
01 December 2012
64 PRETRIP REMINDER Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
The alarm is cleared when Pretrip Test is entered. If the Pretrip Test is not successful, the alarm will not be reset.
If the Pretrip Test is not successful then diagnose and correct the fault.
How Alarm is Set

1. If a programmable hour meter is set as a Pretrip Reminder and the hourmeter time expires then Alarm
Code 64 is set as a Log Alarm.

The alarm self-clears when a Pretrip Test is entered.
This feature must be programmed. See Section 3 Hourmeters for details.
1. Perform a Pretrip Test to confirm unit operation.
2. Reset the Pretrip Reminder hourmeter after a Pretrip Test is entered.
5-70
01 December 2012
65 ABNORMAL TEMPERATURE DIFFERENTIAL Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm Alarm Code 13 Sensor Check

Codes
Considerations
This alarm only applies to Multi-Temperature Trailer Units and Single Temperature Truck Units.
How Alarm is Set

Alarm Code 65 Abnormal Temperature Differential is set if there is an abnormally large cooling or heating
temperature differential and the offending sensor cannot be determined. Alarm Code 13 Sensor Check will also
be set.

Determine which sensor Alarm Codes (02, 03, 203, 04, 204 or 05) are present along with Alarm Code 13.
Proceed as shown for that Alarm Code.
Sensor alarms are classified as either “Soft Failures” or “Hard Failures”.
A “Soft Failure” is defined as erratic operation or sensor drift that exceeds acceptable tolerances. If this occurs,
the alarm code for the suspect sensor will be set along with Alarm Code 13. This indicates a potential problem
that may not be immediately apparent, and also shows that a hard failure as defined below did not occur. Alarm
Code 13 is always set if a soft failure occurs.
Note: Alarm Code 13 can be cleared by the driver, while sensor Alarm Codes 03, 04, 203 and 204 can
only be cleared from the Guarded Access Menu. If the unit has only Alarm Code 03, 04, 203 or 204 set
when inspected, that alarm code may have been originally set with Alarm Code 13. Checking the
ServiceWatch data logger download will indicate the conditions that existed when the failure occurred.
A “Hard Failure” is defined by an out of range sensor reading, typically caused by an open or shorted sensor,
connector, or harness conductor. The sensor display will show dashes if a hard failure occurs. If this occurs, only
the alarm code for that sensor will be set (such as Alarm Code 03 if the control return air sensor failed). Alarm
Code 13 will not be set if a hard failure occurs.
Note: The controller may not be currently showing dashes for the sensor reading, but the alarm will be
present when the unit is inspected. If a sensor alarm code is set, a failure did occur at some point.
Checking the ServiceWatch data logger download will indicate when the hard failure occurred.
5-71
01 December 2012
66 LOW ENGINE OIL LEVEL Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Shutdown Alarm in Diesel Mode
Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
A shutdown level Alarm Code 66 becomes a Log Alarm if the unit is switched from Diesel Mode to Electric Mode.
A log level Alarm Code 66 becomes a Shutdown Alarm if the unit is switched from electric to Diesel Mode.

The switch is located on the top of the engine oil pan. The switch is open with full oil level and closed with low oil
level.
Circuit Description
The wiring is located in the Main Harness via the OLS and CHOL circuits.
How Alarm is Set

1. Alarm Code 66 is set as a supporting Log Alarm if the ECU determines the engine oil level is low.

5-72
01 December 2012
67 CHECK LIQUID LINE SOLENOID CIRCUIT Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Check Alarm (Pre-trip only)
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 28 Pretrip Abort

Codes Alarm Code 111 Unit Not Configured Correctly
How Alarm is Set

The liquid line solenoid is not used on single temperature applications. However, the associated output is
checked during the Non-running Pretrip Test to be certain nothing has been mistakenly connected to it. The
output is energized and then de-energized to insure that no device is connected to the circuit and that the Base
Controller is operating properly.
1. If current flow is detected during the output energized phase of the Non-running Pretrip Test then Alarm
Code 67 will be set as a Check Alarm and Alarm Code 111 Unit Not Configured Correctly will be set as a
Log Alarm. The Non-running Pretrip Test will be allowed to complete.
2. If current flow is detected during the output de-energized phase of the Non-running Pretrip Test then
Alarm Code 67 will be set as a Check Alarm, Alarm Code 111 Unit Not Configured Correctly will be set as
a Log Alarm and Alarm Code 28 Pretrip Abort will be set as a Shutdown Alarm. The Pretrip Test will be
aborted.

5-73
01 December 2012
68 INTERNAL CONTROLLER FAULT CODE Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Log, Check or Shutdown Alarm
How Alarm is Set

1. If a shutdown level internal fault occurs in the Base Controller then Alarm Code 68 is set as a Shutdown
Alarm.
2. If a check level internal fault occurs in the Base Controller then Alarm Code 68 is set as a Check Alarm.
3. If a log level internal fault occurs in the Base Controller the Alarm Code 68 is set as a Log Alarm.
1. Replace the Base Controller.
2. Return failed Base Controller for failure analysis.
70 HOURMETER FAILURE Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If one or more hourmeters exceeds 499,999 hours the Alarm Code 70 is set as a Log Alarm.

1. If the hourmeter readings are normal, perform a Cold Start per Service Procedure A07A.
2. If the code can now be cleared, proceed with Base Controller setup, using Service Procedure A04A.
IMPORTANT: Any time a Cold Start is performed the Base Controller must be set up using Service
Procedure A04A. Failure to do so may result in the unit not operating to customer specifications.
5-74
01 December 2012
74 CONTROLLER RESET TO DEFAULTS Page 1 of 1

How Alarm is Set

1. If all the Base Controller programmable features have been reset to factory defaults the Alarm Code 74 is
set as a Check Alarm. Alarm Code 74 is typically set by a cold start.

This alarm can only be cleared from the Guarded Access menu.
1. Be sure the Base Controller cold start jumper J101 is in the correct (up) position. It should match the
white mark on the Base Controller, at the side of the jumper. If the jumper is in the wrong position a cold
start will occur every time the unit is turned on.
2. Complete the Base Controller setup, using Service Procedure A04A.
3. Alarm code 74 will be cleared during the Base Controller setup.
IMPORTANT: Any time Alarm Code 74 occurs the Base Controller must be set up using Service Procedure
A04A. Failure to do so may result in the unit not operating to customer specifications.
5-75
01 December 2012
79 INTERNAL DATA LOGGER OVERFLOW Page 1 of 1

How Alarm is Set

If too many data logger events occurred at once or if too many data logger events occurred during a download
then Alarm Code 79 is set as a Log Alarm.

No corrective action is possible. This serves only as an indication that an event occurred that was not recorded
by the data logger.
5-76
01 December 2012
84 RESTART NULL Page 1 of 2

Associated Alarm Alarm Codes 10, 17, 18. 20, 21, 22, 36, 42, 63, 90, 91 and 93
Codes
Considerations
 This alarm is a secondary alarm that is set along with the associated primary alarm.
 The alarm indicates that the unit is in a temporary (“prevent” or “restart null”) shutdown. The alarm clears
automatically if the condition does not re-occur.
 Many of these actions include a “waiting period” (to allow the engine to cool down, a high pressure
condition to subside or the like). The alarm code that caused the condition and Alarm Code 84 might be
present to indicate that the Base Controller is taking a corrective action and that a restart will be
attempted when conditions permit.
 If the corrective action is successful, the original alarm code and Alarm Code 84 are cleared
automatically. If the original alarm condition continues to occur, and the corrective actions taken by the
Base Controller are not successful, the original alarm code remains. Alarm Code 84 is automatically
cleared and the unit shuts down.
 This alarm occurs if unit operation is not allowed as a result of the associated prevent alarm. For
example, if a high discharge pressure condition shuts the unit down, a waiting period occurs to allow
system pressures to equalize. A restart occurs when conditions permit.
 If restarts are disabled Alarm Code 84 is also disabled.
 Most prevent alarms become Shutdown Alarm if three occurrences of the alarm occur within a set time
period.
 Alarm Codes 10, 18 and 63 are not promoted to shutdown level if the Continuous Restarts feature is
enabled.
 Alarm Codes 32 and 63 are promoted to guarded access clearable Shutdown Alarms if the Limited
Restarts Feature is enabled and the Shutdown Alarm occurs 3 times with a 12 hour time period.
 Some prevent alarms will result in modified unit operation after the alarm is self cleared. For example,
Alarm Code 10 High Discharge Pressure will result in Alarm Code 42 Unit Forced to Low Speed being set
and the unit being forced to low speed for a 1 hour period.
 If the unit is turned off while Alarm Code 84 is present the primary alarm becomes a Shutdown Alarm
when the unit is turned back on.
5-77
01 December 2012
84 RESTART NULL Page 2 of 2

How Alarm is Set
1. This alarm is set with the associated alarm that caused the condition.

This alarm clears automatically if the condition is resolved.
Check for associated alarms and repair as required.
5-78
01 December 2012
85 FORCED UNIT OPERATION Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm Alarm Code 26 Check Refrigeration Capacity

Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. This alarm is set only if an alert low refrigeration capacity alarm occurs while the unit is operating in the
reduced capacity state.

This alarm clears automatically if the condition is resolved.
Considerations
1. This alarm is a secondary alarm that is set along with the associated primary alarm.
2. This alarm indicates that the unit was forced to a different operating mode than would normally be
implemented under the existing conditions. This can occur as result of low coolant temperature or high
compressor temperature. It indicates that normal unit operation has been over-ridden, (i.e., the discharge
pressure setpoint has been reduced). The alarm is only set if a low cooling capacity condition occurs
while the unit is in reduced capacity mode.
Check for associated alarms and repair as required.
5-79
01 December 2012
86 CHECK DISCHARGE PRESSURE SENSOR Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
Circuit Description
The 3-wire discharge pressure sensor is supplied with +5 VDC and ground from the Base Controller. The wiring
is located in the Sensor Harness via the DPP, DPN and DPI circuits.
Considerations
other circuits.
The maximum discharge pressure that can be displayed is 500 psig. If the sensed pressure is greater than 500
psig, the HMI Control Panel will display [ - - - - ] instead of the discharge pressure.
The minimum discharge pressure that can be sensed is –10 psig. The control system cannot determine if the
minimum sensed pressure is the result of an electrical short or very low system pressure.
The Discharge Pressure Transducer will have a “500” on the body of the part. The Suction Pressure Transducer
will have a “200” on the body of the part. They are not interchangeable.
How Alarm is Set

1. If the unit is not running and the discharge pressure transducer reading is greater than 500 psig for 10
seconds then Alarm Code 86 is set as a Check Alarm. If the unit is in a Pretrip Test this alarm is set as a
Shutdown Alarm.
2. If the unit is running, the ambient temperature is greater than 10°F (-12°C) and the discharge pressure
transducer reading is less than +15 psig for 10 seconds then Alarm Code 86 is set as a Check Alarm. If
the unit is in a Pretrip Test this alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
3. If Alarm Code 10 is cleared and the discharge pressure transducer reading is greater than or equal to 425
psig but less than 500 psig then Alarm Code 86 is set as a Check Alarm.

This alarm is cleared manually. Clearing the code will cause the unit to shut down and restart to check the
transducer for proper operation by performing a ETV check.
5-80
01 December 2012
86 CHECK DISCHARGE PRESSURE SENSOR Page 2 of 2

1. Check the discharge pressure display using the Gauge Menu.
2. If the discharge pressure is not displayed by the Base Controller, unplug the transducer and check for +5
VDC between DPP and DPN. If +5 VDC is not present check the Base Controller using Service
Procedure A01A.
3. Check the harness wires DPP, DPN and DPI for continuity using an ohmmeter.
4. Connect refrigeration gauges to verify that the sensor is displaying the correct pressure. Replace the
sensor if required.
5-81
01 December 2012
87 CHECK SUCTION PRESSURE SENSOR Page 1 of 2

Associated Alarm
Codes
Circuit Description
The 3-wire suction pressure sensor is supplied with +5 VDC and ground from the Base Controller. The sensor is
located in the suction line and downstream of the ETV if present. The wiring is located in the Sensor Harness via
the SPP, SPN and SPI circuits.
Considerations
other circuits.
The maximum suction pressure that can be displayed is 200 psig. If the sensed pressure is greater than 200
psig, the HMI Control Panel will display [ - - - - ] instead of the suction pressure. When the unit is off and the
refrigerant pressures have equalized, the system pressure can exceed 200 psig when ambient temperatures are
above 90°F (35°C). If this occurs the HMI Control Panel will display [ - - - - ]. This is normal operation and no
cause for concern.
The minimum suction pressure that be sensed is -12 psig.
If the sensor opens the display will read -10 PSIG. An alarm may not be generated immediately but the unit will
be forced to low speed due to low suction pressure.
The Suction Pressure Transducer will have a “200” on the body of the part. The Discharge Pressure Transducer
will have a “500” on the body of the part. They are not interchangeable.
How Alarm is Set

1. If the unit is running and the suction pressure sensor reading is greater than 200 PSIG for 10 seconds
then Alarm Code 87 is set as a Check Alarm. If the unit is in a Pretrip Test this alarm is set as a
Shutdown Alarm. If the suction pressure is greater than 200 PSIG the sensor display will be dashes [ - - -
- ].
2. If the unit is running and the suction pressure sensor reading is less than -9 PSIG for 10 seconds then
Alarm Code 87 is set as a Check Alarm. If the unit is in a Pretrip Test this alarm is set as a Shutdown
Alarm.
3. If suction pressure does not change 3 PSIG during the ETV test then Alarm Code 87 is set as a Check
Alarm. If the unit is in a Pretrip Test this alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
5-82
01 December 2012
87 CHECK SUCTION PRESSURE SENSOR Page 2 of 2

This alarm is cleared manually. Clearing the code will cause the unit to shut down and restart to check the
transducer for proper operation by performing an ETV check.
1. Check the suction pressure display using the Gauge Menu. If the suction pressure is -10 psig then turn
the unit off and allow the system refrigerant pressures to equalize. If the displayed suction pressure
remains at –10 psig then the suction pressure transducer is defective and must be replaced.
2. Check the suction pressure display using the Gauge Menu. If the sensor reads [ - - - - ] psig then turn
the unit off and allow the system pressures to equalize.
 If the actual suction pressure is less than 180 psig, but the displayed suction pressure remains at
[ - - - - ] then the transducer is defective and must be replaced.
 If the suction pressure is greater than 180 psig, the suction pressure transducer may be operating
normally. Place the unit in full cool and allow the return air temperature to drop below 50F
(10C). If the suction pressure display remains at [ - - - - ] then the transducer, controller power
supply, or conductors are faulty.
3. If the suction pressure is not displayed by the Base Controller, unplug the transducer and check for +5
Vdc between SPP-01 and SPN-01. If 5 volts is not present check the Base Controller, using Service
Procedure A01A.
4. Connect refrigeration gauges to verify that the sensor is not displaying the correct pressure. Replace the
sensor.
5. Check the harness wires SPP-01, SPN-01 and SP-01 for continuity using an ohmmeter.
5-83
01 December 2012
89 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLING VALVE CIRCUIT Page 1 of 2


The Electronic Throttling Valve (ETV) is located in the suction line and is accessible from the rear of the unit.
IMPORTANT: There are two different valves currently in use. They are connected in a similar manner, but the
valve wire color codes are different for each valve. Consult the unit schematic diagram for connection details.
Circuit Description
The ETV circuit consists of 4 wires from the ETV driver located on the Base Controller to the ETV. The harness
wires to the valve are labeled EVA-01, EVB-01, EVC-01 and EVD-01. These wires are located in the Main
Harness.
IMPORTANT: There are two different valves currently in use. They are connected in a similar manner, but the
valve wire color codes are different for each valve. Consult the unit schematic diagram for connection details.
How Alarm is Set

The electrical test is performed before every engine or motor start. The running test is only performed when the
unit restarts after a shutdown or prevent alarm or if the Base Controller senses a problem with either or both of
the refrigerant pressure transducers. The running test is also performed when an engine start occurs during a
Pre-trip Test.
When Alarm Code 89 Check ETV Circuit is cleared the unit will shut down (if running) and perform a full ETV test
to confirm proper ETV operation.
The alarm can be set during the non-running or running phases of the unit engine start routine.
1. During the non-running phase the ETV driver outputs are checked for error conditions (ETV electrical test).
2. During the first phase of the running test, the ETV is nearly closed. The ETV closing is confirmed by a
drop in suction pressure.
3. During the second phase of the running test, the ETV is opened. The ETV opening is confirmed by a rise
in suction pressure.

This alarm is cleared manually. The unit will shut down (if running) and perform a full ETV test to confirm proper
ETV operation.
5-84
01 December 2012
89 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLING VALVE CIRCUIT Page 2 of 2

1. Check the suction and discharge pressures with unit not running, to determine if refrigerant charge
appears adequate.
2. Check the electrical operation of electronic throttling valve circuit, using Service Procedure G03A.
3. If the electronic throttling valve appears to function electrically, check the refrigeration system for low
refrigerant, a frozen expansion valve, or a severe restriction in the suction side of the system.
5-85
01 December 2012
90 ELECTRIC OVERLOAD Page 1 of 2

Alarm Type Check or Prevent Alarm in Electric Mode
Codes
How Alarm is Set
Alarm conditions are only active when 3 power is connected (ER input is high).
1. This alarm will be set during Electric Mode operation if the Base Controller determines that the electric
motor overload relay (EOL) has tripped.
2. If during a Pretrip Test the unit is not configured electric standby and the EOL input is low then Alarm
Code 90 Electric Overload is set as a Check Alarm and Alarm Code 111 Unit Not Configured Correctly is
set as a Log Alarm.

Considerations
This alarm becomes a Log Alarm if the unit is switched from Electric Mode to Diesel Mode.
1. Check the electric motor for current draw. Refer to the motor nameplate for the Full Load Amperage
rating (FLA) of the motor.
2. Check the setting of the motor overload relay. It should be 10% greater than full load rating of the motor.
3. Check the EOL-01 circuit for continuity from J6 pin 2 on the Base Controller to the overload relay.
4. Check for continuity between the overload relay terminals 95 and 96. The contacts should be normally
closed.
5. Check the CHHV circuit for continuity to chassis ground.
5-86
01 December 2012
91 CHECK ELECTRIC READY INPUT Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Prevent Alarm in Electric Mode
Codes
How Alarm is Set
This alarm will only be set if the unit is configured for manual switchover from electric to diesel.
1. If Electric Mode operation is selected and the Base Controller determines that 3 standby power is not
connected (ER input is low) then set Alarm code 91 as a prevent alarm.

This alarm is cleared automatically when one of the two actions occur:
 The unit is auto switched or manually switched to Diesel Mode operation.
 3 standby power is restored to the unit.
Considerations
This alarm becomes a Log Alarm if the unit is switched from Electric Mode to Diesel Mode.
1. Check the ER-01 Circuit from the phase detect module for 12 volts to chassis ground when standby
power is connected to the unit.
2. Check the 8 circuit at the phase detect module for 12 volts.
3. Check to be sure standby power of the correct voltage is present at L1, L2 and L3 on the phase detect
module.
4. Check the ER-01 Circuit for continuity from J6 pin 5 on the Base Controller to the phase detect module.
5. If steps 1-5 above are correct, check the control system, using Service Procedure A01A.
6. If steps 1, 2, 4 or 5 above do not correct the fault, replace the phase detect module.
5-87
01 December 2012
92 SENSOR GRADES NOT SET Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm Alarm Codes 03, 04, 203, and 204 sensor alarm codes for graded sensors
Codes Alarm Code 12 Sensor Shutdown
How Alarm is Set

1. If any graded return or discharge sensor is in valid range and the sensor grade is set to grade 5H
(default) when the unit power switch is turned on then Alarm Code 92 is set as a Log Alarm. The
offending sensor alarm code (03, 04, 203 or 204) is also set.

Clears automatically when the sensor grade is set to other than 5H. The offending sensor alarm code (03, 04,
203 or 204) must be manually cleared in Guarded Access after the sensor grades have been set.
Considerations
The sensor grade must be set using the Sensor Calibration feature in the Guarded Access Menu. If the sensor
grade is not properly set the sensor reading will not be accurate. Grade 5H is set as the default grade on factory
Base Controller and is used as an indication that the sensor grade has not been set.
Alarm Code 92 Sensor Grades Not Set is not set for spare sensors. However, if used, spare sensors should be
calibrated to achieve maximum accuracy.
1. Verify actual sensor grades for all graded sensors.
2. Using this information, calibrate the sensors using the Sensor Calibration feature in the Guarded Access
Menu. See Service Procedure A15A in Section 6 of this manual for details.
5-88
01 December 2012
96 LOW FUEL LEVEL Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm Alarm Code 98 Check Fuel Level Sensor

Codes
Considerations
This alarm is enabled only if the unit is configured with a fuel level sensor.
How Alarm is Set

1. If the fuel level indicated by the fuel level sensor falls to 15% of tank capacity then Alarm Code 96 is set
as a Check Alarm.

This alarm is cleared automatically when the fuel level exceeds 25% of tank capacity. The alarm will not clear
manually until the fuel level is greater than 20%.
1. Check fuel tank level and fill as required.
5-89
01 December 2012
98 CHECK FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm Alarm Code 96 Low Fuel Level

Codes
Considerations
This alarm is enabled only if the unit is configured with a fuel level sensor.
How Alarm is Set

1. Alarm is set when the fuel level sensor is determined to be out of range.

1. Check fuel level sensor harness to be sure it is connected and secure.
2. Check fuel level sensor harness for continuity.
3. Replace fuel level sensor.
5-90
01 December 2012
108 DOOR OPEN TIMEOUT Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
Changes in the door switch state are not recognized for 4 seconds. This is to prevent rapid unit operation
changes if the door is ajar or the door switch is defective.
The unit will be restarted after the off timer expires.
How Alarm is Set

The following conditions must be met:
 The optional door switch must be installed.
 The unit must programmed to force the unit off on door opening.
 A maximum door open time must be programmed.
1. When door open timer expires, the unit will restart if allowed and resume operation even if the door is still
open. Alarm Code 108 is set as a Check Alarm.

1. Download the ServiceWatch data logger and inspect the information to determine if the door switch is
defective or if the door was left open for an extended period of time during loading or unloading of the
trailer.
2. Check the operation of the door switches.
5-91
01 December 2012
111 UNIT NOT CONFIGURED CORRECTLY Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm Alarm Code 02 Check Evaporator Coil Sensor

Codes Alarm Code 03 Check (Control) Return Air Sensor
Alarm Code 29 Check Defrost Damper Circuit
Alarm Code 30 Defrost Damper Stuck
Alarm Code 45 Check Hot Gas or Hot Gas Bypass Circuit
Alarm Code 67 Check Liquid Line Solenoid Circuit
Alarm Code 90 Electric Overload
Alarm Code 94 Check Loader #1 Circuit
Alarm Code 95 Check Loader #2 Circuit
Alarm Code 110 Check Suction Line Solenoid Circuit
Alarm Code 113 Check Electric Heat Circuit
Alarm Code 121 Check PWM Liquid Injection Circuit
Alarm Code 122 Check Diesel/Electric Circuit
Alarm Code 137 Check Damper Gear Motor Heater
Alarm Code 143 Check Drain Hose Heater Output
How Alarm is Set
1. If a mismatch exists between the unit hardware configuration and the unit hardware as detected by the
Base Controller then Alarm Code 111 is set as a Log Alarm.

1. Verify actual unit configuration.
2. Set the unit configuration using the Unit Configuration sub-menu of the Programming Menu, as shown in
Service Procedure A04A.
5-92
01 December 2012
113 CHECK ELECTRIC HEAT CIRCUIT Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Check or Shutdown Alarm (Pretrip test only)
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 28 Pretrip Abort.

Codes
How Alarm is Set
This alarm is set if the measured shunt current is incorrect during a non-running pre-trip test. Current is
measured with the output on and off.
1. The alarm is set as a Check Alarm if the current is not within specifications when the solenoid is
energized.
2. The alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm if the current does not return to 0 when the device is de-energized.
3. The alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm if the unit is not configured as a Model 50 unit and the current flow
is within specifications when the solenoid is energized.

1. Check for battery voltage at the 7E wire on the heater contactor.
2. Check the heater contactor coil for continuity.
3. Verify actual unit configuration.
5-93
01 December 2012
117 AUTO SWITCH FROM DIESEL TO ELECTRIC Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Log or Shutdown Alarm
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 118 Auto Switch from electric to diesel
Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If the unit is switched from diesel operation to electric operation during a Pretrip Test then set Alarm code
117 as a Log Alarm. The Pretrip Test will be restarted from the beginning in Electric Mode.
2. If the unit is switched from diesel operation to electric operation during a non-running Service Test Mode
operation then set Alarm code 117 as a Shutdown Alarm.
3. If the unit is switched from diesel operation to electric operation during normal operation this alarm is set
as a Log Alarm for information only.

Information only. No action is required.
5-94
01 December 2012
118 AUTO SWITCH FROM ELECTRIC TO DIESEL Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm Alarm Code 117 Auto Switch from diesel to electric
Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If the unit is switched from electric operation to diesel operation during a Pretrip Test then set Alarm code
118 as a Log Alarm. The Pretrip Test will be restarted from the beginning in Diesel Mode.
2. If the unit is switched from electric operation to diesel operation during a non-running Service Test Mode
operation then set Alarm code 118 as a Shutdown Alarm.
3. If the unit is switched from electric operation to diesel operation during normal operation this alarm is set
as a Log Alarm for information only.

Information only. No action is required.
5-95
01 December 2012
120 CHECK ALTERNATOR EXCITE CIRCUIT Page 1 of 2

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
The alternator excite input is energized when the engine starts to supply excitation voltage to the alternator.
Circuit Description
The Alternator Excite circuit is a single wire circuit. The EXC wire connects the Base Controller connector J7 pin
33 to the alternator excite terminal. The wire is routed in the Main Harness. A Smart FET on the Base Controller
supplies power to the EXC circuit. LED 18 is turned on when the alternator excite output is energized.
How Alarm is Set

1. If during normal operation the current is not within specifications 3 seconds after the alternator excite
output is energized then Alarm Code 120 is set as a Check Alarm and the output is turned off. Alternator
excite operation is not allowed until Alarm Code 120 is cleared. The unit will continue to run but with
reduced performance until the condition is corrected and the alarm is cleared.
2. If during normal operation the current does not return to less than 0.5 amps 3 seconds after the alternator
excite output is de-energized then Alarm Code 120 is set as a Check Alarm. Alternator excite operation
is not allowed until Alarm Code 120 is cleared. The unit will continue to run but with reduced performance
until the condition is corrected and the alarm is cleared.
3. If during a Pretrip Test the current is not within specifications when the alternator excite output is
energized then Alarm Code 120 is set as a Check Alarm.

5-96
01 December 2012
120 CHECK ALTERNATOR EXCITE CIRCUIT Page 2 of 2

1. Check the operation of the alternator excite circuit using Output Test Mode. Be sure the alternator excite
circuit LED lights. If the alternator excite circuit LED 18 lights then go to Step 2. If the alternator excite
circuit LED 18 does not light then go to Step 3.
2. If the alternator excite circuit LED 18 does light then check for 12 Vdc at the alternator excite terminal. If
12 Vdc is not present check for a short circuit, open circuit or loose connection.
3. If the alternator excite circuit LED 18 does not light then check the circuit with an accurate ohmmeter for a
short circuit, open circuit or loose connection.
4. Disconnect the EXC wire at the alternator and check for 12 Vdc when the engine is running. If 12 VDC is
not present check the EXC circuit for continuity.
5-97
01 December 2012
121 CHECK PWM/LIQUID INJECTION CIRCUIT Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Log or Shutdown Alarm (Pretrip only)
Associated Alarm Alarm Code 111 Unit Not Configured Correctly

Codes
How Alarm is Set
The PWM/Liquid Injection Circuit is not currently used. However, the associated output is checked during the
Non-running Pretrip Test to be certain nothing has been mistakenly connected to it. The output is energized and
then de-energized to insure that no device is connected to the circuit and that the Base Controller is operating
properly.
1. If the unit is not configured as a screw compressor or scroll compressor and current flow is detected when
the output is energized then Alarm Code 121 is set as a Log Alarm and Alarm Code 111 Unit Not
Configured Correctly is also set as a Log Alarm.

5-98
01 December 2012
122 CHECK DIESEL/ELECTRIC CIRCUIT Page 1 of 2

Alarm Type Check or Shutdown Alarm (Pretrip test only)
Associated Alarm
Codes
Circuit Description
The Diesel/Electric circuit is energized by the Diesel/Electric Relay K5 on the Base Controller. The 7E wire
supplies 12 VDC the Phase Select Module to energize the appropriate Standby Motor contactor.
How Alarm is Set

1. If during a Pretrip Test the unit is configured with Diesel/Electric Relay and current is not greater than 0.5
amps when the circuit is energized then Alarm Code 122 is set as a Check Alarm.
2. If during a Pretrip Test the zone is configured with Diesel/Electric Relay and current does not return to
less than 0.5 amps of run relay reference when de-energized then Alarm Code 122 is set as a Shutdown
Alarm.
IMPORTANT ADDITIONAL CONSIDERATIONS: The following is true on all units, even if Electric Standby is
not present.
When the Diesel/Electric Relay is energized during a Pretrip Test, the Fuel Solenoid is de-energized. When this
occurs, the current flow measured by the shunt should decrease to indicate that the Fuel Solenoid is actually de-
energized. If the current flow does not decrease, the Fuel Solenoid was not de-energized and Alarm Code 122
Check Diesel/Electric Circuit is set. This is normal operation.
If the current flow decreases by less than 0.75 amps when the Fuel Solenoid is de-energized, then the Fuel
Solenoid is presumed to be de-energized and the Pretrip Test continues.
However, if the current flow decreases by more than 0.75 Amps when the Fuel Solenoid is de-energized, Alarm
Code 122 Check Diesel/Electric Circuit is also set. This indicates that the Fuel Solenoid is drawing excessive
current. Alarm Code 35 Check Run Relay Circuit is not set under these conditions.

5-99
01 December 2012
122 CHECK DIESEL/ELECTRIC CIRCUIT Page 2 of 2

1. Check the operation of the Diesel/Electric relay using Output Test Mode in the Maintenance Menu. Be
sure the Diesel/Electric LED 7 lights.
2. Use the HMI control panel amps gauge to check the current drawn by the Diesel/Electric relay while
operating the Diesel/Electric relay with Output Test Mode. The current draw should be between 0.1 to 2
amps.
3. If Alarm Code 122 Check Diesel/Electric Circuit is set, check the current draw of the Fuel Solenoid using
Output Test Mode. If the current draw for the Fuel Solenoid decreases by more than 0.75 amps during
the Diesel/Electric Relay Test, the Fuel Solenoid should be replaced.
Note: A replacement fuel solenoid can be plugged in but not physically installed and a Pretrip Test run to
confirm the original fuel solenoid is the source of the problem.
IMPORTANT: Do not replace the Base Controller or Base Controller without first confirming that Alarm Code
122 Check Diesel/Electric Circuit was not set by the Fuel Solenoid drawing current in excess of 0.75 amps.
5-100
01 December 2012
127 SETPOINT NOT ENTERED Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
How Alarm is Set
1. If the setpoint was changed but the change was not confirmed by pressing the YES key then Alarm Code
127 Setpoint Not Entered is set as a Check Alarm. The setpoint has not been changed and has returned
to the original setting.

Information only. Be sure setpoint is adjusted properly.
5-101
01 December 2012
128 ENGINE RUN TIME MAINTENANCE REMINDER #1 Page 1 of 1

129 ENGINE RUN TIME MAINTENANCE REMINDER #2 Page 1 of 1
130 ELECTRIC RUN TIME MAINTENANCE REMINDER #1 Page 1 of 1
131 ELECTRIC RUN TIME MAINTENANCE REMINDER #2 Page 1 of 1
132 TOTAL UNIT RUN TIME MAINTENANCE REMINDER Page 1 of 1
#1
133 TOTAL UNIT RUN TIME MAINTENANCE REMINDER Page 1 of 1
#2
134 CONTROLLER POWER ON HOURS Page 1 of 1
Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
The programmable hourmeter alarms can be cleared from the Guarded Access Menu only.
How Alarm is Set

1. If one of the hourmeters above has exceeded the programmed time limit then the appropriate alarm code
is set as a Log Alarm.

This alarm is cleared from the Guarded Access Menu only.
1. Perform required maintenance, as dictated by owner requirements.
2. Reset the hourmeter limit after completion using the Hourmeter menu. See Section 4 for details.
5-102
01 December 2012
141 AUTO-SWITCH DIESEL TO ELECTRIC DISABLED Page 1 of 1

Considerations
When this alarm is set the unit will remain in Diesel Mode operation even when connected to a fully functional
electric standby power system.
How Alarm is Set

1. If the Autoswitch Diesel to Electric feature is set yes and the unit switches to Electric Mode operation and
an Electric Mode Shutdown Alarm is already set, then Alarm Code 141 Auto-switch Diesel to Electric is
set as a Check Alarm.

1. Check for associated alarms and repair as required.
5-103
01 December 2012
145 LOSS OF CONTROLLER “ON” FEEDBACK SIGNAL Page 1 of 1

Circuit Description
The Base Controller “On” feedback signal is supplied by 8X power flowing through fuse F7 (2A) to pin 6 on the
CAN connectors J12, J13 and J14. The power on pin 6 of CAN connector J14 flows to the HMI Control Panel pin
6. The presence of power at pin 6 of the HMI Control Panel indicates that power is present on the 8X circuits.
Active CAN communications indicate the K9 On/Off Relay is energized and the Base Controller is running. If CAN
communications are active but power is not present at pin 6 of the HMI Control Panel then there is a problem with
the 8XP or 8X circuit(s).
How Alarm is Set

1. If communications have been established between the Base Controller and a CAN connected device
such as the HMI Control Panel or an iBox and the device feedback input is low for 3 seconds then set
Alarm Code 145 Loss of Controller “ON” Feedback Signal as a Log Alarm.

1. Verify that fuse F7 is not blown. If fuse F7 is blown, check the 8XP circuit for shorts. This circuit supplies
power to pin 6 of all of the CAN communication ports (J12, J13 and J14) on the Base Controller. If
necessary, check for shorts at any devices connected to any of the CAN ports.
2. Check for power at pin 6 of the HMI Control Panel. If power is not present, check for an open in the 8XP
circuit from fuse F7 to pin 6 of the CAN communication ports.
5-104
01 December 2012
146 SOFTWARE VERSION MISMATCH Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm Alarm Code 111 Unit Not Configured Correctly

Codes
How Alarm is Set
If single temperature software is detected in a unit with a Multi-Temperature Expansion Module connected then
set Alarm Code 146 Software Version Mismatch as a Shutdown Alarm. Alarm Code 111 Unit Not Configured
Correctly will also be set as a Log Alarm.

This alarm is cleared manually. The alarm will also clear automatically if the correct version of Base Controller
software is flash loaded.
Flash load the correct software for the application.
148 AUTO-SWITCH ELECTRIC TO DIESEL DISABLED Page 1 of 1

Considerations
When this alarm is set the unit will remain in Electric Mode operation.
How Alarm is Set

1. If the Autoswitch Electric to Diesel feature is set yes and the unit switches to Diesel Mode operation and
an Diesel Mode Shutdown Alarm is already set, then set Alarm Code 141 Auto-switch Electric to Diesel
as a Check Alarm.

1. Check for associated alarms and repair as required.
5-105
01 December 2012
150 OUT OF RANGE LOW Page 1 of 1

Considerations
The CargoWatch temperatures and times that will cause an alarm to be set are user programmable. These
CargoWatch Data Logger features are configured as required for the particular customer applications. See the
Sensor Configuration Menu – CargoWatch Data Logger in Section 3 of this manual for details.
This alarm is only logged in the CargoWatch Data Logger.
Be sure the CargoWatch Data Logger is downloaded before installing HMI Control Panel software, as the HMI
Control Panel Cold Start will erase any existing data in the CargoWatch Logger.
How Alarm is Set

1. If the temperature falls below the user programmed temperature for the user programmed time interval
then Alarm Code 150 Out of Range Low is set as a Log Alarm.
2. If a CargoWatch sensor is open or shorted then Alarm Code 150 Out of Range Low is set as a Log Alarm.
3. If Out of Range Checking is turned On and no CargoWatch sensors are connected then Alarm Code 150
Out of Range Low is set as a Log Alarm.

1. Determine the cause of low CargoWatch sensor temperature and correct as necessary.
2. If no CargoWatch sensors are connected and the Out of Range feature is turned On, perform an HMI
Control Panel Cold Start the ThermoServ Service Tool. The Cold Start will set the Out of Range Checking
to Off. Be sure the CargoWatch Data Logger is downloaded before installing HMI Control Panel software,
as the HMI Control Panel Cold Start will erase any existing data in the CargoWatch Data Logger.
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt a cold start using the Base Controller jumpers or with the download cable
connected to the ServiceWatch port as this will restart the SR-4 Base Controller, not the HMI Control Panel.
5-106
01 December 2012
151 OUT OF RANGE HIGH Page 1 of 1

Considerations
The CargoWatch temperatures and times that will cause an alarm to be set are user programmable. These
CargoWatch Data Logger features are configured as required for the particular customer applications. See the
Sensor Configuration Menu – CargoWatch Data Logger in Section 3 of this manual for details.
This alarm is only logged in the CargoWatch Data Logger.
Be sure the CargoWatch Data Logger is downloaded before installing HMI Control Panel software, as the HMI
Control Panel Cold Start will erase any existing data in the CargoWatch Logger.
How Alarm is Set

1. If the temperature falls above the user programmed temperature for the user programmed time interval
then Alarm Code 150 Out of Range High is set as a Log Alarm.
2. If a CargoWatch sensor is open or shorted then Alarm Code 150 Out of Range High is set as a Log
Alarm.
3. If Out of Range Checking is turned On and no CargoWatch sensors are connected then Alarm Code 150
Out of Range High is set as a Log Alarm.

1. Determine the cause of low CargoWatch sensor temperature and correct as necessary.
2. If no CargoWatch sensors are connected and the Out of Range feature is turned On, perform an HMI
Control Panel Cold Start using the ThermoServ Service Tool. The Cold Start will set the Out of Range
Checking to Off. Be sure the CargoWatch Data Logger is downloaded before installing HMI Control
Panel software, as the HMI Control Panel Cold Start will erase any existing data in the CargoWatch Data
Logger.
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt a cold start using the Base Controller jumpers as this will restart the SR-4 Base
Controller, not the HMI Control Panel.
5-107
01 December 2012
157 OPTISET FILE MISMATCH Page 1 of 2

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
How Alarm is Set

Alarm Code 157 OptiSet Plus Profile Mismatch indicates that a problem exists with the OptiSet Plus Temperature
Profiles.
Alarm Code 157 will be set as a Check Alarm on power-up if the OptiSet configuration in the Base Controller does
not match the configuration held in the HMI Control Panel. This alarm condition usually occurs if the Base
Controller is Cold Started or replaced.
If OptiSet Plus with Named Products is in use and the Base Controller is Cold Started or replaced with a new
Base Controller, the Named Temperature Profiles are deleted by the Cold Start or do not exist in the replacement
Base Controller but still exist in the HMI Control Panel. The following conditions will be present:
1. Alarm Code 157 OptiSet Plus Profile Mismatch will be set.
2. Alarm Code 157 may be able to be cleared manually but will re-occur when the unit is powered off and
back on.
3. The OptiSet Plus Reset selection in Guarded Access Menu may not be available. An OptiSet Plus Reset
can still be performed using ThermoServ Service Tool.
If the number of profiles held in the SR-4 Base Controller memory does not match the number of profiles
expected by the ThermoServ Service Tool, then Alarm Code 157 OptiSet File Mismatch is set as a Check Alarm.
If the OptiSet Configuration held in the SR-4 Base Controller does not match the OptiSet Configuration held in the
HMI Control Panel when the unit is powered up, then Alarm Code 157 OptiSet File Mismatch is set as a Check
Alarm.

5-108
01 December 2012
157 OPTISET FILE MISMATCH Page 2 of 2

1. OptiSet Plus File is Available: If the correct OptiSet Plus File is available, sending the OptiSet Plus
File to the ServiceWatch Data Logger will transfer the correct Temperature Profiles to both the Base
Controller and the HMI Control Panel.
The OptiSet Plus Temperature Profiles in the Base Controller and HMI Control Panel now match. Alarm
Code 157 can be cleared manually.
2. OptiSet Plus File is Not Available: Sending an OptiSet Plus Reset using The ThermoServ Service
Tool will reset both the Base Controller and the HMI Control Panel to OptiSet defaults. All OptiSet Plus
Temperature Profiles will be cleared from both the Base Controller and HMI Control Panel – OptiSet Plus
will be set to factory defaults with Numeric Settings only.
Important: The OptiSet Plus Reset selection in Guarded Access Menu may not be available. An OptiSet
Plus Reset can still be performed using The ThermoServ Service Tool.
Important: The The ThermoServ Service Tool OptiSet Plus Reset will occur deceivingly fast and is not
reported as successful by The ThermoServ Service Tool. However, the OptiSet Plus Reset will be
performed.
There are no OptiSet Plus Temperature Profiles in either the Base Controller or HMI Control Panel.
Alarm Code 157 can be cleared manually.
3. Alternative Action if OptiSet Plus File is Not Available: Perform an HMI Control Panel Cold Start as
shown by Service Procedure A07B. The HMI Control Panel will be reset to defaults and all OptiSet Plus
Temperature Profiles will be cleared from the HMI. OptiSet Plus will be set to factory defaults with
Numeric Settings only.
Important: The CargoWatch Data Logger will also be cleared. Be sure to download the CargoWatch
Data Logger before performing a Cold Start.
There are no OptiSet Plus Temperature Profiles in the Base Controller or HMI Control Panel. Alarm Code
157 can be cleared manually.
4. Allow Alarm Code 157 to remain set: Alarm Code 157 OptiSet Plus Profile Mismatch can be left set
temporarily, but then only Numeric Setpoints will be available.
5-109
01 December 2012
157A NUMBERS IN LIEU OF NAMED PRODUCTS Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type NONE - No alarm code is set
Condition
A Long String of Numbers is Present In Lieu of Named Products but Alarm Code 157 Is Not Present.
What Causes Condition

If OptiSet Plus with Named Products is in use and the HMI Control Panel is Cold Started or replaced with a new
HMI Control Panel, the Named Temperature Profiles are deleted by the Cold Start or do not exist in the
replacement HMI Control Panel but still exist in the Base Controller. The following conditions will exist:
1. A long string of numbers will be shown in place of Named Product names.
2. The OptiSet Plus Reset can be performed using either the Guarded Access Menu or The ThermoServ
Service Tool.
Corrective Action
1. OptiSet Plus File is Available: If the correct OptiSet Plus File is available, sending the OptiSet Plus
File to the ServiceWatch Data Logger will transfer the correct Temperature Profiles to both the Base
Controller and the HMI Control Panel.
The OptiSet Plus Temperature Profiles in the Base Controller and HMI Control Panel now match. The
Named Profiles will now be present in lieu of the long strings of numbers.
2. OptiSet Plus File is Not Available: Sending an OptiSet Plus Reset using the Guarded Access Menu or
The ThermoServ Service Tool will reset both the Base Controller and the HMI Control Panel to OptiSet
defaults. All OptiSet Plus Temperature Profiles will be cleared from both the Base Controller and HMI
Control Panel – OptiSet Plus will be set to factory defaults with Numeric Settings only.
Important: The ThermoServ Service Tool OptiSet Plus Reset will occur deceivingly fast and is not
reported as successful by The ThermoServ Service Tool. However, the OptiSet Plus Reset will be
performed.
3. Alternative Action if OptiSet Plus File is Not Available: Perform a Base Controller Cold Start as
shown by Service Procedure A07A. The Base Controller will be reset to defaults. Be sure to record
programmable settings before performing the Cold Start and re-program all settings after the Cold Start is
completed. Clear all alarm codes. All OptiSet Plus Temperature Profiles will be cleared – OptiSet Plus
will be set to factory defaults with Numeric Settings only.
Important: All Guarded Access Programmable Feature settings will be cleared and set to factory
defaults. Be sure to record all Guarded Access settings before performing the Cold Start. All Guarded
Access Settings must be set to the recorded values or customer specifications before releasing the unit
for service.
5-110
01 December 2012
158 SOFTWARE FAILED TO LOAD Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
Base Controller Software flash loads via The ThermoServ Service Tool, USB Flash Drive or other methods are all
performed and checked in the same manner.
How Alarm is Set

When new software is being flash loaded to a Base Controller, the current revision software is held intact until the
new revision software is installed and verified. If the flash load is unsuccessful, the Base Controller will continue to
operate with the current revision software and Alarm Code 158 Software Failed to Load will be set as a Check
Alarm.

This alarm is cleared automatically when the new software is successfully flash loaded. The alarm can be cleared
manually, but will return when the unit power is switched off and back on.
Retry the flash load procedure.
5-111
01 December 2012
159 CHECK BATTERY CONDITION Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
How Alarm is Set

If the unit is running in Cycle Sentry Mode:
1. This alarm will be set as a Check Alarm if three consecutive Low Battery Voltage Restarts occur.
2. This alarm will be set as a Check Alarm if one Low Battery Voltage Restart occurs within a programmable
time limit. This time is adjustable from 1 minute to 10 minutes. Default setting is 5 minutes.

Check the battery and replace if necessary.
Not currently implemented

160 LOST REB CAN COMMUNICATION Page 1 of 1
Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
How Alarm is Set
5-112
01 December 2012
203 CHECK DISPLAY RETURN AIR SENSOR Page 1 of 3

Alarm Code 03 Check (Control) Return Air Sensor
This sensor is one of a pair of return air sensors. Both return air sensors must agree within specified limits. The
sensor associated with Alarm Code 203 Check Display Return Air Sensor is used to display the temperature. The
sensor is located next to the control return air sensor in the return air stream. The harness wires to this sensor
are marked with two yellow cables tie near the sensor connection. It is a graded sensor.
Circuit Description
The display return air temperature sensor circuit is a two wire circuit. The RTRP-01 (+) wire connects the Base
Controller 35 pin sensor connector J1 pin 28 to the blue sensor wire. The RTRN-01 (-) wire connects the Base
Harness. The harness wires to this sensor are marked with two yellow cables tie near the sensor connection.
The sensor is hard wired to the sensor harness.
Considerations
1. If the unit is controlling on return air temperature and a problem occurs with either return air sensor, the
unit will switch to Discharge Air Control and Alarm Code 11 Unit Controlling on Alternate Sensor will be
set. The appropriate sensor alarm codes will also be set.
5-113
01 December 2012

How Alarm is Set
2. If the sensor reading is under -50°F (-46°C) for 10 seconds then Alarm Code 203 is set as a Check
Alarm. The sensor reading will display dashes [ - - - ] may return to normal. This condition is termed a
3. If the differential between the return air temperature and other temperature sensors is too large when
Alarm Code 03 is cleared then Alarm Code 203 and Alarm Code 13 Sensor Calibration Check are set as
Check Alarms. This condition is termed a “soft” sensor failure.
Alarm Code 203 and Alarm Code 13 Sensor Calibration Check are set as Check Alarms. This condition
is termed a “soft” sensor failure.
5. If the sensor grade for this sensor is set to 5H then Alarm Code 203 and Alarm Code 92 Sensor Grades
Not Set are set as Check Alarms.
6. The temperatures of the control return air sensor and display return air sensor twins are not within a
specified range. If the faulty sensor can be determined, only the alarm code for that sensor and Alarm
Code 13 Sensor Check will be set. Alarm Codes 03 Check (Control) Return Air Sensor, 203 Check
Display Return Air Sensor, and 13 Sensor Check are set if the faulty sensor cannot be determined.

5-114
01 December 2012


1. Review the ServiceWatch data logger and check the senor reading at the time the alarm was set. Also,
1. Review the ServiceWatch data logger and check the sensor readings at the time the alarm was set. Also,
2. Check for an airflow obstruction and correct sensor mounting. Be sure the brass clamp is installed on the
two return air sensors.
If all or many of the Sensor Alarm Codes (02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 11, 12, 203 and 204) are set
5-115
01 December 2012
204 CHECK DISPLAY DISCHARGE AIR SENSOR Page 1 of 3

Alarm Code 04 Check (Control) Return Air Sensor
This sensor is one of a pair of dual discharge air sensors. Both discharge air sensors must agree within specified
limits. The sensor associated with Alarm Code 204 Check Display Discharge Air Sensor is used to display the
temperature. The sensor is located next to the display discharge air sensor in the discharge air stream. The
harness wires to this sensor are marked with two red cable ties near the sensor connection. It is a graded sensor.
Circuit Description
The discharge air temperature sensor circuit is a two wire circuit. The DTRP-01 (+) wire connects the Base
Controller 35 pin sensor connector J1 pin 10 to the blue sensor wire. The DTRN-01 (-) wire connects the Base
Harness. The harness wires to this sensor are marked with two red cables tie near the sensor connection. The
Considerations
1. If the unit is controlling on discharge air temperature, and a problem occurs with either discharge air
sensor, the unit will switch to Return Air Control and Alarm Code 11 Unit Controlling on Alternate Sensor
will be set. The appropriate sensor alarm codes will also be set.
5-116
01 December 2012

How Alarm is Set
2. If the sensor reading is under -50°F (-46°C) for 10 seconds then Alarm Code 204 is set as a Check
Alarm. The sensor reading will display dashes [ - - - ] may return to normal. This condition is termed a
3. If the differential between the discharge and other sensors is too large when Alarm Code 04 is cleared
then Alarm Code 204 and Alarm Code 13 Sensor Calibration Check are set as Check Alarms. This
condition is termed a “soft” sensor failure.
Alarm Code 204 and Alarm Code 13 Sensor Calibration Check are set as Check Alarms. This condition
is termed a “soft” sensor failure.
5. If the sensor grade for this sensor is set to 5H then both Alarm Code 204 and Alarm Code 92 Sensor
Grades Not Set are set as Check Alarms.
6. The temperatures of the control discharge air sensor and display discharge air sensor twins are not within
a specified range. If the faulty sensor can be determined, only the alarm code for that sensor and Alarm
Code 13 Sensor Check will be set. Alarm Codes 04 Check (Control) Discharge Air Sensor, 204 Check
Display Discharge Air Sensor, and 13 Sensor Check are set if the faulty sensor cannot be determined.

Programmable Settings
5-117
01 December 2012


1. Review the ServiceWatch data logger and check the sensor readings at the time the alarm was set. Also,
If all or many of the Sensor Alarm Codes (02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 11, 12, 203 and 204) are set
5-118
01 December 2012
Not currently implemented

233 REB TRANSITION CONSERVATIVE TO FULL NULL Page 1 of 1
Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
How Alarm is Set
234 CHECK RELATIVE HUMIDITY SENSOR Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
How Alarm is Set

1. This alarm is set as a Check Alarm if the input is not linear and is not between 1 VDC and 5 VDC.
2. If a connection is made to the Humidity Sensor inputs and the unit is not configured with a Humidity Sensor
set Alarm Code 111 Unit Not Configured Correctly as a Check Alarm.

1. If this alarm is set by Condition 1 check the voltage levels at the humidity sensor and replace sensor if
indicated.
2. If this alarm is set by Condition 2 check and correct the unit Configuration in the Guarded Access > Unit
Configuration Menu.
5-119
01 December 2012
251 REB MIS-CONFIGURED Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
How Alarm is Set

1. This alarm is set as a Check Alarm if the installed Radio Expansion Board (REB) does not match the
selection made in Guarded Access > Unit Configuration > Radio Expansion Board Menu.
2. This alarm is set as a Check Alarm if the unit is configured with a Radio Expansion Board (REB) and it is
not detected.
3. This alarm is set as a Check Alarm if a Radio Expansion Board (REB) is detected unexpectedly.

1. Verify that the configuration setting in Guarded Access > Unit Configuration > Radio Expansion Board
Menu matches the installed Radio Expansion Board (REB).
2. Verify the Radio Expansion Board (REB) is properly installed and secured.
5-120
01 December 2012
252 CHECK FRESH AIR EXCHANGE CIRCUIT Page 1 of 2

Associated Alarm
Codes
Fresh Air Exchange allows fresh outside air to be drawn into the trailer and the interior air to be exhausted. This
feature is beneficial when hauling loads that release gas as they ripen, such as potatoes. The Fresh Air
Exchange feature should be used exactly as specified by the customer.
IMPORTANT: The Fresh Air Exchange feature is only available with setpoints above 32°F (0°C). The feature is
disabled with setpoints of 32°F (0°C) and below.
A Damper Solenoid and mechanical linkage is used to open and close the Fresh Air Exchange door.
Circuit Description
NOTE: In normal operation the Auto Fresh Air Solenoid is only energized when the unit engine is running.
The Fresh Air Exchange circuit is a two wire circuit. The Fresh Air Exchange Solenoid is energized by Relay K8
and Fuse F11 on the Base Controller. The AFA wire applies 12 VDC to one side of the Fresh Air Exchange
Solenoid to energize the solenoid. The CHAFA wire connects the other side of the solenoid to chassis ground at
the ground plate near the unit battery. The solenoid is not polarity sensitive, but the suppression diode must be
installed with the bar end of the diode toward the AFA wire. The wires are routed in the Main Harness.
The Fresh Air Reed Switch is closed when the fresh air door is closed and open when the fresh air door is open.
Wire numbers AFASW and CHSW supply door position information to the microprocessor digital input at J7 Pin
19.
How Alarm is Set

1. When the Fresh Air Exchange Solenoid is energized, the fresh air door will open and the Auto Fresh Air
Reed Switch will also be open. If a mismatch exists between the Fresh Air Exchange and the Auto Fresh
Air Reed Switch, up to three additional attempts to open the door will be made by de-energizing and
energizing the Fresh Air Exchange Solenoid at 1 second intervals. If the door still fails to open as
indicated by the Auto Fresh Air Reed Switch, Alarm Code 252 is set as a Check Alarm. The Fresh Air
Exchange Solenoid will remain energized to open the door if conditions change – for example, should
some ice melt that was restricting door movement.
2. If during a Pretrip Test the unit is configured with Fresh Air Exchange and current is not between 2 to 10
amps when the Fresh Air Exchange Solenoid is energized then Alarm Code 252 is set as a Check Alarm.
3. If during a Pretrip Test the unit is configured with Fresh Air Exchange and current does not return to less
than or equal to 0.5 amps when de-energized then Alarm Code 252 is set as a Shutdown Alarm.

5-121
01 December 2012
252 CHECK FRESH AIR EXCHANGE CIRCUIT Page 2 of 2

Considerations
In normal operation the Auto Fresh Air Solenoid is only energized when the unit engine is running.
1. Check the operation of the Fresh Air Exchange circuit using Output Test Mode. Be sure the Fresh Air
Exchange LED 22 lights.
2. Use the HMI Control Panel amps gauge to check the current drawn by the Fresh Air Exchange Solenoid
while operating the Fresh Air Exchange Door with Output Test Mode. The current draw should be
approximately 6 amps.
3. Energize the Fresh Air Exchange Solenoid using Output Test Mode and check for battery voltage on the
AFA circuit. If voltage is present and no current was measured in the step above replace the Fresh Air
Exchange Solenoid.
4. Verify that the Auto Fresh Air Reed Switch is closed when the fresh air door is closed and open when the
fresh air door is open. Battery voltage should be present at J7 Pin 19 when the switch is open (door is
open). 0 volts should be present at J7 Pin 19 when the switch is closed (door is closed).
5. Inspect the Fresh Air Exchange mechanical components for binding or ice buildup.
5-122
01 December 2012
SR-4 PRECEDENT 500 SERIES ALARM CODES

The following 500 Series Alarm Codes apply to Precedent applications with electric condenser fans and
evaporator blower powered by the engine driven generator.
500 CHECK HOST EVAPORATOR BLOWER LOW SPEED Page 1 of 1
INFORMATION NOT AVAILABLE
501 CHECK HOST EVAPORATOR BLOWER HIGH SPEED Page 1 of 1
502 CHECK HOST EVAPORATOR RPM SENSOR Page 1 of 1
503 CHECK HOST CONDENSER FAN 1 RPM SENSOR Page 1 of 1
504 CHECK HOST CONDENSER FAN 2 RPM SENSOR Page 1 of 1
5-123
01 December 2012
505 CHECK ROADSIDE COND FAN MOTOR SPEED CKT Page 1 of 2

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
If this alarm is set as a result of a short circuit as determined by the SmartFET operational check then no further
operation is allowed until the alarm has been cleared.
How Alarm is Set
Condition 1 – SmartFET Operational Check
The SmartFET is checked every time it is turned on or off. The alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm if a short circuit
is detected by the SMartFET, otherwise it is set as a Check Alarm. If the alarm is set as the result of a short
circuit no further operation is allowed until the alarm has been cleared.
Condition 2 – Non-Running Pretrip Test

If during a Pretrip Test the current is not between 0.5 to 3 amps when the solenoid is energized then Alarm Code
45 Check Hot Gas Circuit is set as a Check Alarm.

If during a Pretrip Test the current does not return to less than 0.5 amps when de-energized then Alarm Code 45
Check Hot Gas Circuit is set as a Shutdown Alarm.

5-124
01 December 2012
505 CHECK ROADSIDE COND FAN MOTOR SPEED CKT Page 2 of 2

solenoid coil.
3. Clear the alarm to reset the Smart FET. Check the operation of the Roadside Condenser Fan circuit
using Output Test Mode. Be sure the Roadside Condenser Fan Circuit LED 30 lights. For Base
Controller LED identification see the LED decal on the control box door. If the Base Controller Roadside
Condenser Fan Circuit LED 30 lights go to Step 4. If the Base Controller Roadside Condenser Fan
Circuit LED 30 does not light go to Step 5.
4. If the Base Controller Roadside Condenser Fan Circuit LED 30 lights and Alarm Code 505 Check
Roadside Condenser Fan Motor Speed Circuit is set, the circuit has high resistance or is open. Use the
HMI Control Panel amps gauge to check the current drawn by the Roadside Condenser Fan Motor, while
operating the contactor with Output Test Mode. The current draw should be approximately 1.8 amps. If
the current is not within limits then check for high resistance or open in the circuit or contactor coil as
shown in Step 5. Verify that all circuit connectors are secure.
5. If the Base Controller Roadside Condenser Fan Circuit LED 30 does not light and Alarm Code 505 Check
Roadside Condenser Fan Motor Speed Circuit is set, check for a shorted circuit or contactor coil.
Disconnect the Base Controller 35 pin Connector J4 and check the Roadside Condenser Fan Circuit at
Pin 16 with an accurate ohmmeter for a short circuit, open circuit or loose connection. The solenoid coil
resistance should be approximately 8.3 ohms.
Controller/Base Controller Assembly as shown in Service Procedure A01A.
5-125
01 December 2012
506 CHECK CURBSIDE COND FAN MOTOR SPEED CKT Page 1 of 2

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
If this alarm is set as a result of a short circuit as determined by the SmartFET operational check then no further
operation is allowed until the alarm has been cleared.
How Alarm is Set
Condition 1 – SmartFET Operational Check
The SmartFET is checked every time it is turned on or off. The alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm if a short circuit
is detected by the SMartFET, otherwise it is set as a Check Alarm. If the alarm is set as the result of a short
circuit no further operation is allowed until the alarm has been cleared.

If during a Pretrip Test the current is not between 0.5 to 3 amps when the solenoid is energized then Alarm Code
45 Check Hot Gas Circuit is set as a Check Alarm.

If during a Pretrip Test the current does not return to less than 0.5 amps when de-energized then Alarm Code 45
Check Hot Gas Circuit is set as a Shutdown Alarm.

5-126
01 December 2012
506 CHECK CURBSIDE COND FAN MOTOR SPEED CKT Page 2 of 2

solenoid coil.
3. Clear the alarm to reset the Smart FET. Check the operation of the Curbside Condenser Fan circuit using
Output Test Mode. Be sure the Curbside Condenser Fan Circuit LED 32 lights. For Base Controller LED
identification see the LED decal on the control box door. If the Base Controller Curbside Condenser Fan
Circuit LED 32 lights go to Step 4. If the Base Controller Curbside Condenser Fan Circuit LED 32 does
not light go to Step 5.
4. If the Base Controller Curbside Condenser Fan Circuit LED 32 lights and Alarm Code 505 Check
Curbside Condenser Fan Motor Speed Circuit is set, the circuit has high resistance or is open. Use the
HMI Control Panel amps gauge to check the current drawn by the Curbside Condenser Fan Motor, while
operating the contactor with Output Test Mode. The current draw should be approximately 1.8 amps. If
the current is not within limits then check for high resistance or open in the circuit or contactor coil as
shown in Step 5. Verify that all circuit connectors are secure.
5. If the Base Controller Curbside Condenser Fan Circuit LED 32 does not light and Alarm Code 506 Check
Curbside Condenser Fan Motor Speed Circuit is set, check for a shorted circuit or contactor coil.
Disconnect the Base Controller 35 pin Connector J4 and check the Curbside Condenser Fan Circuit at
Pin 17 with an accurate ohmmeter for a short circuit, open circuit or loose connection. The solenoid coil
resistance should be approximately 8.3 ohms.
Controller/Base Controller Assembly as shown in Service Procedure A01A.
5-127
01 December 2012
508 SPEED REQUEST COMMUNICATION ERROR Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
How Alarm is Set

This alarm is set if the unit’s requested operating speed does not match the requested operating speed.
Condition 1 – Diesel Mode Low Speed Operation

If the Low Speed Request has not been received by the Engine Control Unit (ECU) Alarm Code 508 is set as a
Log Alarm.
Condition 2 – Diesel Mode High Speed Operation

If the High Speed Request has not been received by the Engine Control Unit (ECU) Alarm Code 508 is set as a
Log Alarm.

5-128
01 December 2012
509 ECU FAILED TO ENABLE Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
How Alarm is Set

Condition 1 – ECU Enable Maximum Retries has been reached
If the maximum number of retries to enable the Engine Control Unit (ECU) has been exceeded, this alarm is set
as a Shutdown Alarm in Diesel Mode and a Log Alarm in Electric Mode.

When cleared, the ECU Enable Failed Counter is reset to 0 and the execute ECU Enable sequence is attempted
if conditions allow.
Verify the KeyswitchSignal is present at the ECU Connector Pin 8.
Verify the ECU Relay on the Engine Control Relay/Fuse Board is energized.
5-129
01 December 2012
510 ECU RUN SIGNAL FAILED Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
How Alarm is Set

Condition 1 – SR-4 Run Signal Enable Maximum Retries has been reached
If the maximum number of retries to enable the SR-4 Run Signal to the Engine Control Unit (ECU) has been
exceeded, this alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm in Diesel Mode and a Log Alarm in Electric Mode.

When cleared, the ECU Run Signal Failed Counter is reset to 0.
Verify the Run Signal is present at the ECU Connector Pin 7.
5-130
01 December 2012
511 ENGINE WAIT TO START TIME DELAY EXPIRED Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
How Alarm is Set

Condition 1 – Maximum Time for Engine Wait to Start Lamp has been reached
If the Engine Wait to Start Timer has been exceeded this alarm is set as a Log Alarm.

Verify the Run Signal is present at the ECU Connector Pin 7.
Check the Can Bus circuit to the ECU. Bu sure connectors are fully seated.
5-131
01 December 2012
518 GENERATOR GROUND FAULT Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
This alarm only occurs when running in Diesel Mode.
How Alarm is Set

Condition 1 – Ground Fault Detected
If the Ground Fault Detection Sensor output to the SR-4 Base Controller is low for 3 seconds (indicating a ground
fault condition exists) this alarm is set as a Check Alarm.

This alarm is cleared from Guarded Access only.
This alarm will auto clear if the Ground Fault Detection Sensor output to the SR-4 Base Controller is high for 3
seconds.
Check the generator circuit and fan circuits for a ground fault.
5-132
01 December 2012
519 CHECK BATTERY CHARGER INPUT POWER Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
How Alarm is Set

Condition 1 – Brown Out, Black Out, Wye Point Open or Over-Voltage
If the input to the Battery Charger is not within allowable limits this alarm is set as a Check Alarm.
Condition 2 – Over-Voltage Shutdown

If the input voltage to the Battery Charger exceeds the allowable limits this alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
Condition 3 – Abnormal Frequency

If the input power frequency to the Battery Charger exceeds the allowable limits this alarm is set as a Check
Alarm.

This alarm will auto clear if the setting condition no longer exists.
Check generator output voltage.
5-133
01 December 2012
520 CHECK BATTERY CHARGER OUTPUT POWER Page 1 of 1

Alarm Type Log or Check Alarm
Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
How Alarm is Set

Condition 1 – No Battery Connection on Battery Charger Battery Terminal
If the output of the Battery Charger does not appear to be connected to the battery this alarm is set as a Log
Alarm.
Condition 2 – Depleted Battery

If the Charging, Low Battery message is received this alarm is set as a Log Alarm.
Condition 3 – Non-battery Load connected to Battery Charger Battery Terminal

If non-battery load appears to be connected to the charge output of the this alarm is set as a Log Alarm.
Condition 4 – Battery not Drawing Current

If the battery does not appear to be drawing charge current this alarm is set as a Check Alarm.
Condition 5 – Excessive Load on Battery Charger Load Terminal

If the load connected to the Battery Charger appears excessive this alarm is set as a Check Alarm.
Condition 6 – Battery connected to Battery Charger Load Terminal

If it appears that a battery is connected to the load output this alarm is set as a Check Alarm.

This alarm will auto clear if the setting condition no longer exists.
Verify a good battery is properly connected to the Battery Charger.
Check battery condition.
5-134
01 December 2012
521 BATTERY CHARGER EXTERNAL/ENVIRON FAULT Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
How Alarm is Set

The Battery Charger J1939 Output sends messages to the SR-4 Base Controller.
Condition 1 – High Battery Charger Temperature 1

If the Primary Threshold temperature is exceeded but is less than the Secondary Threshold this alarm is set as a
Check Alarm.

If the Secondary Threshold temperature is exceeded, but is less than the Final Threshold this alarm is set as a
Check Alarm.

If the Final Threshold temperature is exceeded this alarm is set as a Check Alarm.

Verify the Roadside Condenser Fan is operating.
Check for plugged air duct.
5-135
01 December 2012
522 BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR ALARM Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
How Alarm is Set

Condition 1 – Battery Temperature Sensor Failed

If the Battery Temperature Sensor is failed this alarm is set as a Check Alarm.

Check Battery Temperature Sensor.
5-136
01 December 2012
523 BATTERY CHARGER INDICATED CONDITIONS Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
How Alarm is Set

Condition 1 – Operating, Battery Failure

If the Battery Charger is operating and the connected battery appears to have failed this alarm is set as a Check
Alarm.
Condition 2 – Operating, Load Fault

If the Battery Charger is operating and the connected load appears to have a fault this alarm is set as a Check
Alarm.
Condition 3 – Operating, Thermal Shutdown

If the Battery Charger is operating and enters thermal shutdown this alarm is set as a Check Alarm.
Condition 4 – Charger Failure

If the Battery Charger is operating and appears to have failed this alarm is set as a Check Alarm.
Condition 5 – Charger Not Reporting Off

If the Battery Charger is not reporting off when it should be this alarm is set as a Check Alarm.

Check the Battery Charger Led Blink Rate for possible error code.
5-137
01 December 2012
524 GENERATOR OP LIMIT VOUT TO FREQ RATIO Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
How Alarm is Set

Applies to Alternator Equipped units using a Hall Effect Generator Current Sensor
Condition 1 – Output Voltage to Frequency Ratio is Not Within Normal Limits

If a Hall Effect Generator Current Sensor output voltage to frequency ratio is not within acceptable limits this
alarm is set as a Check Alarm.

Check engine RPM.
Check for belt slippage.
5-138
01 December 2012
525 GENERATOR FREQUENCY RANGE FAULT Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
How Alarm is Set

Condition 1 – Generator Frequency Range Fault

If a Hall Effect Generator Current Sensor determines that the Generator frequency is not with acceptable limits
this alarm is set as a Check Alarm.

Check engine RPM.
5-139
01 December 2012
526 GENERATOR OPERATION LIMIT OUTPUT CURRENT Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
How Alarm is Set

Condition 1 – Generator Frequency Range Fault

If a Hall Effect Generator Current Sensor determines that the Generator frequency is not with acceptable limits
this alarm is set as a Check Alarm.

Check engine RPM.
5-140
01 December 2012
528 CONTROLLER NOT RECEIVING MESSAGES FROM Page 1 of 1

BATTERY CHARGER
Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
How Alarm is Set

Condition 1 – Controller Not Receiving Message From Battery Charger

If the SR-4 Base Controller is expecting messages from the Battery Charger but is not receiving them this alarm is
set as a Check Alarm.
The following alarms will not be set if Alarm Code 528 is set:
Alarm Code 25 Alternator Check
Alarm Code 519 Check Battery Charger Input Power
Alarm Code 520 Check Battery Charger Output Power
Alarm Code 521 Battery Charger External Environmental Fault
Alarm Code 522 Battery Temperature Sensor Alarm
Alarm Code 523 Battery Charger Indicated Conditions

Check the CAN Bus connection to the Battery Charger.
5-141
01 December 2012
529 CHECK FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
This alarm is set in Diesel Mode operation only
How Alarm is Set

Condition 1 – SmartFET Check
The SmartFET check failed when the fuel pump was energized.

Examine the download for an open or short circuit condition.
5-142
01 December 2012
538 ENGINE J1939 CAN DATA LINK DEGRADED Page 1 of 2

Alarm Type Log or Check Alarm

Codes
Considerations
This alarm applies only to applications with electronic controlled engines.
The Engine J1939 CAN Datalink Health Machine (CDHM) is intended to increase unit uptime by allowing unit to
run when the J1939 CAN bus experiences momentary and / or intermittent Engine J1939 CAN message drops.
The CDHM is designed to continuously monitor incoming PGN's and report their status as LOST or NOT LOST. If
a sufficient number of PGN's are reported as LOST, the CDHM will output a Engine J1939 CAN Datalink Status
as either DEGRADED or FAILED. The Engine J1939 CAN Datalink Status is used throughout the system
functions.
5-143
01 December 2012
538 Engine J1939 CAN Data link Degraded Page 2 of 2

How Alarm is Set
Condition 1 Data Link DEGRADED, Engine Operating Mode = STANDBY
If the J1939 CAN Data Link is = DEGRADED and the ECU/Engine Operating Mode is = STANDBY then the
engine stays in STANDBY and this alarm is set as a Log Alarm. Alarm Code 42 is also set as a Log Alarm.
Condition 2 Data Link DEGRADED, Engine Operating Mode = PRECRANK

If the J1939 CAN Data Link is = DEGRADED and the ECU/Engine Operating Mode is = PRECRANK then the
engine stays in PRECRANK and this alarm is set as a Log Alarm. Alarm Code 42 is also set as a Log Alarm.
Condition 3 Data Link DEGRADED, Engine Operating Mode = CRANK

If the J1939 CAN Data Link is = DEGRADED and the ECU/Engine Operating Mode is = CRANK then the engine
stays in CRANK and this alarm is set as a Log Alarm. Alarm Code 42 is also set as a Log Alarm.
Condition 4 Data Link DEGRADED, Engine Operating Mode = RUNNING LOW SPEED
If the J1939 CAN Data Link is = DEGRADED and the ECU/Engine Operating Mode is = RUNNING LOW SPEED
then the engine stays in RUNNING LOW SPEED and this alarm is set as a Check Alarm. Alarm Code 42 is also
set as a Log Alarm.
Condition 5 Data Link DEGRADED, Engine Operating Mode = RUNNING HIGH SPEED
If the J1939 CAN Data Link is = DEGRADED and the ECU/Engine Operating Mode is = RUNNING HIGH SPEED
then the engine is forced to RUNNING LOW SPEED and this alarm is set as a Check Alarm. Alarm Code 42 is
also set as a Log Alarm.
Condition 6 Data Link DEGRADED, Engine Operating Mode = RUNNING SAFE MODE
If the J1939 CAN Data Link is = DEGRADED and the ECU/Engine Operating Mode is = RUNNING SAFE MODE
then the engine stays in RUNNING SAFE MODE and this alarm is set as a Log Alarm. Alarm Code 42 is also set
as a Log Alarm.
Condition 7 Data Link DEGRADED, Engine Operating Mode = STOPPED SAFE MODE
If the J1939 CAN Data Link is = DEGRADED and the ECU/Engine Operating Mode is = STOPPED SAFE MODE
then the engine stays in STOPPED SAFE MODE and this alarm is set as a Log Alarm. Alarm Code 42 is also set
as a Log Alarm.

Auto clears only when Engine J1939 CAN Data Link status = ACTIVE
Check CAN Bus connectors and continuity.
5-144
01 December 2012
539 J1939 CAN DATA LINK FAILED Page 1 of 2


Codes Alarm Code 509 ECU Failed to Enable
Considerations
This alarm applies only to applications with electronic controlled engines.
The Engine J1939 CAN Datalink Health Machine (CDHM) is intended to increase unit uptime by allowing unit to
run when the J1939 CAN bus experiences momentary and / or intermittent Engine J1939 CAN message drops.
The CDHM is designed to continuously monitor incoming PGN's and report their status as LOST or NOT LOST. If
a sufficient number of PGN's are reported as LOST, the CDHM will output a Engine J1939 CAN Datalink Status
as either DEGRADED or FAILED. The Engine J1939 CAN Datalink Status is used throughout the system
functions.
5-145
01 December 2012
539 J1939 CAN DATA LINK FAILED Page 2 of 2

How Alarm is Set
Condition 1 Data Link FAILED, Engine Operating Mode = STANDBY
If the J1939 CAN Data Link is = FAILED and the ECU/Engine Operating Mode is = STANDBY then the engine
stays in STANDBY and this alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
Condition 2 Data Link FAILED, Engine Operating Mode = PRECRANK

If the J1939 CAN Data Link is = FAILED and the ECU/Engine Operating Mode is = PRECRANK then the engine
stays in PRECRANK and this alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
Condition 3 Data Link FAILED, Engine Operating Mode = CRANK

If the J1939 CAN Data Link is = FAILED and the ECU/Engine Operating Mode is = CRANK then the engine stays
in CRANK and this alarm is set as a Log Alarm.
Condition 4 Data Link FAILED, Engine Operating Mode = RUNNING LOW SPEED
If the J1939 CAN Data Link is = FAILED and the ECU/Engine Operating Mode is = RUNNING LOW SPEED then
the engine stays in RUNNING LOW SPEED and this alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
Condition 5 Data Link FAILED, Engine Operating Mode = RUNNING HIGH SPEED
If the J1939 CAN Data Link is = FAILED and the ECU/Engine Operating Mode is = RUNNING HIGH SPEED then
the engine is forced to RUNNING LOW SPEED and this alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
Condition 6 Data Link FAILED, Engine Operating Mode = RUNNING SAFE MODE
If the J1939 CAN Data Link is = FAILED and the ECU/Engine Operating Mode is = RUNNING SAFE MODE then
the engine stays in RUNNING SAFE MODE and this alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
Condition 7 Data Link FAILED, Engine Operating Mode = STOPPED SAFE MODE
If the J1939 CAN Data Link is = FAILED and the ECU/Engine Operating Mode is = STOPPED SAFE MODE then
the engine stays in STOPPED SAFE MODE and this alarm is set as a Shutdown Alarm.

After an Alarm Code 539 Shutdown occurs the ECU Disable Sequence is executed. After a specified time delay,
the ECU Enable Sequence is executed. If the ECU Enable Sequence is successful, Alarm Code 539 is auto
cleared.
If Alarm Code 539 is set as a Log Alarm, it will be auto cleared when Engine J1939 CAN Data Link status =
ACTIVE or DEGRADED.
Check CAN Bus connectors and continuity.
5-146
01 December 2012
599 ENGINE SERVICE TOOL CONNECTED Page 1 of 1

Associated Alarm
Codes
Considerations
Alarm Code 599 is set as an information alarm to indicate that the Engine Service Tool was connected.
How Alarm is Set

Condition 1 – Engine Service Tool Connected
If the user selects Maintenance Menu > Connect Engine Service Tool from the Maintenance Menu, this alarm
code is set as a Log Alarm.

This alarm is auto cleared if the user exits Maintenance Menu > Connect Engine Service Tool from the
Maintenance Menu.
None
5-147
01 December 2012
5-148
01 December 2012
SR-4 PRECEDENT 600 SERIES YANMAR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE

CODES (DTC)
Viewing Yanmar DTC Codes (Diagnostic Trouble Codes)

If the Yanmar Engine Control Unit (ECU) determines a problem exists, one or more Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(DTC) will be set.
Engine DTC Codes are viewed by means of the Yanmar Engine Diagnostic Tool. The procedure shown below
should be used along with Service Procedure A60A Connecting and Using the Yamnar Engine Diagnostic Tool.
Yanmar Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) with Thermo King Alarm Codes
When a Yanmar DTC Code is set a corresponding 600 Series Thermo King Alarm Code is also set. The 600
Series Alarm Code is a general indication of what issues may exist. Always connect the Yanmar Service Tool
and read all existing DTC codes. Use this information to diagnose the problem using the Yanmar Service
documentation.
Clearing Yanmar DTC Codes and Associated Thermo King Alarm Codes
Yanmar DTC Codes are cleared using the Yanmar Service tool or by choosing “Clear All ECU Faults from the
HMI Control Panel Main Menu. When the Yanmar Fault Codes are cleared the associated Thermo King Alarm
Code is also cleared. The codes are still available by downloading the ServiceWatch Data Logger using the
Precedent Service Tool.
5-149
01 December 2012
CONNECTIONS TO YANMAR ENGINE CONTROL UNIT (ECU)

There are three connections from the Thermo King Base Controller to the Yanmar Engine Control Unit (ECU) as
shown below.
 Keyswitch Signal – This signal sends power to the ECU.
 Run Signal – This signal is high when the Base Controller is requesting the engine to run.
 CAN Bus – All other communications between the Base Controller and the ECU are via the CAN Bus.
5-150
01 December 2012
600 CHECK CRANKSHAFT SPEED SENSOR Page 1 of 1

Fault Type Check Alarm
Associated Thermo Alarm Code 42 Unit Forced to Low Speed

King Alarm Codes
Considerations
How Fault is Set

Condition 1
This DTC is set as a Check Alarm if the ECU sends one or more of the following DTC Codes.
P0336 Abnormal Signal
P0337 No Signal
Thermo King Alarm Code 42 Unit Forced to Low Speed is also set as a Log Alarm.
How Fault is Cleared

This alarm is clearable using the HMI Control Panel Main Menu > Clear All ECU Faults.
This alarm is auto cleared if the ECU stops sending the DTC Codes shown above.
Log Alarm cleared.
5-151
01 December 2012
601 CHECK CAMSHAFT SPEED SENSOR Page 1 of 1

Associated Yanmar
Fault Codes
Associated Thermo
King Alarm Codes
Considerations
How Fault is Set

Condition 1
This fault is set as a Check Alarm if the ECU sends one or more of the following DTC Codes.
P0342 No Signal
P1341 Phase Difference with Crankshaft

Log Alarm cleared.
5-152
01 December 2012
602 CHECK INTAKE THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR Page 1 of 1

Fault Type Shutdown or Log Alarm
Associated Yanmar
Fault Codes
Associated Thermo
King Alarm Codes
Considerations
How Fault is Set

Condition 1
This fault is set as a Shutdown Alarm if the ECU sends one or more of the following DTC Codes and the unit is
running in Diesel Mode. This fault is set as a Log Alarm if the ECU sends one or more of the following DTC
Codes and the unit is running in Electric Mode.
P02E9 Voltage High
P02E8 Voltage Low

Log Alarm cleared.
5-153
01 December 2012
603 CHECK EXHAUST PRESSURE SENSOR Page 1 of 1

Associated Yanmar
Fault Codes
Associated Thermo
King Alarm Codes
Considerations
How Fault is Set

Condition 1
P0473 Voltage High
P0472 Voltage Low

Log Alarm cleared.
5-154
01 December 2012
604 CHECK COOLANT TEMP SENSOR Page 1 of 1

Associated Yanmar
Fault Codes
King Alarm Codes
Considerations
How Fault is Set

Condition 1
This fault is set as a Check Alarm if the ECU sends one or more of the following DTC Codes:
P0118 Voltage High
P0117 Voltage Low

Alarm Code 42 Unit Forced to Low Speed is also cleared.
Log Alarm cleared.
5-155
01 December 2012
605 CHECK FRESH AIR TEMP SENSOR Page 1 of 1

Fault Type Log Alarm
Associated Yanmar
Fault Codes
Associated Thermo
King Alarm Codes
Considerations
How Fault is Set

Condition 1
This fault is set as a Log Alarm if the ECU sends one or more of the following DTC Codes:
P0113 Voltage High
P0112 Voltage Low

Log Alarm cleared.
5-156
01 December 2012
607 CHECK FUEL TEMP SENSOR Page 1 of 1

Associated Yanmar
Fault Codes
Associated Thermo
King Alarm Codes
Considerations
How Fault is Set

Condition 1
P0183 Voltage High
P0182 Voltage Low

Log Alarm cleared.
5-157
01 December 2012
608 CHECK RAIL PRESSURE SENSOR Page 1 of 1

Associated Yanmar
Fault Codes
Associated Thermo
King Alarm Codes
Considerations
How Fault is Set

Condition 1
P0193 Voltage High
P0192 Voltage Low

Log Alarm cleared.
5-158
01 December 2012
609 CHECK INTAKE PRESSURE SENSOR Page 1 of 1

Associated Yanmar
Fault Codes
Associated Thermo
King Alarm Codes
Considerations
How Fault is Set

Condition 1
P0238 Voltage High
P0237 Voltage Low

Log Alarm cleared.
5-159
01 December 2012
610 CHECK ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE SENSOR Page 1 of 1

Associated Yanmar
Fault Codes
King Alarm Codes
Considerations
How Fault is Set

Condition 1
P2229 Voltage High
P2228 Voltage Low

Log Alarm cleared.
5-160
01 December 2012
611 CHECK GLOW PLUG CIRCUIT Page 1 of 1

Associated Yanmar
Fault Codes
Associated Thermo
King Alarm Codes
Considerations
How Fault is Set

Condition 1
P0543 Disconnected or VB short circuit
P0541 Short Circuit to Chassis Ground

Log Alarm cleared.
5-161
01 December 2012
612 CHECK INTAKE THROTTLE CIRCUIT Page 1 of 1

Associated Yanmar
Fault Codes
Associated Thermo
King Alarm Codes
Considerations
How Fault is Set

Condition 1
P0660 Voltage High
P1658 #1 Short Circuit with Power Supply
P1659 #1 Short Circuit with Chassis Ground
P1661 #2 Short Circuit with Power Supply
P1662 #2 Short Circuit with Chassis Ground

Log Alarm cleared.
5-162
01 December 2012
613 CHECK INJECTOR(S) Page 1 of 2

Associated Yanmar
Fault Codes
Associated Thermo
King Alarm Codes
Considerations
How Fault is Set

Condition 1 – Injector #1 Fault
P0204 Disconnected
P1272 Unclassified
P1271 Short Circuit in Drive Circuit
P0271 Short Circuit in Inner Coil

P0202 Disconnected
P1266 Unclassified

P0201 Disconnected
P1263 Unclassified

P0203 Disconnected
P1269 Unclassified
Condition 5 – Multiple Injector Faults

P0203 Disconnected
P1269 Unclassified
5-163
01 December 2012
613 Check Injector(s) Page 2 of 2

Log Alarm cleared.
5-164
01 December 2012
614 CHECK HIGH PRESSURE FUEL PUMP Page 1 of 1

Associated Yanmar
Fault Codes
Associated Thermo
King Alarm Codes
Considerations
How Fault is Set

Condition 1
P0627 Disconnected
P1642 High Side Short Circuit to Chassis Ground
P1641 Low Side Short Circuit to power Supply

Log Alarm cleared.
5-165
01 December 2012
615 RAIL PRESSURE FAULT Page 1 of 1

Associated Yanmar
Fault Codes
Associated Thermo
King Alarm Codes
Considerations
How Fault is Set

Condition 1 – High Rail Pressure
P0093 Pressure Deviation High
P0088 Over-pressure
P00F Relief Valve Open
Condition – Low Rail Pressure

P0094 Pressure Deviation Low

Log Alarm cleared.
5-166
01 December 2012
616 ENGINE OVERSPEED Page 1 of 1

Associated Yanmar
Fault Codes
Associated Thermo
King Alarm Codes
Considerations
How Fault is Set

Condition 1
P0219 Actual Engine Speed > Rated Speed + 300 RPM

Log Alarm cleared.
5-167
01 December 2012
617 INTERNAL ECU FAULT Page 1 of 2

Associated Yanmar
Fault Codes
Associated Thermo
King Alarm Codes
Considerations
How Fault is Set

Condition 1 – Critical Internal Fault
P1607 WDA/ABE Communication Error
P1613 CY146 SPI Communication Error
P1615 CY320 SPI Communication Error
P1616 R2S2 MSC Communication Error
P1608 Sensor Power Supply 1 Voltage High
P1617 Sensor Power Supply 1 Voltage Low
P1609 Sensor Power Supply 1 Voltage Error
P1624 Internal Sense Power Supply Voltage Low
P160D WDA/ABE Shutoff – Low Voltage
P1639 WDA/ABE Shutoff – High Voltage
P1640 WDA/ABE Shutoff – Operational Malfunction
Condition 2 – Other Internal Fault

P160A Actuator Driver Circuit 1 – VB Short
P1625 Actuator Driver Circuit 2 – VB Short
P1626 Actuator Driver Circuit 1 – Ground short
P1633 Actuator Driver Circuit 2 – Ground short
P160B ECU Soft Reset 1
P1636 ECU Soft Reset 2
P1637 ECU Soft Reset 3
Condition 3 – EEPROM Fault

P0601 Deletion Error
P160E Read Error
P160F Write Error
5-168
01 December 2012
617 Internal ECU Fault Page 2 of 2

Log Alarm cleared.
5-169
01 December 2012
618 CHECK EGR SYSTEM Page 1 of 2

Associated Yanmar
Fault Codes
King Alarm Codes
Considerations
How Fault is Set

Condition 1 – Actuator Error
P0404 Over-voltage
P0404 Under-voltage
P1410 High Temperature Thermistor Fault
P1411 Low Temperature Thermistor Fault
P1409 Feedback Fault
P148A Valve Stuck Open Fault
P049D Initializing Fault
U0401 ECM Data Fault
U0401 Out of Target Value Range
P1405 Short Circuit in Motor Coil
P0403 Disconnection in Motor Coil
P0488 Position Sensor Fault
Condition 2 – CAN Communication Error

U010B Timeout Error (Received Message)
U040C Data Length Code Error (Received Message)
5-170
01 December 2012
618 Check EGR System Page 2 of 2

Log Alarm cleared.
5-171
01 December 2012
619 ECU MAIN RELAY FAULT Page 1 of 1

Associated Yanmar
Fault Codes
Associated Thermo
King Alarm Codes
Considerations
How Fault is Set

Condition 1
P068B Relay Contact Stuck
P068A Power-off without Self Hold

Log Alarm cleared.
5-172
01 December 2012
623 TRUCAN MESSAGE TIMEOUT Page 1 of 1

Associated Yanmar
Fault Codes
King Alarm Codes
Considerations
How Fault is Set

Condition 1 – TSC1 Timeout
U0292 TSC1 Timeout
Condition 2 – ECR1 Timeout

U1292 Y-ECR1 Timeout

Log Alarm cleared.
5-173
01 December 2012
624 CHECK EGR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Page 1 of 1

Associated Yanmar
Fault Codes
King Alarm Codes
Considerations
How Fault is Set

Condition 1
P041D Voltage High
P041C Voltage Low

Log Alarm cleared.
5-174
01 December 2012
625 CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMP SENSOR Page 1 of 1

Associated Yanmar
Fault Codes
Associated Thermo
King Alarm Codes
Considerations
How Fault is Set

Condition 1
P040D Voltage High
P040C Voltage Low

Log Alarm cleared.
5-175
01 December 2012
626 CHECK EXHAUST TEMP SENSOR Page 1 of 1

Associated Yanmar
Fault Codes
King Alarm Codes
Considerations
How Fault is Set

Condition 1
P0546 Voltage High
P0545 Voltage Low

Log Alarm cleared.
5-176
01 December 2012
699 UNKNOWN ECU FAULT Page 1 of 1

Fault Type Shutdown or Check Alarm
Associated Yanmar
Fault Codes
King Alarm Codes
Considerations
How Fault is Set

This fault is set by the SR-4 Base Controller one second after the ECU sends an unmapped code:
Condition 1
If the engine is in Running Safe Mode then Fault Code 699 is set as a Check Alarm and Alarm Code 42 is set as
a Log Alarm.
Condition 2
If the engine is in Stopped Safe Mode then Fault Code 699 is set as a Shutdown Alarm.
Condition 3
If the engine is not in Running Safe Mode or Stopped Safe Mode then Fault Code 699 is set as a Check Alarm.

Log Alarm cleared.
5-177
01 December 2012
5-178
01 December 2012
Section 6 – SR-4 Trailer S/T Elect Eng Service Procedure TOC
Section 6 Table of Contents
A01A Base Controller/Interface Board Functional Test

A01B HMI Control Panel Functional Test
A01C HMI Control Panel Self Test
A02A Recording Existing Programmable Feature Settings
A03A Replacement of the Base Controller
A03B Replacement of the HMI Control Panel
A04A Programmable Feature Setup
A05A Clock/Calendar Setup (See Section 4)
A06A Checking Software Revision (See Section 4)
A07A Performing a Base Controller Cold Start
A07B Performing an HMI Control Panel Cold Start
A15A Unit Temperature Sensor Grade Calibration
A17A Full Pretrip Test (See Section 4)
A26A Welding on Units Equipped with Microprocessors
A28A Setting Unit Running Time Hourmeters
A34A Operating Service Test Mode (See Section 4)
A44A Operating Interface Board Test Mode (See Section 4)
A46A Flash Loading Base Controller Software
A46B Flash Loading HMI Control Panel Software
A47B Retrieving and Sending OptiSet Plus Configurations
A48A Phase Detect Module Operation and Diagnostics
A49A CargoWatch Data Logger
A50A ServiceWatch Data Logger
A60A Connecting and Using the Yanmar Diagnostic Tool
~ Continued next page ~
01 December 2012
Section 6 – SR-4 Trailer S/T Elect Eng Service Procedure TOC
01 December 2012
Section 6 – SR-4 Trailer S/T Elect Eng Service Procedure A01A
SR-4 Base Controller Functional Test
Where Used
All SR-4 Single Temperature and Spectrum Multi-Temperature units
Purpose
To confirm proper operation of the Base Controller
Materials Required
Page 1
P41xA01A 01 December 2012
Page 2
Section 6 – SR-4 Trailer S/T Elect Eng Service Procedure A01B
SR-4 HMI Control Panel Functional Test
Where Used
Purpose
To confirm proper operation of the Base Controller
Materials Required
Page 1
P41xA01B 01 December 2012
Page 2
Section 6 – SR-4 Trailer S/T Elect Eng Service Procedure A01C
SR-4 HMI Control Panel Self Test
Where Used
Purpose
To confirm proper operation of the SR-4 Trailer HMI Control Panel using the built in Display Self Test
Materials Required
 None
Operation
The following procedure allows the technician to determine if the SR-4 Trailer HMI Control Panel is operating
properly using the built in HMI Self Tests.
Important Notes
 Replace only one component at a time to be certain the problem component is correctly identified.
Page 1
P41xA01C 01 December 2012
Step Action Result Comments
HMI Control Panel Self Test
1 To access the Maintenance
Menu press the MENU key.
2 The Maintenance Menu is

accessed from the first Main
Menu screen that appears; either
the Language Display or the
Alarms Display. Press and hold
both the unlabelled soft key and
the Exit Key for 5 seconds.
3 The first Maintenance Menu

feature will appear. Press the UP
and DOWN Keys to scroll thru
the Maintenance Menu choices.
When DISPLAY SELF TEST is
shown on the display, press the
SELECT Key to access it.
5 The DISPLAY SELF TEST menu

appears. The available tests are
shown in the table on page 4.
6 Press the UP and DOWN Keys to

scroll thru the Display Self Test
Menu choices.
Page 2

7 When DISPLAY SELF TEST is
shown on the display, press the
SELECT Key to access it.
8 When the individual test is

complete another test can be
selected.
9 When testing is finished press

EXIT to return to the
Maintenance Menu.
Page 3
SR-4 HMI Control Panel Self Tests

 LCD Test – This test allows the technician to select a normal or inverted display. If inverted is chosen the
display is reversed – segments that were turned on are now turned off and segments that were turned off
are now turned on. The technician visually verifies that all display segments are functioning properly.
 Keypad Test – This test prompts the technician to press the four soft keys, the Defrost Key and the Cycle
Sentry Key. Each time the requested key is pressed the next prompt is displayed, allowing the technician
to verify proper operation of these keys.
 Backlight Test – This test allows the technician to turn the backlight on and off to confirm operation.
 Brightness Test – This test allows the technician to select Low, Medium or High backlight intensity.
 Buzzer Test – This test allows the technician to turn the HMI buzzer on and off to verify operation.
 Heater Output – This test allows the technician to turn the HMI display heater on and off.
 Unit On/Off Output Test – This test allows the technician to turn the Unit On/Off output off. This turns
the unit off to confirm that the output can be turned off. To restart the unit, press the On key.
 SPR Digital Output Test – This test allows the technician to turn digital output 2 on and off. This allows
the operation of a device attached to this output to be checked.
 Serial E2 – This test allows the technician to perform an internal HMI memory test. The test takes less
than 1 second and the results are reported as PASS or FAIL.
 Datalog Flash – This test allows the technician to perform an internal HMI CargoWatch data logger
memory test. The test takes less than 1 second and the results are reported as PASS or FAIL.
 RTC Update – This test allows the technician to perform an internal HMI real time clock test. The test
takes less than 3 seconds and the results are reported as PASS or FAIL.
Page 4
Recording Existing Programmable Feature Settings
Where Used
All SR-4 Single Temperature Trailer Units
Purpose
To retrieve and record the sensor grades and programmable feature settings of an SR-4 Base Controller
Materials Required
 A copy of the Setup Sheet at the back of this Service Procedure.
Operation
 The settings of the graded sensors and all programmable features must be retrieved before replacing a
Base Controller or performing a Base Controller Cold Start. These settings will then be duplicated in the
replacement Base Controller or after the Cold Start.
 See Section 3 of this manual for flowcharts and a complete description of programmable features.
 The default settings are shown on the Setup Sheet at the back of this Service Procedure.
 If a sensor grade is not shown on the setup sheet physically check the sensor to determine the grade. It
is very important that sensor grades be set properly.
Page 1
Procedure
1 Turn the unit on.
2 Press the MENU key. The Operator Menu appears. Do not let the unit start. The
Guarded Access Menu cannot
be entered in the unit is running.
3 Press and hold both the EXIT The Maintenance Menu appears.
and unlabelled key for 5
seconds.
4 Press the DOWN key as

required to display the Software
Revision Menu. Then press the
SELECT key to enter the
Software Revision menu.
5 Use the UP and/or DOWN keys Record the software revisions on

to scroll through the HMI Control the Setup Sheet.
Panel and Base Controller
software revisions.
6 When the software revisions

have been recorded press the
EXIT key to return to the
Maintenance Menu.
Page 2

7 Press the UP and DOWN key as The real time clock is located in
required to display the Set Time the HMI Control Panel. The time
and Date Menu. Then press the is supplied to the Base Controller
SELECT key to enter the Set each time the unit is turned on.
Time and Date Menu. If the Base Controller is changed
the clock setting will be supplied
to the Base Controller when the
unit is turned on. If the HMI
Control Panel is changed the
time and date must be checked
and set if necessary.
8 Check the Time to determine the Record the time zone on the Compare local time to unit time
time zone used by the customer. Setup Sheet. to determine time zone.
9 When the time zone has been

recorded press the EXIT key to
return to the Maintenance Menu.
10 Be sure the unit is not running. If the unit is running, scroll back
The unit will not enter the and enter Output Test Mode.
Guarded Access Menu if it is This will cause the unit to shut
running. down. Press the Exit key to
Scroll back to the Set Time and
Date Menu and proceed with the
next step.
Page 3

11 Press and hold both the EXIT The Guarded Access Menu If a Security Code is requested
and unlabelled key for 5 appears. then enter the Security Code or
seconds. [4444] to enter the Guarded
Access Menu.
12 The Programmable Features

Menu will appear. Press the
Programmable Features Menu.
13 Use the UP and/or DOWN keys Record all Programmable

to scroll through all settings in Features settings on the Setup
the Programmable Features Sheet.
Menu.
14 When all Programmable

Features settings have been
return to the Guarded Access
Menu.
15 Use the UP and/or DOWN keys Use the Setup Sheet as a guide.
to scroll to the next Guarded
Access Menu.
16 Use the SELECT key to enter Use the Setup Sheet as a guide.
the next Guarded Access Menu.
Page 4

17 Use the UP and/or DOWN keys Record all Programmable
to scroll through all settings in Features settings on the Setup
the Menu. Sheet.
18 Use the EXIT key to return to the

Guarded Access Menu.
19 Continue to use Steps 15 – 18 The OptiSet Plus features will be

as required to complete the retrieved at the end of this
Setup Sheet. procedure using a separate
OptiSet Plus Procedure. See
Service Procedure A47B
Retrieving and Sending OptiSet
Plus Configurations.
20 When all settings have been

Menu.
21 Press the EXIT key again to

return to the Standard Display.
22 Download the ServiceWatch and This information may be needed

CargoWatch data loggers. for diagnostics.
23 Download the OptiSet Plus

settings using Service Procedure
A47B Setting Up OptiSet Plus
Features using the ThermoServ
Service Tool.
Page 5
Page 6
Single Temperature Setup Sheet - XXxx Software
SOFTWARE REVISION
Function Default Setting Recorded Setting
HMI Control Panel Software Revision XXxx
Base Controller/Interface Board Software Revision XXxx
SET DATE AND TIME
Compare local time to unit time to determine time zone. The real time clock is located in the HMI Control Panel.
The time is supplied to the Base Controller/Interface Board each time the unit is turned on. If the Base
Controller/Interface Board is changed the clock setting will be supplied to the Base Controller/Interface Board
when the unit is turned on. If the HMI Control Panel is changed the time and date must be checked and set if
necessary.
Time Zone As specified by
customer
SECURITY CODE

Security Code as specified by customer None
If an unknown security code is set then use Security Code 4444 to gain access.
IMPORTANT: Not all features shown on the Setup Sheet may appear. This is
dependent on hardware type, software revision and unit settings.
Page 7
PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES

Temperature Units FAHRENHEIT
Pressure Units PSI
Restart Unit After Shutdown ENABLED
Setpoint High Limit 80°F
Setpoint Low Limit -20°F
Fuel Saver II ENABLED
High Speed Pull Down ENABLED
Fresh Frozen Range 24°F
Door Open Forces LOG ONLY
Door Open Timeout (HRS:MIN) OFF
Sleep Mode After Pretrip DISABLED
Rail Option DISABLED
Rail Alternate (If Rail Option = ENABLED) DISABLED
Blocked Air Chute Detect DISABLED
Temperature Differential (If Blocked Air Chute = ENABLED) 9.9
Time to Alarm (If Blocked Air Chute = ENABLED) 0:30
Door Open Override (If Blocked Air Chute = ENABLED) DISABLED
Discharge Pressure Setpoint 415 PSIG
Water Temperature Setpoint 210°F
Limited Alarm Restarts DISABLED
Remote Device DISABLED
COM 1 Default Baud Rate 1200
High Temperature Defrost Disabled
Local Authorization of OS+ Upload (Not Currently Used)
Local Authorization of Flash Load (Not Currently Used)
Page 8
MAIN MENU CONFIGURATION

Add Keypad Lockout to Mode Menu DISABLED
Add Sleep to Mode Menu DISABLED
Add Temperature Units to Mode Menu DISABLED
HOURMETER SETUP– PROGRAM HOURMETER

Total Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours OFF
Total Run Time Reminder # 2 Hours OFF
Controller Power On Hours OFF
Pretrip Reminder Hours OFF
Engine Run Time Reminder # 1 OFF
Engine Run Time Reminder # 2 OFF
Electric Run Time Reminder # 1 OFF
Electric Run Time Reminder # 2 100 HOURS
HOURMETER SETUP– VIEWABLE HOURMETER SETUP

Total Hours DISABLED
Total Run Time Hours ENABLED
Engine Hours ENABLED
Electric Hours ENABLED
Total Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours DISABLED
Total Run Time Reminder # 2 Hours DISABLED
Controller Power On Hours DISABLED
Pretrip Reminder Hours DISABLED
Engine Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours DISABLED
Engine Run Time Reminder # 2 Hours DISABLED
Electric Run Time Reminder # 1 Hours DISABLED
Electric Run Time Reminder # 2 Hours DISABLED
Page 9
HOURMETER SETUP– PROGRAM SERVICE DUE DATE

Engine Run Time Service Due Date DISABLED
SENSOR CALIBRATION

Control Return Air Sensor Grade 5H
Control Discharge Air Sensor Grade 5H
Display Return Air Sensor Grade 5H
Display Discharge Air Sensor Grade 5H
Spare 1 Sensor Grade 5H
CYCLE SENTRY SETUP

Cycle Sentry Amperes Level 5 AMPS
Battery Sentry Voltage Level 12.2 VOLTS
DEFROST SETUP

Defrost Interval In Range with Fresh Setpoint 6 HOURS
Defrost Interval Not In Range with Fresh Setpoint 4 HOURS
Defrost Interval In Range with Frozen Setpoint 6 HOURS
Defrost Interval Not In Range with Frozen Setpoint 4 HOURS
Maximum Defrost Duration 45 MINUTES
Page 10
LANGUAGE SETUP (First language = 65xx, second language 66xx)

Default Language ENGLISH
Enable Language English DISABLED
Enable Language Spanish DISABLED
Enable Language French DISABLED
Enable Language German DISABLED
Enable Language Italian DISABLED
Enable Language Dutch DISABLED
Enable Language Portuguese DISABLED
Enable Language Greek DISABLED
Enable Language Turkish DISABLED
Enable Language Hebrew DISABLED
Enable Language Arabic DISABLED
ACCESS CODE SETUP

Enter Access Code NO CODE
OPTISET PLUS
OptiSet Plus features are retrieved using the ThermoServ Service Tool.
Page 11
SENSOR CONFIGURATION (CargoWatch)
Log Interval is set for all sensors.

Logging Interval 15 minutes
Up to 6 sensors may be configured

Default 1 2 3 4 5 6
Function
Sensor Logging 1-2 On, 3-6 Off
Sensor Name Log Sensor X
Out of Range Checking OFF
Low Limit -10.8°
High Limit 10.8°
Italian Logging OFF
Sensor Averaging OFF
Up to 4 digital inputs may be configured.

Default 1 2 3 4
Function
Door Open Logging 1On, 2-4 Off
Digital Input #X Name Digital Input #X
These features allow extended data logging when the unit is turned off.
Default Setting Recorded Setting
Function
Countdown OFF
Conservative OFF
If set Enabled, this feature sends a Start of Trip marker to the CargoWatch and ServiceWatch Data Loggers any
time the setpoint is changed.
Default Setting Recorded Setting
Function
SOT on Setpoint DISABLED
Page 12
UNIT CONFIGURATION

Unit Type Trailer
Engine Type YANMAR 2.1
Compressor Type RECIP
ETV Configured YES
Electric Standby Equipped (Model 50) YES
Electric Heat Option (Model 50) YES
Electric Motor Type (14 HP Type, 24 HP Type) (Model 50) NO
Diesel to Electric Auto Switch Enabled (Model 50) NO
Electric to Diesel Auto Switch Enabled (Model 50) NO
Unit Model As built
High Capacity Unit NO
High Capacity Fresh (If High Capacity = YES) NO
Defrost Motor Equipped NO
Fuel Sensor Type NONE
Rear Remote Control NONE
Rear Remote Control Action (If Rear Remote installed) Stand By
Pretrip/Sleep Switch Options DISABLED
rd
3 Party Device Control NONE
Low Fuel Shutdown DISABLED
Fresh Air Exchange DISABLED
Page 13
Page 14
Replacement of the SR-4 Base Controller
Where Used
All SR-4 Single Temperature units
Purpose
To replace the Base Controller
Materials Required
 Cable ties
Operation
The Base Controller is removed from the control box as an assembly.
Important Notes
 It is very important that the correct Base Controller be used for replacement. Consult the material in
Section 7 of this manual to determine the required Base Controller for the application.
 It is very important that the correct Base Controller software be used. Base Controllers are supplied from
Service Parts with the most recent software at the time of manufacture. The anti-static shipping bags are
also marked with pertinent information. Consult the material in Section 7 of this manual to determine the
required Base Controller software for the application. Check the available software on SharePoint
InfoCentral for the current released software version.
 Some applications may require the 60 amp fuse be removed from the old Base Controller and installed in
the replacement Base Controller.
 Be sure the harnesses are reconnected properly and do not place excessive strain on the connectors.
Secure the harnesses with cable ties as required.
Page 1
1 Log the existing Base Controller This information will be used
settings using Service Procedure to set up the replacement
A02A. Base Controller.
2 Turn the unit off.
3 Disconnect standby power, if

connected.
4 Disconnect the unit battery. Some circuits are directly

connected to the unit battery.
5 Disconnect all harness
connectors from the Base
Controller assembly.
6 Remove the screws securing the

Base Controller to the control
box and remove the Base
Controller assembly from the
control box.
7 Install the new Base Controller

assembly in the control box.
Page 2

8 Reconnect all harness Apply Super Lube as needed.
connectors to the Base Be sure all connectors are
Controller and Interface Board. securely mated and secure
the harnesses with cable ties
as required.
9 Reconnect the unit battery.
10 Reconnect the standby power if

needed.
11 Turn the unit on. The real time clock settings

will be loaded from the HMI
Control Panel when the unit is
turned on.
12 Clear any alarm codes as shown

in Section 4.
13 Set up all programmable

features using Service
Procedure A04A.
14 Run a Pretrip Test as shown in

Section 4 to verify proper unit
operation.
Page 3
Page 4
Section 6 – SR-4 and SR-4 M/T Service Procedure A03B
Replacement of the Trailer HMI Control Panel
Where Used
All SR-4 Trailer Single Temperature units
Purpose
To replace the Trailer HMI Control Panel
Materials Required
 Cable ties
Operation
The Trailer HMI Control Panel is removed from the control box door as an assembly.
Important Notes
 It is very important that the correct HMI Control Panel software be used. HMI Control Panels are supplied
from Service Parts with the most recent software at the time of manufacture. The anti-static shipping
bags are also marked with pertinent information. Consult the material in Section 7 of this manual to
determine the required HMI Control Panel software for the application. Check the available software on
SharePoint InfoCentral for the current released software version.
 Be sure the harnesses are reconnected properly and do not place excessive strain on the connectors.
Secure the harnesses with cable ties as required.
Page 1

1 Turn the unit off.
2 Disconnect standby power, if

connected.
3 Disconnect the unit battery.
4 Disconnect the harness

connector from the HMI Control
Panel.
5 Remove the four screws

securing the HMI Control Panel
to the control box and remove
the HMI Control Panel from the
control box.
6 Install the new HMI Control

Panel in the control box.
7 Re-connect the harness Be sure all connectors are

connector to the HMI Control securely mated and secure
Panel. Apply Super Lube as the harnesses with cable ties
required as required.
Page 2


8 Reconnect the unit battery.
9 Reconnect the standby power if

needed.
10 Turn the unit on. The programmable feature

settings will be loaded from
the Base Controller when the
unit is turned on.
11 Clear any alarm codes as shown

in Section 4.
12 Check the setting of the real time The clock may be set from
clock as shown in Section 4 and the Maintenance Menu or
correct if necessary. with the ThermoServ™
Service Tool.
13 Run a Full Pretrip Test as shown

in Section 4 to verify proper unit
operation.
Page 3

Page 4

Programmable Feature Setup
Where Used
All SR-4 Trailer units
Purpose
To set the sensor grades and programmable features of an SR-4 Base Controller to customer specifications
Materials Required
 A completed copy of the Setup Sheet at the back of Service Procedure A02A Recording Existing
Programmable Feature Settings.
Operation
 The settings of the graded sensors and all programmable features must be programmed after replacing a
Base Controller or performing a Base Controller Cold Start.
 See Section 3 of this manual for flowcharts and a complete description of programmable features.
 The default settings are shown on the appropriate Setup Sheet at the back of Service Procedure A02A
Recording Existing Base Controller Settings.
 If a sensor grade is not shown on the setup sheet visually check the sensor to determine the grade. It is
very important that sensor grades be set properly.
Page 1
Procedure
1 Turn the unit on.
2 Press the MENU key. The Operator Menu appears.
seconds.
4 Press the NEXT key as required

to display the Software Revision
Menu.
5 Use the UP and/or DOWN keys Verify the Software revisions are
to scroll through the HMI Control as desired.
Panel and Base Controller
software revisions.
6 When the software revisions

have been verified press the
EXIT key to return to the
Maintenance Menu.
Page 2

8 Press the NEXT key as required The real time clock is located in
to display the Set Time and Date the HMI Control Panel. The time
Menu. Then press the SELECT is supplied to the Base Controller
key to enter the Set Time and each time the unit is turned on.
Date Menu. If the Base Controller is changed
the clock setting will be supplied
to the Base Controller when the
unit is turned on. If the HMI
Control Panel is changed the
time and date must be checked
and set if necessary.
9 Verify that the Time is set to the

time zone used by the customer
as shown on the setup sheet.
10 When the time zone has been

verified press the EXIT key to
11 Be sure the unit is not running. If the unit is running, scroll back
The unit will not enter the and enter Output Test Mode.
Guarded Access Menu if it is This will cause the unit to shut
running. down. Press the Exit key to
Scroll back to the Set Time and
Date Menu and proceed with the
next step.
Page 3

12 Press and hold both the EXIT The Guarded Access Menu If a Security Code is requested
and unlabelled key for 5 appears. then enter the Security Code or
seconds. [4444] to enter the Guarded
Access Menu.
13 The Programmable Features

Menu will appear. Press the
Programmable Features Menu.
14 Use the UP and/or DOWN keys Set all Programmable Features

to scroll through all the features settings to those shown on the
in the Programmable Features Setup Sheet.
Menu.
15 When all Programmable

Features have been set press
the EXIT key to return to the
16 Use the UP and/or DOWN keys Use the Setup Sheet as a guide.
to scroll to the next Guarded
Access Menu.
17 Use the SELECT key to enter Use the Setup Sheet as a guide.
the next Guarded Access Menu.
18 Use the UP and/or DOWN keys Set all menu settings to those
to scroll through all settings in shown on the Setup Sheet.
the Menu.
Page 4

19 Use the EXIT key to return to the
20 Continue to use Steps 16 – 19 The OptiSet features are set up

as required to complete the using the ThermoServ™ Service
Setup Sheet. Tool. See Service Procedure
A47B Retrieving and Sending
OptiSet Plus Configurations.
21 When all settings have been

Menu.
22 Press the EXIT key again to

return to the Standard Display.
23 Set up the OptiSet features using

Service Procedure A47B
Retrieving and Sending OptiSet
Plus Configurations.
24 Run a Pretrip Test as shown in

Section 4 to verify proper unit
operation.
Page 5
Page 6
Performing a Base Controller Cold Restart
Where Used
All SR-4 Single Temperature Trailer units
Purpose
To perform a Cold Restart on the Base Controller
Materials Required
 ThermoServ Service Tool
Page 1
Page 2
Performing an HMI Control Panel Cold Restart
Where Used
All SR-4 Single Temperature Trailer units
Purpose
To perform a Cold Restart on the HMI Control Panel
Materials Required
 ThermoServ Service Tool
Page 1
Page 2
Unit Temperature Sensor Grade Calibration
Where Used
Purpose
To calibrate the sensor grades of graded sensors
Materials Required
 None
Operation
The following sensors are graded sensors and must be properly calibrated.
 Single Temperature Units The control and display return air temperature sensors and the control and
display discharge air temperature sensors are graded sensors. The Spare 1 temperature sensor is also a
graded sensor.
Any time these sensors are replaced or a Cold Start is performed the sensor grade must be correctly entered to
insure optimum performance of the unit. The sensor grade is stamped on the barrel of each sensor. Failure to
properly calibrate sensors may result in nuisance alarm codes.
Important Notes
 Always record the marked sensor grades of any replacement return, discharge or spare temperature
sensors. The grade is required to complete the sensor calibration procedure.
 If any return air temperature or discharge air temperature sensor grade is set to 5H then Alarm Code 92
Sensor Grades Not Set will be set. Calibrating the sensor grades automatically clears alarm Code 92.
Note that Alarm Code 92 does not apply to spare sensors. However, when used, spare sensors should
still be calibrated to achieve maximum accuracy.
Page 1
1 Verify and record the sensor Note that Alarm Code 92
grades of all return air, discharge does not apply to spare
air and spare sensors (if used) sensors. However, when
by physically checking the used, spare sensors should
sensor. still be calibrated to achieve
maximum accuracy.
2 Turn the unit on.
3 Press the MENU key. The Main Menu appears.
seconds.
5 Press the DOWN key as The Set Time and Date Menu
required to display the Set Time appears.
and Date Menu.
6 Press and hold both the EXIT The Guarded Access Menu
and unlabelled key for 5 appears.
seconds.
7 Press the DOWN key as The Sensor Calibration Menu

required to display the Sensor appears.
Calibration Menu.
Page 2

8 When the Sensor Calibration The first graded sensor and the
Menu is shown press the current grade appear.
SELECT key to access the
Sensor Calibration Menu.
9 If necessary, use the UP and/or These keys scroll thru all graded Be sure the correct sensor is
DOWN keys to select the sensor sensors installed on the unit. selected.
to be calibrated.
10 When the sensor to be calibrated The Sensor Change menu for

is shown on the display, press the selected sensor will appear.
the SELECT key.
11 Use the “+” and “-“ keys to

change the sensor grade to
match the grade stamped on the
sensor.
12 When the correct grade is shown

press the YES key to confirm the
choice.
13 If necessary, repeat steps 9 – 12

to change any other sensor
grades that are not correct.
14 Press Exit to leave the Sensor

Calibration Menu.
Page 3

15 If graded sensor alarms exist The Alarms Menu will appear.
(Alarm Codes 03 and/or 04), use
the BACK key to return to the
Alarms Menu in Guarded
Access.
16 Press the SELECT key to enter

the Alarms Menu.
17 Press the CLEAR key to clear

the sensor alarms.
18 When finished, press the EXIT

key several times or turn the unit
off to exit the Sensor Calibration
Menu.
Page 4
Welding on Units Equipped with SR-4 Base Controllers
Where Used
Purpose
To prevent damage to the Base Controller, Engine Control Unit (ECU), Battery Charger and other components
during welding operations
Materials Required
 None
Operation
Electric welding generates high amperage currents that can damage electrical and electronic components. In
order to minimize the possibility of damage the following procedures should be followed.
Page 1
Before Welding
1. Turn the unit off.
2. Disconnect standby power, if

connected.
3. Remove the both battery cables.
4. Connect the welder ground cable

as close as possible to the area
where the welding is to be
performed. Move the welder
ground cable as required.
After Welding
1. Reconnect the battery cable.
2. Reconnect the standby power if

needed.
3. Perform a Pretrip Test as shown

in Section 4 to confirm operation.
Page 2
Setting Unit Running Time Hourmeters
Where Used
Purpose
This procedure should be followed to set the fixed running time hourmeters Total Hours, Total Run Time Hours,
Engine Hours, Electric Run Time Hours and Zone Run Hours after replacing a Base Controller with a new
replacement Base Controller. If all hourmeters have less than 100 hours accumulated, time can be added to
them as shown in this procedure. If hourmeter time exceeds 100 hours, the hourmeter time can no longer be
changed.
Materials Required
 None
IMPORTANT: Time can only be added if all hourmeters have less than 100 hours accumulated. If hourmeter
time exceeds 100 hours, the hourmeter time can no longer be changed.
IMPORTANT: If time in excess of 100 hours has been entered the hourmeters can no longer be changed.
Exercise care when changing these hourmeter settings. Be sure the correct number of hours are selected for
each hourmeter.
IMPORTANT: Do not allow the 3 minute Guarded Access keypad timeout to occur during this procedure. If the
keypad times out before all desired changes are made and a hourmeter exceeds 100 hours, the hourmeters can
no longer be changed.
IMPORTANT: Do not exit hourmeter setup until all hourmeters have been set as required. Once the hourmeter
setup has been exited this menu is locked out and the hourmeters can no longer be changed.
Page 1
Procedure
1 Determine the number of hours
to be set on each hourmeter. If
the unit is a Model 50 unit, be
sure the total of Engine Hours
and Electric Run Time Hours is
equal to the number of hours to
be set as Total Run Time Hours.
2 Turn the unit on.
3 Press the MENU key. The Main Menu appears. Press the MENU key.
seconds.
5 Press the NEXT key as required

to display the Set Time and Date
Menu.
6 Press and hold both the EXIT The Guarded Access Menu
and unlabelled key for 5 appears.
seconds. If a Security Code is
requested enter the Security
Code or [4444] to enter the
Page 2

7 Press the DOWN key to display The Hourmeter Setup Menu
the Hourmeter Setup Menu. appears.
8 Press the SELECT key to

choose the Hourmeter Setup
Menu.
9 Press the SELECT key again to

choose the Program Hourmeter
Menu.
10 Press the DOWN key to scroll to

the last item in the Program
Hourmeter Menu. The NEXT
key will disappear.
11 Press and hold both the EXIT This will add the non- IMPORTANT: Do not exit the
and unlabelled key for 5 programmable hourmeters to the hourmeter setup or allow the
seconds. menu only if the number of hours Guarded Access keypad
in these hourmeters are less timeout to occur during this
than 100 hours. procedure. If the keypad
times out and an hourmeter
exceeds 100 hours, the
hourmeters will be locked and
can no longer be changed.
Page 3

12 Use the UP and/or DOWN keys
to show the desired hourmeter.
When the desired hourmeter is
shown press the SELECT key to
chose it.
13 Change the value of the

hourmeter by pressing the + or -
keys.
14 When the correct number of IMPORTANT: If time in

hours is shown press the YES excess of 100 hours has
key to accept the change. been entered the hourmeters
Exercise care when changing
hourmeter settings.
15 Repeat Steps 12-14 as

necessary to change the
remaining hourmeters.
16 When all hourmeters are set IMPORTANT: If time in

press the EXIT key to return to excess of 100 hours has
the Program Hourmeter menu. been entered the hourmeters
Be sure all settings are
correct before leaving this
menu.
Page 4
Flash Loading SR-4 Base Controller Software
Where Used
Purpose
To update software for the Thermo King SR-4 Base Controller using a computer and ThermoServ™ Service Tool
Flash Loading using USB Flash Drive

SR-4 equipped units can also flash load HMI Control Panel and SR-4 Base Controller software using a
ThermoServ Service Tool configured USB Flash Drive. See USB Flash Drive in Section 4 of this manual for
details.
Materials Required
Page 1
Page 2
Flash Loading SR-3 HMI Control Panel Software
Where Used
Purpose
To update software for the Thermo King SR-4 HMI Control Panel using a computer and ThermoServ™ Service
Tool
Flash Loading using USB Flash Drive

ThermoServ Service Tool configured USB Flash Drive. See USB Flash Drive in Section 4 of this manual for
details.
Materials Required
Page 1
Page 2
Retrieving and Sending OptiSet Plus Configurations
Where Used
All SR-4 units
Purpose
To retrieve and send OptiSet Plus configurations to and from the Thermo King SR-4 Base Controller using a PC
computer and ThermoServ™ Service Tool.
Materials Required
Page 1
Page 2
Phase Detect Module Operation and Diagnostics
Where Used
All SR-4 Single Temperature units equipped with electric standby
Purpose
To understand phase detect module operation and diagnostic procedures
Description
The phase detect module is designed to monitor 3 phase voltages from 160 volts AC thru 510 volts AC.
Brown
THERMO KING
9131C98G06
Blue L1
L2 0202
L3
Black
CAUTION: Units featuring optional Electric Standby utilize 460, 400 or 230 volt 3 phase AC electrical
power any time the unit is operating in Electric Mode. This voltage potential is also present any time the
unit is connected to a source of external standby power. Extreme care must be used when working on
the unit, as these voltages are capable of causing serious injury or death.
Page 1
Operation
The brown, blue and black wires are used to sample the power at L1, L2 and L3 respectively. Operating power
from 12 to 24 VDC is supplied to the module via the 8 wire and CH wire.
When the voltage sensed rises above 180 volts AC and all three phases are present the module ER wire will
output 12-24 VDC after the conditions exist for 2 to 4 seconds. This signal informs the base controller that electric
standby operation is possible. If the voltage drops below 160 volts AC or a phase is lost, the output is turned off
after the condition exists for 8 to 10 seconds. The module continues to monitor the power and will again output
12-24 VDC within 2 to 4 seconds after the voltage rises above 180 volts AC and all three phases are present.
If phase rotation is L1, L2, L3 the 7EB wire will supply 12 to 24 VDC to energize the appropriate phase rotation
contactor. If phase rotation is L1, L3, L2 the 7EC wire will supply a chassis ground to energize the appropriate
phase rotation contactor. The 7EB and 7EC wires are interlocked to prevent both phase contactors from being
energized at once.
Connections
Connections to the module are shown in the tables below.
Power Connections
Input Description
8F Supplies nominal 12-24 volt DC power to the phase detect module.
CH Chassis ground
Inputs
Input Description
L1 This brown wire supplies standby power L1 to the phase detect module.
L2 This blue wire supplies standby power L2 to the phase detect module.
L3 This black wire supplies standby power L3 to the phase detect module.
Page 2
Outputs
Output Description
7EH With 12-24 VDC is supplied, then outputs 7EB and 7EC will be at 12-24 VDC.
7EB If phase rotation is L1, L2, L3 then this wire will provide 12-24 VDC to energize the appropriate phase
rotation contactor. The 7EC wire is interlocked to prevent both phase contactors from being
energized at once.
7EC If phase rotation is L1, L3, L2 then this wire will provide 12-24 VDC to energize the appropriate phase
rotation contactor. The 7EB wire is interlocked to prevent both phase contactors from being
energized at once.
ER This wire will output 12-24 VDC 2 to 4 seconds after the voltage rises above 180 volts AC and all
three phases are present. If the voltage drops below 160 volts AC or a phase is lost and the
condition remains for 8 to 10 seconds, the output is turned off. The module continues to monitor and
will again output 12-24 VDC 2 to 4 seconds after the power returns to normal (voltage rises above
180 volts AC and all three phases are present).
Connector Pinout
1 8F Power to Module
2 CH Chassis ground
3 ER Power OK
4 7EH Switches the 7EC and 7EB from grounding to power logic
5 7EB Phase A-B-C
6 7EC Phase A-C-B
7 Unused
8 Unused
9 Unused
Page 3
Removal and Replacement
1. Turn the unit off.

2. Disconnect the unit battery.
3. Disconnect the standby power.
4. Disconnect the three wires from the phase detect module at the motor contactor.
5. Unplug the phase detect module harness.
6. Remove the old phase detect module.
7. Install the new phase detect module.
8. Connect the new phase detect module wires to the upper contactor as follows:
9. Connect the brown wire to L1 on the contactor.
10. Connect the blue wire to L2 on the contactor.
11. Connect the black wire to L3 on the contactor.
12. Use crimp-on terminals as required.
13. Connect the plug on the short harness from the phase detect module.
14. Install the high voltage cover.
15. Secure wires and wire harnesses as required using cable ties.
16. Connect the unit battery.
17. Connect standby power.
18. Perform a Pretrip Test to verify proper operation.
Page 4
Diagnostics

1. Plug the standby power cord into
a known good standby power
supply and turn the unit on.
2. Using a Fluke Meter, measure The standby voltage between

the standby voltage between phases should be between 200 -
phases L1 - L2, L2 - L3 and L3 - 500 VAC. If not, repair as
L1 at the input to the terminals necessary to supply the needed
where the Brown, Blue and Black voltage to the unit.
wires are connected.
3. Check the 8F and CH circuits to If this power is not present, check

the phase detect module. 12-24 the 8 circuit from the On/Off
VDC must be present from 8F to switch.
CH.
4. If correct power is present in the If power is not present replace Removal and replacement of the
test above then the ER circuit on the phase detect module. phase detect module is detailed
the interface board should have on a previous page.
12-24 VDC present.
Page 5

5. If LED 6 on the interface board is If power is not present check the
on then the 7EH circuit should Diesel/Electric Relay circuit on
have 12-24 VDC present. the interface board.
6. If the unit is calling for operation If neither contactor is energized Removal and replacement of the
(LED 6 is on) one of the phase check for 12-24 VDC. If voltage is phase detect module is detailed
select contactors should be not present replace the phase on a previous page.
energized. detect module.
Page 6
CargoWatch Data Logger
Where Used
All SR-4 Single Temperature equipped with optional CargoWatch sensors
Purpose
To understand, use and diagnose the CargoWatch Data Logger
Description
Page 1
Page 2
ServiceWatch Data Logger
Where Used
Purpose
To understand and use the ServiceWatch Data Logger
Description
Page 1
Page 2
Section 6 – SR-4 Trailer S/T Elec Eng Service Procedure A60A
Connecting and Using the Yanmar Engine Diagnostic Tool
Where Used
All SR-4 Unit with Yanmar Electronic Control Engines
Purpose
To connect and use the Yanmar Diagnostic Tool
Materials Required
 Yanmar Diagnostic Tool
 PC Computer with current Yanmar SmartAssist Direct Diagnostic Software
Operation
The Yanmar Diagnostic Tool is used to connect the PC Computer USB Port to the Yanmar Engine Control Unit
data connector located in the Unit Control Box. Yanmar SmartAssist Direct (YSAD) Software installed on the PC
Computer is used to communicate with the Yanmar Engine Control Unit (ECU). This allows ECU information to
be retrieved, Yanmar Fault Codes to be read, operational data to be examined and updated and other diagnostic
functions to be performed.
Diagnostic Process Using YSAD
Page 1
1 The unit battery must be
connected and the
Microprocessor Power Switch
must be turned on.
2 Turn the unit on and enter the

Maintenance Menu.
3 In the Maintenance Menu, scroll Connect Engine Service Tool

to and select Connect Engine is the last item in the
Service Tool. Maintenance Menu
Yanmar Engine Diagnostic Tool
Page 2

4 Open the Control Box and locate
the Yanmar Diagnostic
Connector.
5 Connect the Yanmar Diagnostic

Tool to the Yanmar Diagnostic
Connector in the unit Control Box
using the supplied cable.
6 Connect the Yanmar Diagnostic This cable is a standard USB

Tool to the PC Computer using cable. Excessive cable
the supplied cable. length of the USB cable may
affect operation.
7 Start the Yanmar SmartAssist To maintain current status, the This verifies the YSAD
Direct (YSAD) software. Yanmar SmartAssist Direct software and extends the
(YSAD) software was must be license for another 90 days.
started every 90 days while the
PC Computer is connected to the
internet.
8 Complete the log-in information
as shown below.
Page 3

9 Select Industrial Engine as Click the left mouse button to
shown below. select.
Page 4

10 Select ECU Access as shown Click the left mouse button to
below. select.
Page 5

11 Select Diagnostics (Execution) Click the left mouse button to
as shown below. select.
Page 6

12 Select Summary Information as Click the left mouse button to
shown below. select.
Page 7

13 Select Diagnostic Codes – Active Click the left mouse button to Any Active Fault Codes will
DTC as shown below. select. be shown.
Page 8

13 Select Diagnostic Codes – Click the left mouse button to Any Logged Fault Codes will
Logged DTC as shown below. select. be added to the list.
Page 9

15 To clear all Fault Codes left click
the All Clear button.
For additional information see the Yanmar Diagnostic Documentation.
Page 10
Section 7 – SR-4 Trailer S/T Electronic Engine
Service Information Table of Contents
Table of Contents Section 7
I01A SR-4 Hardware Features

I02A SR-4 Software Features
01 December 2012
Section 7 – SR-4 Trailer S/T Electronic Engine
Service Information Table of Contents
01 December 2012
Section 7 – SR-4 Trailer S/T Elect Eng Hardware Features I01A
SR-4 Hardware Features
SR-4 Base Controllers ....................................................................................................................................... 3

SR-4 Base Controller Hardware Versions ..................................................................................................... 3
Service Parts Numbers for SR-4 Base Controllers ....................................................................................... 3
SR-4 Base Controller Label Identification ..................................................................................................... 3
SR-4 Base Controller Software Requirements .............................................................................................. 3
SR-4 Base Controller Compatibility............................................................................................................... 3
SR-4 Base Controller Board Layout – Mounting Base not shown ............................................................... 4
SR-4 HMI Control Panels ................................................................................................................................... 5

SR-4 HMI Control Panel Hardware Versions ................................................................................................. 5
Service Parts Numbers for SR-4 HMI Control Panels ................................................................................... 5
SR-4 HMI Control Panel Label Identification ................................................................................................. 5
SR-4 HMI Control Panel Software Requirements .......................................................................................... 5
SR-4 Base Controller Compatibility............................................................................................................... 6
SR-4 HMI Control Panel.................................................................................................................................. 6
Base Controller/HMI Control Panel Diagnostic Tool ........................................................................................ 7
Yanmar Diagnostic Tool .................................................................................................................................... 9
Page 1
01 December 2012
Page 2
01 December 2012
SR-4 BASE CONTROLLERS
SR-4 Base Controller Hardware Versions

There is currently one version of the SR-4 Base Controller/Interface Board as shown in the Table below.
Service Parts Numbers for SR-4 Base Controllers

Dates Base Controller Type Service
Description Designator Part #
Pre-Production Engineering Part Number xxAxxxxx N/A XX-XXXX
Release Revision H
SR-4 Base Controller Label Identification

The label is located on the edge of the Base Controller Mounting Base. The label shows board engineering part
number, Service Parts number, and installed software rev. The Base Controller Serial Number for SR-4
applications ends in “0T4” as shown below.
SR-4 Designator
BASE P/N: 1H64689001G02 S/N: P000344512320T4

S.P. P/N: 45-2448
REV. PRTO Bar Code Here
ICON-A000-BA00
SR-4 Base Controller Software Requirements

Single temperature applications with SR-4 Base Controllers must use SR-4 Base Controller Software Revisions
XXxx.
SR-4 Base Controller Compatibility

There is no compatible Base Controller as of this date.
Page 3
01 December 2012
SR-4 Base Controller Board Layout – Mounting Base not shown
J32
1
J34
1
J33
1
J12
1
J13
1
J9
1
J10
1 2AH
Watlow RoHS
J21 J27
12
35
23
F12 - 5A
F1 - 5A
F8 - 5A
F7 - 2A
2935 Rev H
J98
F5 – 60A
1
J11
J29
K11
13
24
1
J101 LED09
J1 STATUS
LED48
J102
H
12
35
23
F13 - 2A
CH
J8
2
A
J6
F15 - 2A
S/N: P000344512320T4
1
13
24
Here
1
F2 - 15A
J3 J15
Code
J5 F6 - 15A 2
Bar
LED47
LED50
F25 – 7.5A F22 - 10A

F3 - 40A
BASE P/N: 1H64689001G02
LED04
LED35
LED01
LED36
LED37
F20 - 2A
LED38
LED06
F10 - 15A
K6
LED07
LED49
LED46
LED27
LED29
LED30
LED32
S.P. P/N: 45-2448
ICON-A000-BA00
LED05
REV. PRTO
LED43 K8 K1
LED16
LED17
LED14
LED44
LED11
LED12
LED13
LED10
LED39
LED40
LED41
LED42
F4
LED24
LED25
LED26
K9
LED23 K7 K10
K2
1 12
LED
J4 13 23 02 8D 8D FA DMP 8S
K3 7D 8DP LED08
24 35
Page 4
01 December 2012
SR-4 HMI CONTROL PANELS
SR-4 HMI Control Panel Hardware Versions

There is currently one version of the SR-4 HMI Control Panel as shown in the Table below. The SR-4 Control
System uses a redesigned HMI Control Panel. Key use and general operation is generally the same as SR-2 and
SR-3 HMI Control Panels.
Service Parts Numbers for SR-4 HMI Control Panels

Dates HMI Control Panel Type Service
Description Designator Part #
Pre-Production Engineering Part Number xxAxxxxx N/A XX-XXXX
Release Revision H
SR-4 HMI Control Panel Label Identification

The label is located on the back of the HMI Control Panel. The label shows board engineering part number,
Service Parts number, and installed software rev. The HMI Control Panel Serial Number for SR-4 applications
ends in “0T4” as shown below.
SR-4 Designator
BASE P/N: 1H64617001
S.P. P/N: 45-2449
REV. 9A24
S/N: H10712212370T4
Bar Code Here
X13651591010 DV
SR-4 HMI Control Panel Software Requirements

Single temperature applications with SR-4 Base Controllers must use SR-4 HMI Control Panel Software
Revisions XXxx.
Page 5
01 December 2012
SR-4 Base Controller Compatibility

There is no compatible Base Controller as of this date.

The SR-4 HMI Control Panel is identified by Service Part Number as shown on the label. It can be physically
identified by appearance and the Smart Reefer 4 logo on the front panel just below the Soft Keys as shown
below.
THERMO KING
ON
°F
OFF
SET
POINT
35 GAUGES
.8
SENSORS
35
MENU
SR4
Smart Reefer 4
Page 6
01 December 2012
BASE CONTROLLER/HMI CONTROL PANEL DIAGNOSTIC TOOL
Page 7
01 December 2012
Page 8
01 December 2012
YANMAR DIAGNOSTIC TOOL

The Yanmar Smart Assist Direct (YSAD) Diagnostic Tool is changing. Need to get current details.
Page 9
01 December 2012
Page 10
01 December 2012
Section 7 – SR-4 Trailer S/T Elect Eng Software Features I02A
SR-4 Software Features
SR-4 Base Controller/Interface Board Software ............................................................................................... 3

SR-4 Precedent Trailer Single Temperature Base Controller Software Revisions ...................................... 3
SR-4 Base Controller Software Revision XXxx ............................................................................................. 3
Availability of SR-4 Base Controller Single Temp Software ......................................................................... 4
Flash Loading SR-4 Software using a PC Computer .................................................................................... 5
Flash Loading SR-4 Software using a ThermoServ™ Configured USB Flash Drive ................................... 5
SR-4 HMI Control Panel Software ..................................................................................................................... 7

SR-4 Precedent Trailer Single Temperature HMI Control Panel Software Revisions .................................. 7
SR-4 HMI Control Panel Software Revision XXxx ......................................................................................... 7
Availability of SR-4 HMI Control Panel Single Temp Software ..................................................................... 8
Flash Loading SR-4 Software using a PC Computer .................................................................................... 9
Flash Loading SR-4 Software using a ThermoServ™ Configured USB Flash Drive ................................... 9
SR-4 Diagnostic Tool Software ....................................................................................................................... 11
SR-4 ThermoServ™ Service Tool Software .................................................................................................... 11
Yanmar Smart Assist Direct™ Service Tool Software ................................................................................... 11
Page 1
01 December 2012
Page 2
01 December 2012
SR-4 BASE CONTROLLER/INTERFACE BOARD SOFTWARE
SR-4 Precedent Trailer Single Temperature Base Controller Software Revisions

The Base Controller software family for single temperature applications is 80xx. The current single temperature
SR-4 Base Controller software is available on SharePoint InfoCentral.
IMPORTANT: When necessary to flash load new software to a Base Controller use the most recent revision
available.
IMPORTANT: Unless otherwise noted, software upgrades made to units with previous software revisions are not
covered by a warranty labor allowance.
SR-4 Base Controller Software Revision XXxx

Dates Features Interchange with:
Pre-Production  November 2012 Production release None
Precedent S-600
S/T Units
Page 3
01 December 2012
Availability of SR-4 Base Controller Single Temp Software
When SR-4 Base Controller and/or HMI Control Panel flash load files are downloaded from the Thermo King
iService web site, the flash load files are downloaded as a *.ZIP file. When flash load files for SR-4 applications
are unzipped, there will now be three flash load files instead of the usual two.
 The traditional *.mXX and *.cXX files will be unzipped. These two files are for use when flash loading an
SR-4 Unit in the traditional manner using a USB Data Cable to connect the SR-4 Unit to a PC Computer
equipped with ThermoServ™ Service Tool software.
NOTE: Both the *.mXX and *.cXX files must be present in order to perform a flash load using a USB
Data Cable, even though only one of them is shown by ThermoServ™ Service Tool.
 A *.FLA file will also be unzipped. This file is for use when flash loading a unit using a ThermoServ™
Service Tool configured USB Flash Drive.
The Flashload Directory on the configured USB Flash Drive contains sub-directories for HMI and
SR4SINGLE TEMP flash load *.FLA files. The *.FLA file must be placed in the correct directory on the
flash drive using either the ThermoServ™ Service Tool Upload > Manage Flashload Files feature or
Windows Explorer.
Page 4
01 December 2012
Revision XXxx Trailer Single Temperature SR-4 Base Controller Software is available on the Thermo King TSA
Info Central web site. Go to:
http://www.thermoking.com/tk/index.asp
Choose TSA Info Central and select Home > Software and Downloads > Microprocessors > Trailer
Microprocessor Updates.
 The file name for the *.ZIP file containing both the traditional .mXX and .cXX files and the *.FLA file is
Micro Code XXxx Update for the SR-4 Single Temp Base Controller.zip. Double click this file to install the
software.
Flash Loading SR-4 Software using a PC Computer

For additional information on flash loading Base Controller software using a PC computer, ThermoServ™ Service
Tool and a USB cable, see the ThermoServ™ Service Tool Operation Manual.
Flash Loading SR-4 Software using a ThermoServ™ Configured USB Flash Drive
ThermoServ™ Service Tool configured USB Flash Drive. See the ThermoServ™ Service Tool Operation Manual
for details.
Page 5
01 December 2012
Page 6
01 December 2012
SR-4 HMI CONTROL PANEL SOFTWARE
SR-4 Precedent Trailer Single Temperature HMI Control Panel Software Revisions
HMI Control Panel Software Revision 7Axx functions with both single temperature and multi-temperature SR-4
applications. There is currently one version of HMI Control Panel software. The following languages are
supported:

English is the default language.
IMPORTANT: When necessary to flash load new software to an HMI Control Panel use the most recent revision
available.
IMPORTANT: Unless otherwise noted, software upgrades made to units with previous software revisions are not
covered by a warranty labor allowance.
SR-4 HMI Control Panel Software Revision XXxx

Dates Features Interchange with:
Pre-Production  November 2012 Production release None
Precedent S-600
S/T Units
Page 7
01 December 2012
Availability of SR-4 HMI Control Panel Single Temp Software
When SR-4 Base Controller and/or HMI Control Panel flash load files are downloaded from the Thermo King
iService web site, the flash load files are downloaded as a *.ZIP file. When flash load files for SR-4 applications
are unzipped, there will now be three flash load files instead of the usual two.
 The traditional *.mXX and *.cXX files will be unzipped. These two files are for use when flash loading an
SR-4 Unit in the traditional manner using a USB Data Cable to connect the SR-4 Unit to a PC Computer
equipped with ThermoServ™ Service Tool software.
NOTE: Both the *.mXX and *.cXX files must be present in order to perform a flash load using a USB
Data Cable, even though only one of them is shown by ThermoServ™ Service Tool.
 A *.FLA file will also be unzipped. This file is for use when flash loading a unit using a ThermoServ™
Service Tool configured USB Flash Drive.
The Flashload Directory on the configured USB Flash Drive contains sub-directories for HMI and
SR4SINGLE TEMP flash load *.FLA files. The *.FLA file must be placed in the correct directory on the
flash drive using either the ThermoServ™ Service Tool Upload > Manage Flashload Files feature or
Windows Explorer.
Page 8
01 December 2012
Revision 7Axx HMI Control Panel SR-4 Base Controller Software is available on the Thermo King TSA Info
Central web site. Go to:
http://www.thermoking.com/tk/index.asp
Choose TSA Info Central and select Home > Software and Downloads > Microprocessors > Trailer
Microprocessor Updates.
 The file name for the *.ZIP file containing both the traditional .mXX and .cXX files and the *.FLA file is
Micro Code XXxx Update for the SR-4 Single Temp HMI Control Panel.zip. Double click this file to install
the software.
Flash Loading SR-4 Software using a PC Computer

For additional information on flash loading HMI Control Panel software using a PC computer, ThermoServ™
Service Tool and a USB cable, see the ThermoServ™ Service Tool Operation Manual.
Flash Loading SR-4 Software using a ThermoServ™ Configured USB Flash Drive
ThermoServ™ Service Tool configured USB Flash Drive. See the ThermoServ™ Service Tool Operation Manual
for details.
Page 9
01 December 2012
Page 10
01 December 2012
SR-4 DIAGNOSTIC TOOL SOFTWARE

SR-4 THERMOSERV™ SERVICE TOOL SOFTWARE

YANMAR SMART ASSIST DIRECT™ SERVICE TOOL SOFTWARE

Page 11
01 December 2012
Page 12
01 December 2012
Section 8 – SR-4 Trailer S/T Electronic Engine Diagrams
SR-4 Precedent Schematic Diagrams and Wiring Diagrams
1H75822 Rev B – Schematic, Precedent S-600 > 25 HP S/T Electronic Engine
1H75823 Rev B – Wiring Diagram, Precedent S-600 > 25 HP S/T Electronic Engine
01 December 2012
Section 8 – SR-4 Trailer S/T Electronic Engine Diagrams
01 December 2012
RELEASED 06/Nov/2012
1 2 3 4
REV
BAT
P2-[3,E]
B
2A FS8-80A
P3-[1,C],P3-[1,E],P4-[1,C],P4-[1,D],P5-[4,H]
BAT
1 of 6
2
FS5-30A STR
2S 8S BAT
FS10-35A BAT_POS BAT_NEG
SHEET
H FS10-35A FS6-40A GPR 2 BAT

H
SCHEMATIC >25
1H75822
2H H
2A
BAT DC I/P
2
2
2A-1
2-1
P3-[1,E],P4-[1,C],P5-[3,H]
F15-2A SR4 SM
POWER
SUPPLY
2A
J4-25
CODE IDENT NO DWG NO
EVA STARTER
8S 8S GND
ETV
LED 49
ETV DRIVER
J4-28 EVB EVA RED

GP
2A EVB GRN
LED 47 EVC WHT
G J4-27 EVC EVD BLK G
H
LED 50
J4-26 EVD
SCALE:
TITLE
A2
SIZE
LED 46 AFS
F22-10A K10
J16-6 AFADE AFADE
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCES
05-Sep-12
05-Sep-12
05-Sep-12
SW1
LED 44
ON DIMENSIONS PER TKS09109
CAD GENERATED DRAWING,
DO NOT MANUALLY UPDATE
2A F1-5A
ON/OFF
DATE
REB
SWITCH
F2-15A
J5-1 8 8 2AB
J5-2 2AB
ENG APPVL
F F
APPROVED
F25-7.5A
CHECKED
J4-35 HPCO
TKK
TKK
NM
THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION DRAWN
8
HPCO
J4-23 PHPCO HPCO
K8 J11 PC
J29 UFD
K8
K7
7K
K9
J4-12 CC CC
P4-[2,A],P5-[2,A]
LED 43
K7
K9
E E
LED 5
FINISH
7K J4-30 K32 (ECUR)
FET P2-[3,F]
INGERSOLL-RAND IS THE SOLE OWNER OF THIS DRAWING
REGARDING EXPORTING INFORMATIONOUTSIDE OF THE
PROVIDED AND ONLY BY THE RECIPIENT, WHO AGREES

AND ALL INFORMATION IN IT, WHICH ARE PROTECTED
THIS DRAWING OR THE INFORMATION IN IT EXCEPT AS

PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION; 1) DISCLOSE NOR USE
SPECIFIED ABOVE; OR 2) MAKE ANY COPIES OF OR
WORK FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PROVIDED OR

THAT IT WILL NOT, WITHOUT INGERSOLL-RAND'S
LED 1
U.S. THIS DRAWING MAY BE USED ONLY BY THE

RECIPIENT FOR THE PURPOSE FOR WHICH IT IS
DRAWING. ALL COPIES MUST BE RETURNED TO

EXTRACTS, REVISIONS, OR UPDATES FROM THE
BY COPYRIGHT ANDMAY BE SUBJECT TO LAWS
INGERSOLL-RAND UPON COMPLETION OF THE

J16-7 8D 8D
P4-[2,A],P5-[2,E]
UPON ANY EARIER REQUEST.

8 ON/OFF
K6 K10
8FH 8FH
J16-8 P3-[1,C]
LED 4
OPTIONAL
F10-15A F13-2A
D 8 K6 J8-1 8FC 8FC D
INPUT
WHT
8X J8-2 ALM ALM
POWER RLM
RED
REVISIONS
LED 6 ALPC ALPC
J8-3 GND
BLK
8FC 8FC
J8-4 AUXP-1 23-Aug-12 TKK 635110 TKK B
SPT RELEASED
SPN SPN BLK
J1-13
SR4 CONTROLLER
05-Sep-12 TKK 646011 TKK B

J3-11 SPP SPP RED
REVERSED OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
SP1 SP1 WHT ON CONDENSER FAN ROADSIDE
J1-24
CONTACTOR FOR USE WITH CCW
C ROADSIDE FAN
C
DPT
DPN DPN BLK
J1-14
J3-12 DPP DPP RED
DP1 DP1
J1-25
J1-3 FUELN
FUEL WHT FLS BLK
ULTRASONIC FUEL LEVEL
J1-2
8X J1-1 SENSOR OPTION
8F US
RED
CLS
J3-18 CLS CLS
B B
HSN HSN
J1-27 C
HSI HSI
J1-26 B
J1-16 HSP HSP CH
A
HS
GFF GFF
J3-33 P3-[3,H],P4-[1,H],P5-[1,C]
GFN GFN
J3-34 P3-[3,H],P4-[1,H],P5-[1,C]
8X J3-35 GFP GFP
P3-[3,H],P4-[1,H],P5-[1,C]
7E 7E
J6-1 P4-[3,B],P5-[2,B]
EOL EOL
J6-2 P4-[2,A],P5-[2,A]
A J6-3
8 8
P4-[3,B],P5-[2,B] A
CH CH
2A J6-4 P4-[2,A],P5-[2,A]
ER ER
J6-5 P4-[3,B],P5-[2,A]
26E 26E
J6-6 P4-[3,B],P5-[2,B]
TO SHEET 2 8X
50 UNIT ONLY
FOR LEGEND SEE PAGE 6
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
REV
B
2 of 6
FROM SHEET 1
ADS
AFADSP AFADSP
SHEET
J3-31 1
H 2A 8X H
1H75822
AFADS AFADS
J3-32 2
DS
DSP DSP
J3-29 A
CH
B
DS DS
J3-30 C
J4-8 8DF CH
FET 8DF
FUEL PUMP
HGB
J4-5 HGB CH
FET HGB
G J4-7 26 26
PS
CH
G
FET
SCALE:
WRPM WRPM
A2
SIZE
J3-3 P3-[1,D],P4-[4,B],P5-[4,D],P5-[4,E]
J3-2 CHER
ECUR
J4-20 ECUKS ECUKS CH
8X FET
K32 (ECUR)
7 P1-[2,E]
SR4 CONTROLLER
SHLD EGR
J32-3
K53-CANL K68 K68 CH
J32-2 5
J32-1 K75-CANH
CH
F GPR F
K70 K70 CH
4
CH
ECU
STR
K28 K28 K73
1
2 K73
2A
EGR
B42 B42 2AF
6
ECUR
K88 K88 2AF
8
BAT BAT
P1-[3,H]
BAT-LOAD BAT-LOAD
P3-[1,E],P4-[1,C],P5-[4,H] BATTERY CHARGER
E BAT-GND BAT-GND
P3-[1,E],P4-[1,C],P5-[4,H] ONLY E
FS9-20A
J25 2EGR 2EGR 2AF
CCFC
8X
J4-17 CFC CFC CH
FET
CRFC
J4-16 CFR CFR CH
FET
EFLC EFHC
J4-15 EFH EFH EH EH CH
FET
EFHC EFLC
D FET
J4-14 EFL EFL EL EL CH
D
CH
J23-1
CH
CH
P3-[1,F]
J4-21 BCE
FET JCH
P3-[1,F],P4-[1,D],P5-[3,H]
J33-4 P3-[1,F],P4-[1,D],P5-[3,H]
JSHLD
J33-3 P3-[1,F],P4-[1,D],P5-[3,H]
JCANL
J33-2 P3-[1,F],P4-[1,D],P5-[3,H]
JCANH
J33-1 P3-[1,F],P4-[1,D],P5-[3,H]
2
EXC
F20-2A J4-2 P3-[1,D],P4-[1,C],P5-[4,G]
J4-33 2Y
P3-[1,D],P4-[1,D],P5-[4,G]
GSI GSI
C J3-6
GSN GSN
P3-[1,H],P4-[3,H],P5-[1,E] C
J3-5 P3-[1,H],P4-[3,H],P5-[1,E]
GSP GSP
J3-4 P3-[1,H],P4-[3,H].P5-[1,E]
RXD2
PRNT-A
TXD2
PRNT-B
COM2
PRNT-C
CHPR
PRNT-D PRNT
RXD2 D14
HMI-20 PRNT-E
TXD2 2PA
HMI-31 PRNT-F
COM2
8X HMI-19
CH(BLACK1) CH(BLACK1) D14
J12-8 HMI-35 HMI-29
OFF(RED1) OFF(RED1)
F12-2A J12-7 HMI-33
J12-6 8XP(BLACK2) 8XP(BLACK2)
HMI-6
S1P S1P
HMI-4 EVAPS-1
B 2A
F8-5A
J12-5 2AA(RED2) 2AA(RED2)
HMI-12 HMI-27
S2P S2P
EVAPS-2
B
ON(BLACK3) ON(BLACK3) S3P S3P
J12-4 HMI-34 HMI HMI-3 EVAPS-3
SHLD(SHIELD) SHLD(SHIELD) S4P S4P
J12-3 HMI-23 HMI-26 EVAPS-4
CANH(BLACK4) CANH(BLACK4) S5P S5P
J12-2 HMI-22 HMI-2 EVAPS-5
CANL(RED4) CANL(RED4) S6P S6P
J12-1 HMI-10 HMI-1 EVAPS-6 EVAPS
RAS S6N S6N
HMI-24 EVAPS-7
RTP S5N S5N
J1-5 HMI-13 EVAPS-8
RTN S4N S4N
J1-17 ATS HMI-25 EVAPS-9
ATP S3N S3N
J1-30 HMI-14 EVAPS-10
ATN S2N S2N
J1-31 DRA HMI-15 EVAPS-11
RTRP S1N S1N
J1-28 HMI-16 EVAPS-12
RTRN
J1-29 DDA
J1-10 DTRP
DTRN
J1-22 DTS
A J1-7 DTP A
DTN
J1-19 CTS
J1-8 CTP
CTN
J1-20 SS
J1-9 ST1P
J1-21 ST1N
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
REV
GSI
P2-[2,C]
B
GSN
P2-[2,C]
3 of 6
GSP
P2-[2,C]
GSN
GSP
GSI
HRGC
GT1 GT1 GT1 HRGC GFF
SHEET
YEL C BLU P1-[2,B]

H H
CURRENT
SENSOR
GEN GFD
30 UNIT ONLY
1H75822
GT2 GT2 GT2 GFN

3 B BLK P1-[2,A]
GENERATOR
GT3 GT3 GT3 HRGN GFP
YEL A RED P1-[2,A]
HRGN
GROUND FAULT
DETECTOR
CH
EFHC EFLC CCFC CRFC

L1B L1 T1 ET11 L1B L1 T1 ET1 L1B L1 T1 CT1 L1B L1 T1 RT2
G G
SCALE:

A2
SIZE
EVAPORATOR FAN HIGH SPEED EVAPORATOR FAN LOW SPEED CONDENSER FAN CURB CONDENSER FAN ROAD
CT1
CT2
CT3
RT1
RT2
RT3
ET1
ET2
ET3
L3B
L2B
L1B
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
L3 L2 L1
2 BATT JCH
P2-[2,D]
F JSHLD F
P2-[2,C]
Battery Charger
BAT-LOAD JCANH
P2-[2,C]
2BC LOAD JCANL
P2-[2,C] EFM CCFM CRFM
Option
CH
P2-[2,D] 3 3 3
2BC
BCE
P2-[2,D]
BAT-GND BS EVAPORATOR CONDENSER CURB CONDENSER ROAD
GND BSN FAN MOTOR FAN MOTOR FAN MOTOR
FS7-35A
CH
T11 T12 T13 CH

BTS
BSN BS
ET11
ET12
ET13
CH
CH
CH
BAT-GND
BAT-LOAD
2BC
2
E E
P1-[2,H]
P2-[3,E]
P1-[1,H]
P2-[3,E]
CH
ALT
2A 2A GND CH CH
P1-[1,H] B+
W
SEN
EX
WRPM
EXC
2Y
2Y
P2-[2,C]
EXC
P2-[2,C]
D WRPM
D
P2-[2,G]
REAR FLUSHMOUNT OPTION
FUEL HEATER OPTION
J13-8 CH (GREEN)
GREEN RICB-01-2
FHR F-20A J13-7 OFF (YELLOW)
RICB-01-5
REAR FLUSHMOUNT
YELLOW
2A 2A 2FH 2FH 2HP 2HP 2 (BLUE)
P1-[1,H] 2 J13-5 RICB-01-1
CONTROLLER
BLUE
CH ON (ORANGE)
1 J13-4 RICB-01-4
ORANGE
FHR
8FH 8FH CH
P1-[2,D]
CH
J10-4 REM-ON (BROWN)

BROWN RICB-01-6
J10-2 TXD (RED)
RED RICB-01-8
CH RXD (BLACK)
C J10-1
BLACK RICB-01-7 C
CARGO WATCH OPTION REB OPTION
S1N-02 S1N-02
EVAPS_HMI-12 CW-12
S2N-02 S2N-02
EVAPS_HMI-11 CW-11
S3N-02 S3N-02
EVAPS_HMI-10 CW-10
BAT_POS
S4N-02 S4N-02
EVAPS_HMI-9 CW-9 RJ6-4
S5N-02 S5N-02
EVAPS_HMI-8 CW-8 RJ6-3
S6N-02 S6N-02 BVN BVN RED
EVAPS_HMI-7 CW-7 RJ6-2 REB-2 2
S6P-02 S6P-02 BVP BVP BLK
EVAPS_HMI-6 CW-6 RJ6-1 REB-1 1
S5P-02 S5P-02
BAT_NEG
EVAPS_HMI-5 CW-5
S4P-02 S4P-02 RJ6 REB
EVAPS_HMI-4 CW-4
S3P-02 S3P-02
EVAPS_HMI-3 CW-3
B EVAPS_HMI-2
S2P-02 S2P-02
CW-2
B
S1P-02 S1P-02
EVAPS_HMI-1 CW-1 BACKUP BATTERY
LED2-1
LED2-2
LED3-2
LED3-1
LED OPTION LED EXTENSION OPTION

LEDN
LEDN
LEDP
LEDP
F-5A
LEDP LEDP LEDP LEDP LEDP
LED1-1 LED4-1 LED5-1
LEDN LEDN LEDN
UNTERMINATED
LEDN LEDN LEDN LEDN
A LED1-1
LEDP LEDP
LED4-1 LED6-1
LEDP A
LEDN
LEDN
LEDP
LEDP
LED2-1
LED2-2
LED3-2
LED3-1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
REV
B
GC
HRGC
4 of 6
GFF HRGC GT1 GT1 GT1 GT1 T1 L1B ALT

CURRENT
P1-[2,B]
SENSOR
C BLU YEL
CH GND 2A
GEN B+ P1-[1,H]
GFD
GFN GT2 GT2 GT2 GT2 T2 L2B W
P1-[2,A] B BLK 3 SEN
EX
SHEET
H GFP HRGN GT3 GT3 GT3 GT3 T3 L3B

H
EXC
P1-[2,A]
2Y
A RED YEL
1H75822
HRGN GENERATOR CONTACTOR

GROUND FAULT
2Y
GSN
GSP
P2-[2,C]
GSI
DETECTOR
CH
GSI EXC
P2-[2,C] P2-[2,C]
GSN
P2-[2,C]
CH
GSP
P2-[2,C]
EFHC EFLC CCFC CRFC

G L2B L2 T2 ET12 L2B L2 T2 ET2 L2B L2 T2 CT2 L2B L2 T2 RT1
G
SCALE:
A2
SIZE
EVAPORATOR FAN HIGH SPEED EVAPORATOR FAN LOW SPEED CONDENSER FAN CURB CONDENSER FAN ROAD
CT1
CT2
CT3
RT1
RT2
RT3
ET1
ET2
ET3
T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3
F F
EFM CCFM CRFM
3 3 3
EVAPORATOR CONDENSER CURB CONDENSER ROAD
FAN MOTOR FAN MOTOR FAN MOTOR
T11 T12 T13 CH
ET11
ET12
ET13
CH
CH
CH
E OLH E
HC
FB1-3
L1B L1A L1A L1 T1 H1 H1 L1 T1 H1A
10A
FB1-2
10A
FB1-1
10A HEATER CONTACTOR
L3B
L2B
L1B
L3 L2 L1 HEATER OVERLOAD RELAY

2 BATT JCH
P2-[2,D]
H1A
JSHLD
P2-[2,C]
Battery Charger
BAT-LOAD JCANH
P2-[2,C]
2BC LOAD JCANL
P2-[2,C]
EH1 1 6
Option
D CH
P2-[2,D] D
230V UNIT
2BC
BCE
P2-[2,D]
BAT-GND BS
GND GND BSN
ONLY
FS7-35A
2 5
BTS
BSN BS
3 4
H2A EVAPORATOR HEATERS H3A
BAT-LOAD
BAT-GND
OL
2BC
2
PP PC1 CC
P1-[2,H]
P2-[3,E]
P1-[1,H]
P2-[3,E]
L1 L1 L1 T1 L1A L1A L1 T1 T1 T1 L1 T1
C X C
L2 L2 L2 T2 L2A L2A L2 T2 T2 T2 L2 T2
Y
L3 L3 L3 T3 L3A L3A L3 T3 T3 T3 L3 T3
Z
PHASE CONTACTOR COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR
GND
GND
PC2
OVERLOAD RELAY
L3 T1 L1
L2 T2 L2
P2-[2,G]
L1 T3 L3
PHASE CONTACTOR
GRY
BRN
BLK
7E
P1-[2,A]
B L3 L2 L1 T1 T2 T3 B
WRPM
HC
7EA 7E 26E
P1-[2,A]
GND CH PSM 8X 8 8 T7 WRPM
P1-[2,A] CDM
ER ER ER T8
12HP
P1-[2,A]
SP-GND 3
OL COMP DRIVE
7EC 7EB SP N/C T9 CH
PHASE SELECT MOTOR
EOL EOL CH
7EC
P1-[2,A]
7EB
MODULE
PC1
7EC CC GC
8D 8D GC1 GC1 CH T4 T5 T6 CH
P1-[2,D]
CH
PC2 GC CC
A 7EB
P1-[2,E]
CC CC CC1 CC1 CH A
SPLICE
GND
CH
P1-[2,A]
CH
CH CH
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
460V UNIT ONLY
REV
B
BSN 2 2
GND
P1-[2,H]
Battery Charger
BSN
5 of 6
BS
BC1 BCE
P2-[2,D] FS7-35A
Option
TH1 L1 T1 L1BC CH 2BC 2BC 2L

P2-[2,D] P1-[1,H]
BTS
JCANL BAT-LOAD BAT-LOAD

SHEET
P2-[2,C] LOAD
P2-[3,E]
H TH2 L2 T2 L2BC
P2-[2,C]
JCANH
H
1H75822
JSHLD BAT-GND BAT-GND

P2-[2,C] P2-[3,E]
BS
TH3 L3 T3 L3BC JCH CH

P2-[2,D] BATT
L1 L2 L3
BC2
L1BC
L2BC
L3BC
L1B L1 T1 L1BC
L2B L2 T2 L2BC
L3B L3 T3 L3BC
TRC
FB2-1
L1 T1 L1D L1D TX1
10A
FB2-2
L2 T2 L2D L2D TX2
G 10A
G
FB2-3
L3 T3 L3D L3D TX3
10A
SCALE:
TRANSFORMER CONTACTOR
A2
SIZE
EFHC
T1 L1 L1B
TH1
T2 L2 L2B
CH
T3 L3 L3B H1 CH
TR
EVAPORATOR FAN HIGH SPEED
F F
L3B
L2B
L1B
X1 TX1
REFER TO SHEET
3 FOR REMAINING
TH1
TH3
TH2
T3 T2 T1 X2 TX2
CONNECTIONS
7A
GENERATOR
X3 TX3
GC CONTACTOR
FB1-1
7A
L3 L2 L1
FB1-2
7A
H2 H3
TRANSFORMER
TH2 TH3
FB1-3
GT3
GT2
GT1
L1A
BC1 BC2
GSI TRC BC2 CH
L2A
GSN CURRENT
GSP SENSOR CC TRC GC
L3A
E P1-[2,D]
8D 8D TRC TRC GC1 CH E
GSN
GSP
GT3
GT2
GT1
GSI
P2-[2,G]
GT3
GT2
GT1
P2-[2,C]
P2-[2,C]
P2-[2,C]
WRPM
OL
CC
GENERATOR
T3 T3 WRPM
T1
GEN
GND L1A L1 T1 T1A L1 T1 CDM

CH T1
T2 T2 19HP
3
T2
L2A L2 T2 T2A L2 T2 3
T2
T1 T1 COMP DRIVE CH
T3
HRGN
HRGC
L3A L3 T3 T3A L3 T3 MOTOR

T3 19 HP
COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR
D UNIT ONLY D
HRGN
HRGC
OVERLOAD RELAY
OLH
HC
P2-[2,G]
YEL
YEL
GFD
GROUND FAULT L1A L1 T1 H1 L1 T1 H1A

DETECTOR
A RED
B BLK
C BLU
T1 T2 T3
WRPM
L2A L2 T2 H2 L2 T2 H2A
12 HP
GFN
GFP
GFF
L3A L3 T3 H3 L3 T3 H3A UNIT ONLY

HEATER CONTACTOR T7 WRPM
CDM
P1-[2,B]
P1-[2,A]
P1-[2,A]
T8
12HP
3
HEATER OVERLOAD RELAY
T9 CH
C PC1
COMP DRIVE
MOTOR
C
H1A
L1 L1 L1 T1 L1A
X
L2 L2 L2 T2 L2A T4 T5 T6 CH
Y
EH2 1
L3 L3 L3 T3 L3A
CH
Z
PHASE CONTACTOR MC1
GND
PC2
GND
PP
L3 T1 L1 L1A 2 6
4
L2 T2 L2 L2A
H2A
3 5 CH
L1 T3 L3 L3A H3A ALT
B PHASE CONTACTOR MC2 EVAPORATOR HEATER 2A 2A B+
GND CH B
P1-[1,H]
7E W
P1-[2,A] SEN
HC EX
7E 26E 26E
GRY
BRN
EXC
P1-[2,A]
2Y
BLK
2Y
L3 L2 L1
P2-[2,C]
BC2 BC1 EXC
P2-[2,C]
7EA 7E 7E BC1 BC1 CH
PSM
GND
GND CH 8X 8 8 TRC
P1-[2,A]
BC1 CH
ER ER ER
P1-[2,A]
SP-GND OL
7EC 7EB SP N/C EOL EOL CH
P1-[2,A]
PC1 PHASE SELECT
7EC
7EB
A MODULE GC CC A
CC CC CC1 CC1 CH
P1-[2,E]
PC2
CH
7EB CH
P1-[2,A]
CH
FOR LEGEND SEE PAGE 6 CH
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
SCHEMATIC LEGEND
REV
B
6 of 6
REF DES DESCRIPTION LOCATION

ADS AIR DOOR SWITCH 2-2H
SHEET
AFS AUTO FRESH AIR SOLENOID 1-3G

H ALT ALTERNATOR 3-1E, 4-3H, 5-4B H
1H75822
ATS AMBIENT AIR TEMP SENSOR 2-2A

BAT BATTERY 1-3H
BAT-CHG BATTERY CHARGER 3-1F
BC1 BATTERY CHARGER CONTACTOR 1 5-2H
BC2 BATTERY CHARGER CONTACTOR 2 5-2H
BTS BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR 3-1E
CC COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR 4-3A, 4-3C, 5-2D, 5-3A, 5-3E
CCFC CONDENSER CURB SIDE FAN CONTACTOR 2-2E, 3-3G, 4-3G

CCFM CONDENSER CURB SIDE FAN MOTOR 3-3F, 4-3F
CDM COMPRESSOR DRIVE MOTOR 4-4B, 5-4C, 5-4E
CLS COOLANT LEVEL SWITCH 1-2B
CRFC CONDENSER ROAD SIDE FAN CONTACTOR 2-2D, 3-3G, 4-3G
CRFM CONDENSER ROAD SIDE FAN MOTOR 3-4F, 4-3F
G CS CURRENT SENSOR 3-2H, 4-2H, 5-1E G
CTS COIL TEMP SENSOR 2-3A
DDA DISPLAY DISCHARGE AIR TEMP SENSOR 2-3A
SCALE:
DPT DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER 1-2C

A2
SIZE
DRA DISPLAY RETURN AIR TEMP SENSOR 2-2A

DS DOOR SWITCH 2-2H
DTS DISCHARGE AIR TEMP SENSOR 2-3A
ECU ENGINE CONTROL UNIT 2-2F
ECUR ENGINE CONTROL UNIT RELAY 2-2F, 2-3E
EFHC EVAPORATOR FAN HIGH SPEED CONTACTOR 2-2D, 3-1G, 4-1G, 5-1F
EFLC EVAPORATOR FAN LOW SPEED CONTACTOR 2-2D, 3-2G, 4-2G
EFM EVAP FAN MOTOR 3-2F, 4-2F
EGR EGR RELAY 2-2F, 2-3E
EH EVAPORATOR HEATERS 4-4D, 5-3B
F ETV ELECTRIC THROTTLE VALVE 1-2G F
EVAPS EVAPORATOR SENSORS 2-4A
F-20A FUSE FUEL HEATER 3-2C
F-5A FUSE LED 3-3A
F1-5A FUSE ON SR4 TO REB BOARD 1-1F
F10-15A FUSE ON SR4 FROM K6, BYPASS HMI CONTROL 1-1D
F12-2A FUSE ON SR4 TO HMI 2-1B
F13-2A FUSE ON SR4 TO RLM 1-2D
F15-2A SR4 CONTROLLER POWER SUPPLY 1-1H
F2-15A FUSE ON SR4 TO ON/OFF SWITCH 1-1F
F20-2A ALTERNATOR SENSE 2-1C
F22-10A FUSE ON SR4 TO AFS 1-1G
F25-7.5A FUSE ON SR4 TO HPCO 1-1F
F8-5A FUSE ON SR4 TO HMI 2-1B
FB1-10A FUSE BLOCK FANS & BATTERY CHARGER 4-2E
E FB1-7A FUSE PRIMARY TRANSFORMER 5-2E E
FB2-10A FUSE BLOCK TRANSFORMER SECONDARY 5-3G
FH FUEL HEATER 3-2C
FHR FUEL HEATER RELAY 3-1C
FLS FUEL LEVEL SENSOR 1-3B
FP FUEL PUMP 2-2G
FS10-35A FUSE TO GLOW PLUGS 1-1H
FS10-35A FUSE BATTERY TO BATTERY CHARGER 1-2H
FS5-30A FUSE TO STARTER 1-1H
FS6-40A FUSE TO GLOW PLUGS 1-1H
FS7-35A FUSE BATTERY CHARGER TO LOAD 3-1E
FS8-80A FUSE BATTERY TO FS5 & FS6 1-2H
FS9-20A FUSE TO EGR & ECU B42 & K88 2-3E
GC GENERATOR CONTACTOR 4-3A, 4-3H, 5-1E, 5-3A, 5-4E
D GEN GENERATOR 3-2H, 4-2H, 5-1E D
GFD GROUND FAULT DETECTOR 3-3H, 4-1H, 5-1D
GP GLOW PLUGS 1-3G
GPR GLOW PLUGS RELAY 1-2H, 2-2F
HC HEATER CONTACTOR 4-2B, 4-3E, 5-3D
HGB HOT GAS BYPASS 2-2G
HMI HUMAN/MACHINE INTERFACE 2-3B
HPCO HIGH PRESSURE CUTOUT SWITCH 1-2F
HS HUMIDITY SENSOR 1-2B
K10 RELAY ON PCB AUTO FRESH AIR 1-2D
K6 RELAY ON PCB ON-OFF 1-2D
K7 RELAY ON PCB DIESEL/ELECTRIC 1-2E
K8 RELAY ON PCB RUN 1-2F
K9 RELAY ON PCB STANDBY MOTOR 1-2E
C LED 1 7K-ECUR 1-2E C
LED 4 RUN RELAY 7K 1-2D
LED 43 COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR CC 1-2E
LED 44 AUTO FRESH AIR AFADE 1-2F
LED 46 ELECTRIC THROTTLING VALVE - EVD 1-2G
LED 47 ELECTRIC THROTTLING VALVE - EVB 1-2G
LED 49 ELECTRIC THROTTLING VALVE - EVA 1-2G
LED 5 FUEL PUMP 8D 1-2E
LED 50 ELECTRIC THROTTLING VALVE - EVC 1-2G
LED 6 ON/OFF 8X 1-2D
LED1 LED OPTION 3-1A
LED2 LED OPTION 3-1B
LED3 LED OPTION 3-1B
OL OVERLOAD RELAY STANDBY MOTOR 4-3A, 4-3C, 5-3A, 5-3D
B OLH OVERLOAD RELAY HEATERS 4-3E, 5-2C B
PC PC PORT 1-3F
PC1 PHASE CONTACTOR (NOT REVERSED) 4-1A, 4-2C, 5-1A, 5-1C
PC2 PHASE CONTACTOR (REVERSED) 4-1B, 4-2B, 5-1A, 5-1B
PP POWER PLUG 4-1C, 5-1C
PRNT PRINTER PORT 2-4C
PS PILOT SOLENOID 2-2G
PSM PHASE SELECT MODULE 4-2B, 5-1B
RAS RETURN AIR TEMP SENSOR 2-2B
RLM REMOTE LIGHT MODULE 1-2D
SM STARTER MOTOR 1-3H
SPT SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER 1-2C
STR STARTER RELAY 1-2H, 2-2F
SW1 ON/OFF SWITCH 1-2F
TR TRANSFORMER 5-3F
A TRC TRANSFORMER CONTACTOR 5-2A, 5-1G, 5-3E A
UFD UFD PORT 1-3F
1 2 3 4
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
[6,E]
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
4
3
2
1
J12
J33
J32
J13
J10
DOOR CONNECTORS
USB CONNECTIONS
COM2-01
CHPR-01
RXD2-01
TXD2-01
2PA-01
D14-01
BLACK1 (CH)
RED1 (OFF)
BLACK2 (8XP)
RED2 (2AA)
BLACK3 (ON)
SHIELD (SHLD)
BLACK4 (CANH)
RED4 (CANL)
12 35 SEE REAR FLUSHMOUNT SEE REAR HMI
SHIELD (SHLD)
BLACK (K53-CANL)
WHITE (K75-CANH)
SP-BC JCH-01
JSH-02
BLACK(JCANL-01)
WHITE (JCANH-01)
23 OPTION ON WIRING SHEET 7 FLUSHMOUNT ON/OFF
11 34 OPTION WIRING SWITCH 1 S6P-01
SHEET 7
PRINTER
DTRN-01 22 2 S5P-01
F SW1 PC PORT F
PRNT
DTRP-01 10 33 3 S3P-01
ST1N-01 S1P-01
A
B
C
D
E
F
21 4 TO J11
ST1P-01 9 32 8-02 2AB-01 5
DRAIN (JSH-01)
CTN-01 20 6 BLACK2 (8XP) UFD PORT
CTP-01 8 31 ATN-01 HMI 7
DTN-01 19 ECU 8 TO J29
DTP-01 7 30 ATP-01 [6,B] 9
18 J11 10 RED4 (CANL)
2AB-01
USB CONNECTIONS
6 29 RTRN-01 ALTERNATOR BATTERY CHARGER (30) 11
EOL-01
26E-01
2PA-01
8-02
CH-05
SP-01
ER-01
7E-01
RTN-01 17 Pg2-[8,A] [7,E] 12 2AA-01 RED2 (2AA)
8-01
RTP-01 5 28 RTRP-01 J29 OPTIONAL 13 S5N-01
BCE-02
HSP-01 16 14 S3N-01
EXC-02
ALTERNATOR ONLY
2Y-02
4 27 HSN-01 15 S2N-01
J5
15 16 S1N-01
1
2
J6
FUELN-01 3 26 HSI-01 17
6
5
4
3
2
1
DPN-01 14 4 50 UNIT ONLY 18
Pg2-[5,A]
ALT
C
B
A
E FUEL-01 2 25 DPI-01 3 19 COM2-01 E
ALT
C
B
A
SPN-01 13 2
CHPR-01 BATTERY CHARGER ONLY 20 RXD2-01
8F-01 1 24 SPI-01 1 1 21
C
B
A
CH-01
[1,F]
ALT
CH 2-01 Pg2-[3,D] 22 BLACK4 (CANH)
J1 J8 2EGR-01 23 SHIELD (SHLD)
OPTIONAL 2A-01 1
STR 24 S6N-01
BATTERY CHARGER (30)
EXC-01
BCE-01
2Y-01
2BC-01 2A
25 S4N-01
Pg2-[8,D] [4,E] CL 26 S4P-01
K28-01 K73-01 27 S2P-01
28
2-02 1 29 D14-01
30
DPP-01 12 35 GFP-01 2 31 TXD2-01
INTERFACE
RL
23 8S-01 2S-01 32
SPP-01 11 34 GFN-01 33 RED1 (OFF)
PC BOARD
22
2-01 30A 34 BLACK3 (ON)
10 33 GFF-01 2S-01 35 BLACK1 (CH)
[3,C]
8D-02
D 21 BUSS BAR GP D
9 32 AFADS-01
20
8 31 AFADSP-01 CL B00-01 LV CONTROL (50)
8D
19 K70-01 B00A-01 Pg2-[8,B],Pg3-[8,F],Pg4[8,F]
1 1
TO WIRING SHEET 7
7 30 DS-01 LV CONTROL (30)
HGB-01
EXC-01
HEATER HARNESS
8DF-01
OPTIONAL FUEL
CC-01
CLS-01 Pg2-[8,B]
26-01
18
8D
GSI-01 6 29 DSP-01
17
RL
GSN-01 5 28 H-01 2H-01
AFADE-01
GSN-02
GSN-02
GFN-02
GSP-02
GFN-02
GSP-02
GFP-02
CFR-02
CFC-02
GFP-02
CFR-02
CFC-02
GFF-02
EFH-02
GFF-02
EFH-02
EFL-02
EFL-02
GSI-02
GSI-02
CC-02
16
8FH-01
8D-03
GSP-01 40A
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
4 27 23
1
10
11
15 12 2H-01
WRPM-01 J4
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
3 26
C_MAIN
FS10-35A EGR
C_MAIN
14
J16
18
27
36
45
CHER-01 2 25
10
11
12
10
11
12
FH-OPT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
13 50 UNIT ONLY
C_KIT
CL B00A-01
10
11
12
C SEE C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
EVA-01
EFL-01
EVD-01
EFH-01
EVC-01
CFR-01
EVB-01
CFC-01
K32 (ECUR-01)
ECUKS-01
BCE-01
2Y-01
PHPCO-01
HPCO-01
1 24 K68-01 B00B-01
DETAIL A
J3
HMI
8FH-01
EFL-01
EFH-01
CFR-01
CFC-01
CC-01
GSP-01
GSI-01
GFF-01
GFN-01
GFP-01
GSN-01
[1,D]
RL
S6N-01
S5N-01
S4N-01
S3N-01
S2N-01
S1N-01
S1P-01
S2P-01
S3P-01
S4P-01
S5P-01
S6P-01
B42-01 2EGR-02
FS9-20A
2EGR-01 SP-02 SP-03
FUELN-01
EVAPS
DS-INT-01 ECU-IF-01 ECU
FUEL-01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
DS-01 DS-02 K88 K88-01
8F-01
C C 8 8
CHDS-01 CHDS-02 K32 (ECUR-01) K32 (ECUR-01)
EVAPS_HMI
B B 7 7
10
12
11
CL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
DSP-01 A A DSP-02 B42 6 6 B42-01 ECUKS-01 B00B-01
K68 5 5 K68-01 B00C-01
DS-INT K70 4 4 K70-01
B00 3 3 B00-01
BLK
WHT
GRN
S1P-02
S2P-02
S3P-02
S4P-02
S5P-02
S6P-02
S6N-02
S5N-02
S4N-02
S3N-02
S2N-02
S1N-02
B K73 2 2 K73-01 RL
B
K28 1 1 K28-01 K88-01 2AF-01
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Pg7-[3,D]
ECU-IF-MAIN UNIFIED
Pg2-[8,F]
TO WIRING SHEET 7 ECU
OPTIONAL FUEL LEVEL SENSOR [7,F] Pg5-[8,F]
CAD GENERATED DRAWING,

18-Sep-12 TKK
23-Aug-12 TKK
TO PIN 7 OF CONNECTOR J16
CORRECTION: MOVED WIRE 8D-03
ROADSIDE FAN
CONTACTOR FOR USE WITH CCW
ON CONDENSER FAN ROADSIDE
REVERSED OUTPUT CONNECTIONS
INGERSOLL-RAND IS THE SOLE OWNER OF THIS DRAWING AND ALL

DO NOT MANUALLY UPDATE
PIN LOCATIONS INFORMATION IN IT, WHICH ARE PROTECTED BY COPYRIGHT AND
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED TOLERANCES
SHOWN FROM WIRE END MAY BE SUBJECT TO LAWS REGARDING EXPORTING INFORMATION
ON DIMENSIONS PER TKS09109
OUTSIDE OF THE U.S. THIS DRAWING MAY BE USED ONLY BY THE
DRAWN DATE TITLE

REVISIONS
RECIPIENT FOR THE PURPOSE FOR WHICH IT IS PROVIDED AND

J19 J17 THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION
RELEASED
WIRING DIAGRAM >25HP

ONLY BY THE RECIPIENT, WHO AGREES THAT IT WILL NOT, WITHOUT
INGERSOLL-RAND'S PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION; 1) DISCLOSE
NM 18-Sep-12
A J22 NOR USE THIS DRAWING OR THE INFORMATION IN IT EXCEPT AS CHECKED A
646011
635110
J16 SPECIFIED ABOVE; OR 2) MAKE ANY COPIES OF OR EXTRACTS,

TKK 18-Sep-12
J20 REVISIONS, OR UPDATES FROM THE DRAWING. ALL COPIES MUST
BE RETURNED TO INGERSOLL-RAND UPON COMPLETION OF THE APPROVED
WORK FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PROVIDED OR UPON ANY
TKK 18-Sep-12 SIZE CODE IDENT NO DWG NO REV
J16 J18
TKK B
TKK A
A2 B
EARLIER REQUEST.
FINISH ENG APPVL 1H75823
SCALE: SHEET 1 of 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Pg1-[1,B] UNIFIED
DTS
BLU
DTP-01 BRN
PHPCO-01
S1N-02
S2N-02
S3N-02
S4N-02
S5N-02
S6N-02
8S-01 DTN-01
S6P-02
S5P-02
S4P-02
S3P-02
S2P-02
S1P-02
HPCO-01
CHCL-01
CH26-01
SM
HGB-01
CHH-01
EVD-01
EVC-01
EVB-01
EVA-01
CLS-01
CHB-02
CHB-01
26-01
F F
CH
HIGH PRESSURE CUTOUT SWITCH
CHB-02
GND DDA
CW
HGB
GND_PLATE M BLU
DTRP-01
HOT GAS BYPASS SOLENOID PS
HPCO
12 12
11 11
10 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CHFP-01 DTRN-01
BRN
CLS
5_GND_PLT 9_GND_PLT
44
33
2
1
CW-01
CHH-01
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
A
2
1
BAT-01
2 2
1 1
B
2 2
1 1
2 2
1 1
COOLANT LEVEL SWITCH

A B
CH-01 4_GND_PLT 8_GND_PLT CH26-01
ETV
CHCL-01 ENGINE GND BAT-01
BLK
WHT
GRN
RED
B00C-01 CHDS-01
UNTERMINATED
3_GND_PLT 7_GND_PLT
BAT-01
PILOT SOLENOID
CH-02 2_GND_PLT 6_GND_PLT CHBAT-01 CHB-01 BAT-03 ST1N-01
SENSOR (OPTIONAL) CHBC-01 ST1P-01
BLU
1_GND_PLT
BAT_NEG BAT_POS BAT-02
BRN HSP-01
HSN-01
HSI-01
BAT-03
TYPICAL 1 OF 6
J_GP
E E
DRA
LV CONTROL (50) FAN BOX COMMON TO ALL 30 & 50 UNITS BLU
RTRP-01 BRN
LV CONTROL (30) H-01 RTRN-01
FS8-80A
EVAPORATOR FAN HIGH SPEED EVAPORATOR FAN LOW SPEED CONDENSER FAN CURB CONDENSER FAN ROAD RAS
EFHC EFLC CCFC CRFC GLOW PLUGS BLU
CL CL CL CL RTP-01 BRN
CH-04 A2 A1 CH-03 A2 A1 CH-12 A2 A1 A2 A1 RTN-01
EH-01 EL-01 CFC-02 CH-12 CFR-02
2-01
CH-11 CH-04 CH-03
FAN BOX ATS

CC CC CC CC BLU
L1 T1 L1 T1 L1 T1 L1 T1 ATP-01 BRN
L1B ET11-01 GT1-01 ET1-01 CT1-01 RT2-01 ATN-01
D D
Pg1-[3,E]
L2 T2 L2 T2 L2 T2 L2 T2
L2B ET12-01 GT2-01 ET2-01 CT2-01 RT1-01
L3 T3 L3 T3 L3 T3 L3 T3 CTS
WHT RED
L3B ET13-01 GT3-01 ET3-01 CT3-01 RT3-01 DSP-02A
C B A
RL RL RL RL BLU
BLK
CHDS-02 CTP-01
DS
B
22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 BRN
EFL-02 EL-01 EFH-02 EH-01 DS-02 C CTN-01
BUSS BAR DOOR SWITCH
Pg1-[8,E] FANS SPT
BLK
G/Y-06
1
SPN-01
30 MODEL
CT1-01
CT2-01
CT3-01
RT1-01
RT2-01
RT3-01
ET1-01
ET2-01
ET3-01
CH-02
CH-11
2 RED
SPP-01
FB_GC-GND WRPM-02 2 2 WRPM-01 SPI-01
3 WHT
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
T3
T1
T2
T3
FB-C-GND CHER-02 1 1 CHER-01 4
C CDM_RPM
C
[6,B],Pg3-[2,C],Pg4-[1,D],Pg4-[2,C]
Pg3-[2,C],Pg4-[2,C],Pg4-[1,D]
SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
EFM
GENERATOR TO FAN CONTROLS (30)
COND CURB COND ROAD DPT

3 3 3
GROUND FAULT DETECTOR
EVAPORATOR CONDENSER CONDENSER 1 BLK

CURB FAN ROAD FAN FUEL PUMP 8DF-02 8DF-01 DPN-01
BLK
B GFN-02 FAN MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR
BLU 2 RED
RED
C GFF-02 DPP-01
A GFP-02 3 WHT
T11
T12
T13
GFD CHFP-02 CHFP-01 DPI-01

YEL 4
ET11-01
ET12-01
ET13-01
G\Y-05
G\Y-07
G\Y-08
YEL
2 HRGC-01
1 HRGN-01
DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
TO WIRING SHEET 7 C AFADSP-01
B FB_EV-GND FB_CFC-GND FB_CFR-GND OPTIONAL FRESH AIR B AFADS-01 ECU_ALT
B
DOOR HARNESS A AFADE-01
A B ECUP-01
AFA
Pg3-[8,F],Pg4-[8,F],Pg1-[1,D]
B A ECUN-01
GSN-02
GSP-02
[3,C]
GSI-02
BTS BAT-02
CH ECU
WRPM-02
HRGN-01
HRGC-01
BLU
BS BRN
BSN BAT-LOAD-01 A BATTERY
BAT-GND-01 B CHARGER ONLY
C
B
A
GT1-01 1 TURN
GT1-01 ECU_BC
2 TURNS W
BSN
BATTERY CHARGER
GENERATOR GT2-01
1 LOAD
BAT-LOAD-01 Pg5-[8,A]
3 GT2-01 BS 2 ECU POWER
CURRENT 2Y-02 A SENSE BCE-02 3
SENSOR ALT GND CHA-01 CHBAT-01
GT3-01 EXC-02 B EXC CHBC-01 4 GND
BAT-GND-01
GT3-01 BLACK 5
WHITE 6 FS7-35A
A 2A
Pg1-[7,E] JSH-01 7 BATT 2BC-02 2BC-01 A
4 TURNS CH-ALT JCH-01 8
ALTERNATOR L3 L2 L1
G/Y-06
2A-01
UNIT ONLY
SIZE CODE IDENT NO DWG NO REV
L3B
L2B
L1B
OPTIONAL
ALTERNATOR BATTERY CHARGER (30) A2 1H75823 B
Pg1-[4,E] SCALE: SHEET 2 of 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LV CONTROL (50)
Pg1-[1,D],Pg2-[8,B],Pg4-[8,F]
POWER
CH-15
IN
CH-23
CC1-01
7EC-01
7EC-01
7EB-01
7EB-01
CH-23
CH-22
CH-22
CH-21
CH-06
ER-01
7E-03
L1 X
8-01
L2 Y
F TIMER TIMER TIMER L3 Z F
BLK RED BLU BLK RED BLU BLK RED BLU G/Y-11 GND FB-PSM-GND2
CL CL CL
G/Y-11
J5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CH-21
CH-15
CH-06
CH-05
CC PC2
SP-GND
7EC
7EA
7EB
CH
ER
SP
N/C
8X
PC1
- +
GND-01 PHASE CH-25
CC CC CC PSM SELECT
L1 T1 L1 T1 BUSS BAR L1 T1
L1A-03 T1A MODULE
BRN L1
L2A-03 L2 T2 L2 T2 L2 T2 L1 L2 L3
T2A GRY L2
L3A-03 L3 T3 L3 T3 L3 T3
BRN
GRY
BLK
RL T3A BLK L3
12 11
E GC1-01 8D-02 E
COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR PHASE CONTACTOR PC2 PHASE CONTACTOR PC1
BUSS BAR
BUSS BAR
FUSE FB1 GC OLH HC
EOL-01
CH-24
CH-25
L1A-03 L1
FB1-1
T1 L1B-01 CL CC CL
L1A-04 L1B A1 A2 L1 T1 7E-03 A1 A2
L2A-03 L2
FB1-2
T2 L2B-01 GC1-01 CH-24 L1A-04 H1-01 7E-01 26E-01
L2A-04 L2B L2 T2 95 96
L3A-03 L3
FB1-3
T2 L3B-01 L2A-04 H2-01 OL
L3A-04 L3B CC L3 T3 CC L1 T1 T3-01
L1 L1B-01 T1 L3A-04 H3-01 L1 T1 T1A T9-01
GT1-11 L1B-04 H1A-01 H1-01 L2 T2 T2-01 T4-01
D L2 T2 L2B-01 RL L2 T2 T2A T8-01 T5-01 SPLICE D
GT2-11 L2B-04 H2A-01 H2-01 L3 T3 T1-01 T6-01
L3 T3 L3B-01 HEATER OVERLOAD RELAY L3 T3 T3A T7-01
GT3-11 L3B-04 H3A-01 H3-01
RL RL
21 22 22 21
CC-02
BLK
B GFN-02 OVERLOAD RELAY
HEATER CONTACTOR
GENERATOR TO FAN CONTROLS
BLU GENERATOR CONTACTOR

C
RED
A GFP-02 STANDBY MOTOR
GFD
FAN CONTROL BOX POWER
H1A-01
G/Y-04
YEL
HRGC-11
OPTIONAL BATTERY CHARGER (50)
2 EFHC
YEL
HRGN-11
T1-01
T2-01
T3-01
1
CL
HEATER
A2 A1
EH-GND
EH1
T1
T2
T3
16
C C
GSN-02
GSP-02
CC
GSI-02
L1 T1 T7
L1B-04 T7-01 12HP
230V UNIT
HRGC-11
HRGN-11
L2 T2 T8 CDM WRPM-02 Pg2-[3,C]

L2B-04 T8-01 3
2 5
L3 T3 3 4 CHER-02 Pg2-[3,C]
L3B-04 T9-01
T9 COMP DRIVE
C
B
A
GT1-11 1 TURN
GT1-11 RL EVAPORATOR MOTOR
2 TURNS 22 21 HEATER
GENERATOR GT2-11 GND
H2A-01
H3A-01
3 GT2-11 CURRENT
FAN BOX - SEE SHEET 2
T4
T5
T6
SENSOR
GT3-11
G\Y-10
GT3-11
G/Y-04
G\Y-10
T4-01
T5-01
T6-01
W
4 TURNS
ALTERNATOR
G/Y-16
UNIT ONLY 2Y-02 A SENSE

ALT
B EXC-02 B EXC
GND CHA-01 OEH-GND B
2A
CH-ALT
OGC-GND
2A-01
L1B
L2B
L3B
L1 L2 L3
8
BATTERY CHARGER
BATT 7
6
5
A GND 4 A
3
2
LOAD 1
ALTERNATOR (50) A2 1H75823 B

Pg1-[4,E] SCALE: SHEET 3 of 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
ALTERNATOR (50).
Pg1-[4,E]
LV CONTROL (50).
Pg1-[1,D],Pg2-[8,B],Pg3-[8,F]
POWER
IN
CH-15
CC1-01
CH-23
L1 X
A A
7EC-01
7EC-01
7EB-01
7EB-01
CH-23
CH-22
CH-22
CH-21
CH-06
ER-01
EXC-02
7E-03
L2 Y
2Y-02
8-01
TIMER L3 Z
BLK RED BLU TIMER TIMER G/Y-11 GND
CL FB-PSM-GND2
G/Y-11
BLK RED BLU BLK RED BLU
J5
CH-21
CC CL CL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CH-15
CH-06
CH-05
EXC B
SENSE A
PC2 - PC1 +
SP-GND
7EC
7EA
7EB
CH
ER
SP
N/C
8X
GND-01 2A-02
2A
W
ALT
PHASE CH-25
CC SELECT
L1A-03 L1 T1 CC CC PSM FB-PSM-GND
BUSS BAR
GND
T1A L1 T1 L1 T1 MODULE
L2A-03 L2 T2 BRN L1
T2A L2 T2 L2 T2
460V UNIT
L1 L2 L3
CH
L3A-03 L3 T3 GRY L2
RL T3A L3 T3 L3 T3
BRN
GRY
BLK
B TRC-02
12
8D-02
11 BLK L3 B
COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR CH
PHASE CONTACTOR PC2 PHASE CONTACTOR PC1
BUSS BAR
BUSS BAR
OLH STANDBY MOTOR (19 HP)

FUSE FB1 GC
EOL-01
CC HC
CH-24
CH-25
FB1-1 CL L1 T1
L1A-03 L1 T1 TH1-01 L1A-04 H1-01 CL
L1A-04 TH1-02 A1 A2 7E-03 A1 A2
L2A-03 L2
FB1-2
T2 TH2-01 GC1-01 CH-24 L2 T2 7E-01 26E-01
L2A-04 TH2-02 L2A-04 H2-01 7E-02 T4-01
95 96 SPLICE
L3A-03 L3
FB1-3
T2 TH3-01 L3 T3 OL T7-01
7E-02
L3A-04 H3-01
T1
T2
T3
L3A-04 TH3-02 CC CC L1 T1 T3 T5-01
C L1B-11 L1 T1 T1A T3-01 T8-01 SPLICE C
GT1-11 RL L1 T1 L2 T2
L1B-04 H1A-01 H1-01 T2 T6-01
T1
T2
T3
L2 T2 L2B-11 L1B-11 T2A T2-01 T9-01 SPLICE
GT2-11 L2 T2
L2B-04 HEATER OVERLOAD RELAY H2A-01 H2-01 L3 T3 T1 19 HP
L3 T3 L3B-11 L2B-11 T3A T1-01
GT3-11 L3 T3
BLK
GFN-02 RL L3B-04 L3B-11 H3A-01 H3-01 CDM WRPM-02 Pg2-[3,C]
BLU
B
21 22 RL
C GFF-02 CC1-01 CC-02 22 21 3 CHER-02 Pg2-[3,C]
RED
A GFP-02 OVERLOAD RELAY
GENERATOR CONTACTOR HEATER CONTACTOR COMP DRIVE
GFD STANDBY MOTOR (12 HP) MOTOR
YEL
YEL
2 HRGC-11
HRGN-11
T1-01
T2-01
T3-01
1
HEATER.
19 HP
FAN CONTROL BOX POWER.
G/Y-04
GENERATOR TO FAN CONTROLS.
H1A-01
G/Y-20
EFHC T1 T2 T3 UNIT ONLY
CL
D A2 A1 D
12 HP
1 EH-GND T7-01 T7
CH
WRPM-02 Pg2-[3,C]
GSN-02
CDM
GSP-02
EH3
GSI-02
T8
CC T8-01 3
L1 T1 CHER-02 Pg2-[3,C]
HRGN-11
HRGC-11
L1B-04 T9-01 T9 COMP DRIVE

MOTOR
L2 T2 2 6
L2B-04
4 12 HP GND
C
B
A
L3 T3
G/Y-01
1 TURN
UNIT ONLY
T4
T5
T6
GT1-11 GT1-11 L3B-04
2 TURNS RL 3 5
GENERATOR GT2-11 22 21
3 GT2-11 CURRENT
H2A-01 EVAPORATOR
T4-01
T5-01
T6-01
G/Y-10
HEATER
TH1-01
SENSOR
H3A-01
GT3-11 FAN BOX - SEE SHEET 2
GT3-11 TR-GND
E E
4 TURNS H1
ALTERNATOR TR
G/Y-26
UNIT ONLY X1
TX1-01
G/Y-04
G/Y-10
G/Y-01
X2
TX2-01
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
X3
OGC-GND BC1 BC2 TRC TX3-01
L3BC
L1 L2 L3
CL CL CL
A1 A2 A1 A2 CH-28 A1 A2 CH-28 L2BC BATTERY CHARGER OSB_GND-01 H2 H3
BC1-01 CH-29 BC2-01 CH-29 BC1-01 CH-27 L1BC
BC1-03 TH2-01 TH3-01
BATT
LOAD
GND
CC CC CC GND-03
L1 T1 L1B-02 L1 T1 L1B-11 L1 T1
TH1-02 L1B-11 L1BC L1B-02 L1D-01
L2 T2 L2 T2 L2 T2 FUSE FB2
F TH2-02 L2B-02 L2B-11 L2D-01 FB2-1 F
L2B-11 L2BC L2B-02 TX1-01 L1 T1
L1D-01
L3 T3 L3B-02 L3 T3 L3B-11 L3 T3
TH3-02 L3B-11 L3BC L3B-02 L3D-01 FB2-2
RL RL RL TX2-01 L2 T2
L2D-01
21 22 21 22 21 22
TRC-01 SIZE CODE IDENT NO DWG NO REV
BC2-01 TRC-01 7E-02 BC1-03 GC1-01 TRC-02 L3
FB2-3
T2
BATTERY CHARGER CONTACTOR 1 BATTERY CHARGER CONTACTOR 2 TRANSFORMER CONTACTOR
TX3-01 L3D-01
A2 1H75823 B
SCALE: SHEET 4 of 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Pg1-[1,B]
ECU
ENGINE HARNESS CONNECTIONS
K32 (ECUR-01)
F F
K75-CANH
K53-CANL
SHLD
K88
K28
K73
K68
B42
K70
B00
8 1 2 5 6 1 2 3 3 7 4
K88 K28 K73 K68 B42 K75C K53C 5A B00A K32 K70
K88B
B01C
EGR VALVE LOW OIL LEVEL SW 120 PULL UP LOW OIL PRESS SW
1 2 2 1 A C A C
B00B B00C K22B A50B A50A K15B K15A
ENGINE CASE 0V
BATTERY +12 K54B 4 3
K76B K54A
E E
YDT
B01 CAN TERM A
1 23 4
K75C
K53C
5A
K75A
K53A
C K65B
HHF SPLDIAG
15A K76A K75B
J1939/15 CABLE
J1939/11 CABLE
B01A
K53B BATTERY 0V
B00
D D
K88A K05 K03 K01 K28 K73 K68 K54 K76 K90 K75 K53 K65 K06 K04 K02 K22 A50 K15 K32 K70
05 03 01 28 73 68 54 76 90 75 53 65 06 04 02 22 50 15 70
88 HI LO 32
IGN FUSED B+12V START CONTROL EGR CONTROL CAN 1 HI LO BATTERY 0V PDLSW UB3 LOP ENG STOP GPC
DIAG
YANMAR ENGINE ECU
INJ 1 INJ 2 INJ 3 INJ4 4 HP FUEL PUMP COOLANT TEMP FUEL PRESSURE CRANK SHIELD RTN CAMSHAFT SENSOR AIR TEMP REF 0V EGR TEMP FUEL TEMP EXH TEMPNEW TEMPWIF REF 0V EGR PRESS
47 17 31 01 32 02 33 16 04 05 28 29 07 26 25 39 54 38 08 37 52 59 52 33 11 51 56 79 21 57 77 45 85 39 74
A47 A17 A31 A01 A32 A02 A33 A16 A04 A05 A28 A29 A07 A26 A25 A39 A54 A38 A08 A37 A52 A59 K52 K33 A11 A51 K56 K79 K21 K57 K77 K45K85K39K74
C C
K52B K52A A51B A51A
K52B
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 2 1 2 1 3 2 1 B A A B 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 1 3 4 5 2
B B
ECUN-01
ECUP-01
Pg2-[1,A]
ECU POWER
A A

A2 1H75823 B
SCALE: SHEET 5 of 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
WIRE CODE SIGNAL DESCRIPTION WIRE CODE SIGNAL DESCRIPTION WIRE CODE SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
2-02 2 PCB STUD TO 40 AMP FUSE DTP-01 DISCHARGE AIR SENSOR L3BC BC2 TO BATTERY CHARGER
26-01 PILOT SOLENOID DTRN-01 DISCHARGE AIR REDUNDANT - L3D-01 TRANSFORMER CONTACTOR TO FUSE FB2
26E-01 HEATER CONTACTOR A2 DTRP-01 DISCHARGE AIR REDUNDANT LEDN-01 LED -
2A-01 ALTERNATOR POWER OUTPUT DTS-BLU DISCHARGE AIR SENSOR + LEDP-01 LED +
2A-03 FUEL HEATER RELAY DTS-BRN DISCHARGE AIR SENSOR - OFF HMI OFF
F F
2AA-01 HUMAN / MACHINE INTERFACE ECUKS-01 ECU RELAY CONTROL ON HMI ON
2AB-01 ON/OFF SWITCH ECUN-01 ECU POWER - PHPCO-01 HIGH PRESSURE CUTOUT SWITCH
2AF-01 ECU RELAY COIL ECUP-01 ECU POWER + RAS-BLU RETURN AIR POWER
2BC-01 BATTERY POSITIVE EFH-01 EVAPORATOR FAN HIGH SPEED CONTACTOR NC RAS-BRN RETURN AIR -
2EGR-01 2A PCB STUD TO FS9-20A EFL-01 EVAPORATOR FAN LOW SPEED CONTACTOR NC REM-ON REAR FLUSHMONT CONTROLLER
2FH-01 FUEL HEATER POWER EH-01 EVAPORATOR HIGH SPEED FAN CONTACTOR RT1-01 CONDENSER ROAD FAN MOTOR
2H-01 40 AMP FUSE TO GLOW PLUG RELAY EL-01 EVAPORATOR LOW SPEED FAN CONTACTOR RT2-01 CONDENSER ROAD FAN MOTOR
2HP-01 FUEL HEATER FUSE POWER EOL-01 COMPRESSOR DRIVE MOTOR OVERLOAD RT3-01 CONDENSER ROAD FAN MOTOR
2PA-01 PRINTER TO HMI ER-01 ELECTRIC RELAY TO PHASE SELECT MODULE RTN-01 RETURN AIR DISPLAY -
2S-01 30 AMP FUSE TO STARTER RELAY ET1-01 EVAPORATOR LOW SPEED FAN MOTOR RTP-01 RETURN AIR DISPLAY +
2Y-01 ALTERNATOR SENSE ET11-01 EVAPORATOR HIGH SPEED FAN MOTOR RTRN-01 RETURN AIR REDUNDANT -
7E-01 HEATER CONTACTOR A1 ET12-01 EVAPORATOR HIGH SPEED FAN MOTOR RTRP-01 RETURN AIR REDUNDANT POWER
7EB-01 PHASE CONTACTOR REVERSED ET13-01 EVAPORATOR HIGH SPEED FAN MOTOR RXD2-01 PRINTER TO HMI
E 7EC-01 PHASE CONTACTOR NOT REVERSED ET2-01 EVAPORATOR LOW SPEED FAN MOTOR S1N-01 CARGO WATCH SENSORS - E
8-01 ON/OFF SWITCH ET3-01 EVAPORATOR LOW SPEED FAN MOTOR S1P-01 CARGO WATCH SENSORS +
8D-02 COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR AUX NC EVA-01 ELECTRIC THROTTLE VALVE S2N-01 CARGO WATCH SENSOR 2 -
8DF-01 FUEL PUMP EVB-01 ELECTRIC THROTTLE VALVE S2P-01 CARGO WATCH SENSOR 2 +
8F-01 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR POS EVC-01 ELECTRIC THROTTLE VALVE S3N-01 CARGO WATCH SENSOR 3 -
8FC-01 REMOTE LIGHT POWER EVD-01 ELECTRIC THROTTLE VALVE S3P-01 CARGO WATCH SENSOR 3 +
8FH-01 FUEL HEATER RELAY EXC-01 ALTERNATOR EXCITATION S4N-01 CARGO WATCH SENSOR 4 -
8S-01 STARTER SOLENOID FUEL-01 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR S4P-01 CARGO WATCH SENSOR 4 +
8XP J12 TO HMI FUELN-01 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR - S5N-01 CARGO WATCH SENSOR 5 -
AFADE-01 AUTO FRESH AIR DAMPER G/Y-01 GREEN/YELLOW HIGH VOLTAGE GROUND S5P-01 CARGO WATCH SENSOR 5 +
AFADS-01 AUTO FRESH AIR DOOR SWITCH GC1-01 GENERATOR CONTACTOR COIL AND TR NC AUX S6N-01 CARGO WATCH SENSOR 6 -
AFADSP-01 AUTO FRESH AIR DOOR SWITCH GFF-01 GROUND FAULT FAILURE FAULT S6P-01 CARGO WATCH SENSOR 6 +
ALM-01 REMOTE LIGHT OPTION INPUT GFN-01 GROUND FAULT - SPI-01 SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
D ALPC-01 REMOTE LIGHT OPTION GROUND GFP-01 GROUND FAULT + SPN-01 SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER D
ATN-01 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE - GSI-01 GENERATOR CURRENT SENSOR INPUT SPP-01 SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
ATP-01 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE + GSN-01 GENERATOR CURRENT SENSOR - T1-01 COMPRESSOR DRIVE MOTOR
ATS-BLU AMBIENT TEMPERATURE POWER GSP-01 GENERATOR CURRENT SENSOR + T1A COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR TO OVERLOAD
ATS-BRN AMBIENT TEMPERATURE - GT1-01 GENERATOR OUTPUT T2-01 COMPRESSOR DRIVE MOTOR
B00-01 ECU GROUND GT2-01 GENERATOR OUTPUT T2A COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR TO OVERLOAD
B42-01 EGR VALVE GT3-01 GENERATOR OUTPUT T3-01 COMPRESSOR DRIVE MOTOR
BC1-01 BC1,BC2, AND TRC CONTACTORS H-01 GLOW PLUGS T3A COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR TO OVERLOAD
BC2-01 BC1 AND BC2 CONTACTORS H1-01 HEATER OVERLOAD TO HEATER CONTACTOR TH1-01 TRANSFORMER PRIMARY
BCE-01 BATTERY CHARGER ENABLE H1A-01 EVAPORATOR HEATERS TH2-01 TRANSFORMER PRIMARY
BS BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR H2-01 HEATER OVERLOAD TO HEATER CONTACTOR TH3-01 TRANSFORMER PRIMARY
BSN BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR H2A-01 EVAPORATOR HEATERS TRC-01 BC1 TO TRC TO CC CONTACTORS
CANH HUMAN / MACHINE INTERFACE CAN HIGH H3-01 HEATER OVERLOAD TO HEATER CONTACTOR TX1-01 TRANSFORMER SECONDARY
CANL HUMAN / MACHINE INTERFACE LOW H3A-01 EVAPORATOR HEATERS TX2-01 TRANSFORMER SECONDARY
C CC-01 GENERATOR CONTACTOR AUX CN HGB-01 HOT GAS BYPASS TX3-01 TRANSFORMER SECONDARY C
CC1-01 COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR COIL HPCO-01 HIGH PRESSURE CUTOUT TXD2-01 PRINTER TO HMI
CFC-01 CONDENSER FAN CURB SIDE CONTACTOR HRGC-01 HIGH RESISTANCE GROUND TO GFD COMMON WRPM-01 COMPRESSOR DRIVE MOTOR RPM
CFR-01 CONDENSER FAN ROAD SIDE CONTACTOR HRGN-01 HIGH RESISTANCE GROUND TO GFD NEUTRAL
CH HMI GROUND HSI-01 HUMIDITY SENSOR INPUT
CH-01 CHASSIS GROUND HSN-01 HUMIDITY SENSOR -
CH26-01 PILOT SOLENOID GROUND HSP-01 HUMIDITY SENSOR +
CHCL-01 COOLANT LEVEL GROUND JCANH-01 CAN HIGH TO BATTERY CHARGER (WHITE)
CHDS-01 DOOR SWITCH GROUND JCANL-01 CAN LOW TO BATTERY CHARGER (BLACK)
CHER-01 COMPRESSOR DRIVE MOTOR RPM GROUND JCH-01 BATTERY CHARGER TO GROUND
CHFP-01 FUEL PUMP GROUND JSH-02 BATTERY CHARGER TO SHIELD
CHPR-01 PRINTER GROUND K28-01 STARTER CONTROL SIGNAL
CLS-01 COOLANT LEVEL SWITCH K32 (ECUR-01) ECU RUN
B COM2-01 PRINTER COMMON TO HMI K53-CANL CAN TO ECU LOW B
CT1-01 CONDENSER CURB FAN MOTOR K68-01 EGR RELAY CONTROL SIGNAL
CT2-01 CONDENSER CURB FAN MOTOR K70-01 GLOW PLUG RELAY CONTROL
CT3-01 CONDENSER CURB FAN MOTOR K73-01 STARTER RELAY CONTROL
CTN-01 COIL TEMPERATURE - K75-CANH CAN TO ECU HIGH
CTP-01 COIL TEMPERATURE + K88-01 ECU POWER
CTS-BLU COIL TEMPERATURE + L1 POWER PLUG
CTS-BRN COIL TEMPERATURE - L1A-03 FB1 FUSES CONTACTORS AND BATTERY CHARGER
D14-01 PRINTER PORT L1B-01 GENERATOR CONTACTOR TO FAN CONTACTORS
DDA-BLU DISCHARGE AIR REDUNDANT + L1BC BC2 TO BATTERY CHARGER
DDA-BRN DISCHARGE AIR REDUNDANT - L1D-01 TRANSFORMER CONTACTOR TO FUSE FB2
DPI-01 DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER L2 POWER PLUG
DPN-01 DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER L2A-03 FB1 FUSES CONTACTORS AND BATTERY CHARGER
DPP-01 DISCHARGE PRESSURE TRANSDUCER L2B-01 GENERATOR CONTACTOR TO FAN CONTACTORS
A DRA-BLU RETURN AIR REDUNDANT POWER L2BC BC2 TO BATTERY CHARGER A
DRA-BRN RETURN AIR REDUNDANT - L2D-01 TRANSFORMER CONTACTOR TO FUSE FB2
DS-01 DOOR SWITCH L3 POWER PLUG
DSP-01 DOOR SWITCH L3A-03 FB1 FUSES CONTACTORS AND BATTERY CHARGER SIZE CODE IDENT NO DWG NO REV
DTN-01 DISCHARGE AIR SENSOR - L3B-01 GENERATOR CONTACTOR TO FAN CONTACTORS
A2 1H75823 B
SCALE: SHEET 6 of 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
OPTIONAL HARNESS - FRESH AIR DOOR

D2 D3
AFA-MAIN
AFADSP-02 AFADSP-02
RED
C
ADS
B A
F TO WIRING AFADS-02 AFADS-02 F
BLK
B
SHEET 2 A AFADE-02
2 2
1 1
1 1
2 2
LED2
LED3
OPTIONAL HARNESS - LED OPTIONAL HARNESS - LED EXTENSION AFS
LEDN-02
LEDP-02
LEDP-03
LEDN-03
AFADE-02 1 1
CHFA-01 2 2
AUTO FRESH AIR DAMPER
CHFA-01
LEDP-02 SP-03
LEDP-03 LED5
1 1 LEDP-01 LEDP-01 LEDP-04 LEDP-04 1 1 LEDP-05
SP-04
LEDN-01 LEDN-02 LEDN-03 LEDN-04 LEDN-05
D1
2 2 2 2
LEDN-01 LEDN-04
LED1 LED4 AFS-GND
SP-01
LEDP-05 LEDP-07
E LEDP-06 E
SP-02
LED11 LED8
LEDN-05 LEDN-07 OPTIONAL HARNESS - REMOTE LIGHT
LEDN-01 SP-05 LEDN-04 LEDN-06
2 2 LEDN-01 LEDN-02 LEDN-03 LEDN-04 2 2 LEDN-06
D6
1 1 LEDP-01 LEDP-01 SP-06 LEDP-04 LEDP-04 1 1 LEDP-06 1 ALM-01 ALM-01 INPUT
F-5A
LEDP-02 LEDP-03 TO J8 CONNECTOR 2 8FC-01
LED6 SR4 CONTROLLER 3 ALPC-01 8FC-01 POWER REMOTE
4 8FC-02 RLM
LEDN-02
LEDN-03
LEDP-02
LEDP-03
LIGHT
J8 ALPC-01 GND MODULE
8FC-02 AUXP-1
LED10
LED9
2 2
1 1
1 1
2 2
LEDN-07
LEDP-08
D OPTIONAL HARNESS - FUEL LEVEL SENSOR D
D5 D4 Pg1-[6,B]
GRN RED RED OPTIONAL ULTRASONIC
FLS FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
FUEL LEVEL
UNTERMINATED WHT YEL YEL
SESNOR
TO TRAILER WIRE
BLK
BLK BLK
OPTIONAL HARNESS - REAR FLUSHMOUNT CONTROLLER
OPTIONAL HARNESS - SPARE SENSOR

RICB
SS
C BROWN (REM-ON) 8 8 BRN BROWN RED 8
BLU C
SHIELD 7 7 SHLD BLACK 7 ST1P-02 ST1P-02 BRN
8 CH GREEN (CH) ORANGE (ON) 6 6 ORN ORANGE BROWN 6 ST1N-02 ST1N-02
7 YELLOW (OFF) GREEN (CH) 5 5 GRN GREEN YELLOW 5
6 YELLOW (OFF) 4 4 YEL YELLOW ORANGE 4
TO J13 CONNECTOR 5 BLUE (2) BLUE (2) 3 3 BLU BLUE 3
SR4 CONTROLLER 4 ORANGE (ON) RED (TXD) 2 2 RED RED GREEN 2
3 BLACK (RXD) 1 1 BLK BLACK BLUE 1
2 OPTIONAL HARNESS - HUMIDITY SENSOR
1 RIH RICB-01
RFC. RFC
J13
BROWN (REM-ON)
HSP-02 HSP-02 3
BLACK (RXD)
HSN-02 HSN-02 2
RED (TXD)
HSI-02 HSI-02 1
HS
B B
J10
4
3
2
1
TO J10 CONNECTOR
SR4 CONTROLLER
OPTIONAL HARNESS - FUEL HEATER

FHR
TO FH-OPT CL
1 8FH-02 CH-08
WIRING SHEET 1
A FH-MAIN A
FH
CH
RL
F-20A CH-09 2
TO 2A STUD 1 2A-03 2FH-01 2HP-02 SP-012HP-01 1
SR4 CONTROLLER SIZE CODE IDENT NO DWG NO REV
2A
A2 1H75823 B
SCALE: SHEET 7 of 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
F F
E E
TELEMATICS
OPTIONAL REB BOARD
RJ98
10
D 3 D
2
RJ5
4
3
OPTIONAL HARNESS - HARNESS REB
2
BVN-01
1
BVP-01
RJ6
RJ2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
C C
RED 2 2
BVP-01
BLK 1 1
BVN-01
BAT_POS BAT_NEG
REB
BACKUP BATTERY
B B
A A

A2 1H75823 B
SCALE: SHEET 8 of 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

18200314-Thermo King Sr-4 Single Temp Trailer Diagnoses Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

18200314-Thermo King Sr-4 Single Temp Trailer Diagnoses Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

18200314-Thermo King Sr-4 Single Temp Trailer Diagnoses Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Diagnostic Manual

SR-4 Trailer Single Temp

SR-4 Controller Trailer Single

SR - 4 Trailer Single Temperature Units

SR-4 Base Controller

Copyright © 2012 Thermo King Corp. - Minneapolis, MN, USA

This manual covers the following SR-4 hardware versions:

SR-4 Base Controller

This manual covers the following SR-4 software revisions:

Base Controller Software Revision through 8035

See Section 7 of this manual for additional details.

Section 1 - Safety information

Section 2 - Hardware Description

Section 3 - Software Description

Section 6 - Service Procedures

Section 7 - Service Information

Section 8 – Schematics and Wiring Diagrams

A02A Recording Existing Programmable Feature Settings Using HMI Keypad

A03A Replacement of the Base Controller

A04A Programmable Feature Setup Using HMI Keypad

Manual Form Number ____________________________________________________

Section and Page # ______________________________________________________

Your Name _____________________________________________________________

Company Name _________________________________________________________

Phone Number __________________________________________________________

Corrections and Comments _______________________________________________

THERMO KING CORPORATION

Table of Contents - Section 1

5. Never apply heat to a sealed refrigeration system or container.

Warning Nameplate on Units Equipped with 2 way Communications

Refrigerant First Aid

2. Obtain medical assistance as soon as possible.

Refrigeration Oil First Aid

3. Treat all wires as high voltage wires.

High Voltage First Aid

OTHER ELECTRICAL CONSIDERATIONS

Base Controller Service

UNITS EQUIPPED WITH TELEMATICS

1. Pressing the Off Key on the HMI Control Panel.

Failure to do so may result in serious injury.

Remote Control Warning Nameplate

Warning Nameplate on Units Equipped with 2 way Communications

Table of Contents - Section 2

Block Diagram - Single Temp Trailer Applications ......................................................................................... 5

Electronic Throttling Valve (ETV) .............................................................................................................. 55

SR-4 PRECEDENT ELECTRONIC ENGINE CONTROL UNIT (ECU)

To Starter Relay ENGINE Camshaft

To Engine Control Unit Relay Low Oil

SR-4 PRECEDENT FAN AND BLOWER CONTROL

Components located in High

SR-4 PRECEDENT FAN AND BLOWER CONTROL

SR-4 ELECTRONIC ENGINE GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Mechanical Engines < 25 HP

Electronic Engines > 25 HP

Unit Wiring Loom Colors

Fan and Blower Motors

Optional Battery Charger

Optional Smart Power™ Electric Standby

Optional Accessory DC Alternator

SR-4 CONTROL SYSTEM